KX Td1232e

Digital Super Hybrid System
Please read this manual before connecting

the Digital Super Hybrid System.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
MODEL Panaso
nic Panaso
nic
KX-TD816E / KX-TD1232E KX-TD816 KX-TD1232

Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model
KX-TD816E/KX-TD1232E, Digital Super Hybrid System.
System Components
Model Description
Service Unit KX-TD816E Digital Super Hybrid System (Main Unit)
KX-TD1232E Digital Super Hybrid System (Main Unit)
Telephone KX-T7420E Digital proprietary telephone
KX-T7425E Digital proprietary telephone
KX-T7431E Digital proprietary telephone with 1-line display
KX-T7130E Proprietary telephone with 1-line display
KX-T7020E Proprietary telephone
KX-T7050E Proprietary telephone
Optional KX-T7440E Digital DSS Console
Equipment KX-T7441E Digital Attendant Console
KX-T7240E Digital DSS Console
KX-T7040E DSS Console
KX-TD170E 8-Station Line Unit
KX-TD180E 4-CO Line Unit
KX-TD181E*1 8-CO Line Card
KX-TD182E*2 4-CO Line Card
KX-TD190E Message Unit
KX-TD192E*1 System Inter Connection Card (two cards with Connection Cable)
KX-TD196E*1 Remote Card
KX-TD197E 9600bps Speed Remote Card
KX-TD198E*2 9600bps Speed Remote Unit
KX-TD199E*2 Message Card
KX-TD280E 2-ISDN S0 Line Unit
KX-TD281E*1 4-ISDN S0 Line Card
KX-TD282E*2 2-ISDN S0 Line Card
KX-TD286E 6-ISDN S0 Line Unit
KX-TD290E Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN Expansion Unit
KX-TD142 Cell Station
KX-TD144 Cell Station
KX-TD146 Interface Unit
KX-T30865E Doorphone
KX-A46E Battery Adaptor
System Components Table
Note In this Installation Manual, the suffix “E” of each model number is omitted. The Digital
Super Hybrid System is abbreviated as “DSHS.” The Digital Proprietary Telephone is
abbreviated as “DPT.” Other proprietary telephone (analogue type) is abbreviated as
“APT.” A Single Line Telephone is abbreviated as “SLT.”
2 *1: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

*2: Available for KX-TD816 only.
Important Information
FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.
A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5
amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is
replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer.
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN
YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF
AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS
INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING : THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT : The wires in this mains leads are coloured in accordance with the following
code:
Green-and-yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the
coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the
plug which is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or
GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse : Open the-fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse
and fuse cover.
3
Important Information
This equipment should be used on PSTN lines requiring 2-wire Loop calling unguarded clearing
with Loop Disconnect or DTMF address signalling.
The equipment must be connected to direct extension lines and a payphone should not be
connected as an extension.
Operation in Power Failure

In the event of a power failure, three single line telephones connected to Power Failure Transfer
jacks will be directly connected to the following CO lines:
KX-TD816 — CO 1, CO 2, and CO 5
KX-TD1232 — CO 1, CO 2, and CO 9
• Set the Dialling Mode (Tone or Pulse) of your telephone, according to the CO line.
• 999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT
emergency (999) and (112) service.
Satisfactory performance can not be guaranteed for every allowed combination of host and
subsidiary apparatus.
999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the CO line for the purpose of
making outgoing calls to the BT emergency (999) and (112) service.
During dialling, this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line. This
is not a fault and we advise you not to call Fault Repair Service.
‘Prevention of access by user. This apparatus is intended to be accessible only to authorized

personnel. This apparatus must be installed in a locked room or similar environment, such that
user access is prevented. Failure to prevent such user access will invalidate any approval given
to this apparatus.’
Caution:
Do not push the PAUSE button more than twice following the initial access digit (or digits).
Failure to comply with this requirement may result in unsatisfactory operation.
Notice:
This PBX should only be used on B•T lines on which specific BT services or facilities are
provided.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type

recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according
to the manufacturer's instructions.
4
Attention
• The apparatus is designed to be installed and operated under controlled conditions
of ambient temperature and a relative humidity not greater than 60%.
• Avoid installing the apparatus in damp or humid environments, such as bathrooms
or swimming pools.
• The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices
such as fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can
interfere with the performance of the Digital Super Hybrid System.
• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40˚C /
104˚F) and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or other holes of this unit.
• If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug a single
line telephone directly into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly,
do not reconnect your system to the line until the system has been repaired. If the
telephone does not operate properly, chances are that the problem is in the
telephone network, and not in your system.
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the
cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.
• The ISDN Line Units/Cards are in accordance with the European
Telecommunication Standards (ETS). If your telephone company provides an ISDN
service which follows standards other than ETS, some ISDN features may not work
properly. (E.g. Charge Fee Reference, CLIP, COLP, etc.)
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS
BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING
THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT,
AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR
SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN
EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED
ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS.
THE POWER SOCKET WALL OUTLET SHOULD BE LOCATED NEAR
THIS EQUIPMENT AND BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
TO PREVENT RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
5
Attention
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom
of the unit. You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided
and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification
in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
For your future reference
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
Warning 73/23/EEC
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment 89/336/EEC
this product may cause radio interference in which case 92/31/EEC
the user may be required to take adequate measures. 93/68/EEC
APPROVED for connection to APPROVED for connection to

telecommunication systems telecommunication systems
specified in the instructions for specified in the instructions for
use subject to the conditions set use subject to the conditions set
out in them. out in them.
606055 NS / 1010 / 235 / R / 604365
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232
6
Introduction
This Installation Manual provides technical information for the Panasonic Digital
Super Hybrid System, KX-TD816/KX-TD1232. It is designed to serve as an overall
technical reference for the system and includes a description of the system, its
hardware and software, features and services and environmental requirements.
This manual contains the following sections:
Section 1, System Outline.

Provides general information on the system including system capacity and
specifications.
Section 2, Installation.
Contains the basic system installation and wiring instructions, as well as how to
install the optional cards and units.
Section 3, Features.
Describes all the basic, optional and programmable features in alphabetical order. It
also provides information about the programming required, conditions, connection
references, related features and operation for every feature.
Section 4, System Programming.

Provides step-by-step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone.
Section 5, List.
Lists tone/ring tone and default values of system programming.
Section 6, Troubleshooting.
Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting.
Section 7, PRI Section.

Provides information on using the Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN line with the
optional expansion unit.
Section 8, DECT Portable Station Section.

Provides information on the wireless system, which can be optionally equipped with
the basic system.
NOTE
The following documents may be used in conjunction with this manual:
• User Manual for KX-TD816/KX-TD1232 System, DIGITAL Proprietary Telephones,
Console, DECT Portable Station and Single Line Telephones
• Programming Table
The programming table is designed to be used as a hard copy reference to the user-
programmed data.
7
Installation Manual Contents
Section 1 System Outline
1.1 System Highlights ............................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Basic System Construction .............................................................. 1-4
1.3 Proprietary Telephones .................................................................... 1-5
1.4 Options............................................................................................... 1-6
1.5 Specifications..................................................................................... 1-11
1.5.1 General Description................................................................. 1-11
1.5.2 Characteristics ......................................................................... 1-12
1.5.3 System Capacity...................................................................... 1-13
1.5.4 Ports......................................................................................... 1-15
Section 2 Installation
2.1 Before Installation ............................................................................ 2-2
2.2 Installation of the Main Unit ........................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Unpacking ............................................................................... 2-4
2.2.2 Name and Location ................................................................. 2-4
2.2.3 Wall Mounting......................................................................... 2-6
2.2.4 Frame Earth Connection.......................................................... 2-7
2.2.5 Opening Front Cover............................................................... 2-7
2.3 Connection......................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.1 System Connection Diagram................................................... 2-8
2.3.2 Extension Connection
for Proprietary Telephones, Single Line Telephones and Consoles .......... 2-10
2.3.3 Parallelled Telephone Connection
for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone ........................ 2-15
2.3.4 EXtra Device Port (XDP) Connection
for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone ............ 2-17
2.3.5 External Pager Connection...................................................... 2-18
2.3.6 External Music Source Connection......................................... 2-20
2.3.7 Printer Connection .................................................................. 2-22
2.4 Optional Cards and Units Installation ........................................... 2-25
2.4.1 Location of Optional Cards and Units..................................... 2-25
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card) ..................................... 2-28
2.4.3 Lightning Protector Installation .............................................. 2-33
2.4.4 CO Line Connection (Optional Unit)...................................... 2-36
2.4.5 Extension Connection (Optional Unit).................................... 2-36
2.4.6 Installing Expansion Unit........................................................ 2-37
2.4.7 Internal ISDN S0 Line Connection ......................................... 2-42
2.4.8 Remote Card Installation*1...................................................... 2-45
2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit*2 / Message Unit Installation...... 2-46
2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card / Message Card*2 Installation .... 2-48
8 *1: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection............................... 2-50
2.4.12 System Connection*................................................................ 2-51.4
2.4.13 Battery Adaptor Connection.................................................... 2-51.6
2.5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer ........................ 2-52
2.6 Starting the System for the First Time ........................................... 2-54
2.7 System Restart .................................................................................. 2-56
2.8 System Data Clear ............................................................................ 2-57
Section 3 Features
A Absent Message Capability ................................................................ 3-2
Account Code Entry ........................................................................... 3-3
Alert Indication................................................................................... 3-4
Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice......................................................... 3-5
Answering, Direct CO Line................................................................ 3-6
Automatic Adjust Time ...................................................................... 3-6
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) ............................................... 3-7
Automatic Configuration.................................................................... 3-8
Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer ..................................... 3-8
Automatic Redial → Redial, Automatic............................................. 3-144
Automatic Station Release.................................................................. 3-9
B Background Music (BGM)................................................................. 3-10
Background Music (BGM) – External ............................................... 3-10
Budget Management........................................................................... 3-11
Busy Lamp Field ................................................................................ 3-12
Busy Station Signalling (BSS) ........................................................... 3-12
Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS) .............................................. 3-13
Button, Flexible .................................................................................. 3-14
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)................................................................. 3-16
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO) ................................................................... 3-17
Button, Single-CO (S-CO) ................................................................. 3-18
Buttons on Proprietary Telephones..................................................... 3-19
C Caller ID ............................................................................................. 3-22
CALL FORWARDING FEATURES – SUMMARY ......................... 3-23
Call Forwarding – All Calls................................................................ 3-24
Call Forwarding – Busy...................................................................... 3-24
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer ................................................ 3-25
Call Forwarding – Follow Me ............................................................ 3-25
Call Forwarding – No Answer............................................................ 3-26
Call Forwarding – to CO Line............................................................ 3-27
Call Forwarding – by ISDN Line ....................................................... 3-28
Call Forwarding – from Hunting Group............................................. 3-28
*: Available for KX-TD1232 only. 9

Call Hold – CO Line........................................................................... 3-29
Call Hold – Intercom .......................................................................... 3-30
Call Hold, Exclusive – CO Line......................................................... 3-30
Call Hold, Exclusive – Intercom ........................................................ 3-31
Call Hold Retrieve – CO Line ............................................................ 3-32
Call Hold Retrieve – Intercom............................................................ 3-32
Calling / Connected Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP / COLP) .......................................................................... 3-33
Calling / Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR / COLR) .. 3-34
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection................................... 3-35
Call Log, Incoming............................................................................. 3-36
Call Park ............................................................................................. 3-37
Call Pickup, CO Line ......................................................................... 3-38
Call Pickup, Directed.......................................................................... 3-38
Call Pickup, Group ............................................................................. 3-39
Call Pickup Deny................................................................................ 3-39
Call Splitting....................................................................................... 3-40
CALL TRANSFER FEATURES – SUMMARY ............................... 3-40
Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line................................................. 3-41
Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension .............................................. 3-41
Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension .......................................... 3-42
Call Waiting ........................................................................................ 3-43
Charge Fee Reference......................................................................... 3-44
Class of Service (COS)....................................................................... 3-45
CO Incoming Call Information Display ............................................. 3-46
CO Line Connection Assignment....................................................... 3-48
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing.................................... 3-48
CO Line Group ................................................................................... 3-49
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) .............................. 3-50
Conference.......................................................................................... 3-51
Confirmation Tone.............................................................................. 3-52
Console ............................................................................................... 3-54
Consultation Hold............................................................................... 3-56
D Data Line Security .............................................................................. 3-57
Delayed Ringing → Ringing, Delayed............................................... 3-147
Dial Tone, Distinctive......................................................................... 3-57
Dial Type Selection ............................................................................ 3-58
Direct Dialling In (DDI) ..................................................................... 3-60
Direct In Lines (DIL).......................................................................... 3-61
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button
→ Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS)................................ 3-13
10
Directed Call Pickup → Call Pickup, Directed .................................. 3-38
Display, Call Information ................................................................... 3-62
Display, Extension Programmed Data................................................ 3-63
Display, Self-Extension Number ........................................................ 3-64
Display, Time and Date ...................................................................... 3-65
Display Contrast Adjustment.............................................................. 3-65
Do Not Disturb (DND) ....................................................................... 3-66
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call......................................... 3-67
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override........................................................ 3-67
Door Opener ....................................................................................... 3-68
Doorphone Call................................................................................... 3-69
Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line............................................ 3-70
E Electronic Station Lockout ................................................................. 3-71
Emergency Call .................................................................................. 3-72
End-to-End DTMF Signalling (Tone Through).................................. 3-72
Exclusive Hold → Call Hold, Exclusive – CO Line / Intercom......... 3-30 / 31
Extension Connection Assignment..................................................... 3-73
Extension Group ................................................................................. 3-73
External Feature Access ..................................................................... 3-74
EXtra Device Port (XDP) ................................................................... 3-75
F Flexible Button → Button, Flexible ................................................... 3-14
Flexible Numbering............................................................................ 3-76
Floating Station .................................................................................. 3-79
Full One-Touch Dialling..................................................................... 3-80
G Group Call Pickup → Call Pickup, Group ......................................... 3-39
Group CO (G-CO) Button → Button, Group-CO (G-CO)................. 3-16
H Handset / Headset Selection ............................................................... 3-81
Handset Microphone Mute ................................................................. 3-81
Handsfree Answerback....................................................................... 3-82
Handsfree Operation........................................................................... 3-82
Hold Recall ......................................................................................... 3-83
Host PBX Access................................................................................ 3-84
HOTEL APPLICATION .................................................................... 3-85
Check-In / Check-Out......................................................................................... 3-85
Room Management............................................................................................. 3-86
Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) ........................................................ 3-86
Hunting Group.................................................................................... 3-87
I Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) ..................................... 3-88
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Extension .................... 3-90
Intercept Routing ................................................................................ 3-93
Intercom Calling ................................................................................. 3-94
11
L Last Number Redial → Redial, Last Number .................................... 3-144
Least Cost Routing (LCR).................................................................. 3-95
LED Indication, CO Line ................................................................... 3-106
LED Indication, Intercom................................................................... 3-107
Limited Call Duration......................................................................... 3-108
Line Access, Automatic...................................................................... 3-108
Line Access, CO Line Group ............................................................. 3-109
Line Access, Direct............................................................................. 3-110
Line Access, Individual ...................................................................... 3-111
Line Preference – Incoming (No Line / Prime Line / Ringing Line) ... 3-112
Line Preference – Outgoing (Idle Line / No Line / Prime Line) ........ 3-113
Live Call Screening (LCS) ................................................................. 3-114
Lockout............................................................................................... 3-115
Log-In / Log-Out ................................................................................ 3-116
Loop-CO (L-CO) Button → Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)..................... 3-17
M Manager Extension ............................................................................. 3-117
Message Waiting................................................................................. 3-117
Microphone Mute ............................................................................... 3-118
Mixed Station Capacities.................................................................... 3-119
Module Expansion.............................................................................. 3-120
Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN) Ringing Service ..................... 3-121
Music on Hold .................................................................................... 3-122
N Night Service ...................................................................................... 3-123
No Reply Group.................................................................................. 3-124
Notebook Function ............................................................................. 3-125
O Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ............................................ 3-126
Off-Hook Monitor .............................................................................. 3-126
One-Touch Dialling ............................................................................ 3-127
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button................................................... 3-128
Operator .............................................................................................. 3-129
Operator Call ...................................................................................... 3-130
Outgoing Message (OGM) ................................................................. 3-131
P PAGING FEATURES – SUMMARY ................................................ 3-132
Paging – All ........................................................................................ 3-132
Paging – External................................................................................ 3-133
Paging – Group................................................................................... 3-134
Parallelled Telephone ......................................................................... 3-135
Pause Insertion, Automatic................................................................. 3-136
Phantom Extension ............................................................................. 3-137
Pickup Dialling ................................................................................... 3-138
Power Failure Restart ......................................................................... 3-138
12
Power Failure Transfer ....................................................................... 3-139
Predial................................................................................................. 3-140
Private Call ......................................................................................... 3-140
Pulse to Tone Conversion ................................................................... 3-141
Q Quick Dialling .................................................................................... 3-142
R Recall .................................................................................................. 3-143
Redial, Automatic .............................................................................. 3-144
Redial, Last Number .......................................................................... 3-144
Redial, Saved Number ....................................................................... 3-145
Remote Station Lock Control ............................................................. 3-146
Reverse Circuit ................................................................................... 3-146
Ringing, Delayed ................................................................................ 3-147
Ringing, Discriminating ..................................................................... 3-147
Ring Group ......................................................................................... 3-148
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons............................................. 3-149
Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls ........................................ 3-149
S Saved Number Redial → Redial, Saved Number............................... 3-145
Screened Call Transfer – to CO Line
→ Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line .................................. 3-41
Screened Call Transfer – to Extension
→ Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension ................................ 3-41
Secret Dialling .................................................................................... 3-150
Single-CO (S-CO) Button → Button, Single-CO (S-CO) ................. 3-18
Special Display Features .................................................................... 3-151
CO Outgoing Call Log ....................................................................................... 3-151
Extension Dialling .............................................................................................. 3-152
Station Speed Dialling ........................................................................................ 3-152
System Feature Access Menu............................................................................. 3-153
System Speed Dialling........................................................................................ 3-154
Station Hunting................................................................................... 3-155
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ...................................... 3-157
Station Program Clear ........................................................................ 3-160
Station Programming.......................................................................... 3-161
Station Programming Data Default Set .............................................. 3-162
Station Speed Dialling ........................................................................ 3-163
* System Connection ............................................................................. 3-164
System Data Default Set..................................................................... 3-165
System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer.......... 3-165
System Programming with Proprietary Telephone............................. 3-167
System Speed Dialling........................................................................ 3-168
System Working Report...................................................................... 3-169
*: Available for KX-TD1232 only. 13

T Terminate ............................................................................................ 3-170
Time-Out, Variable ............................................................................ 3-171
Timed Reminder ................................................................................. 3-173
Toll Restriction ................................................................................... 3-174
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry ............................. 3-178
Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialling......................... 3-179
Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) ...................... 3-180
Two-Way Recording into the Voice Mail ........................................... 3-181
U Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) ...................................................... 3-182
Unscreened Call Transfer – to Extension
→ Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension............................ 3-42
User Programming (Manager Programming)..................................... 3-185
V Voice Mail Integration ........................................................................ 3-186
Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones ................ 3-192
Volume Control – Speaker / Handset Receiver / Headset / Ringer .... 3-193
W Whisper OHCA .................................................................................. 3-194
Section 4 System Programming

4.1 General Programming Instructions................................................ 4-2
4.1.1 Using the Proprietary Telephones ............................................. 4-3
4.1.2 Programming Ways ................................................................... 4-7
4.1.3 Entering Characters................................................................... 4-9
4.1.4 User Programming Mode.......................................................... 4-12
4.1.5 Example of Programming ......................................................... 4-13
4.2 Manager Programming.................................................................... 4-15
[000] Date and Time Set ..................................................................... 4-15
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set.......................................... 4-17
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set ............................................. 4-19
[003] Extension Number Set .............................................................. 4-20
[004] Extension Name Set .................................................................. 4-22
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment ............................................... 4-23
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night ..... 4-25
[007] Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment ...................... 4-26
[008] Absent Messages....................................................................... 4-28
[009] Quick Dial Number Set............................................................. 4-29
[010] Budget Management ................................................................. 4-30
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate .................................................... 4-31
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set .................................................... 4-32
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set........................................................ 4-34
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port .......................................... 4-35.0
[015] Charge Rate Fractional Point Assignment ................................ 4-35.1
14
[016] Charge Rate Assignment........................................................... 4-35.2
[017] TD286 Extension Number Set .................................................. 4-35.4
[018] TD286 Extension Name Set...................................................... 4-35.6
[019] Budget Management on TD286 Port ........................................ 4-35.7
[021]–[022] Doorphone Call Forwarding — Day / Night................. 4-35.8
4.3 System Programming ....................................................................... 4-36
[100] Flexible Numbering .................................................................. 4-36
[101] Day / Night Service Switching Mode ....................................... 4-39
[102] Day / Night Service Starting Time............................................ 4-40
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment ....................... 4-42.0
[104] Quick Dial Assignment ............................................................. 4-42.1
[105] Account Codes .......................................................................... 4-43
[106] Station Hunting Type ................................................................ 4-44
[107] System Password....................................................................... 4-45
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button ......................................... 4-46
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type...................................................... 4-47
[110] Network Type Assignment........................................................ 4-49
[111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment ... 4-50
[113] VM Status DTMF Set ............................................................... 4-51
[114] VM Command DTMF Set ........................................................ 4-53
[115] Adjust Time............................................................................... 4-55
[116] ROM Version Display ............................................................... 4-56
[117] Charge Display Selection .......................................................... 4-57
[118] Charge Fee Reference Extension Assignment .......................... 4-58
[119] Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set .......................................... 4-59
[120] User Password........................................................................... 4-60
[121] Pulse Dial Reception Assignment............................................. 4-61
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment........................................... 4-62
[123] Hotel Application ...................................................................... 4-63
[125] Assignment of Denomination ................................................... 4-64
[126] Voice Mail Number Assignment ............................................... 4-65
[127] Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment .............................. 4-67
[128] Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment................................. 4-68
[129] Operator Queue ......................................................................... 4-69.0
[130] Phantom Extension Number Assignment ................................. 4-69.1
[131] Hunting Group Assignment ...................................................... 4-69.2
[132] Hunting Group Name Assignment............................................ 4-69.3
[133] Hunting Overflow ..................................................................... 4-69.4
[134]–[135] Hunting Intercept — Day / Night................................... 4-69.6
[137]–[138] UCD Time Table Assignment — Day / Night .............. 4-69.7
[139] UCD Time Table ....................................................................... 4-69.8
15
[148] Off-Hook Monitor ..................................................................... 4-69.9
[150] ISDN DDI Translation Table .................................................... 4-69.10
[151]–[152] ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment — Day / Night........... 4-69.11
[153] Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) ..................... 4-69.13
4.4 Timer Programming......................................................................... 4-70
[200] Hold Recall Time ...................................................................... 4-70
[201] Transfer Recall Time................................................................. 4-71
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time......................................... 4-72
[203] Intercept Time ........................................................................... 4-73
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time......................................................... 4-74
[205] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time............................... 4-75
[207] First Digit Time......................................................................... 4-76
[208] Inter Digit Time......................................................................... 4-77
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times ............................................... 4-78
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time................................................ 4-79
[211] Dial Start Time .......................................................................... 4-80
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time ................................................ 4-81
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time........................................ 4-82
[215] Ring-Off Detection Time .......................................................... 4-83.0
[216] Outgoing Message Time ........................................................... 4-83.1
[217] Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time .......................................... 4-83.2
[218] Doorphone-to-CO Line Call Duration Time............................. 4-83.3
4.5 TRS Programming ........................................................................... 4-84
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6............ 4-84
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6......... 4-85
[311] Emergency Dial Number Set .................................................... 4-86
4.6 CO Line Programming .................................................................... 4-87
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment ............................................. 4-87
[401] CO Line Group Assignment ..................................................... 4-88
[402] Dial Mode Selection.................................................................. 4-89
[403] Pulse Speed Selection ............................................................... 4-91
[404] DTMF Time .............................................................................. 4-92
[405] CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set ......................................... 4-93
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night ................................. 4-95
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night................................ 4-96
[411] Host PBX Access Codes ........................................................... 4-97
[412] Pause Time ................................................................................ 4-99
[413] Register Recall Signal Time...................................................... 4-100
[414] Disconnect Time ....................................................................... 4-101
[415] CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set ......................................... 4-102
[416] Reverse Circuit Assignment...................................................... 4-103
16
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment ............................................... 4-104
[420]/[429] ISDN Ring Service Assignment — Day / Night............. 4-105
[421] CO Line Name Assignment ...................................................... 4-106
[422] ISDN Port Type......................................................................... 4-107
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode ...................................................... 4-108
[424] ISDN Configuration .................................................................. 4-109
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode .............................................................. 4-110
[426] ISDN TEI Mode........................................................................ 4-111
[427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number ......................... 4-112
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone................................................. 4-113.0
[437] Multiple Subscriber Number Set............................................... 4-113.1
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment
— Day / Night for ISDN MSN ................................................. 4-113.2
[440] TD286 ISDN Port Type ............................................................ 4-113.4
[441] TD286 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode.......................................... 4-113.5
[442] TD286 ISDN Configuration...................................................... 4-113.6
[443] TD286 ISDN Data Link Mode.................................................. 4-113.7
[444] TD286 ISDN TEI Mode............................................................ 4-113.8
[445] TD286 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number ............. 4-113.9
[446] TD286 ISDN Extension Progress Tone .................................... 4-113.10
4.7 COS Programming ........................................................................... 4-114
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night............................ 4-114
[502] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit .............................. 4-115
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line........................................................... 4-116
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line ..................................................... 4-117
[507] Do Not Disturb Override........................................................... 4-118
[508] Account Code Entry Mode........................................................ 4-119
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level
for System Speed Dialling — Day / Night................................ 4-120
[511] Door Opener Access ................................................................. 4-121
[513] Night Service Access ................................................................ 4-122
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call ............................... 4-123
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction...................................... 4-124
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction ................................ 4-125.0
[518] CFU / CFB / CFNR Assignment............................................... 4-125.1
[519] Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ................................... 4-125.2
[520] Call Forwarding from Hunting Group ...................................... 4-125.3
[521] Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line .................................. 4-125.4
4.8 Extension Programming .................................................................. 4-126
[600] EXtra Device Port ..................................................................... 4-126
[601] Class of Service......................................................................... 4-127
17
[602] Extension Group Assignment ................................................... 4-128
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
— Day / Night........................................................................... 4-129
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night........................................................................... 4-131
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night ........... 4-133
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes.......................................................... 4-135
[611] Extension Connection Assignment ........................................... 4-136
[612] Data Line Security..................................................................... 4-137
[613] ISDN Class of Service .............................................................. 4-138
— Day / Night for ISDN Extension.......................................... 4-139
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment................... 4-141
[620]–[621] Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night.................. 4-142.0
[622] Incoming Call Display .............................................................. 4-142.1
[623] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment for Extension.................... 4-142.2
[624] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension.......... 4-142.3
[627] TD286 Class of Service ............................................................ 4-142.4
[629]–[630] Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment
— Day / Night for TD286 Extension........................................ 4-142.5
[632] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment for TD286 Extension........ 4-142.7
4.9 LCR Programming........................................................................... 4-143
[7000] LCR Mode .............................................................................. 4-143
[7002] BTL Access Code ................................................................... 4-145
[7003] Itemized Code Set ................................................................... 4-146.0
[7004] Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set ........................................... 4-146.1
[7005] TD286 Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set............................... 4-146.2
[7X01] LCR Leading Digit Entry ...................................................... 4-147
[7X11] LCR Time and Fee Set .......................................................... 4-149
[7X20] LCR Exceptional Code Set .................................................... 4-151
[7X21] LCR Carrier Code .................................................................. 4-153
[7X22] LCR Carrier Modify Command............................................. 4-154
[7X23] LCR CO Line Group Assignment.......................................... 4-155
[7X24] Authorization Code Set.......................................................... 4-156
4.10 Resource Programming.................................................................... 4-157
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout........................ 4-157
[801] SMDR Format........................................................................... 4-158
[802] System Data Printout ................................................................ 4-159
[803] Music Source Use ..................................................................... 4-160
[804] External Pager BGM ................................................................. 4-161
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone............................................ 4-162
18
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2 ............... 4-163
[813] Floating Number Assignment ................................................... 4-165
[814] Modem Standard ....................................................................... 4-167.0
[817] TD197 Baud Rate Set ............................................................... 4-167.1
[818] Timed Reminder Message Assignment..................................... 4-167.2
4.11 Option Programming ....................................................................... 4-168
[990] System Additional Information................................................. 4-168
[991] COS Additional Information..................................................... 4-176
Section 5 List
5.1 Tone / Ring Tone ............................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Default Values ................................................................................... 5-4
Section 6 Troubleshooting
6.1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.1 Installation................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.2 Connection ................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.3 Operation................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Using Reset Button ................................................................... 6-5
Section 7 PRI Section

7.1 Overview............................................................................................ 7-2
7.2 Installation......................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 Location of the Optional Units.................................................. 7-3
7.2.2 Installing the Unit (KX-TD290)................................................ 7-5
7.3 PRI System Programming ............................................................... 7-7
[450] PRI Configuration ..................................................................... 7-7
[451] PRI Reference CO..................................................................... 7-9
Section 8 DECT Portable Station Section

8.1 Overview............................................................................................ 8-2
8.2 Wireless System Installation............................................................ 8-3
8.2.1 Wireless System Outline ........................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Site Planning ............................................................................. 8-5
8.2.3 Location of the Unit .................................................................. 8-9
8.2.4 Installing the Unit...................................................................... 8-13
8.2.5 Site Survey ................................................................................ 8-18
8.2.6 Wall Mounting .......................................................................... 8-29
8.3 DECT Portable Station Features .................................................... 8-30
Digital Wireless Connection............................................................... 8-30
Call Directory ..................................................................................... 8-35
PS Programming................................................................................. 8-36
Super EXtra Device Port (SXDP) ...................................................... 8-38
19
8.4 DECT PS System Programming ..................................................... 8-40
DECT PS System Programming Conditions ...................................... 8-40
[020] PS Flexible CO Button Assignment.......................................... 8-41
[650] PS Registration.......................................................................... 8-43
[651] PS Termination.......................................................................... 8-46
[653] PS Extension Name Set............................................................. 8-48
[654] SXDP Assignment .................................................................... 8-49
[655] PS Budget Management............................................................ 8-50
[656] PS Charge Verification Assignment.......................................... 8-51
[657] PS Class of Service ................................................................... 8-52
[658] PS Extension Group Assignment .............................................. 8-53
[659]–[660] PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night........................... 8-54
[661]–[662] PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night........................................................................... 8-56
[663]–[664] PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment
— Day / Night........................................................................... 8-58
[665] PS Voice Mail Access Codes .................................................... 8-59
[667] PS Extension Connection Assignment...................................... 8-60
[668] PS Data Line Security ............................................................... 8-61
[671] PS Extension Number Set ......................................................... 8-62
[672] PS Password Set........................................................................ 8-64
[673] PS CLIP / COLP Number Assignment ..................................... 8-65
[674]–[675] PS Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night ............ 8-66
[676] PS Incoming Call Display......................................................... 8-67
[677] PS Itemized Code Set................................................................ 8-68
[680] Cell Station Number Assignment for Master CS...................... 8-69
[681] PS Radio System ID Reference................................................. 8-70
[682] Radio Information Data Clear................................................... 8-71
8.5 Template for the Cell Station........................................................... 8-72
20
Section 1
System Outline
This section provides general information on the system,
including system capacity and specifications.
1.1 System Highlights
System Capacity Basic Module System
System Expansion Connection
KX-TD816
CO line (ISDN S0 line) 0 8 (4) —
Extension 8 16 —
KX-TD1232
CO line (ISDN S0 line) 0 12 (6) 24 (12)
Extension 16 32 64
Module Expansion
Expansion modules are used to increase the system capacity. CO
line modules and extension modules can be added to the basic
system to add CO lines, ISDN S0 lines and extensions.
EXtra Device Port (XDP)

Each extension jack in the system supports the connection of a
digital proprietary telephone / console and a single line device. The
devices have different extension numbers and are treated as two
completely different extensions.
Parallelled Telephone Connection

Every jack in the system also supports the parallel connection of a
proprietary telephone and a single line device. They share the same
extension number and are considered by the system to be one
extension.
Super Hybrid System

This system supports the connection of digital and analogue
proprietary telephones, consoles and single line devices such as
single line telephones, facsimiles, and data terminals.
System Connection*
With the addition of optional System Inter Connection Card, two
Digital Super Hybrid Systems can be connected together to expand
the system capacity. The two systems function as one, however,
some functions such as paging and music on hold are duplicated.
Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPT)

The system supports nine different models of digital proprietary
telephones which cover the range from a monitor set to a large
display handsfree version.
1-2 System Outline *: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

1.1 System Highlights
The system can be programmed from a proprietary telephone or
from a personal computer.
Voice Mail Integration

The system supports Voice Processing Systems with in-band
DTMF signalling as well as DPT integration.
Least Cost Routing (LCR)

Automatically selects the pre-programmed least expensive route for
outgoing toll calls.
Charge Fee Reference

Allows the user to see charges and to print out the charges.
Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Ringing occurs over the external paging system; call can be
answered from any station.
Remote Station Lock Control

Allows an operator to lock an extension so that outgoing calls
cannot be made.
Budget Management
Limits the telephone usage to a pre-assigned amount.
Hotel Application
Allows to handle the front and operator services such as check-
in/check-out and wake-up call setting.
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

Allows an incoming calls to be distributed uniformly to a specific
group of extensions.
System Outline 1-3

1.2 Basic System Construction
The KX-TD816 Digital Super Hybrid System has a basic capacity
of 8 extensions, and KX-TD1232 has 16 extensions. It is capable
of supporting Panasonic digital and analogue proprietary
telephones, consoles and single line devices such as single line
telephones, facsimiles.
To expand its capabilities the system can be equipped with optional
components or customer-supplied peripherals such as external
speakers and external music sources (e.g., radios).
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYST
EM
D816
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYST
EM
Panaso Panaso
nic nic
1-4 System Outline

1.3 Proprietary Telephones
The following Panasonic proprietary telephones are available with
this system.
Proprietary Description
Telephone
KX-T7420 Digital, speakerphone, 12 Flexible CO
KX-T7431 Digital, 1-line display, speakerphone,
12 Flexible CO
24 Flexible CO
24 Flexible CO
24 Flexible CO
12 Flexible CO
KX-T7250 Digital, monitor, 6 Flexible CO
KX-T7130 1-line display, speakerphone, 12 Flexible CO,
12 PF
KX-T7020 Speakerphone, 12 Flexible CO, 4 PF
KX-T7050 Monitor, 12 Flexible CO, 4 PF
Note : Flexible CO : Flexible CO button (programmable)

PF : Programmable Feature button
System Outline 1-5

1.4 Options
8-Station Line Unit (KX-TD170)
Each unit adds eight extensions. One expansion unit for KX-
TD816, and up to two expansion units for KX-TD1232 can be
installed per system.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
D816
Panasonic
Panasonic
8 or 16 extensions 8 extensions can

can be added. be added.
4-CO Line Unit (KX-TD180) /

2-ISDN S0 Line Unit (KX-TD280) /
6-ISDN S0 Line Unit (KX-TD286)
One of the following units can be installed per system.
KX-TD180 : Adds four CO lines.
KX-TD280 : Adds two ISDN S0 lines (Basic Rate Interface).
KX-TD286 : Adds six ISDN S0 lines (Basic Rate Interface).
D1232
D816
Panasonic
Panasonic
4 CO lines / 2 ISDN S0 lines / 4 CO lines / 2 ISDN S0 lines /

6 ISDN S0 lines can be added. 6 ISDN S0 lines can be added.
1-6 System Outline

1.4 Options
8-CO Line Card (KX-TD181)*1 /
4-ISDN S0 Line Card (KX-TD281)*1
One of the following cards can be installed for KX-TD1232.
KX-TD181 : Adds eight CO lines.
KX-TD281 : Adds four ISDN S0 lines.
8 CO lines / 4 ISDN S0 lines can be added.
4-CO Line Card (KX-TD182)*2 /

2-ISDN S0 Line Card (KX-TD282)*2
One of the following cards can be installed for KX-TD816.
KX-TD182 : Adds four CO lines.
KX-TD282 : Adds two ISDN S0 lines.
4CO/ISDN
4 CO lines / 2 ISDN S0 lines can be added.
System Inter Connection Card (KX-TD192)*1

Permits two Digital Super Hybrid Systems to be connected together
— to double system capacity.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic Panasonic
Connection Cable
*1: Available for the KX-TD1232 only. System Outline 1-7

*2: Available for the KX-TD816 only.
1.4 Options
Remote Card (KX-TD196)*1
The Remote Card allows programming and maintenance of the
system from a remote location.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic
Central
Office
Telephone Line
Personal Computer with modem
9600bps Speed Remote Card (KX-TD197) /

9600bps Speed Remote Unit (KX-TD198)*2
These card and unit allow system programming and maintenance
from a remote location.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
KX-TD197: Can be installed inside the KX-TD1232 or to the
Message Unit (KX-TD190).
KX-TD198: Can be installed to the KX-TD816.
Be sure not to install these card and unit at the same time.
Panasonic
Central
Office
Telephone Line
Personal Computer
with Modem
Note The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as the main unit.
1-8 System Outline *1: Available for the KX-TD1232 only.

1.4 Options
Message Unit (KX-TD190) / Message Card (KX-TD199)*
These unit and card require recording an Outgoing Message
(OGM). OGM for external callers and/or an OGM for Timed
Reminder can be recorded.
KX-TD190: Can be installed to the KX-TD816 and KX-TD1232.
D1232
KX-TD199: Can be installed to the 9600bps Speed Remote Unit
(KX-TD198).
Be sure not to install these unit and card at the same time.
Panasonic
Central
Office
Telephone Line External Telephone
Note The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as the main unit.
Battery Adaptor (KX-A46)

Supports the connection of two car batteries (12 VDC52) for
power backup in case of a power failure.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Battery Adaptor KX-A46
Panasonic
Two car batteries, connected in series
Battery Adaptor Connector
Note The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit.
*: Available for the KX-TD816 only. System Outline 1-9

1.4 Options
DSS Console (KX-T7440, KX-T7240, KX-T7040) /
Attendant Console (KX-T7441)
Permits easy and quick access to stations and features. The Busy
Lamp Field (BLF) shows the idle, busy or Do Not Disturb state of
each station. If the Operator uses a Console as well as a proprietary
telephone, the BLF will show the check-in/check-out status.
Consoles are designed for use with a proprietary telephone. The
KX-TD816 supports up four Consoles. The KX-TD1232 supports
up to eight Consoles per system.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
DIGI
TAL
Pana
sonic
DIGITA
L
Panaso
nic
Panasonic
Paired
PairedTelephone
Telephone Console
DSS Console
(Digital Proprietary
(Proprietary KX-T7240/
Telephone)
Telephone) KX-T7040
Pair
Pair
Doorphone (KX-T30865)
This system supports two doorphones and two door openers. The
doorphone is an option.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic Panasonic
Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2
Panasonic
Door Door
Opener 1 Opener 2
1-10 System Outline

1.5 Specifications
1.5.1 General Description
System Capacity KX-TD816
CO lines (ISDN S0 lines) 8 max. (4 max.)
Extensions 16 max. (32 max. with XDP)
KX-TD1232
CO lines (ISDN S0 lines) 12 max. (6 max.)
Extensions 32 max. (64 max. with XDP)
Control Method Stored Program CPU: 16 bits CPU
Switching Non Blocking PCM Time Switch
Power Supplies Primary 230 VAC, 50 Hz

Secondary Station Supply Volt: 30V
Circuit Volt: ± 5V, ± 15V
Power Failure • Memory back-up duration: seven
years by factory-provided lithium
battery
• Power Failure Transfer: 3 CO lines
max. assigned to extensions
• System operation for several hours
by recommended batteries
(consisting of two 12 VDC car
batteries)
Dialling Outward Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps

Tone (DTMF) Dialling
Internal Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialling
Mode Conversion DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
Connector CO lines 4-pin connector

Stations 6-pin connector
Paging Output Pin Jack (RCA JACK)
External Music Input Two-conductors Jack
(MINIJACK 3.5 mm diameter)
System Outline 1-11

1.5 Specifications
Extension Connection Cable
Single line telephones 1 pair wire (A, B)
KX-T7420, KX-T7425, KX-T7431, KX-T7433, 1 pair wire (L, H) or
KX-T7436, KX-T7220, KX-T7230, KX-T7235, 2 pair wire (A, B, L, H)
KX-T7250
KX-T7130 , KX-T7020, KX-T7050 2 pair wire (A, B, L, H)
KX-T7440, KX-T7441, KX-T7240, KX-T7040 1 pair wire (L, H)
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Interface EIA (RS-232C)
Output Equipment Printer
Detail Recording Date, Time, Extension Number, CO
Line Number, Dialled Number, Call
Duration, Charge Fee, Account Code
1.5.2 Characteristics
Station Loop Limit KX-T7420 / KX-T7425 / KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 /
KX-T7220 / KX-T7230 / KX-T7235 / KX-T7250 / KX-T7020 /
KX-T7050 / KX-T7130 ...........................40 ohms
Single Line Telephone .............................600 ohms including set
Doorphone................................................20 ohms
Minimum Leak Resistance 15 000 ohms
Maximum Number of Station Instruments per Line

1 for KX-T7420, KX-T7425, KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436,
KX-T7220, KX-T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7250, KX-T7130,
KX-T7020, KX-T7050 or single line telephone
2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port Connection of a proprietary
telephone and a single line telephone
Ring Voltage 70 Vrms at 25 Hz depends on Ringing Load
Primary Power 230 VAC, 50 Hz
Central Office Loop Limit 1 600 ohms max.
Environmental Requirements 0 – 40 °C / 32 – 104 °F, 10 – 90%
1-12 System Outline

1.5 Specifications
Ability To Recognize Further Digits
The KX-TD816 / KX-TD1232 PBX is capable of accepting and
acting upon routing information received from a proprietary
telephone for 10 seconds, after the latest routing information has
been received. (Satisfies BS6450:Part 1 1993 Clause 13.5.)
1.5.3 System Capacity

Lines, Cards, Units, Station Equipment
KX-TD1232
Max. Quantity
Item KX-TD816 Single System
Max. Quantity System Connection
System Inter
Connection Card — — 2
Service Unit 1 1 2
8-CO Line Card or — 1 2
4-ISDN S0 Line Card
4-CO Line Card or 1 — —
2-ISDN S0 Line Card
4-CO Line Unit, 1 1 2
2-ISDN S0 Line Unit or
6-ISDN S0 Line Unit
CO Line 8 12 24
ISDN S0 Line (Basic Rate Interface) 4 6 12
8-Station Line Unit 1 2 4
Extension Jack 16 32 64
Station Terminal 32 64 128
(including DSS Consoles)
{DSS Console} {4} {8} {16}
Remote Card — 1 2
9600bps Speed Remote Card* — 1 2
9600bps Speed Remote Unit 1 — —
Message Card** 1 — —
Message Unit — 1 2
System Outline 1-13

1.5 Specifications
Doorphone 2 2 4
Door Opener 2 2 4
External Pager 2 2 4
External Music Source 2 2 4
*: 9600bps Speed Remote Card cannot be installed directly in KX-TD816, but can be installed in the
Message Unit (KX-TD190) and then to the KX-TD816.
**: Message Card cannot be installed directly in KX-TD816, but can be installed in the 9600bps Speed
Remote Unit (KX-TD198) and then to the KX-TD816.
System Data
Item Max. Quantity

Operator 2
System Speed Dialling 500
One-Touch Dialling 24 per station
(proprietary telephone)
Station Speed Dialling 10 per station
Call Park 10
Absent Message 9
CO Line Group 8
Toll Restriction Level 8
Extension Group 16
Class of Service 8
Message Waiting 128
Hunting Group 32
1-14 System Outline

1.5 Specifications
1.5.4 Ports
Port type classification
PORT NAME BRIEF DESCRIPTION PORT TYPE
EXTN PORT ** CONNECT TO PT, SLT 1AS
PSTN PORT ** CONNECT TO NETWORK PA1
ISDN 2 PORT CONNECT TO DIGITAL NETWORK PD1
PAGING PORT * EXTERNAL PAGING 4F
EXT. MUSIC PORT * EXTERNAL MUSIC 4F
BATTERY PORT * CONNECT TO KX-A46 4C
DOORPHONE PORT * CONNECT TO KX-T30865 4E
DOOR OPENER PORT DOOR OPENER 4F
* These ports do not respond to address signalling.

** These ports provide DTMF and Loop Disconnect Signalling.
Port types between which call paths can be established

TO EXTN PSTN PAGING EXT. MUSIC DOOR- Battery DOOR ISDN
FROM PHONE OPENER 2
EXTN A A A X A X X A
PSTN A A X X X X X X
PAGING X X X X X X X X
EXT. MUSIC A A A N/A X X X A
DOORPHONE A X X X N/A X X X
Battery X X X X X N/A X X
DOOR OPENER X X X X X X N/A X
ISDN 2 A A X X X X X X
A: Allowed X: Not allowed N/A: Not applicable
Maximum associated cable loss for EXT port

PT: Max cable loss 0.34 dB (240 m max for ø 0.5 mm)
SLT: Max cable loss 0.87 dB (620 m max for ø 0.5 mm)
Port to port loss

Loss across switch, PAS → 1AS Loss=1.13 dB (Not through–fed
system)
System Outline 1-15

1.5 Specifications
Send and receive loudness ratings on port to port basis
Send loudness rating (1AS → PAS) : +3 dB (0 km)
Receive loudness rating (PAS → 1AS) : -6 dB (0 km)
Extension (1AS) port

3 ringers can be supported with extension wiring up to 620 m.
Notes • EXTN Jack 1 to EXTN Jack 16 for KX-TD816 or EXTN Jack 1 to

EXTN Jack 32 for KX-TD1232 may be used for off premise extension in
which case cabling would be required by BS6701:Part 1 1986 to be
equipped with over voltage protection.
• When using separately approved extension telephones, the best overall
performance of the PBX system will be obtained by using extension
telephones of impedance class A clause 4.3.2.1 of BS6305:1982.
1-16 System Outline

Section 2
Installation
This section contains the basic system installation and wiring
instructions, as well as how to install the optional cards and
units.
2.1 Before Installation
Please read the following notes concerning installation and
connection before installing the system.
Safety Installation Instructions

When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should
always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and
injury to persons, including the following:
1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Installation Precautions
This set is exclusively made for wall mounting only. Avoid
installing in the following places. (Doing so may result in
malfunction, noise, or discoloration.)
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature
range: 0°C – 40°C / 32°F – 104°F)
2. Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs,
etc. may damage the equipment or contacts.
3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into
contact with the unit.
5. Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing
machines or electric welders.
6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well
as microwave ovens or air conditioners. (It is preferable not to
install in the same room with the above equipment.)
7. Install at least 1.8 m from radios and televisions. (both the main
unit and proprietary telephones)
8. Do not obstruct area around the main unit (for reasons of
maintenance and inspection — be especially careful to allow
space for cooling above and at the sides of the main unit).
Wiring Precautions
Make sure to keep the following instructions when wiring.
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power
source, computer, telex, etc. If the cables are run near those
wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables
and ground the shields.
2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors or the like to protect
2-2 Installation
2.1 Before Installation
the wires where they may be stepped on. Avoid wiring under
carpets.
3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers,
telexes, and other office equipment. Otherwise, the system
operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such
equipment.
4. Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of
(telephone) equipment such as single line telephones, data
terminals, answering machines, computers, voice processing
systems, etc., except proprietary telephones (e.g. KX-T7235,
KX-T7436).
5. The Power Switch of the system must be off during wiring.
After all the wirings are completed, turn the Power Switch on.
6. Mis-wiring may cause the system to operate improperly. Refer
to Section 6.1.1 “Installation” and Section 6.1.2 “Connection.”
7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the
telephone from the extension line and then connect again, or turn
off the Power Switch of the system and then on again.
8. The system is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug. This
is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the
outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet.
Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding-type plug.
9. Use twisted pair cable for CO line connection.
10. CO lines should be installed with lightning protectors. For
details, refer to Section 2.4.3 “Lightning Protector Installation.”
Warning: Warning : Static sensitive connectors

Static sensitive devices are used.
To protect printed circuit boards
from static electricity, do not REMOTE
touch connectors indicated to the SYSTEM INTER
right. To discharge body static, CONNECTION
4CO/ISDN
touch ground or wear a

grounding strap.
8CO/ISDN
Installation 2-3
2.2 Installation of the Main Unit
2.2.1 Unpacking
When you unpack the main unit, the following components should
be included:
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232 Service Part No.
Main Unit one one
AC Cord one one PQJA10045Z
Templet one one TD1232:PQQX10176Y
TD816:PQQX10171Y
Screw three four PQHE5008Z
Pager Connector two two PQJP1E2Z
Music Source Connector two two PQJE1E1Z
Expansion line cord holder one one PQHR10113Z1
6-pin plugs for extension connection eight sixteen PQJSO6SO8Z
4-pin plugs for doorphone or
two two PQJSO4SO8Z
door opener connection
Overlay one one PQGD10124W
Installation Manual one one PSQX1047*
User Manual one one PSQX1848*
2.2.2 Name and Location

Overview of the Main Unit D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Earth Terminal
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
EIA(RS-232C)
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Connector EIA (RS-232C)

Connector
Earth Terminal
Battery Adaptor Battery Adaptor
Connector Connector
Panaso Panaso
nic nic
AC Inlet AC Inlet
Power Indicator Power Switch Power Switch

Power Indicator
2-4 Installation
Inside View of the Main Unit
KX-TD816
Extension Connectors
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
External Music Jack 2
4CO/ISDN System Clear Switch
Reset Button
Door Opener and
Doorphone Connectors
Front Cover
KX-TD1232 Door Opener and

Doorphone Connectors
REMOTE
SYSTEM INTER
CONNECTION
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
8CO/ISDN
System Clear Switch

Reset Button
Front Cover
Notes • EIA (RS-232C) Connector, Battery Adaptor Connector, Paging Jack

ports, External Music Jack ports, and Doorphone / Dooropener
Connectors are at SELV.
• CO Line Connectors and Extension Connections are at TNV.
• Interconnection circuit should be such that the equipment continues to
comply with the requirements of 4.2 of EN41003 for TNV circuits and
2.3 of EN60950 for SELV circuits, after making connections between
circuits.
Installation 2-5
2.2.3 Wall Mounting
This set is made exclusively for wall mounting. The wall must be
able to support the weight of the main unit. If screws other than the
ones supplied are used, they must have the same diameter as the
ones enclosed.
Mounting on Wooden Wall

KX-TD816 KX-TD1232
1. Place the templet (included) on the wall 1. Place the templet (included) on the wall
to mark the three screw positions. to mark the four screw positions.
Templet Templet
2. Install the three screws (included) into 2. Install the four screws (included) into the
the wall. wall.
Wooden Wooden
Wall Wall
Drive the screw Drive the screw

to this position to this position
3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads. 3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.
2-6 Installation
2.2.4 Frame Earth Connection
IMPORTANT!!!
You must connect the frame of the main unit to Earth.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
D816
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panas
onic To ground
Earth
To
ToEarth
Earth
2.2.5 Opening Front Cover

Two screws are attached to the front cover by springs so that they
will not be lost. To open the front cover of the main unit:
1. Loosen the two screws on the right side of the main unit.
2. Open the front cover in the direction of Arrow A .
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYST
EM
D816
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
Screw
A
Screw
A
Screw
Panas
onic
Screw
Panas
onic
Installation 2-7
2.3 Connection
2.3.1 System Connection Diagram
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
Printer for SMDR or Personal Computer for System Programming
Two car batteries, connected in series

Battery Adaptor • Consisting of two 12 VDC
KX-A46
Panas
onic To AC Outlet The socket outlet shall be placed close to the
equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Panasonic Panasonic
Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2

KX-T30865 KX-T30865
External Music Source 1 Amplifier Speaker 1
External Music Source 2 Amplifier Speaker 2
2-8 Installation
2.3.1 System Connection Diagram
D1232
DEGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
(CO Lightning Protectors)

KX-TD816 : 8 CO Lines CO’s 1 through 8 (additional)
KX-TD1232: 12 CO Lines CO’s 1 through 12 (additional)
Panasonic
KX-TD816 : 16 Extensions (8 extensions – initial, 8 extensions – additional)

KX-TD1232: 32 Extensions (16 extensions – initial, 16 extensions – additional)
(two pair)
It is recommended that (two
(one
extension of jack 1 is a
DIGITAL
Panasonic pair)
pair)
display proprietary
telephone.
KX-T7400 series digital
Single Line Telephone proprietary telephones
KX-T7200 series digital
proprietary telephones
(one
(two (two pair)
pair)
(one pair) pair)
Pa
nas
oni
c
nic
aso
Pan
Cordless Phone
KX-T7000 series analogue Digital DSS/Attendant
Data Terminal proprietary telephones consoles(KX-T7440/
(one KX-T7441/KX-T7240)
pair) (one (two
pair) pair)
(two pair)
Voice Processing System Telephone Answering KX-T7130 analogue

Machine with Facsimile proprietary telephone KX-T7040 DSS console
Notes • : needs optional cards or adaptor.

• Parallel telephone connections are possible.
• The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit.
Installation 2-9
for Proprietary Telephones, Single Line Telephones and Consoles
(KX-TD816: Jack 1 through Jack 8, KX-TD1232: Jack 1 through Jack 16)
Wire Specifications
In making an extension line connection, use twisted pair cable for
installation. The wire specifications for extensions are as follows:
Wire Solid wire
Diameter of conductor ø 0.4 – ø 0.65 mm
Diameter including coating ø 0.66 – ø 1.05 mm
Connection Use 6-pin plugs (included). There are 8 plugs to connect extensions
to jacks 1 through 8 for KX-TD816, and 16 plugs to connect
extensions to jacks 1 through 16 for KX-TD1232. Mis-connection
may cause the system to operate improperly. See Section 6.1.1
“Installation” and 6.1.2 “Connection” before connection.
1. Insert required telephone wires into the holes in a plug.

Fix the transparent part into the black part.
Note: Do not strip the wires. Insert the wires all the way into the plug.
6-pin plug
P2
L
A
B
H
P1
2. Insert the plug into an extension jack in the main unit.
KX-TD816
Jack 4
Jack 3
4CO/ISDN
Jack 2
P2
L
A Jack 1
B
H
P1
Jacks 1 through 8 are

located from bottom to top.
To extensions (Jacks 1 – 8)
2-10 Installation
KX-TD1232
REMOTE
SYSTEM INTER Jack 4

CONNECTION
Jack 3
8CO/ISDN
Jack 2
P2
L
A Jack 1
B
H
P1
Jacks 1 through 16 are

located from bottom to top.
To extensions (Jacks 1 – 16)
Installation 2-11
Maximum distance of extension line cord

The maximum length of the extension line cord, twisted cable, that
connects the main unit and the extension is as follows:
DI
GI
TA
L
Pana
sonic
240 m for ø 0.5 mm
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Digital Proprietary Telephone
Single line Telephone
620 m for ø 0.5 mm
DIGI
TAL
Pana
soni
c
240 m for ø 0.5 mm

Console
Notes • Extension line cords should only be routed internally (inside a

customers premises).
Proprietary Telephone (analogue type) Connection

With the KX-T7020, KX-T7050 and KX-T7130 model proprietary
telephones, 4-conductor wiring is required for each extension.
Connect pins “A,” “B,” “L” and “H.”
A: A-wire L: Low
B: B-wire H: High
2-12 Installation
Digital Proprietary Telephone Connection

With the KX-T7420, KX-T7425, KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-
T7436, KX-T7220, KX-T7230, KX-T7235, and KX-T7250 model
digital proprietary telephones, 4-conductor wiring is required for
each extension. Connect pins “L” and “H” only. (“A” and “B” are
only needed for Paralleled Telephone or XDP operation.)
Single Line Telephone Connection

With the single line telephones, 2-conductor wiring is required for
each extension. Connect pins “A” and “B.”
Console Connection
A maximum of four Consoles for KX-TD816 and a maximum of
eight Consoles for KX-TD1232 per system can be installed. The
Console must be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone.
System Programming is required to designate paired jack numbers
of Consoles and proprietary telephones. With the KX-T7440, KX-
T7441, KX-T7240 and KX-T7040 model Consoles, 4-conductor
wiring is required for each extension. Connect pins “L” and “H”
only. (“A” and “B” are not necessary.)
Notes If a telephone or answering machine with an A-A1 relay is connected to

the main unit, set the A-A1 relay switch of the telephone or answering
machine to OFF position.
Station Wiring
1. Proprietary Telephone (analogue type) Connection and Console Connection
6-pin plug Secondary socket
Terminal wire
L B 5
A L 4
B
H H 3
A 2
Installation 2-13
2. Digital Proprietary Telephone Connection and SLT Connection
6-pin plug Master socket
Terminal wire
L L 6
A B 5
B
H A 2
H 1
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[007] Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
Feature References Section 3, Features,

Console
Note After completing all the required inside cabling, including CO lines,
extensions, external pagers and external music sources, fasten the
cables with the nylon tie (included) as shown.
2-14 Installation
for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone
A single line telephone can be connected in parallel with any

proprietary telephone as follows:
Method 1
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYSTE
M
2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins “A” and “B.”

For DPT: Connect pins “L” and
“H” only. (“A” and “B” are
not necessary.)
For APT: Connect pins “A,”
“B,” “L” and “H.” For DPT: Master
Master socket socket
For APT:
Secondary
socket
Digital or Analogue Single Line

Proprietary Telephone Telephone
Installation 2-15
for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone
Method 2: for Digital Proprietary Telephone only
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
2-conductor wiring cord 4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins “A” and “B.” Connect pins “A,” “B,” “L” and “H.”
Master
socket <Back of the KX-T7400 Series DPTs>
To single line
telephone
To system
Single Line Digital Proprietary
Telephone Telephone
<Back of the KX-T7200 Series DPTs>
To single line
To system telephone
LCD ADJ TO TEL

PUSH
TO EMSS
Notes • Not only a single line telephone but a single line device such as an
answering machine, a facsimile or a modem (personal computer) etc.
can be connected in parallel with a digital proprietary telephone.

Paralleled Telephone
2-16 Installation
for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone
With the eXtra Device Port (XDP) connection, a digital proprietary

telephone and a single line telephone can be connected to the same
extension jack and have different extension numbers. System
programming is required.
A single line telephone and a digital proprietary telephone are
connected to the main unit by 2-conductor and 4-conductor wiring
cords.
Method 1 D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM

Connect pins “L” and “H” only. 2-conductor wiring cord
(“A” and “B” are not necessary.) Connect pins “A” and “B.”
Master Master
socket socket
Digital Proprietary Single Line Telephone
Telephone
Method 2
Section 2.3.3 “Paralleled Telephone Connection, Method 2: for
Digital Proprietary Telephone only” is also available for XDP
connection.
[600] EXtra Device Port

Installation 2-17
2.3.5 External Pager Connection
A maximum of two user-supplied external pagers can be connected
per system. You can program the external pager that will send
background music and determine whether both pagers will generate
a confirmation tone. Use an RCA connector and shielded cable.
To adjust the sound level of the pagers, use the volume control on
the amplifiers.
• Output impedance: 600 Ω
KX-TD816
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
4CO/ISDN
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment 2
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment 1
2-18 Installation
KX-TD1232
REMOTE
SYSTEM INTER
CONNECTION
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
8CO/ISDN
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment 2
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment 1
[804] External Pager BGM
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone

Background Music (BGM) – External Paging – External
Paging – All
Installation 2-19
2.3.6 External Music Source Connection
A maximum of two music sources can be connected per system.
Use a two-conductor plug (3.5 mm in diameter). Insert the plug to
the earphone / headphone jack on the external music source.
System programming is required for the Music on Hold and
Background Music features. To adjust the sound level of the Music
on Hold, use the volume control on the external music source.
• Input impedance: 8 kΩ
KX-TD816

4CO/ISDN
External Music Source 2
2-20 Installation
KX-TD1232
REMOTE
SYSTEM INTER External Music Jack 2

CONNECTION
8CO/ISDN
[803] Music Source Use
[990] System Additional Information, Field (20)

Background Music (BGM) Background Music (BGM) – External
Music on Hold
Installation 2-21
2.3.7 Printer Connection
A user-supplied printer can be connected to the EIA (RS-232C)
connector (25-pin) on the main unit. The printer is used to print out
SMDR call records and system programming data.
Connect the EIA (RS-232C) printer connector to the EIA
connector. Cables must be shielded; the maximum length is 2 m.
EIA Serial Printer

Connector
Serial Interface
(RS-232C)
The pin configuration of EIA (RS-232C) connector is as follows:
Pin Circuit Type

Signal Name
No. EIA CCITT
1 FG Frame Ground AA 101
2 SD (TXD) Transmitted Data BA 103
3 RD (RXD) Received Data BB 104
4 RS (RTS) Request To Send CA 105
5 CS (CTS) Clear To Send CB 106
6 DR (DSR) Data Set Ready CC 107
7 SG Signal Ground AB 102
8 CD (DCD) Data Carrier Detect CF 109
20 ER (DTR) Data Terminal CD 108.2
Ready
2-22 Installation
Printer / Personal Computer (25-pin) Connection Chart
EIA (RS-232C) port on EIA (RS-232C) port on
the main unit the printer/PC
Circuit Circuit
Signal Pin Pin Signal
Type Type
Name No. No. Name
(EIA) (EIA)
AA FG 1 1 FG AA
BA SD (TXD) 2 3 RD (RXD) BB
BB RD (RXD) 3 2 SD (TXD) BA
CB CS (CTS) 5
CC DR (DSR) 6 20 ER (DTR) CD
AB SG 7 7 SG AB
CD ER (DTR) 20 5 CS (CTS) CB
6 DR (DSR) CC
8 CD (DCD) CF
Printer / IBM* Personal Computer (9-pin) Connection Chart

If you connect an IBM-PC or printer with 9-pin EIA (RS-232C)
connector to your system, see the chart below.
EIA (RS-232C) port on EIA (RS-232C) port on

the main unit the printer/IBM-PC
Circuit Circuit
Signal Pin Pin Signal
Type Type
Name No. No. Name
(EIA) (EIA)
AA FG 1
BA SD (TXD) 2 2 RD (RXD) BB
BB RD (RXD) 3 3 SD (TXD) BA
CA RS (RTS) 4 4 ER (DTR) CD
CB CS (CTS) 5 5 SG AB
CC DR (DSR) 6 6 DR (DSR) CC
AB SG 7 7 RS (RTS) CA
CD ER (DTR) 20 8 CS (CTS) CB
25-pin 9-pin
Note Please read your printer manual and connect the first EIA pin (FG) of this
unit to the printer cable.
* IBM is registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Installation 2-23

EIA (RS-232C) Signals
Frame Ground: FG
Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the
AC power cord.
Transmitted Data: SD (TXD) ............................................(output)
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer. A “Mark” condition is
held unless data or break signals are being transmitted.
Received Data: RD (RXD) .................................................(input)
Conveys signals from the printer.
Request to Send: RS (RTS)................................................(output)
This lead is held ‘ON’ whenever DR (DSR) is ‘ON.’
Clear To Send: CS (CTS)...................................................(input)
An ‘ON’ condition of the CS (CTS) circuit indicates that the printer
is ready to receive data from the unit. The unit does not attempt to
transfer data or receive data when the CS (CTS) circuit is ‘OFF.’
Data Set Ready: DR (DSR)................................................(input)
An ‘ON’ condition of the DR (DSR) circuit indicates that the
printer is ready. An ‘ON’ condition does not indicate that
communication has been established with the printer.
Signal Ground: SG
Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Data Terminal Ready: ER (DTR) .....................................(output)
This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that it is online.
The ‘ON’ condition does not indicate that communication has been
established with the printer. The signal line is switched ‘OFF’
when the unit is offline.
Data Carrier Detect: CD (DCD) .......................................(input)
The ON condition is an indication to data terminal (DTE) that the
carrier signal is being received.
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
[806]-[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters – Port 1 / Port 2

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer
2-24 Installation
2.4 Optional Cards and Units Installation
2.4.1 Location of Optional Cards and Units
The location of the optional cards and units is shown below.
Precaution To protect the printed circuit boards (P-boards) from static electricity, do
not touch parts on the P-boards in the main unit and on the optional cards
and units.
The ISDN unit (KX-TD280, KX-TD286, KX-TD290) should not be
installed only to the Slave system.
Expansion Units
KX-TD816 One 8-Station Line Units (KX-TD170) and/or one CO Line/ISDN

Line Unit (KX-TD180, KX-TD280, KX-TD286, KX-TD290) can
be installed to any expansion area.
One extension line unit

Area 2 8-Station Line Units, KX-TD170
Area 1 One of the following CO/ISDN

line units
• 4-CO Line Unit, KX-TD180
Panasonic • 2-ISDN S0 Line Unit, KX-TD280
• 6-ISDN S0 Line Unit, KX-TD286
• Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
D816 ISDN Expansion Unit, KX-TD290
Expansion Unit
Connectors
Remove the cover

plate(s) on the
front cover.
Installation 2-25
KX-TD1232 A maximum of two 8-Station Line Units (KX-TD170) and/or one
CO Line/ISDN Line Unit (KX-TD180, KX-TD280, KX-TD286,
KX-TD290) can be installed to any expansion area.
Area 3
Max. two extension line units
8-Station Line Units, KX-TD170
Area 2
Area 1
One of the following CO/ISDN

line units
Panasonic • 4-CO Line Unit, KX-TD180
Expansion Unit D1232
• Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN
Connectors Expansion Unit, KX-TD290
Remove the cover

plate(s) on the
front cover.
Note System programming is required for unit location identification. Refer to

Section 4.3 [109] “Expansion Card / Unit Type.”
2-26 Installation
4-CO Line Card / 2-ISDN S0 Line Card for KX-TD816
CO Line
4CO/ISDN
Install 4-CO Line Card (KX-TD182).
Expansion Adds four CO lines.
Card
Connector or
Install 2-ISDN S0 Line Card (KX-TD282).

Adds two ISDN S0 lines.
Front Cover
is open.
System Inter Connection Card / 8-CO Line Card / 4-ISDN S0 Line Card
for KX-TD1232
System Inter SYSTEM INTER
Connection CONNECTION Install System Inter Connection Card

Card (KX-TD192).
Connector This card connects two DSHSs together.
CO Line
Expansion 8CO/ISDN
Install 8-CO Line Card (KX-TD181).
Card Adds eight CO lines.
Connector
or
Install 4-ISDN S0 Line Card (KX-TD281).

Adds four ISDN S0 lines.
Front Cover
is open.
Installation 2-27
2.4.2 CO Line Connection (Optional Card)
Card Installation for KX-TD816
To connect CO 1 through CO 4, install the optional 4-CO Line
Card (KX-TD182).
To connect two ISDN S0 lines (CO 1 through CO 4), install the
optional 2-ISDN S0 Line Card (KX-TD282).
1. Insert the upper end of the 4-CO Line Card or 2-ISDN S0 Line
Card into the two hooks on the main unit.
2. Press the two corners at the lower end of the Card.
3. Fix the card with an accessory screw at the lower-right corner.
4. Connect the cord to the connector.
2-ISDN S0 Line Card 4-CO Line Card
4-pin Connector ✕ 2
2-28 Installation
Card Installation for KX-TD1232
To connect CO 1 through CO 8, install the optional 8-CO Line
Card (KX-TD181).
To connect four ISDN S0 lines (CO 1 through CO 8), install the
optional 4-ISDN S0 Line Card (KX-TD281).
1. Insert the upper end of the 8-CO Line Card or 4-ISDN S0 Line
Card into the two hooks on the main unit.
2. Press the two corners at the lower end of the Card.
3. Fix the card with an accessory screw at the lower-right corner.
4. Connect the cord to the connector.
4-ISDN S0 Line Card CO Line Expansion Card
4-pin Connector ✕ 1 (on the lower board)
Wire Specifications
In making a CO line connection, use twisted pair cable for
installation. The wire specifications for CO lines are as follows:
Wire Solid wire

Diameter of conductor ø 0.4 – ø 0.65 mm
Diameter including coating ø 0.66 – ø 1.05 mm
Notes • In case of starting the system for the first time or System Data Clear,
the application for location will adapt the practical installation instead
of system default setting.
• System Programming is required for location identification. Refer to
Section 4, [109] “Expansion Card / Unit Type.”
Default: CO Line Expansion Unit
Installation 2-29
8-CO Line Connection with KX-TD181 /
4-CO Line Connection with KX-TD182
Use 4-pin plugs (included) to connect CO lines. There are two
plugs to connect four CO lines for KX-TD816, and four plugs to
connect eight CO lines for KX-TD1232. A single plug is able to
connect two CO lines. Mis-connection may cause the system to
operate improperly. See Section 6.1.2 “Connection” before
connection.
1. Insert required telephone wires into the holes in a plug.

A
A B
To the unit ← B A ← From Network
A B
B
2
1
2. Insert the plug A into a CO jack B on the card.

KX-TD181
Jacks for Power

Failure Transfer †
CO 7, CO 8
CO 5, CO 6
CO 3, CO 4
CO 1, CO 2
B View of Connector
A
A
CO 2
B
A
To Terminal Board or Modular CO 1
B
Jacks from the Central Office.
2-30 Installation
KX-TD182
Jacks for Power

CO 3, CO 4
CO 1, CO 2
View of Connector
B
A
A
CO 2
B
A
CO 1
B
To Terminal Board or Modular
Jacks from the Central Office.
† For details, refer to Section 2.5 “Auxiliary Connection for

Power Failure Transfer.”
Note: If connection is made using a TJF (Test Jack Frame), ensure

the maximum cable length between the TJF and the point on
entry into the CO card is less than 30 m (minimum distance 0 m).
Installation 2-31
4-ISDN S0 Line Connection with KX-TD281 /
2-ISDN S0 Line Connection with KX-TD282
Use 4-pin plugs (included) to connect ISDN S0 lines. There are
two plugs to connect two ISDN S0 lines for KX-TD816, and four
plugs to connect four ISDN S0 lines for KX-TD1232. A single
plug is able to connect one ISDN S0 line. Mis-connection may
cause the system to operate improperly. See Section 6.1.2
“Connection” before connection.
1. Prepare the plugs.
RB
TB RA
To the unit ← TA TA ← From Network
RA TB
RB
2
1
2. Insert the plug into an ISDN port on the card.
KX-TD281 KX-TD282
Port No. 4
Port No. 3 Port No. 2
Port No. 1
To Terminal Board or Modular To Terminal Board or Modular

Jacks from the Central Office. Jacks from the Central Office.
Note: If connection is made using a TJF (Test Jack Frame), ensure

the maximum cable length between the TJF and the point on
entry into the CO card is less than 30 m (minimum distance 0 m).
2-32 Installation
2.4.3 Lightning Protector Installation
A lightning protector is a device to be installed on a CO line to
prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging
equipment.
A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact
with a power line. Troubles due to lightning surges have been
showing a steady increase with the development of electronic
equipment.
In many countries, there are regulations requiring the installation of
a lightning protector. A lightning strike to a telephone cable which
is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200,000 volts.
This system should be installed with lightning protectors. In
addition, connection to earth ground is very important for the
protection of the system.
Installation Diagram
CO CO CO
Lightning
Protectors Main
Distribution Main Unit
Frame EXTN
EXTN EXTN Earth Terminal
Frame
SLT PT Earth
Earth
Installation 2-33
Outside Installation Diagram
If you install an extension outside of the main building, the

following precautions are recommended:
(1) Install the extension wire underground.
(2) Use a conduit to protect the wire.
(Main Building)
Protectors
CO
(Another Building)
CO
SLT
Main CO
Main EXTN PT
Distribution Unit
Frame EXTN Lightning
Protector
EXTN EXTN
TEL TEL
Earth
Note The lightning protector for an extension is different from that for CO.
2-34 Installation
Earth Rod Installation Diagram
The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the
composition of the soil. Consider the following recommendations:
Lightning
Protector
CO
Earth Wire
Main
Unit
(Underground)
Earth Rod
1) Installation location of the earth rod .............Near the protector

2) Check obstructions........................................None
3) Composition of the earth rod ........................Metal
4) Depth of the earth rod ...................................More than 50 cm
5) Size of the earth wire ....................................Thickness is more
than 1.6 mm
Installation 2-35
2.4 Optional Cards and Units Installation
2.4.4 CO Line Connection (Optional Unit)
To add four CO lines (KX-TD816: CO 5 through CO 8, KX-
TD1232: CO 9 through CO 12), use the optional 4-CO Line Unit
(KX-TD180).
To add two ISDN S0 lines, use the optional 2-ISDN S0 Line Unit
(KX-TD280).
To add six ISDN S0 lines, use the optional ISDN 6-S0 Line Unit
(KX-TD286). When the KX-TD286 is installed in the KX-TD816,
only four ISDN S0 lines are available for outside lines and the other
ports are for extension lines (ISDN extensions). Then the two basic
analog ports cannot be used.
One of these units can be installed in any of the two/three

expansion areas provided on the front of the main unit.
For Unit Installation, see Section 2.4.6 “Installing Expansion Unit.”
2.4.5 Extension Connection (Optional Unit)

To add eight extensions (KX-TD816: jacks 9 through 16, KX-
TD1232: jacks 17 through 24), use the optional 8-Station Line Unit
(KX-TD170).
To add 16 extensions (jacks 17 through 32),* use two 8-Station
Line Units.
This unit can be installed in any of the two/three expansion areas
provided on the front of the main unit.
For Unit Installation, see Section 2.4.6 “Installing Expansion Unit.”
2-36 Installation *: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

2.4.6 Installing Expansion Unit
The following procedures can be used to install either Extension
Unit (KX-TD170), CO Line / ISDN S0 Line Unit (KX-TD180,
KX-TD280, KX-TD286, KX-TD290). There are two expansion
areas for KX-TD816 and three expansion areas for KX-TD1232.
System programming is required for unit location identification.
Default KX-TD816: bottom = 4-CO Line Unit,
top = 8-Station Line Unit
KX-TD1232: bottom = 4-CO Line Unit,
middle and top = 8-Station Line Unit
1. Loosen the two the screws on the cover 3. Hook the cabinet to the main unit and
plate. Insert fingers into the slits to slide the cabinet to the left until it is
remove the cover plate. fixed.
D1232
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Slit
Slit Panasonic
Panaso
nic
Note Any of the cover plates can be

removed, as needed.
2. Connect the cabinet cord to the 4. Loosen the outside screw and slide the
connector in the main unit firmly. cover to the right.
D1232
D1232
Panasonic
Panasonic
Outside screw
Installation 2-37
5. Secure the inside screw (included in the
card) to fix the cabinet to the main unit.
D1232
Note Be sure to fix the inside screw to the

main unit, or the unit may not work
properly.
Inside screw
Panasonic
6. ■ If a KX-TD170 is to be installed:
6-1. Prepare the required plugs. Eight 6-pin plugs are included in
KX-TD170 to connect extensions.
P2 P2
L L
To the unit ← A
B
A
B ← From Terminal
H H Equipment
P1 P1
2
1
6-2. Insert the plug into a jack on the unit.

Connect an earth wire to the earth terminal on the KX-TD170.
Jack Jack
P2 no. no.
L
A
8
E
X
T B 16 or 24 12 or 20
D
IG
IT
A
L
S
U
P
H (32) (28)
E
R
H
Y
B
R P1
15 or 23 11 or 19
ID
S
Y
S
TE
M
(31) (27)
14 or 22 10 or 18
(30) (26)
13 or 21 9 or 17 (25)
P
an
as
on
(29)
ic
Earth Terminal
To extensions
(jack numbers 9–16 /17–24 / 25–32)
2-38 Installation
■ If a KX-TD180 is to be installed:
6-1. Prepare the required plugs. Two 4-pin plugs are included in
KX-TD180 to connect CO lines.
A
A B
To the unit ← B A ← From Network
A B
B
2
1

Connect an earth wire to the earth terminal on the KX-TD180.
Jacks for Power

A
4C P
FT
B CO5 or CO9
O po
rts
D
IG
IT
A
L
S
U
P
A CO6 or CO10
E
R
H
Y
B
R
ID
S
Y
S
2C
O
w
/P
FT
B
TE
M
2C
O
CO7 or CO11
P
CO8 or CO12
an
as
on
ic

Jacks from the Central Office
† For details, refer to Section 2.5 “Auxiliary Connection for Power

Failure Transfer.”
Installation 2-39
■ If a KX-TD280 / KX-TD286 is to be installed:
6-1. Prepare the required plugs. Two 4-pin plugs are included in
KX-TD280, and six 4-pin plugs are included in KX-TD286 to
connect CO lines.
RB
TB RA
RA TB
RB
2
1

Connect an earth wire to the earth terminal on the KX-TD280
or KX-TD286.
KX-TD280 KX-TD286
TB Jack
TA no. TB
IS
D
P
FT ISDN TA
N
po
rts
Port No.3 or 5 S01

2S
D O
IG
IT
A RA RA
L
S
U
P
E
S02 RB
R
H
Y
B
R
ID
S
Y
2C
O
w
/P
FT
RB
S
TE
M
2C
O
S03
S04
ISDN
Port No.4 or 6 S05
P
an
as
on
ic
P
an S06
as
on
ic
To Terminal Board or Modular To Terminal Board or Modular

Jacks from the Central Office Jacks from the Central Office
Notes • All ports of the KX-TD280 and KX-TD286 can also be used for internal
ISDN lines. For the KX-TD816, jack numbers S05 and S06 of the KX-
TD286 are fixed as internal ISDN lines. To connect internal ISDN lines,
refer to Section 2.4.7 “Internal ISDN Line Connection.”
2-40 Installation
7. Tie up all the cords into a bundle. If Notes • If two or three expansion units are
other cords are coming from the upper installed, cut the cabinet covers on
cabinets, tie them, too. the lower cabinets to allow the cords
8. Close the cabinet cover and secure the from upper cabinet to go down
outside screw. through the cabinet covers. To guard
the cords, smooth the cut edge.
9. Cover the cords with the cord holder
(included).
Cut here
D1232
Panasonic
Cord holder Section 4, System Programming,
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Module Expansion
10. Fix the cords to the wall at the shown
position so that the front cover can be
opened.
D1232
Panasonic
Installation 2-41
2.4.7 Internal ISDN S0 Line Connection
The ISDN S0 bus on the KX-TD280, KX-TD281 and KX-TD282,
whose ROM numbers are P071D or later ROM versions and on the
KX-TD286 can be used as internal S0 bus. The Port numbers 01
and 02 of the KX-TD281 are fixed as external ISDN S0 Lines. The
others can be used as either external or internal ISDN S0 Lines.
Some System Programmings and hardware changes are required to
use the S0 bus as internal ISDN S0 lines beforehand.
Preparation For KX-TD281 only

1. Take the appropriate jumper cover out of the first and second
pins from the left on the jumper of the P-board (“S0” side).
Jumper 1 for Port number 03 Jumper 2 for Port number 04
2. Cover the jumper cover on the first and second pins from the
right on the jumper of the P-board (“EXT” side).
Jumper 1
EXT SO
EXT SO
Jumper 2
EXT
EXT
DIP
SO
SO
Connection Use 4-pin plugs (included) to connect ISDN S0 lines. A single plug
is able to connect one ISDN S0 line. Mis-connection may cause the
system to operate improperly.
1. Re-arrange telephone wires in reverse order of the plug.

Wiring for external ISDN S0 line
RB
TB RA
RA TB
RB
Wiring for internal ISDN S0 line

RB
TB RA
To the unit ← TA TA ← From Terminal
RA TB
RB Equipment
2
1
2-42 Installation
2. Insert the plug into a ISDN S0 port on the unit.
KX-TD281 KX-TD282
Port No. 2
Port No. 3
Port No. 2†
Port No. 1†
To ISDN equipment To ISDN equipment
KX-TD280 KX-TD286
Port No. 3 or 5
Jack No. S01
Jack No. S02
Jack No. S03
Port No. 4 or 6 Jack No. S04
P
an
as
Jack No. S05
on P
ic an
as
oni
c
Jack No. S06
To ISDN equipment To ISDN equipment
Notes • For installing the KX-TD280, KX-TD281, KX-TD282 and KX-TD286

to main unit, refer to Section 2.4.6 “Installing Expansion Unit” and
Section 2.4.2 “CO Line Connection” respectably.
• The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit for KX-TD280 and KX-
TD286.
† Available for external ISDN S0 Line only.
3. Connect the lines between the ISDN board and the ISDN device.
4. Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet.
5. Program “[422] ISDN Port Type” or “[440] TD286 ISDN Port
Type” and other required programmings in System
Programming.
6. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool on the main unit.
Installation 2-43
Maximum cabling distance of S0 bus connection
The maximum length of the extension line cord that connects the
main unit and the ISDN terminal equipment (TE) is shown below:
Under 1000 m
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Point-to-Point
TE
Panasoni
c
Point-to-Multipoint
TE 1 TE 8
Under 150 m
Expansion Point-to-Multipoint
TE 1 TE 8
Under 500 m Under 50 m
Wiring with Terminating Resistors (TR)

The ISDN S0 bus should be terminated with two100Ω terminating
resistors (TR).
Main TR†
Unit
†TR
TE 1 TE 8 RB
TR 100Ω
RA
TA
TR 100Ω
TB
Power Supply for ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE)

The system does not provide a power supply to terminal equipment
(TE). Depending on the type of TE's, the external power supply is
required on ISDN S0 line to operate.
2-44 Installation
2.4.8 Remote Card Installation*
1. Insert the upper end of the Remote Card into the two hooks on
the main unit.
2. Press the two corners at the lower end of the Remote Card.
3. Connect the cord to the Remote Card connector.
KX-TD196 REMOTE
Remote Card
[107] System Password
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[814] Modem Standard

*: Available for KX-TD1232 only. Installation 2-45

2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit* /
Message Unit Installation
Preparation The following preparations are necessary before installing the
9600bps Speed Remote Unit (KX-TD198) or Message Unit (KX-
TD190).
■ KX-TD198 (KX-TD816 only) ■ KX-TD190 / KX-TD198

It is necessary to set the MODE switch It is possible to attach another expansion unit
before installing the Remote Unit to the to the Message or Remote Unit and install
KX-TD816. them to the system. In this case, the following
procedures are necessary.
1. Remove the front cover of the Remote
Unit. 1. Remove the front cover of the Message or
Remote Unit.
2. Set the MODE switch to 1. 2. Attach the expansion unit to the Message
or Remote Unit as shown below. Be sure
to connect the cabinet cords by inserting
the expansion unit cabinet cord through the
MODE
1 2
slot in the Message or Remote Unit.
Expansion unit cabinet cord

Message/Remote unit
cabinet cord
Note The KX-TD198 users must set the MODE

switch to 1.

2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit* /
Message Unit Installation
Installation The following procedures can be used to install the Message or
9600bps Speed Remote Unit.
If it is attached to another expansion unit, refer to the installing
procedures of the expansion unit.
The KX-TD816 is illustrated as the main unit.
1. Loosen the two screws on the cover plate. Insert fingers into the
slits to remove the cover plate.
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Slit Slit
Panaso
nic
Note Any of the cover plates can be removed, as needed.
2. Connect the cabinet cord to the connector in the main unit

firmly.
D816
Panasonic
3. Hook the cabinet on the main unit and slide the cabinet to the
left until it is secured.
D816
Panasonic

2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card /
Message Card* Installation
The KX-TD816 user can install the 9600bps Speed Remote Card
(KX-TD197) to the Message Unit (KX-TD190), and the
Message Card (KX-TD199) to the 9600bps Speed Remote Unit
(KX-TD198).
The KX-TD1232 user can install the 9600bps Speed Remote Card
(KX-TD197) in the main unit.
KX-TD816
1. Open the front cover of the unit, slide the 4. Install the card, secure the screw(s)
side cover to the right and remove it. (included with the KX-TD190 or KX-
TD198) and connect the cable to the
connector.
To install the KX-TD197 to the KX-TD190
2. Turn over the unit and remove the four

screws.
To install the KX-TD199 to the KX-TD198
3. Turn over the unit again and remove the

inside cover.
Note The KX-TD190 is illustrated as an example.

2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card /
Message Card* Installation
5. Flatten the cable to replace the inside 6. Replace the inside cover and secure the
cover properly. four screws on the back.
Also, replace the side cover.
7. Set the MODE switch to 1.
MODE
1 2
Cable
8. Replace the front cover.

Side View 9. Install the unit to the main unit.
Refer to Section 2.4.9 “9600bps Speed
Remote Unit / Message Unit Installation”
for installation.
KX-TD1232
1. Open the front cover.

2. Insert the top side of the Remote card into
the two hooks on the main unit.
3. Press down on the two corners of the
bottom side of the Remote card.
4. Connect the cord to the Remote card
connector.
KX-TD196 REMOTE
9600bps Speed Remote Card
Programming Reference
[817] TD197 Baud Rate Set
Feature Reference Section 3, Features,


2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener
Connection
A maximum of two doorphones (KX-T30865) and two door
openers is permitted.
Doorphone Installation
1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into halves.
ic
ason
Pan
screw
2. Attach the base cover to the wall with two screws.
Note Two kinds of screws are included; choose the one that is
appropriate for use depending on your wall type:
Type 1: When the doorphone plate has been

fixed to the wall.
Type 2: When you wish to install the

doorphone directly to the wall.
3. Connect the wires from the main unit to the screws located in the
front cover.
To the main unit (See the

following page.)
4. Re-attach the halves and re-install the screw.
2-50 Installation
Connection
Connection Use 4-pin plugs (included) to connect doorphone or door opener. A
plug is able to connect up to two doorphones or door openers. 4-
conductor wiring is required.
1. Insert required wires into the holes in a plug.

4-pin plug
Door opener 2
or
Doorphone 2
Door opener 1
or
Doorphone 1
2. Insert the plug into the connector in the main unit.

3. Connect the wires to the doorphone (1 or/and 2) or door opener
(1 or/and 2).
■ Doorphone
KX-TD816
Doorphone 2
DOORPHONE
4CO/ISDN Doorphone 1
Panasonic Panasonic
(KX-T30865) (KX-T30865)
4-conductor wiring
Installation 2-51.0
Connection
KX-TD1232
DOORPHONE
REMOTE
Doorphone 2
SYSTEM INTER
CONNECTION Doorphone 1
8CO/ISDN
4-conductor wiring
Panasonic Panasonic
(KX-T30865) (KX-T30865)
■ Door Opener
KX-TD816
Door opener 2
DOOROPENER
Door opener 1
4CO/ISDN
4-conductor wiring
To door opener 2
is required.
To door opener 1
2-51.1 Installation
Connection
KX-TD1232
DOOROPENER
REMOTE Door opener 2

Door opener 1
SYSTEM INTER
CONNECTION
8CO/ISDN
4-conductor wiring
is required. To door opener 2
To door opener 1
Notes • For wiring, it is recommended to use UL 1015 twisted wire or the

equivalent.
• The wire should be between 1.2 and 2.4 mm in diameter including the
coating.
D=1.2–2.4 mm
• Pair the door opener with the doorphone.
Installation 2-51.2
Connection
Maximum distance of doorphone and door opener line
The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line that
connects to the main unit is as follows:
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
120 m for ø 0.5 mm

M
Panasonic
Doorphone
KX-T30865
Panaso
nic
120 m for ø 0.5 mm

Door opener
[607–608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night

Door Opener Doorphone Call
2-51.3 Installation
2.4.12 System Connection*
To connect two main units, use the optional System Inter
Connection Cards (two) and the Connection Cable (included in the
cards).
1. Insert the upper end of the System Inter Connection

Card into the two hooks on the main unit of the
Master System.
2. Press the two corners at the lower end of the
System Inter Connection Card.
3. Connect the cord to the System Inter Connection
Card connector.
KX-TD192 SYSTEM INTER CONNECTION
System Inter Connection Card
4. Open the latch on the card.

5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the Slave System,
using the other card.
6. Insert one connection cable end to the Master
System and insert the other end into the Slave
System.
7. Close the latches on both systems.
Connection Cable
*: Available for KX-TD1232 only. Installation 2-51.4

2.4.12 System Connection*
8. Open the ROM Cover in the Slave System and set
the Master/Slave switch on the CPU card to “Slave.”
REMOTE
MASTER
8CO/ISDN
SLAVE
9. Turn the power on.
Notes • System Connection may take a while (5 to 15 min. depending on your

software version) to be completed after the power is turned on.
Confirm the connection between the systems by making a call from a
Master Unit extension to a Slave Unit extension.
• To turn the power on for the first time, refer to Section 2.6 “Starting the
System for the First Time.”
• The master and slave must have the same version software. Otherwise,
System Connection will not work properly.
• When you install an ISDN S0 Line Unit or/and Card, you should install
it to the Master System first and then the Slave System. If only
installed to the Slave System, noise may occur.
[115] Adjust Time

System Connection
2-51.5 Installation *: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

2.4.13 Battery Adaptor Connection
User-supplied car batteries can be used as a backup power supply
in the event of a power failure. In case of power failure, the
batteries automatically maintain the power to the main unit
instantly. The optional Battery Adaptor, model KX-A46, is
required.
The Battery Adaptor should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Keep the adaptor and car batteries away from heating appliances
and fire. Place car batteries in airy place.
Connection
When connecting the battery adaptor, keep the following in mind.
• Make sure of the polarities of batteries and wires.
• Make sure do not short the batteries and wires.
• To connect the two batteries, use accessory wire.
Red (+) Yellow (-)

Car batteries 1. Assemble the cords and two car batteries
Battery + - (12VDC each) as shown.
Adaptor 12 VDC
Blue (-)
Accessory
wire + - 12 VDC
Fuse
Holder
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
Earth Terminal
HYBRID SYSTEM
2. Insert the plug of the battery adaptor into

Ground Wire
the battery adaptor connector on the
Panasonic
main unit.
To Earth Connect the earth wire to the earth
KX-TD816
terminal on the main unit.
Plug LED
Power Switch
Earth Terminal
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Ground Wire
3. Turn on the power switch of the battery
To Earth adaptor.
KX-TD1232 Plug LED
Power Switch
Installation 2-51.6
2.4.13 Battery Adaptor Connection
Wall Mounting
1. Drive the accessory four small screws on
Metal Plates
the bottom of the unit.
2. Place the metal plates so that the screw
Front
heads insert into the slots as shown.
Screws 3. Slide the metal plates in the directions of
(big)
the arrows, and drive the screws.
Wall Screws Bottom 4. Place the templet on the wall to mark
(small) two screw positions, and install the big
screws into the wall.
5. Hook the battery adaptor on the screw
Rear heads.
Notes • If the Power LED does not go on, check the main unit, battery adaptor,
batteries and wiring connection.
• After connection of the battery adaptor, keep the power switch on
unless when the main unit is turned off. (Batteries will discharge.)
• To charge the discharged batteries, use a proper charging unit.
• Power Fuse: (8A, 32V)✕2
If the Power LED light goes off during a power failure, the power fuse
may have been blown. To change the fuse:
1. Turn the power switch off.

Fuse Holder 2. Turn the fuse holder in the direction of
B
Arrow B while pushing it in the direction
of Arrow A .
3. Change the fuse.
A
4. Turn the fuse holder in the direction of
C Arrow C while pushing it in the direction
of Arrow A .
5. Turn the power switch on.
• Back-up Duration: depends on the amp-hour of the batteries used.

e.g. When using two 12 VDC batteries 20 amp-hour, maintenance-free,
car batteries, the power is maintained for about three hours.
2-51.7 Installation
Blank
2-51.8
2.5 Auxiliary Connection for Power
Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer connects a specific single line telephone to
selected CO line in the event of system power failure.
Single line telephones connected to the Power Failure Transfer
jacks are connected directly to following CO lines;
KX-TD816 : CO 1, CO 2, CO 5
KX-TD1232 : Master System – CO 1, CO 2, CO 9,
Slave System – CO 13, CO 14, CO 21
The Power Failure Transfer jack is on the 8-CO Line Card, 4-CO
Line Card and 4-CO Line Unit.
KX-TD181 / KX-TD182 Power Failure Transfer Jack KX-TD180

View of Connector
A
View of Connector
A
B
A
B P
an
as
on
ic
To a single line telephone To a single line telephone
Installation 2-52
2.5 Auxiliary Connection for Power
Failure Transfer
KX-TD182
View of Connector
A
B
A
B
To a single line telephone
Notes • In the event of a power failure, system memory is protected by the

factory-provided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except for
the saved values of the Camp-on, Saved Number Redial, Last Number
Redial, Call Park and Message Waiting features.
• The system automatically changes the current connection when the
power supply stops.
• If DC power is available from backup batteries in the event of an AC
power failure, the system does not change the current connection.
Section 4, System Programming

Power Failure Transfer
2-53 Installation
2.6 Starting the System for the First Time
1. Set the power switch to “OFF.”
2. Set the system clear switch to “CLEAR.”
3. Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet.
4. Turn the power switch on.
5. Press the Reset button with a pointed tool.
(The power indicator will flash.)
6. Slide the system clear switch to “NORMAL” while the power
indicator is flashing (approximately within 10 seconds).
The system will be initialized with default values. The system will
also check the CO lines, extensions, and optional cards and units.
KX-TD816
SYSTEM System Clear

CLEAR
CLEAR
Switch
NORMAL
RESET
Reset Button
To AC Outlet
Power Indicator
Installation 2-54
2.6 Starting the System for the First Time
KX-TD1232
System Clear
SYSTEM
CLEAR Switch
CLEAR
NORMAL
RESET
Reset Button
To AC Outlet
Power Indicator
Notes • After pressing the Reset button, slide the system clear switch to
“NORMAL” at step 6 while the power indicator is flashing
(approximately within 10 seconds). Otherwise, the system does not
start up with the default values.
• When System Connection is executed, the system will not accept
incoming outside calls for about 4 minutes after sliding the system
clear switch to “NORMAL.” The system needs time to establish the
LCR data.
CAUTION: Once you start up the system and if you turn the power off, do not perform the
above procedures to start the system again. Otherwise, your programmed data is
cleared. To start the system, just turn the power switch on.
2-55 Installation
2.7 System Restart
If after checking the system features you determine that the system
is not operating properly, restart the system.
Keep in mind that the following features are cleared when you
restart the system:
• Camp-on
• Call Park
The following features are cancelled when you restart the system:
• Calls on Hold
• Calls on Exclusive Hold
• Calls in progress
1. Make sure that the system clear switch is set to “NORMAL.”

Notes • If the system clear switch is set to “CLEAR,” do not slide the system
clear switch to “NORMAL” within 20 seconds of pressing the Reset
button. If you do, the system programming data is reset to the default
values. (Refer to Section 2.8 “System Data Clear.”) Wait over 30
seconds after pressing the Reset button and then slide the system clear
switch to “NORMAL.”
incoming outside calls for about 4 minutes after pressing the Reset
button. The system needs time to establish the LCR data.
• If the system still does not operate properly, please see Section 6.1.4
“Using Reset Button.”
Installation 2-56
2.8 System Data Clear
After storing or changing the system programming data, you can
clear the programming data stored in the system. The system will
restart with the default settings.
1. Slide the system clear switch to “CLEAR.”

3. Return the system clear switch to “NORMAL” while the power
indicator is flashing (approximately within 10 seconds).
Notes • After pressing the Reset button, return the system clear switch to
“NORMAL” at step 3 while the power indicator is flashing
(approximately within 10 seconds). Otherwise, the system is not
cleared.
incoming outside calls for about 4 minutes after returning the system
clear switch to “NORMAL.” The system needs time to establish the
LCR data.
2-57 Installation
Section 3
Features
This section describes every basic, optional, and
programmable features in alphabetical order. It also provides
information about the conditions, connection references,
programming required, related features, and operation for
every feature.
A 3 Features
Absent Message Capability
Description Once set this option provides a message, on the display of the
calling extension, to show the reason for the called extension’s
absence. Nine messages can be programmed as desired which are
available for every extension user. There are six pre-programmed
default messages. Setting or cancelling a message can be done by
individual extension users but only callers with a display telephone
can receive the message.
Conditions • Six default messages, which are changeable, are shown below. The
“%” means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at
individual extension.
(1) Will Return Soon
(2) Gone Home
(3) At Ext %%% (extension number)
(4) Back at %% : %% (hour : minute)
(5) Out Until %% / %% (month / day)
(6) In a Meeting
• An extension user can select only one message at a time. The selected
message is displayed every time the user goes off-hook.
[008] Absent Messages
[100] Flexible Numbering, Absent message
[990] System Additional Information, Area 05 – Bit 7
Feature References None
Operation References Operation – Before Leaving Your Desk

—User Manual Showing an Absent Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display
(Absent Message Capability)
3-2 Features
3 Features A
Account Code Entry
Description An Account Code is used to identify incoming and outgoing
outside calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code
is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call
record. For incoming outside calls, account codes are optional. For
outgoing outside calls, there are three modes available to enter an
account code: Verified-All Calls mode; Verified Toll Restriction
Override mode; and Option mode. One mode is selected for each
extension on a Class of Service basis.
In Verified-All Calls mode, the user must always enter a pre-
assigned account code when making any of the following calls
unless it has previously been stored in memory:
• Call Forwarding – to CO Line
• Last Number Redial
• Line Access
• Notebook Function
• One-Touch Dialling
• Pickup Dialling
• Saved Number Redial
• Station Speed Dialling
• System Speed Dialling
In Verified-Toll Restriction Override mode, the user can enter a pre-
assigned account code only when the user needs to override toll
restriction.
In Option mode, the user can enter any account code if needed.
Conditions • An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling (System / Station
Speed Dialling; Notebook Function; One-Touch Dialling; Pickup
Dialling; Call Forwarding – to CO Line).
• The Account button may be used in place of the feature number. A
flexible button on the proprietary telephone set can be programmed as
the Account button.
• Account code entry after CPC detection must be done within 15
seconds. Otherwise, SMDR call record is activated and entry becomes
impossible afterwards.
• If disconnection signal is selected in program [990], Area 01 – bit 3 and
Recall function is enabled in Area 02 – bit 5, the Verified-All Calls
extension is allowed to make an outside call using the same line with
Recall function.
• If an account code is appended to a call, specified display telephone
users can see the charge for the call (Charge Fee Reference).
Features 3-3
A 3 Features
• In any mode, emergency dial numbers stored in program [311]
“Emergency Dial Number Set” can be dialled out without an account
code entry.
• If the account code stored in location 001 of the programming table is
used, the dialled number is not printed out to SMDR (Private Call).
• It is possible to select whether the account code is printed out or not by
the SMDR. If it is not printed out, it is shown in dots.
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[105] Account Codes
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 3, Area 02 – Bit 5,
Area 07 – Bit 14
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Customising the Buttons – Account Button
Charge Fee Management

Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
Operation References Operation – Making Calls

—User Manual Calling without Restrictions – Using an account code (Account Code
Entry)
Alert Indication
Description If the following situations occur, the pre-warning indication is
displayed on the proprietary telephone of Operator 1 in Day mode.
Memory: When the system finds the wrong system data, the
indication “System Data Err 1” is displayed.
Printer: When the paper of the printer for SMDR runs out or the
printer is out-of-service, the indication “Check Printer” is
displayed. Check the printer.
Connection*: When a system inter-connection error occurs and
system connection operation is interrupted, the indication
“System Link Down” is displayed. Connect the interface
between the systems and press the Reset Button on both systems.
Conditions None
3-4 Features *: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

3 Features A
No Programming required.
Feature Reference None
Operation References Not applicable.
Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice

Description This system offers two methods of Intercom Calling – Ring-Calling
and Voice-Calling. Ring-Calling informs the called party of an
incoming call with a ring tone, while the Voice-Calling uses the
calling party’s voice. The proprietary telephone user can select
tone or voice calling by station programming. If the user selects
Voice-Calling, the calling party can talk to the user immediately
after confirmation tone. The calling extension user is able to
change the calling method pre-selected once at a time by the called
extension by pressing “ ”; Ring-Calling can be switched to Voice-
Calling, and vice versa. This operation is available for both
proprietary and single line telephone users during calling.
Conditions Single line telephone users receive calls with Ring-Calling only.
Initial Settings – Intercom Alerting Assignment

Handsfree Answerback

—User Manual Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice)
Features 3-5
A 3 Features
Answering, Direct CO Line
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to answer an incoming call
by simply pressing the appropriate CO button without lifting the
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE / MONITOR button.
Conditions This feature permits the user to specify the desired line to be answered if
multiple incoming lines are ringing.
No programming required.

CO Line Connection Assignment
Operation References Operation – Receiving Calls

—User Manual Answering Calls
Automatic Adjust Time

Description The system synchronizes the time with the standard time when the
first outgoing call is made through ISDN line after three o'clock
each morning.
Conditions • If the Date and Time setting is programmed, after synchronizing the
time, the programmed time is valid until the first outgoing call is made
after the three o'clock of the next morning.
• In case of the system connection,* when one system synchronizes the
time by the made call through ISDN line, another system will adjust the
time with the time information.

3 Features A
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Description If the line is busy when a call is made, callback ringing will inform
the caller when the line becomes free.
Automatic Callback – Extension
When the caller answers the callback ringing, other extension’s
number is automatically dialled.
Automatic Callback – CO Line
When the caller answers the callback ringing, the line is
automatically selected to allow the user to make an outside call.
Conditions • If the callback ringing is not answered in four rings (within 10 seconds)
the callback is cancelled.
• More than one extension user can set this function to one extension or
CO line at the same time.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic callback busy cancel

—User Manual When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
– Reserving a busy line (Automatic Callback Busy)
Features 3-7
A 3 Features
Automatic Configuration†
Description The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension
number configuration information and the VPS automatically
creates mailboxes with this data (Quick Setup).
Conditions • The data is transmitted to the VPS on the lowest jack port.
• If two or more lines are connected with the VPS, the port(s) with lower
number(s) on the system need to be connected to one(s) with lower
number(s) on the VPS.
<Example>
Correct Way Incorrect Way
#6 #2 #6 #2
#5 #1 #5 #1
DSHS VPS DSHS VPS
Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer

Description When Operator 1 is busy and the outside call reaches the Operator
1 directly, the incoming call can be waited until the waiting queue
is over assigned number. When the incoming call is over assigned
number, the last call will be transferred to the Operator 2.
(Automatic Overflow)
Operator 1 can refer the waiting queue with the indicator of the
Hurry-Up button, and transfer the first waiting call to the pre-
assigned extension with the Hurry-Up button. (Hurry-Up Transfer)
Conditions • Automatic Overflow does not function in the following cases;

a) The waiting queue is set “0.”
b) Operator 2 is not set.
c) Operator 1 belongs to Station Hunting Group.
3-8 Features †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one
that supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
3 Features A
• Hurry-Up Transfer does not function in the following cases;
a) The waiting queue is set “0.”
b) Hurry-Up Button is not assigned.
c) Operator 1 belongs to Station Hunting Group.
[129] Operator Queue
Customising the Buttons – Hurry-Up Button

Operator
Operation References Operator Operation – System Control

—User Manual Forwarding a Waiting Call (Automatic Overflow / Hurry-Up Transfer)
Automatic Station Release

Description After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits
within a specified time period, the user will be disconnected from
the line after reorder tone is sent. To get a line again, the user must
go back on-hook and then off-hook.
Conditions This function works in the following cases:

When making a call
(1)The first digit has not been dialled within 10 seconds.
(2)After a digit is dialled, the next one is not dialled within five
seconds (Intercom call only).
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
Features 3-9
B 3 Features
Background Music (BGM)
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to listen to background music
from the monitor speaker on the telephone.
Conditions • It may be required to select a music source used for BGM by system
programming.
• For Music Source 1, it is possible to select the internal or external music
source by system programming.
• The music is interrupted while off-hooked.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,

Music on Hold
Operation References Operation – Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs

—User Manual Turning on the Background Music
Background Music (BGM) – External

Description Background music (BGM) can be broadcasted in your office
through external pagers. The BGM can be turned on and off by the
operator only.
Conditions • It is required to connect an external pager and an external music

source. The pager and the music source are user-supplied items. Up to
two pagers and up to two external music sources can be installed per
system.
• Each pager can be programmed to send BGM or not.
• For Music Source 1, it is possible to select the internal or external music
source by system programming.
• Priority of access to external pager is: (1)TAFAS; (2)Paging; (3)BGM.
Higher priorities will override BGM.
3-10 Features
3 Features B
[100] Flexible Numbering, Background music – external
[804] External Pager BGM


—User Manual Turning on the External Background Music
Budget Management
Description Limit the telephone usage to a pre-assigned amount. For example,
the limit may be the amount deposited during a hotel at check-in. If
the pre-assign limit is reached, the extension user cannot make
further calls until he/she receives authorization from the operator.
Conditions None
[010] Budget Management
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port

HOTEL APPLICATION
Features 3-11
B 3 Features
Busy Lamp Field
Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the DSS (Direct
Station Selection) buttons, each of which corresponds to a selected
extension, tell whether the corresponding extensions are idle, busy
or in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode.
Conditions • This function is available for DSS buttons on Consoles and for flexible
CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones.
• A DSS button indicator lights red if the corresponding extension is busy
or in DND mode.
• The DSS indicator on a proprietary telephone also informs you of
incoming calls except for the DIL 1:N and doorphone call to the
corresponding extensions. You can pick up calls by pressing the
corresponding flashing DSS buttons.
Customising the Buttons – Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button

Button, Direct Station Console
Selection (DSS)
Busy Station Signalling (BSS)

Description When attempting to call a busy extension, Busy Station Signalling
allows you to signal the user on the phone to answer your call. The
called extension user hears a Call Waiting tone and is able to
answer the call.
Conditions • This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call
Waiting. If it is activated, the caller will hear ringback tone.
• If the called party has been set to activate the Off-Hook Call
Announcement (OHCA) or Whisper OHCA function, the caller can
announce the call through the speaker or the handset.
• If none of three features, Call Waiting, OHCA or Whisper OHCA, is set
at the called party, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
3-12 Features
3 Features B
Feature References Section 3, Features

Call Waiting Whisper OHCA
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

– Sending a call waiting tone (Busy Station Signaling [BSS])
Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Description DSS button permits the proprietary telephone user one-touch access
to other extension users.
Conditions • A flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone can be assigned as a

DSS button using either system or station programming.
• DSS buttons are provided on Consoles with default setting. Changing
the setting is possible from the paired telephone using station
programming.
• Once a button is assigned as a DSS button, it provides Busy Lamp Field
(BLF) status.
• The mode of a DSS button on a Console / proprietary telephone can be
programmed to disconnect the CO line and calls the extension or hold
and transfer the call to the extension (One-Touch Transfer by DSS
Button).
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Customising the Buttons – Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button

Busy Lamp Field One-Touch Transfer by DSS
Console Button

—User Manual Basic Calling – Calling another extension
Operation – During a Conversation
Transferring a Call – Transferring to an extension
Features 3-13
B 3 Features
Button, Flexible
Description The use of Flexible Buttons is determined by either system or
station programming. The following three types of Flexible
Buttons are provided on proprietary telephones (PT) and Consoles:
• Flexible CO buttons (provided on PT only)
• Flexible DSS buttons (provided on Console only)
• Programmable Feature (PF) buttons
The table below shows all of the features which can be assigned to
Flexible Buttons.
Button CO DSS PF
Features to be assigned (PT) (DSS) (DSS)
Single-CO ✔
Group-CO ✔
Loop-CO ✔
Alert ✔
Hurry-Up ✔
Log-In / Log-Out*1 ✔
Call Forwarding from Hunting Group*1 ✔ ✔
Call Pickup Deny*1 ✔ ✔
Call Waiting*2 ✔ ✔
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)*1 ✔ ✔
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)*1 ✔ ✔
Direct Station Selection (DSS) ✔ ✔
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call (DND for DDI)*1 ✔ ✔
Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line*1 ✔ ✔
Live Call Screening† ✔ ✔
Live Call Screening Cancel† ✔ ✔
Message Waiting ✔ ✔
Night*1 ✔ ✔
Paging Deny*1 ✔ ✔
Paralleled Telephone Connection*1 ✔ ✔
Phantom Extension ✔ ✔
Pickup Dialling (Hot Line)*1 ✔ ✔
Two-Way Record† ✔ ✔
Two-Way Transfer† ✔ ✔
Account Code Entry ✔ ✔ ✔
Conference ✔ ✔ ✔
3-14 Features
3 Features B
Button CO DSS PF
Features to be assigned (PT) (DSS) (DSS)
FWD/DND ✔ ✔ ✔
One-Touch Dialling ✔ ✔ ✔
One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold ✔ ✔ ✔
Saved Number Redial ✔ ✔ ✔
Terminate ✔ ✔ ✔
Voice Mail Transfer ✔ ✔ ✔
In the table, “✔” indicates that the feature can be assigned to the button.
† :Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that
supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
*1 :The buttons which alternate the on / off setting of the corresponding feature.
*2 :Pressing this button changes the setting as follows:
Receiving Call Waiting tone → OHCA → Whisper OHCA → none of these
Conditions • A CO line can only appear on one Single-CO button of any given
telephone. A station can only appear on one DSS button of any given
telephone or Console.
• It is possible to have multiple appearances of the same Group-CO or
Loop-CO buttons on the same telephone. Incoming and outgoing calls on
the line are shown on the button in the following priority.
Single-CO > Group-CO > Loop-CO
Customising the Buttons

Buttons on Proprietary Telephones Console
Features 3-15
B 3 Features
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)
Description To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a group of CO lines
(CO line group) can be assigned to a CO button. The function is
referred to as Group-CO (G-CO). The G-CO button works in
conjunction with the DIL 1:N feature. Any incoming call from any
CO line in the CO line group arrives at the G-CO button. To make
an outside call, the user can access an idle CO line in the group by
simply pressing the dedicated G-CO button.
Conditions • No G-CO button is originally provided on a proprietary telephone (PT).
It is programmable on a CO button by either system or station
programming.
• It is needed to program the extension for receiving and / or originating
calls on CO lines.
• It is possible to assign the same CO line group to more than one G-CO
buttons on the same PT.
• If Least Cost Routing (LCR) is set, it is overridden by an outgoing call
made by pressing the G-CO button.
• It is possible to assign the same line to an S-CO button and to a G-CO
button.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be
selected on an extension–CO line basis.
• The digital PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each G-
CO button by system or station programming.
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Customising the Buttons – Group-CO (G-CO) Button
– To distinguish the ringing tones for each CO
button
Answering, Direct CO Line Line Access, Direct
CO Line Group Ringing, Delayed
LED Indication, CO Line Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Line Access, CO Line Group Buttons

—User Manual Basic Calling – Calling an external party
Operation – Receiving Calls
Answering Calls
3-16 Features
3 Features B
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Description All CO lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a
proprietary telephone (PT). The assigned button serves as a Loop-
CO (L-CO) button. An incoming call on any CO line arrives at the
L-CO, unless there are no S-CO or G-CO buttons associated with
the line or unless the button is already in use. To make an outside
call, the PT user can simply press the dedicated L-CO button.
Conditions • No L-CO button is originally provided on a PT. A flexible CO button

can be assigned as an L-CO button in either system or station
programming.
• It is possible to assign more than one L-CO button on a PT.
• Pressing the L-CO button provides the same operation as dialling the
automatic line access code. This results in Automatic Line Access or
Least Cost Routing (LCR), if programmed.
• The digital PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each L-
CO button by system or station programming.
Customising the Buttons – Loop-CO (L-CO) Button
button

Answering, Direct CO Line Line Access, Direct
LED Indication, CO Line Ringing, Delayed
Line Access, Automatic Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Buttons

Answering Calls
Features 3-17
B 3 Features
Button, Single-CO (S-CO)
Description A Single-CO (S-CO) button is a CO line access button. This
allows the proprietary telephone user to access a specific line by
pressing an S-CO button. An incoming call can be directed to an S-
CO button.
Conditions • The default setting for CO buttons is changeable. (Flexible CO

Button)
• An S-CO button provides CO line status.
• It is possible to assign one CO line to both an S-CO and a G-CO button.
• If Least Cost Routing (LCR) is set, it is overridden by an outgoing call
made by pressing the S-CO button.
• Incoming calls appear on the proprietary telephone, when an extension
is assigned as the incoming call destination and an S-CO, G-CO and/or
L-CO button is assigned.
• The digital PT user can choose a desired ringing tone type for the S-CO
button by system or station programming.
Customising the Buttons – Single-CO (S-CO) Button
button

Answering, Direct CO Line Line Access, Individual
LED Indication, CO Line Ringing, Delayed
Line Access, Direct Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Buttons

Answering Calls
3-18 Features
3 Features B
Buttons on Proprietary Telephones
Description Proprietary telephones are provided with the feature / line access
buttons listed below:
KX-T Proprietary Telephones:

Buttons 7020 7050 7130 7220 7230 7235 7250 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436
AUTO ANSWER / MUTE † ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
AUTO DIAL / STORE † ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔! ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
CO † * ✔ (12) ✔ (12) ✔ (12) ✔ (24) ✔ (24) ✔ (12) ✔ (6) ✔ (12) ✔ (24) ✔ (12) ✔ (24) ✔ (24)
CONF † ✔ ✔! ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
FLASH / RCL ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Function ✔ (10) ✔ (10)
FWD / DND † ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
HOLD ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
INTERCOM † ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Jog Dial ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
MESSAGE † ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
MODE ✔
MONITOR ✔† ✔
PAUSE ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
PF (Programmable Feature) ✔ (4) ✔ (4) ✔ (12)
PROGRAM ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
RECALL ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
REDIAL ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
SAVE ✔
SELECT ✔
SHIFT † ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Soft ✔ (3) ✔ (3) ✔ (3) ✔ (3)
SP-PHONE † ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
TRANSFER ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
VOLUME ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ : The button is provided on the designated telephones.

† : The button is provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode).
* : The buttons which can be changed to function as a feature button are called flexible buttons.
! : The button is provided without an LED.
(x) : Shows the number of buttons only if multiple buttons are provided.
The functions of the listed buttons are described below:

AUTO ANSWER / MUTE: This dual function button is used for
extension auto-answer and microphone mute during a conversation.
AUTO DIAL / STORE: Used for System Speed Dialling and
storing program changes.
Features 3-19
B 3 Features
CO (Central Office line): Can make or receive an outside call or
can be re-assigned to a different CO or to various feature buttons.
CONF (Conference): Used to establish a three-party conference.
FLASH/RCL: Allows you to disconnect the current call and
originate another call without hanging up (Recall). Sends a
Register Recall signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to access
their features (External Feature Access).
Function: Used to perform the displayed function / operation.
FWD / DND (Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb): Used to
program Call Forwarding, set Do Not Disturb.
HOLD: Used to place a call on hold.
INTERCOM: Used to make or receive intercom calls.
Jog Dial: Used to adjust the ringer, speaker, handset and headset
volume and the display contrast. With the KX-T7431, KX-T7433
and KX-T7436, it can also be used to select data from the Call
Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display.
MESSAGE: Used to send a message or display current message.
MODE: Used to shift the display in order to access various
features.
MONITOR: Used for handsfree operation.
PAUSE: Inserts a pause in a speed dial number. With an analogue
proprietary telephone, it is used as the PROGRAM button.
PF (Programmable Feature): This flexible button can be
programmed to be a One-Touch Dialling, FWD / DND, SAVE,
Account, CONF (Conference) or Voice Mail Transfer button, as
desired.
PROGRAM: Used to enter / exit the Programming mode. With
the KX-T7220 and KX-T7250, it can also be used as the PAUSE
button.
RECALL: Allows you to disconnect the current call and originate
another call without hanging up (Recall). Sends a Register Recall
signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to access their features
(External Feature Access).
REDIAL: Used for Last Number or Automatic Redial.
SAVE: Used to store a dialled telephone number for Saved
Number Redial.
SELECT: Used to select the displayed function or to call for the
displayed phone number.
SHIFT: Used to access the second level of Soft button function.
Soft: Pressing a Soft button performs the function / operation
appearing on the bottom line of the display.
3-20 Features
3 Features B
SP-PHONE (Speakerphone): Used for handsfree operation. Pressing the
button causes the telephone to switch between handset and handsfree
operation.
TRANSFER: Transfers a call to another extension or external destination.
VOLUME: Used to adjust the ringer, speaker, handset and headset volume
and the display contrast.
Conditions • Certain buttons are equipped with light indicators (LED’s) to show line or
feature status.
• CO buttons can be classified according to the following three types:
Single-CO (S-CO) button / Group-CO (G-CO) button / Loop-CO (L- CO) button
Operation References Refer to respective operating instructions.

—User Manual
Features 3-21
C 3 Features
Caller ID
Description Provides the calling party’s phone number and/or name of the
called party’s display proprietary telephone before the called party
answers the outside call. If the number and/or name are stored in
the list of the System Speed Dialling, the number and/or name are
provided. When neither number nor name is stored in the list, the
number sent from ISDN is displayed. This feature is one of the
ISDN services.
Conditions • Up to 500 entries of number and name can be stored in the list of the
System Speed Dialling by System Programming.
• If the calling party restricts the presentation of calling line
identification, neither the phone number nor the name is displayed
(Calling Line Identification Restriction).
• The name is not displayed, when the corresponding stored number
includes the Flash and Pause, — (hyphen) or Secret button, following
to the line access code and — (hyphen).
• Caller ID will override CO line name display on the extension except
the operator extension. The display can be alternated between Caller ID
and CO line name.
• The analog proprietary telephone will show either the name or the
number. To alternate the display, press key.
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set

Calling / Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR / COLR)
3-22 Features
3 Features C
CALL FORWARDING FEATURES – SUMMARY
Description Call forwarding features enable you to have your calls forwarded to
a specified destination. You may specify the circumstances under
which your calls are forwarded. The following Call Forwarding
features are available:
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – Follow Me
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Call Forwarding – to CO Line
Call Forwarding – by ISDN Line
Call Forwarding – from Hunting Group
Assignable forwarding destinations are: (1) extension, (2) ISDN

extension, (3) Hunting Group.
There can be up to four stages of Call Forwarding. The fifth stage
will be disregarded. If disregarded, the call will be treated
according to the condition of the fourth destination.
It is only possible to call an original extension or Hunting Group
from the destination extension or Hunting Group immediately
before it (Boss Secretary function).
<Example> Call
Hunting Group 1
Forward
Original set
extension
Conditions • Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE
button indicator is lit on the extension which was originally called.
• Setting this function cancels any other Call Forwarding functions.
• DIL 1:N calls can only be forwarded one stage.
• If the final destination of the Call Forwarding is Voice Processing
System, the mailbox number of the extension which was originally
called is automatically sent (Follow On ID), even if it is forwarded
more than one stage.
• The call will not return to the calling extension by the Call Forwarding
function.
FWD
<Example>
FWD FWD
Call
A B C D

Doorphone call forwarding to CO Line
Features 3-23
C 3 Features
Description This feature is used when you want all your calls to be
automatically re-directed to another extension.
Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are:

Outside calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; DIL 1:N; Intercept Routing
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / Do not disturb
Customising the Buttons – FWD/DND Button

—User Manual Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding)

Description A call directed to your extension is forwarded to another extension
if your telephone is busy.
Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are:

[005] Flexible Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / Do not disturb

3-24 Features
3 Features C
Description Your calls are forwarded to another extension if your extension is
busy or you do not answer the call in a pre-determined time.
Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are:

• This function operates the same way as Call Forwarding – Busy and
Call Forwarding – No Answer.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time

Call Forwarding – Busy Call Forwarding – No Answer


Description If you forget to set Call Forwarding – All Calls before you leave
your desk, this allows you to set the same function from the
destination extension.
Conditions • Same as the conditions of Call Forwarding – All Calls.

• It is programmable to enable or disable this feature on a Class of
Service basis.
[991] COS Additional Information, Bit 5

Features 3-25
C 3 Features

Description Calls to your extension are forwarded to another extension if you
do not answer the call in a pre-determined time.

• This function operates if an incoming call is not answered in a specific
period of time. Therefore, this function also applies if your extension is
busy and cannot answer the incoming call within the time.

3-26 Features
3 Features C
Description Calls directed to your extension will be sent to an external
destination. The outside telephone number must be pre-
programmed.

Outside calls – DIL 1:1; DDI (ISDN Service only)
A call between two external parties can be established by this feature
only when both outside lines are ISDN S0 lines.
• The forwarding extension’s Toll Restriction, Least Cost Routing and
Account Code Entry requirements still apply.
• Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to
perform the function.
• If an extension is limited by the program [502] “Extension-to-CO Line
Call Duration Limit” according to its Class of Service, the extension is
unable to forward an outside call to a CO line.
• If a call between an extension and an outside party is established by this
feature, the duration of the call period can be restricted depending on
the setting of a system timer.
[205] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
[502] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line

Limited Call Duration

Features 3-27
C 3 Features
Call Forwarding – by ISDN Line
Description The call forwarding service provided by ISDN can be assigned on a
multiple subscriber number (MSN) basis. The following features
are available.
• Call Forwarding – Unconditional (CFU)
All incoming calls to an extension are transferred by the ISDN
line.
• Call Forwarding – Busy (CFB)
An incoming call to an extension is transferred by the ISDN line
when the line is busy.
• Call Forwarding – No Reply (CFNR)
An incoming call to an extension is transferred by the ISDN line
when the extension does not answer it before a pre-assigned time.
[518] CFU / CFB / CFNR Assignment


Description Pre-assigned extension users can forward calls arriving at any
Hunting Group or calls arriving just at your own Hunting Group.
The destination can be another Hunting Group or a specific
extension.

Outside calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; MSN; Intercept Routing
• Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to
perform this function.
• This feature does not work if the Station Hunting type of the forwarding
Hunting Group is Voice Mail (VM) or Automated Attendant (AA).
3-28 Features
3 Features C
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding from hunting group
[520] Call Forwarding from Hunting Group
[990] System Additional Information, Area 06 – Bit 10 and 11.
Customising the Buttons – Call Forwarding from Hunting Group Button

Station Hunting

—User Manual Forwarding Calls from a Receiving Group (Call Forwarding – from
Hunting Group)
Call Hold – CO Line

Description Allows the extension user to put an outside call on hold. The held
call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any other
extension.
Conditions • With a single line telephone, the user can hold only one call whether it
is an extension or outside call.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes, it
is automatically disconnected.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold
[200] Hold Recall Time

Hold Recall Music on Hold
Operation References Operation – During a Conversation

—User Manual Holding a Call – Holding (regular)
Features 3-29
C 3 Features
Call Hold – Intercom
Description This is used to place an intercom call on hold. The held call can be
retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension.
Conditions • Only one intercom call can be placed on hold in a telephone at a time
(up to 10 calls in the system – Call Park). With a proprietary telephone,
outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same
time. With a single line telephone, either one outside or intercom call
can be held.
results.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold

Call Park Music on Hold
Hold Recall

Call Hold, Exclusive – CO Line

Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to prevent any other
extension users from retrieving a held outside call. Only the user
who held it can retrieve the call.
Conditions • If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results. After Hold Recall results, the held call can be retrieved from
any other extension.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes, it
is automatically disconnected.
3-30 Features
3 Features C

—User Manual Holding a Call – Denying other people the possibility of retrieving your
held calls (Exclusive Call Hold)
Call Hold, Exclusive – Intercom

Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to prevent any other
extension users from retrieving a held intercom call. Only the user
who held it can retrieve the call.
Conditions • Only one intercom call can be placed on Call Hold or Exclusive Call
Hold at a time.
results. After Hold Recall results, the held call can be retrieved from
any other extension.


—User Manual Holding a Call – Denying other people the possibility of retrieving your
held calls (Exclusive Call Hold)
Features 3-31
C 3 Features
Call Hold Retrieve – CO Line
Description Allows the extension user to retrieve a specified outside call that
has been placed on hold by another extension.
Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the
feature number. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold retrieve – CO line
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 6, Area 06 – Bit 6

Call Hold – CO Line

Call Hold Retrieve – Intercom

Description Allows the extension user to retrieve a call that has been placed on
hold by another extension.
Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the
feature number. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold retrieve – intercom

Call Hold – Intercom

3-32 Features
3 Features C
Calling / Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP / COLP)
Description Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) enables showing
the calling party’s number on the display of the called party’s
telephone when a call is received.
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) enables
showing the called party’s number on the display of the calling
party’s telephone when the called party answers a call.
These features are one of ISDN’s services.
To use the CLIP or COLP service, number assignments are required

as follows:
• CLIP/COLP number for each outside line
• CLIP/COLP number for each extension
Conditions • The CLIP service for outgoing outside calls can be restricted by System
Programming (CLIR: Calling Line Identification Restriction).
• The COLP service for incoming outside calls can be restricted by
System Programming (COLR: Connected Line Identification
Restriction).
• The number actually sent to the calling or called party may be different
from the system programmed number. It depends on the contract with
your ISDN supplier.
• It is possible to send the desired CLIP number for one time even if the
CLIP number is not assigned.
[100] Flexible Numbering, CLIP / COLP
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
[623] CLIP/COLP Number Assignment for Extension
[624] CLIP/COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension
[632] CLIP/COLP Number Assignment for KX-TD286 Extension

Caller ID

—User Manual Displaying Your Number on the Called Party and Calling Party’s
Telephone (Calling / Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP /
COLP])
Features 3-33
C 3 Features
Description Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) restricts showing the
calling party’s number on the display of the called party’s telephone
when a call is received.
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) restricts
showing the called party’s number on the display of the calling
party’s telephone when the called party answers a call.
These features are one of ISDN’s services.
Conditions • If the displaying is enabled, the called party can check the calling
party’s number before the called party answers it (CLIP: Calling Line
Identification Presentation, case by case).
• If the displaying is enabled, the calling party can check the the called
party’s number when the called party answers it (COLP: Connected
Line Identification Presentation).
[100] Flexible Numbering, CLIR, COLR
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
Customising the Buttons – CLIR Button, COLR Button

Caller ID

—User Manual Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s
Telephone (Calling Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])
Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Calling Party’s
Telephone (Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR])
3-34 Features
3 Features C
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Description The Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal is an on-hook indication
(disconnect signal) sent from the CO line when the telephone is
hung up at the other end. To support efficient utilization of CO
lines, the system monitors their state and when CPC Signal is
detected from a line, the system disconnects the line and informs
the extension with reorder tone.
Conditions • CPC Signal Detection is enabled or disabled on incoming and outgoing

outside calls by system programming.
• Generally CPC Signal Detection works on incoming outside calls, and
does not work on outgoing outside calls (except once they are placed on
Call Hold, Exclusive Call Hold or Consultation Hold). In this case, if
the extension user remains off-hook after the completion of an outgoing
outside call, the system does not release all the switches used to
establish the connection, and a CO line connected will continue to be
seized. To prevent this, it is administrable to make CPC Signal
Detection work on outgoing outside calls. (Note: Some Central Offices
may send CPC-like signals during the dialling sequence and an attempt
to make a call may be terminated. If your CO does not send such
signals, it is recommended to make CPC Signal Detection work on
outgoing outside calls.)
• If your Central Office does not send CPC-like signals, it is also
effective to limit the dialled numbers during a call by the program [991]
“COS Additional Information” on a Class of Service basis to prevent
unauthorized calls.
• If CPC Signal is detected during a Conference call, the line is
disconnected and the remaining two parties maintain the call.
[405] CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set
[415] CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set
[991] COS Additional Information, Bits 4, 3, 2, 1
Features 3-35
C 3 Features
Call Log, Incoming
Description Provides the external calling party’s information on the display
proprietary telephone when the extension user does not answer the
call. The phone number and name can be displayed when the
number and the name are stored in list of System Speed Dialling.
The stored number or modified number, if needed can be used to
call back the party. This feature is available, if the Caller ID or
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) service is obtained
from the Central Office.
The displayed information are follows;
a) The party’s phone number and name
b) The day and time of the call was made
c) The calling attempt time of the same person
d) The receiving CO line number and name
Conditions • Up to 15 calls can be stored on an extension basis. It is programmable

to assign whether the 16th call will be unacceptable or the oldest call is
replaced by the newest call that is received after 15 calls are stored.
• If the LED indicator of the SHIFT button is red, the user finds that there
were some unanswered call.
• This feature is only available for KX-T7533, KX-T7536, KX-T7230
and KX-T7235.
• It is possible to prevent the other user from referring the call log on the
extension. The operator can also set or cancel the prevention remotely
(Call Log Lock Control).
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call log, incoming / Incoming Call log lock
control

CO Incoming Call Information Display
Operation References Operation – Using the Display Proprietary Telephone

—User Manual Calling Using the Call Log (Incoming Call Log)
Recording a Call Log
Denying Other People the Possibility of Seeing Your Call Log
(Incoming Call Log Lock)
Operator Operation – Extension Control
Changing the Settings – Incoming Call Log Lock Control
3-36 Features
3 Features C
Call Park
Description Allows the extension user to place a held call into a system parking
area. This releases the user from the parked call to perform other
operations. The parked call can be retrieved from any other
extension user.
Conditions • The system contains 10 parking areas, each of which has its own call
park number. Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time in the
system. Under the System Connection,* all users may access the same
call parking area. The number of holding slots remains at 10.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within Transfer Recall Timer period,
Transfer Recall starts to the operator or the extension that parked the
call.
• If Call Park Recall is not retrieved in 30 minutes, it is automatically
disconnected.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the parked call is retrieved.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call park / call park retrieve
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bits 1 and 6

—User Manual Holding a Call – Holding in a system parking zone (Call Park)
Features 3-37
C 3 Features
Call Pickup, CO Line
Description Allows any extension user to answer an incoming outside call that
is ringing at another’s telephone.
Conditions • Call Pickup starts with the lowest CO number.

• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, CO line

—User Manual Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Call Pickup, Directed

Description Allows any extension user to answer a call ringing at any other
extension.
Conditions • Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not
programmed to answer doorphone calls.
• You can pick up a call by pressing a flashing DSS button assigned on a
proprietary telephone.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, directed

3-38 Features
3 Features C
Call Pickup, Group
Description Allows the extension user to answer a call that is ringing at another
telephone, if the call is ringing within the user’s extension group.
Conditions • The user can pick up an incoming outside, intercom, or doorphone call.
• The priority of Group Call Pickup is as follows:
Outside call > Transferred call > Extension call > Doorphone call
• Group Call Pickup starts with the lowest jack number.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, group

Call Pickup Deny

Description Allows the user to prohibit other extensions from picking up calls
ringing at his / her extension by using the call pickup features.
Conditions Distinctive dial tone is sent to the user on the extension with this feature
when the user goes off-hook.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup deny
Customising the Buttons – Call Pickup Deny Button

Call Pickup, CO Line Call Pickup, Group
Call Pickup, Directed

—User Manual Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking up Your Calls
(Call Pickup Deny)
Features 3-39
C 3 Features
Call Splitting
Description Allows the extension user to alternate between two other parties.
Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a
conversation with the other party.
Conditions Call Splitting is impossible during Doorphone Call or Paging.

—User Manual Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
CALL TRANSFER FEATURES – SUMMARY

Description Call Transfer features allow the user to transfer a call to another
party. This operation can be screened or unscreened. Screened call
transfer is used when you want to announce the call to the other
party before completing the transfer. Unscreened call transfer
immediately releases the caller to the called party. An intercom or
an outside call can be transferred to an extension or to an outside
party by:
Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line
Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension
Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension
3-40 Features
3 Features C
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to voice-announce to the
external party and transfer the intercom call.
Conditions Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to
perform it.
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line

Hold Recall
Operation Reference Operation – During a Conversation

—User Manual Transferring a Call – Transferring to an external party
Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension

Description Allows the extension user to voice-announce to the extension and
transfer the call.
Conditions None

—User Manual Transferring a Call – Transferring to an extension
Features 3-41
C 3 Features
Description Allows the user to transfer an intercom or outside call to directly
transfer to an extension party. After dialling the destination
extension, the user replaces the handset while hearing ringback
tone.
Conditions • If the destination party does not answer within the transfer recall time,
the call will return to the user or Operator 1. You can select the desired
one by system programming.
• This function is possible when the destination is sending ringback or
busy tone. If the destination is busy, Camp-On Transfer occurs.
• The ringing signal pattern follows the regular ringing pattern depending
on the party being transferred: outside or extension call ringing.
• It is possible for any extension user to transfer a call to the modem for
remote maintenance.
• If music on hold is enabled, music is sent to the caller while being
transferred. It is system-programmable whether to send ringback tone
or music on hold to the caller by program [990], Area 01 – bit 1.

3-42 Features
3 Features C
Call Waiting
Description While in conversation, a call waiting tone informs the user of
another incoming call that is waiting. He or she can answer the
second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold.
Call waiting tone can be enabled or disabled by dialling the
appropriate feature number.
Conditions • The call waiting tone is generated when an outside call or a doorphone
call comes in or when an extension caller executes Busy Station
Signalling.
• Setting Data Line Security cancels Call Waiting which has been turned
on.
• For proprietary telephone users, two types of call waiting tone are
provided to prevent them from missing the tone as shown below:
A proprietary telephone user can select the desired type by station
programming.
15 s
Tone 1
5s
Intercom
Tone 2
CO
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call waiting / OHCA / whisper OHCA
Initial Settings – Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Customising the Buttons – Call Waiting Button

Busy Station Signaling (BSS)

—User Manual Receiving a Call Waiting (Call Waiting / Off-Hook Call Announcement
[OHCA] / Whisper OHCA)
Answering a Call Waiting
Features 3-43
C 3 Features
Description Allows pre-assigned display telephone users to see charges and
print out the charges. Charges are displayed per extension, CO line,
Account Code, or the total of each can be referred to. There are
two display formats – Pulse or Pound.
Conditions • System programming determines the extensions that can see charges.
• An identification code (ID code), set by system programming, is
required to see charges.
• The first display format – Pulse or Pound – is selected by system
programming. This can be switched manually at each extension.
• Exchange rate between pulse counter and pounds is changeable by
system programming.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by system
programming.
• If the amount exceeds the maximum displayable charge, then only the
highest possible charge will be displayed (e.g. 99999.99£)
[015] Charge Rate Fractional Point Assignment
[016] Charge Rate Assignment
[117] Charge Display Selection
[118] Charge Fee Reference Extension Assignment
[119] Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set
[125] Assignment of Denomination
Operation References Station Programming

—User Manual Charge Fee Management
3-44 Features
3 Features C
Class of Service (COS)
Description COS is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of
extensions. Each extension is assigned a primary and a secondary
COS numbers. Eight Classes of Service are available.
Conditions • The operator can switch the extension’s COS between a primary and a
secondary.
• The programmable items are shown below:
(1) Forwards a call to an outside party
(2) Transfers a call to an outside party
(3) Overrides Do Not Disturb of the called extension
(4) Account Code Entry operation – verified - all calls / verified -
toll restriction override / option
(5) Outgoing call restriction level (Day mode / Night mode) – 1
through 8
(6) Restriction of outside call duration
(7) The number of permitted dialling digits during an outside call
(8) Call Forwarding – Follow Me
(9) System speed dialling call restriction level (Day mode / Night
mode)
(10) Switches the Day/Night service
(11) Unlocks the door opener
(12) Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call
(13) Connected Line Identification Restriction
(14) Calling Line Identification Restriction
(15) Call Forwarding – Unconditional (CFU) / Busy (CFB) / No
Reply (CFNR)
(16) Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
(17) The ability to set Call Forwarding – from Hunting Group
(18) The ability to set Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling
— Day / Night
[511] Door Opener Access
[513] Night Service Access
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call
Features 3-45
C 3 Features
[518] CFU / CFB / CFNR Assignment
[519] Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
[520] Call Forwarding from Hunting Group
[521] Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line
[601] Class of Service
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[991] COS Additional Information
Operation References Operator Operation – Extension Control

—User Manual Assigning Level of Service

Description Provides the display proprietary telephone user with pre-assigned
information if an incoming outside call is received.
You can select one of the following by system programming.
• The caller’s telephone number and name — available for an

ISDN line provided with the CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation) feature.
• The CO line number and CO line name — this information is
useful in the following case:
When several divisions or companies are connected to one system
and they have their own CO lines, a user can check the called
party by the LCD before answering the call if each division's or
company's name is assigned to a CO line.
• DDI number and Name of the called party — available for
incoming DDI calls only.
The initial display on the LCD of the called extension is as follows:
Called
to Extension Phantom Hunting Group
Type including Operator Extension
Selected Caller / No incoming call No incoming call is
DIL 1:N
CO line / DDI is received. received.
Selected Caller / Selected Caller / DDI number of hunting
DIL 1:1
CO line / DDI CO line / DDI group and group name
Selected Caller / Selected Caller / DDI number of hunting
DDI
CO line / DDI CO line / DDI group and group name
3-46 Features
3 Features C
Conditions • It is required to name CO lines and extensions by system programming.
• With the CLIP feature, the ISDN line informs the system of the caller’s
telephone number. To display the name, the system compares the
informed number with the System Speed Dialling Numbers stored in
program [001] and if a match is found, determines the caller’s name by
using the System Speed Dialling Names stored in program [002].
• The display DPT (KX-T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7433 or KX-T7436)
user can record the call information received by the CLIP feature (Call
Log, Incoming feature).
• If the assigned information cannot be displayed, it will be shown
according to the following priority:
Caller →CO Line →DDI
2.4.2 CO Line Connection
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[421] CO Line Name Assignment
[622] Incoming Call Display

Call Log, Incoming
Features 3-47
C 3 Features
Description This allows you to specify the CO lines connected to your system
to prevent an extension user from originating an outside call by
selecting a line which is not connected. An idle line is selected
from the connected ones when an extension user makes an
Automatic Line Access.
Conditions If the user tries to make a call with a disconnected line, reorder tone
sounds to indicate that the line is out of use.
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing

Description Allows you to assign the CO line an extension user can use for
outgoing calls. This feature is useful to prevent unauthorized toll
calls.
Conditions • When an extension user tries to make an outside call on a disallowed

CO line, reorder tone is sent to indicate that the user cannot use the CO
line.
• Day and Night Service are individually programmed. (Night Service)
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night for
ISDN Extension
3-48 Features
3 Features C
CO Line Group
Description CO lines can be grouped into up to eight CO line groups. This
allows extensions to call outside parties without designating a
specific CO line, since a CO line is automatically selected from the
designated CO line group. All CO lines belonging to a CO line
group follow the assignment determined for that CO line group. A
list of assignments for each CO line group is shown below:
• The destination of Intercept Routing
• Disconnect Time
• Register Recall Signal Time
• Host PBX Access Code
• Pause Time (used in Speed Dialling and Recall)
Conditions • Each CO line can only belong to one CO line group.

• CO lines in a CO line group are selected uniformly if all lines belong to
the same system.
• If System Connection* is employed, a CO line group can include CO
lines in both systems. In this case, a CO line is first selected from the
user’s system. If all lines in the user’s system are in use, a line in the
other system is selected.
[100] Flexible Numbering, CO line group line access
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
[412] Pause Time
[413] Register Recall Signal Time
[414] Disconnect Time
*: Available for KX-TD1232 only. Features 3-49

C 3 Features
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
Description Allows the extension users to set the telephone to receive callback
ringing when a busy called party on an ISDN line becomes free. A
special dial tone informs the caller that the called party is busy.
When the caller answers the callback ringing, other party’s number
is automatically dialled.
This feature is one of ISDN’s services and its availability depends
on the service of your telephone company.
This feature is in accordance with the ETS 300 359.
(ETS: European Telecommunication Standard)
Conditions • This feature is enabled or disabled by System Programming.

• An extension can set only one CCBS at a time.
• A proprietary telephone (PT), single line telephone (SLT) and portable
station (PS) can set the CCBS to a busy party.
• The CCBS that has been set by an outside party works only if the called
busy extension is a PT or SLT and the call arrives via DIL 1:1, DDI 1:1
and MSN 1:1.
• If the callback ringing is not answered in four rings (within 10 seconds)
the callback is cancelled.
• The callback rings even if the extension has set the Call Forwarding or
Do Not Disturb (DND).
• The caller can use the telephone before the callback rings. The setting
is cancelled only in the following conditions.
– By the cancelling operation.
– If there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes.
– If the system power is off. / If you reset the system.
• This feature does not work if the extension has set Data Line Security.
• The time the system waits before sending a CCBS signal while hearing
a special dial tone is programmable.
• To activate this feature, use the following software version of the ISDN
Card or Unit.
ISDN Card / Unit Type Software Version
KX-TD280 / KX-TD281 / P071V / P072V or after
KX-TD282
KX-TD286 P831H / P832H or after
KX-TD290 P851F / P852F or after
3-50 Features
3 Features C
[100] Flexible Numbering, CCBS cancel
[153] Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

Dial Tone, Distinctive

– Completing a call to a busy party on an ISDN line (Completion of Calls
to Busy Subscriber [CCBS])
Conference
Description The system supports three-party conference calls, including outside
or inside parties. During a two-party conversation, the extension
user can add a third party to their conversation, thereby establishing
a conference.
Conditions • Possible conference combinations are: 1-inside and 2-outside; 2-inside

and 1-outside; and 3-inside.
• Up to six conference calls are allowed simultaneously.
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a
confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
• The third party must have a CO button which is common to the CO line
in use by the original parties.
Customising the Buttons – Conference (CONF) Button

—User Manual Three-party Conversation
Features 3-51
C 3 Features
Confirmation Tone
Description At the end of many different functions the system confirms the
success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the
extension user through the speaker of the telephone.
Confirmation tone 1:
(a) Indicates that the new setting differs from the previous setting.
(b) Set or cancel the Electronic Station Lockout.
1s
(a) Indicates that the new setting is identical to the previous setting.
(b) In addition, sent when various features are successfully
performed or accessed. (e.g. Call Hold; Automatic Callback Busy)
(c) Sent when accessing external paging equipment. (e.g. Paging –
All; Paging – External) Confirmation tone from external pagers
can be enabled or disabled.
1s
Sent when a conversation is established just after dialling.
For example, when accessing the following features by the feature
numbers:
• Call Park Retrieve
• Call Pickup
• Hold Retrieve
• Paging / Paging Answer
• TAFAS Answer
This tone can be eliminated by system programming so that the
user can start talking instantly.
1s
3-52 Features
3 Features C
Sent when moving from a two-party call to a three-party call, and
vice versa. (These are caused by Conference.) It is possible to
eliminate this tone by system programming.
1s
Conditions Confirmation Tone 1 and 2 are provided to reconfirm the assigned

feature.
Features 3-53
C 3 Features
Console
Description The Direct Station Selection (DSS) or Attendant Console provides direct
access to extensions and features and busy lamp display.
The Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone
(PT). System Programming assigns the jack numbers of the Console and
its associated PT.
Up to four consoles for the KX-TD816 and up to eight consoles for the
KX-TD1232 can be installed. System Connection* provides for 16
consoles. The paired telephone user can carry out the following
operations using the Console:
• Direct access to an extension (Direct Station Selection)
• Quick access to an outside party (One-Touch Dialling)
• Easy transfer of an outside call to an extension
(The programmable One-Touch Transfer feature provides
simplified operation.)
• Quick access to a system feature
The above functions are activated simply by pressing buttons on the
console which were pre-programmed as function buttons.
Consoles are provided with the following buttons listed below:
KX-T Consoles:
Buttons 7040 7240 7440 7441
DSS ✔ (32) ✔ (32) ✔ (64) ✔ (48)
PF (Programmable Feature) ✔ (16) ✔ (16)
ANSWER ✔
RELEASE ✔
✔ : The button is provided on the designated telephones.

(x) : Shows the number of buttons only if multiple buttons are provided.
The functions of the listed buttons are described below:

DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons: Used to access extensions.
Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension. Pressing a
button allows the user to call the corresponding extension. Every button
is provided with an indicator (Busy Lamp Field), which shows the current
state of the corresponding extension as shown in the Table below:
Light State of extension

Off Idle
On Busy / DND
Busy Lamp Field Table

3 Features C
To meet the user’s various needs, DSS buttons can be changed to the
other function buttons.
PF (Programmable Feature) buttons printed as F1 through F16:
These buttons are provided with no default setting. The paired telephone
user can program the buttons for the other function buttons.
ANSWER button: Used to answer an incoming call to the paired
telephone.
RELEASE button: Used to disconnect the line during or after a
conversation or to complete a Call Transfer.
Conditions • Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired
telephone using Station Programming or Programming with Personal
Computer. System Programming with a Proprietary Telephone is not
available.
• If the extension number assigned to a DSS button is changed to another
number, the DSS button automatically follows the new number. (Re-
programming is not necessary.)
• During System Connection,* Consoles must be paired with telephones
in the same system.
• If a port connected to a Console is programmed for XDP jack, a single
line telephone can be connected to the port in parallel.
• To use the KX-T7240 or KX-T7040 DSS Console with this system:
Take care that the button numberings are opposite of the KX-T7440 and
KX-T7441. The default settings of the DSS buttons are the same as that
of KX-T7441.
Section 2, Installation
[007] Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
[600] Extra Device Port
Station Programming ......................................................User Manual

Button, Flexible One-Touch Transfer by DSS
EXtra Device Port (XDP) Button

Transferring a Call – Transferring to an extension
Operator Operation – System Control
Using the ANSWER / RELEASE Button

C 3 Features
Consultation Hold
Description Allows the extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to
transfer it or make a Conference call or make Call Splitting. The
held call cannot be retrieved from other extensions.
Conditions • With a proprietary telephone, Consultation Hold is established by

pressing TRANSFER or CONF button. With a single line telephone, it
is established by pressing the Register Recall button.
• With a single line telephone, the user can hold a call only to transfer it.
• Doorphone calls and paging calls cannot be placed on Consultation
Hold.
• A new incoming call will not arise at the extension which is keeping a
call on Consultation Hold. The extension is regarded as busy.
• If a calling party is placed on hold, music is sent to the party, if
available (Music on Hold).
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Transfer
Recall starts.
• If an outside call is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes, it is
automatically disconnected.

Call Splitting Call Transfer, Unscreened
Call Transfer, Screened – to Conference
CO Line Music on Hold
Call Transfer, Screened – to
Extension
3-56 Features
3 Features D
Data Line Security
Description Data Line Security is a function that can be set by system
programming. Once set, communication between the extension
and the other end is protected from signal intrusions such as Call
Waiting and Hold Recall. Data equipment or a facsimile may be
connected to an extension jack so that the user can perform data
communications. During the communication, Data Line Security
maintains secure data transmission against tones or barging in from
other extensions.
Conditions • If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security, it applies
to the both extensions.
• The Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA) feature is not available for
incoming calls to the extensions to which the Data Line Security feature
is assigned.
[612] Data Line Security
Dial Tone, Distinctive

Description Four types of dial tone patterns are available to give some
information about features enabled on the telephone set.
Dial tone 1: Normal dial tone. None of the features listed below
are enabled.
1s
Dial tone 2: Sounds when any one of the features below are set.
Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones only)
Call Forwarding
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting
Features 3-57
D 3 Features
Data Line Security
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Electronic Station Lockout
Pickup Dialling
Timed Reminder
1s
Dial tone 3: Sounds when performing Account Code Entry or

Completing Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS). Also sounds when
answering Timed Reminder call.
1s
Dial tone 4: Sounds when messages are waiting for the extension.
1s
Conditions None
Dial Type Selection

Description Allows you to select the desired dialling mode for each CO line
regardless of the type of extension originating the call (pulse or
tone).
There are three dialling modes available:
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) Mode
The dialling signal from an extension, either in tone or pulse,
is converted to tone dialling. DTMF signals are transmitted
to the CO line.
3-58 Features
3 Features D
Pulse Dial (Rotary) Mode
The dialling signal from an extension, either in tone or pulse,
is converted to pulse dialling. Pulse signals are transmitted to
the CO line.
Call Blocking Mode
Set this mode on CO lines that can receive both tone and
pulse, but under contract with the Central Office for pulse
dialling only. When dialling to the line using an MF4
telephone, only pulse signals are sent to the Central Office.
Conditions • It is possible for the extension user to temporarily convert the pre-
assigned pulse dialling mode to DTMF mode (Pulse to Tone
Conversion). DTMF mode cannot be changed to pulse.
• In case a CO line can receive both DTMF and pulse signals and is
contracted for DTMF with a Central Office, DTMF mode should be
selected for the line. If it is contracted for pulse dialling mode, Call
Blocking mode should be selected for the line.
• If a line is assigned Pulse Dial mode, select an appropriate pulse speed,
pulse break ratio, and inter-digit pause for the line, if needed. If a line
is assigned DTMF, select an appropriate DTMF duration for the line, if
needed.
• After a held call is retrieved, the dial mode goes back to the one
originally programmed on the CO line.
[402] Dial Mode Selection
[403] Pulse Speed Selection
[404] DTMF Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 4,
Area 02 – Bits 7, 12 and 11

End-to-End DTMF Signaling Pulse to Tone Conversion
(Tone Through)
Features 3-59
D 3 Features
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN line call to a
specific extension. Assignable destinations are: Assignable
destinations are: (1) Operator, (2) extension, (3) Hunting Group,
(4) TAFAS, (5) modem, (6) Phantom extension, (7) Voice Mail
extension, (8) ISDN extension and (9) external ringer. This
requires a number received from the ISDN network. The number is
converted to a specific extension number by using a pre-
programmed conversion table.
[150] [151] [152]

Location ISDN DDI Translation ISDN DDI Ringing ISDN DDI Ringing
No. Table Assignment — Day Assignment — Night
000 2011111 101 201
001 2012222 102 202
: : : :
399 2019999 109 109
Conditions • To use the DDI service, “DDI” must be selected in program [420]/[429]
“ISDN Ringing Service Assignment — Day / Night”.
• An incoming DDI call is converted as programmed in [111] “ISDN
DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment”.
• If an incoming DDI call cannot be sent to a specific extension, it will be
sent to an operator or extension according to DIL 1:N. Selecting an
operator or extension depends on program [990] “System Additional
Information, Area 01 – Bits 5 and 6”.
• It is possible to deny answering the DDI call on a Class of Serve basis.
[111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment
[150] ISDN DDI Translation Table
[151]–[152] ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
[420]/[429] ISDN Ring Service Assignment — Day / Night

Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
3-60 Features
3 Features D
Direct In Lines (DIL)
Description Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to one or more
answering points.
DIL 1:1 puts an incoming outside call to a single destination.
Assignable destinations are: (1) extension; (2) modem; (3) external
pager, (4) Hunting group, (5) Phantom extension, (6)Voice Mail
and (7) ISDN extension. This CO line can be used by multiple
extension users to make calls but can be used by only one extension
to receive calls.
DIL 1:N puts an incoming outside call to multiple destinations.
Assignable destinations are extensions only. This CO line can be
used by multiple extension users to make and receive calls.
Both DIL 1:1 and 1:N can have different destinations for day and
night modes (Night Service).
Conditions • If a CO line is programmed for both DIL 1:1 and DIL 1:N, it is
regarded as a DIL 1:1 line.
• DIL 1:1 to the modem allows the caller to perform remote
administration. DIL 1:1 to an external pager causes the pager to ring
when receiving incoming calls (TAFAS feature).
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
Features 3-61
D 3 Features
Display, Call Information
Description The display proprietary telephone shows the user the following call
information:
Extension number and name

These are shown when calling or when called by an
extension user and during an established intercom call.
A display example: 223: Smith
Dialled telephone number
This is shown when dialling the telephone number.
A display example: 91234567890
Number or name of the caller
These are shown when receiving an incoming outside call
on ISDN network.
Display examples: 0712225555
JOHN WHITE
CO line number and name
This is shown when receiving an outside call.
A display example: CO03:AB COMPANY
Charge Meter
This is shown during an established outside call.
A display example: CO01:00005
Charge Fee
This is shown during an established outside call.
A display example: CO01:£00001.15
Call duration
This is shown during an established incoming outside call.
The display remains for five seconds after the call is
finished.
A display example: CO 02 0:02'28
Conditions • Extension numbers and names, and CO line names are programmable.
If no name is stored, only the number is displayed.
• The display shows no intercom call duration.
• The outgoing outside call duration starts when the programmable timer
expires.
• It is programmable to select the first display, meter or charge, by system
programming. To alternate the display, press the CO button.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by system
programming.
3-62 Features
3 Features D
[117] Charge Display Selection
[125] Assignment of Denomination
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time
[421] CO Line Name Assignment

Display, Extension Programmed Data

Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to confirm the
features assigned on the buttons on the telephone. When it is on-
hook (that is, when the handset is on the cradle and the SP-PHONE
button is off), pressing a button displays the use of the button or the
information assigned to the button for five seconds.
Conditions • Display examples

(1) If REDIAL; SAVE; or One-Touch Dialling button is pressed,
the stored number is displayed: 950-1001PP12345&
(2) If the DSS or MESSAGE button is pressed, the extension
number and the name (if assigned) stored under the DSS button
or the source of the Message Waiting is displayed: 223: Tony
(3) If Account button is pressed, the display shows: Account
(4) If FWD/DND button is pressed, the selected feature assigned on
the button is shown as follows:
(a) If the Do Not Disturb feature is assigned: Do Not
Disturb
(b) If Call Forwarding- All Calls to extension 223 is assigned:
FWD(All) Ext223
(c) If Call Forwarding – Busy to extension 234 is assigned:
FWD(BSY) Ext234
(d) If Call Forwarding – No Answer to extension 345 is
assigned: FWD(NA) Ext345
(e) If Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer to extension 200 is
assigned: FWD(B/NA) Ext200
(f) If Call Forwarding – To CO Line number 91201431 is
assigned: FWD(CO) 91201431
Features 3-63
D 3 Features
• If the display characters exceed 16 digits, the mark “&” is shown at the
right-hand edge.
• This is used to display the data programmed for each PF
(Programmable Feature), DSS, SAVE, or REDIAL button. If Full-One
Touch Dialling is enabled on the telephone Full-One Touch Dialling
will be active instead.
Display, Self-Extension Number

Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to display their own
jack number and extension number in station programming mode.
Conditions Display example

If the jack number is 02 and the extension number is 202:
Jack02<=>EXT202
System Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Programming Information
3-64 Features
3 Features D
Display, Time and Date
Description Offers the display proprietary telephone user a display of either the
present time and the date or the date and the day of the week. It is
displayed while on-hook.
Conditions • There are two types of display:

Display example 1: Day, Month, Time: 1 Jan 12:00AM
Display example 2: Day, Month, Year, Day of the Week:
1 Jan 1994 SAT
• The present date and time are set by system programming.
[000] Date and Time Set
Display Contrast Adjustment

Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display
contrast.
Conditions The adjusting method depends on the type of proprietary telephone (PT)
you have.
• With a KX-T7400 series digital PT, the MODE or Soft buttons and the
Jog Dial are used to select from three available levels.
• With a KX-T7200 series digital PT, the Soft buttons and the Volume
button are used to select from three available levels.
• With an analogue PT, a sliding lever on the telephone (CONTRAST
selector) is used to select from three available levels.
Features 3-65
D 3 Features
Description Allows an extension user to appear busy to an incoming extension
call or allows to transfer an incoming outside call to the assigned
extension. This can be set or cancelled by the extension user.
Conditions • If your proprietary telephone (PT) is not supplied with the FWD/DND
button, it can be assigned on a flexible button.
• DND does not work for the following calls: doorphone calls; recalls for
hold / Timed Reminder alarm.
• A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing the button
showing the arrival of the call.
• An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who
are allowed to override DND in their Class of Service (Do Not Disturb
Override).
• The following extension cannot set DND: operator, the Call Forwarding
(C.FWD) destination or the DND destination.
• When the extension has set the C.FWD, DND or DND for Direct
Dialling In Call, the extension cannot be a DND destination.
• Setting this feature cancels C.FWD or DND for Direct Dialling In Call.
• If the destination extension has DND activated, then the DSS button
corresponding to it will light up red. This indicates to the proprietary
telephone or console user that the destination extension is unavailable.

Do Not Disturb for Direct Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Dialling In Call

—User Manual Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND]) – Refusing all calls
3-66 Features
3 Features D
Description Allows the pre-assigned extension user to reject to answer the direct
dialling in call on Class of Service basis. The rejected call will be
transferred to an operator. The operator cannot reject the direct dialling in
call. This feature is one of the ISDN services.
Conditions • Setting this feature cancels Call Forwarding or DND.

• If the destination extension has DND activated, then the DSS button
corresponding to it will light up red. This indicates to the proprietary
telephone or DSS console user that the destination extension is
unavailable.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Do not disturb for DDI
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call
Customising the Buttons – DND for Direct Dialling In Call Button


—User Manual Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND]) – Refusing direct
outside calls (DND for Direct Dialling In Calls)
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override

Description Permits the pre-assigned extension user to call another user who
sets the Do Not Disturb feature. Dialling ‘2’ enables the caller to
override the DND programmed on the called extension’s telephone
and causes the telephone to ring.
Conditions Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extension users who
can perform DND Override.
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
Features 3-67
D 3 Features

—User Manual Calling without Restrictions – To an extension refusing the call (DND
Override)
Door Opener
Description Allows the extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from
their telephones. The door can be unlocked by extension users who
have been programmed to receive doorphone calls. However,
while engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can open
the door from the telephone to let the visitor in.
Conditions • It is needed to install a user-supplied door opener on each door to be

opened. Two door openers can be installed on each system. System
Connection* provides for four door openers.
• When a visitor presses the Call button on the doorphone, the system
may automatically open the door, if the doorphone has a built-in door
opener. It is required to set by system programming.
2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
[100] Flexible Numbering, Door opener
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment
[511] Door Open Access
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night

Doorphone Call
Operation References Operation – Using User-supplied Equipment

—User Manual If a Doorphone / Door Opener is Connected – Opening the door

3 Features D
Doorphone Call
Description Your system supports two doorphones. If a visitor presses the
doorphone button, pre-assigned extensions are rung. The extension
who answers the call can talk to the visitor. It is possible for any
extension user to originate a call to a doorphone.
Conditions • You need to install an optional Doorphone.

• Two doorphones can be installed on each system. System Connection*
provides for four doorphones.
• It is necessary to program the extensions that can receive calls from
each doorphone during day and night mode.
• If no extension user answers an incoming doorphone call within 30
seconds, the call stops ringing and is cancelled.
• While engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can open the
door from the telephone to let the visitor in (Door Opener). This
requires a user-supplied door opener.
2.4.11 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
[100] Flexible Numbering, Doorphone call

Door Opener

—User Manual If a Doorphone / Door Opener is Connected – Doorphone Call

D 3 Features
Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line
Description Allows the system to forward doorphone calls to ISDN lines. The
extension user can change the forwarding destination, to an
extension or outside party, for each doorphone. If an outside party
is selected, calls to the doorphone are forwarded to the destination
assigned in program [021]–[022] “Doorphone Call Forwarding –
Day / Night.” If an extension is selected, calls to the doorphone are
forwarded to the destination assigned in program [607]–[608]
“Doorphone Ringing Assignment – Day / Night.”
Conditions • Class of Service programming determines the extension users who can
forward the doorphone calls to ISDN lines.
• If the transferred call is not answered within the programmed intercept
time, the line will be disconnected.
• If the doorphone button is pressed again before the call is answered, the
intercept timer starts again.
• If a call between a party at a doorphone and an outside party is
established with this feature, the duration of the call period may be
restricted depending on the setting of the system timer.
• When a doorphone call is transferred to an outside party, either the
extension at Jack 01-1 or Operator 1 can be selected for the charge
account.
• When the LCR feature is functioning, the data of Jack 01-1 is used as
the itemized code programmed in [7003] “Itemized Code Set.” The
data of Operator 1 is also available.
[021]–[022] Doorphone Call Forwarding — Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, Doorphone call forwarding to CO line /
Doorphone call forwarding mode switch
[218] Doorphone-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
[521] Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line
Customising the Buttons – Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line Button

Doorphone Call

—User Manual If a Doorphone / Door Opener is Connected – Forwarding Doorphone
Calls to Outside Parties (Doorphone Call Forwarding to Outside Line)
3-70 Features
3 Features E
Description Allows the extension users to lock their stations so that other users
cannot make outgoing outside calls. Any 3-digit numeric code can
be used to lock the station. The same code is used to unlock it.
Conditions • Making intercom calls and receiving intercom or outside calls are
permitted on the locked station.
• Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout. If
the operator sets Remote Station Lock on a station that has already been
locked by the station user, the user cannot unlock it.
• It is programmable to admit the press of the Register Recall button
during an outside call on the locked station.
• Emergency dial numbers programmed in [311] “Emergency Dial
Number Set” can be dialled on a locked station.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Electronic station lockout


—User Manual Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Electronic Station
Lockout)
Features 3-71
E 3 Features
Emergency Call
Description Allows the extension user to dial out a pre-assigned emergency
number after seizing the CO line.
Conditions • Emergency numbers are allowed to call even in the following cases;
• in Account Code – Verified mode
• in any toll restriction level
• after the pre-assigned charge limit is reached
• in Electronic Station Lockout
• A maximum of ten emergency numbers are assignable. Any number
can be stored as an emergency number. (999) and (112) are already
stored by default settings.
• The LCR feature is not available for the emergency call.
[311] Emergency Dial Number Set

End-to-End DTMF Signalling (Tone Through)

Description DTMF signalling is required for access to special network services
offered by some telephone companies. This system allows the
proprietary telephone user to send DTMF signals to the line during
an established call.
Conditions • If the dial type of the line is assigned to DTMF, Tone Through mode is
established automatically after the dialling sequence is finished and the
call is established.
• If the dial type of the line is assigned to dial pulse, Tone Through mode
is established after the dialling sequence is finished and the “ #”
buttons are pressed (Pulse to Tone Conversion).
• This function also applies to extension and conference calls.
3-72 Features
3 Features E
Dial Type Selection Pulse to Tone Conversion
Extension Connection Assignment

Description Assign whether the extension user can perform all accesses or not.
Conditions • The extension of the jack number 01 should be set to “connect.”

• If the destination of DIL 1:1 or DDI is set to “disconnect,” the call is
transferred to an operator.
[611] Extension Connection Assignment
Operation Reference Not applicable.
Extension Group
Description The system supports 16 extension groups. Any member of an
extension group can pick up a call directed to another group
member (Group Call Pickup) or can make a voice announcement to
another group member (Paging – Group).
Conditions • Every extension should belong to an extension group and can belong to
more than one group simultaneously.
• If System Connection* is employed, an extension group can include
extensions on both systems.
• The floating number can be assigned on extension group basis.
[602] Extension Group Assignment

Call Pickup, Group Paging – Group

E 3 Features
External Feature Access
Description Allows the extension user to have access to the features of a host
PBX or Central Office, such as Call Waiting, etc. Register Recall
signal can be sent out to the CO line.
Conditions • This feature is effective only during an outside call.

• The Register Recall Signal must be assigned as required by the host
PBX or CO line.
• With a proprietary telephone, the RECALL or FLASH/RCL button, or
the feature number is used to perform this function. With a single line
telephone, the feature number is used to perform this feature.
• During outside calls, a RECALL or FLASH/RCL stored in System
Speed Dialling, Station Speed Dialling or One-Touch Dialling functions
as External Feature Access, not as Recall.
[100] Flexible Numbering, External feature access

Host PBX Access Recall

—User Manual If a Host PBX is Connected – Accessing external services (External
Feature Access)
3-74 Features
3 Features E
Description EXtra Device Port (XDP) expands the number of telephones available
in the system by allowing an extension jack to contain two
telephones. A digital proprietary telephone (DPT) and a single line
telephone (SLT) or console and SLT can be connected to the same
jack but have different extension numbers so that they can act as
Conditions • XDP requires previous programming of the individual jack. Enable

XDP mode for the desired jack by system programming. Immediately
after changing the assignment, changed setting may not work for a
maximum of eight seconds.
• If an analogue proprietary telephone (APT) and SLT are connected to
an XDP-enabled jack, neither telephones work.
• If XDP is disabled for the jack, DPT and SLT may be used as
Parallelled Telephones. APT and SLT also can be used as Parallelled
Telephones.
[600] EXtra Device Port

Parallelled Telephone
Features 3-75
F 3 Features
Flexible Numbering
Description The numbers used for the access codes of system features and the
number used for extension numbers are not fixed. They can be set
as required provided there are not any conflicts. Feature numbers
can be from one to three digits, utilizing numbers “0 through 9” as
well as “ ” and “#.” Extension numbers can be two to four digits
in length. Any number can be set as the leading first or second
digit. If one digit is assigned as the leading digit, some extensions
have 2-digit numbers and some have 3-digit numbers. If two digits
are assigned as the leading digits, some have 3-digit numbers and
some have 4-digit numbers.
Flexible Feature Numbers Number Feature Default

01 1st hundred extension block 2
02 2nd hundred extension block 3
03 - 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None
17 Operator call 0
18 Automatic line access / LCR 9
19 CO line group line access 8
20 System speed dialling
21 Station speed dialling 6
22 Station speed dialling programming 60
23 Doorphone call 61
24 Paging – external 62
25 Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer 42
26 Paging – group 63
27 Paging – group answer 43
28 Call pickup, CO line 4
29 Call pickup, group 40
30 Call pickup, directed 41
31 Call hold 50
32 Call hold retrieve – intercom 51
33 Call hold retrieve – CO line 53
34 Last number redial #
35 Call park / call park retrieve 52
36 Account code entry 49
37 Door opener 55
38 External feature access 64
39 Station program clear 790
40 Message waiting 70
41 Not available —
42 Call forwarding / do not disturb 710
43 Call pickup deny 720
3-76 Features
3 Features F
Flexible Feature Numbers Number Feature Default
45 Call waiting / OHCA / Whisper OHCA 731
47 Pickup dialling 74
48 Absent message 750
49 Timed reminder 76
50 Electronic station lockout 77
51 Night service mode 78
52 Parallel telephone mode 69
53 Background music – external 65
54 Paging – deny 721
55 Primary COS select 791
56 Secondary COS select 793
57 Log-in / log-out 45
58 Operator 1 call None
60 Automatic callback busy cancel 46
61-69 Not available —
70 Timed reminder remote 7
71 Call log, incoming 56
72 Do not disturb for DDI 54
73 CLIR 59
74 COLR 58
75 Incoming call log lock 57
76† Live call screening password control† 799
77 System working report 794
78 Super extra device port (SXDP) 48
79 Outgoing message 712
80 CLIP / COLP 711
81 Reserved —
82 Call forwarding from hunting group 714
83 Doorphone call forwarding to CO line 715
84 Doorphone call forwarding mode switch 716
85 CCBS cancel 713
Default feature numbers are shown above.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Features 3-77
F 3 Features
In addition to the flexible feature numbers above, fixed feature
numbers are provided.
Fixed Feature Numbers Feature Default

While busy tone is heard
Busy Station Signalling (BSS) 2
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 2
Whisper OHCA 2
Message Waiting 4
Automatic Callback Busy 6
Completing of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 6
While Do Not Disturb tone is heard
Do Not Disturb Override 2
While calling or talking
Conference 3
Door Open 5
Pulse to Tone Conversion #
Account Code Delimiter # / 99
When the set is on-hook
Time display / date display switching
Day / night mode display #
Conditions • Flexible feature numbers can only be dialled during dial tone.
• The following are examples of feature number conflicts:
Examples: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and 321, etc.
• Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the
feature active. For example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for
“Call Waiting” must be followed by “1” and to cancel it, the same
feature number should be followed by “0.”
[100] Flexible Numbering
3-78 Features
3 Features F
Floating Station
Description You can assign virtual extension numbers for resources to make them
appear to be extensions. These numbers are defined as floating
numbers (FN). The following resources can have floating numbers:
(1) External paging instruments: used for TAFAS feature.
For KX-TD816, two FNs are available. For KX-TD1232,
four FNs are available.
These FNs can be assigned as:
a) DIL 1:1 destination
b) Intercept Routing destination
(2) Modem: used for system administration. One FN is available.
This can be assigned as:
b) and also can be used as an extension number to call
the modem.
(3) Hunting group: used for Station Hunting feature. 32 FNs
are available. These FNs can be assigned as:
b) Extension
c) Intercept Routing destination
d) DDI / MSN destination
e) Hunting Group – overflow
(4) Digital Test Access: used for testing. One DTA is
available. The FN can be used as an extension.
Conditions Floating numbers cannot be used for setting a feature such as Call
Forwarding, etc.
2.4.8 Remote Card Installation*1
2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit*2 / Message Unit Installation
2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card / Message Card*2 Installation
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
*1: Available for the KX-TD1232 only. Features 3-79

F 3 Features
Full One-Touch Dialling
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to make a call or have access
to a system service with one button. There is no need to turn the
SP-PHONE / MONITOR button on before pressing the button,
which is required for One-Touch Dialling. Handsfree operation is
automatically provided by pressing the One-Touch Dialling, DSS,
REDIAL, or SAVE button.
Conditions • It is necessary to program automatic handsfree dial mode.

• This feature is also available with DSS buttons on a Console.
• This feature is also available with the display operation for KX-T7230,
KX-T7235, KX-T7431, KX-T7433 or KX-T7436 (Special Display
Features).
Initial Settings – Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment

Button, Direct Station Redial, Last Number
Selection (DSS) Redial, Saved Number
One-Touch Dialling Special Display Features
3-80 Features
3 Features H
Handset / Headset Selection
Description The system supports the use of headsets on proprietary telephones.
Conditions • The headset is an user-supplied item.

• To set headset mode on a digital proprietary telephone (PT), use station
programming. To set headset mode on an analogue PT, use the handset
/ headset selector provided on the set and / or on the headset.
Initial Settings – Handset/Headset Selection
Operation References None
Handset Microphone Mute

Description Allows the KX-T7400 series digital proprietary telephone user to
turn off the handset microphone, for privacy.
Conditions • This is effective for the handset microphone only. Only your voice will
be muted during a handset conversation.
• The user can hear the other party’s voice during Handset Microphone
Mute.

—User Manual Mute
Features 3-81
H 3 Features
Handsfree Answerback
Description Allows the speakerphone telephone user to talk to a caller without
lifting the handset, if the user has set handsfree answerback mode.
If the user receives an intercom call in the mode, handsfree
conversation is established immediately after the user hears beep
tone and the caller hears confirmation tone.
Conditions • Handsfree answerback mode is set or cancelled by pressing the AUTO

ANSWER button.
• This feature does not work for calls from outside parties or doorphone
calls.
• Handsfree Answerback set on a telephone overrides the Ring / Voice
Intercom Alerting mode preset on the telephone; Handsfree
conversation mode is established as soon as confirmation tone is sent.
• Handsfree answerback mode is overridden and a ring tone is heard
when an outside call is transferred to the extension where the mode is
set.


—User Manual Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
Handsfree Operation
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to dial and to talk to the other
party without lifting the handset. Pressing an appropriate button
provides handsfree mode.
Conditions • This function can be utilized by pressing a button listed below when the
SP-PHONE / MONITOR button indicator is off:
SP-PHONE button; MONITOR button; INTERCOM button; CO button
• The KX-T7050 and the KX-T7250 can be used for handsfree dialling
operations, etc., but cannot be used for handsfree conversation.
• A single press of a One-Touch Button, DSS button, REDIAL button or
a SAVE button also provides handsfree mode if Full One-Touch
Dialling is enabled.
3-82 Features
3 Features H


—User Manual Basic Calling
Answering Calls
Hold Recall
Description Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a pre-
determined time. If the timer expires, ringing or an alarm tone is
generated as a reminder to the user who held the call. If the user is
on-hook and its speaker-phone is off, the phone is rung. If the user
is off-hook or in speakerphone mode when the timer expires an
alarm tone is sent from the built-in speaker of a proprietary
telephone (PT) or from the handset receiver of a single line
telephone at 15-second intervals.
Conditions • Hold Recall can be disabled by programming.

• The display PT flashes the indication of the held party for five seconds
at 15-second intervals synchronized with the tone.
• Alarm tone is sent as follows:
15 s

Call Hold – CO Line Call Hold, Exclusive – CO Line
Call Hold – Intercom Call Hold, Exclusive – Intercom
Features 3-83
H 3 Features
Host PBX Access
Description The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is
performed by connecting a line from the host to a CO line in the
Digital Super Hybrid System.
Conditions • To enable Host PBX Access, put the host PBX line in a CO line group.
The user accesses the host PBX by selecting that CO line.
• A Host PBX Access Code is required to access CO lines of the host
PBX.
• A pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the user-dialled Host
PBX Access Code and the following digits (Automatic Pause Insertion).
Program the pause time required by the Host PBX for that CO line
group.
• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible (External
Feature Access).
[412] Pause Time

External Feature Access Pause Insertion, Automatic
3-84 Features
3 Features H
HOTEL APPLICATION
Description Allows the operator to handle the front/operator services such as
check-in / check-out, timed reminder (wake-up call) and room
management. This operation is applicable to only the operator
extension with the KX-T7235 or KX-T7436.
Check-In / Check-Out
Description Allows the operator to operate the check-in / check-out service.
This feature can control the usage of an outside call by switching
the Class of Service between primary and secondary, and count
and print out the telephone charge and the other charges such as
mini-bar.
Conditions • It is required to enable the hotel application by system programming.

• When the check-in is assigned, the Class of Service is set to the
primary one and the charge counter will be cleared. When the check-
out is assigned, the Class of Service is set to secondary one and the
total telephone charge and the other charge will be displayed and
printed out.
• The telephone charge can be added the surcharge according to the pre-
assigned margin rate. The pre-assigned tax rate can be also added.
• If the operator uses the paired console, the operator can refer the
check-in status on console.
• It is possible to give a header to the printed bill such as hotel's name or
greeting or to assign the starting location of output data with a personal
computer.
• It is possible to limit the telephone usage on a pre-assigned amount by
system programming.
• Timed Reminder, set by either the operator or the extension user, is
canceled when the guest checks out.
[010] Budget Management
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate
[123] Hotel Application

Budget Management Charge Fee Reference

—User Manual Hotel Use Features – Check-in / check-out
Features 3-85
H 3 Features
Room Management
Description Allows the extension user to print out the information of a guest
room (e.g. cleaning status of the room and the total of the minibar
charge) with a telephone in each room. Absent messages No.6
through No.9 can be printed out.
Conditions None
[008] Absent Messages


—User Manual Hotel Use Features – Printing out guest room information
Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)

Description Allows the operator to set, cancel and confirm the wake-up call
remotely for the extension.
Conditions • When either an operator or the extension sets a new time, the pre-set
time is cleared.
• When a wake-up call is not answered, the operator’s Alert indicator
(KX-T7235 and KX-T7436 only) will flash.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder, remote
Customising the Buttons – Alert Button

Timed Reminder

—User Manual Hotel Use Features – Setting the alarm (Wake-up Call) / Unanswered
timed reminder alert
3-86 Features
3 Features H
Hunting Group
Description The system supports thirty-two hunting groups. The station
hunting feature is assigned on the hunting group basis.
Hunting works when an incoming call arrives at an floating number
for a hunting group. However, for VM/AA hunting, an incoming
call to any extension number which belongs to a hunting group is
hunted as well.
The following assignments are determined for the hunting group.
• Floating Extension Number
• The Hunting Group Name
• Numbers of Waiting Queues
• Overflow Status
• The Destination of Intercept Routing — Day/Night
• Hunting Type
Conditions • Each extension can belong to more than one group simultaneously.
[106] Station Hunting Type
[131] Hunting Group Assignment
[132] Hunting Group Name
[133] Hunting Overflow
[134]–[135] Hunting Intercept — Day / Night

No Reply Group Station Hunting
Ring Group Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Features 3-87
I 3 Features
Description The system can manage a call received from the ISDN line by
point-to-point or point-to-multi-point configuration.
An optional ISDN Line Card/Unit, KX-TD280, KX-TD281, KX-
TD282 or KX-TD286 is required.
Point-to-point
A call received through one ISDN port is sent directly to a specific
extension using a Direct Dialling In (DDI) service.
Point-to-multi-point
One ISDN port can support a maximum of ten Multiple Subscriber
Numbers (MSN). A call received through an ISDN port is sent
directly to the pre-assigned extension if the dialled number matches
the stored MSN.
Flow chart of required programs for ISDN

Select the ISDN ring service, DDI, MSN, or
Disable in programs [420]–[429] “ISDN Ring
Service Assignment – Day / Night.”
Disable MSN
DDI
The extensions which are assigned in A received number is converted as program

program [407]–[408] “DIL 1:1 [111] “ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit
Extension – Day / Night” receive calls. /Added Number Assignment.”
Disable DDI MSN
The extensions which are The system searches for the The system searches for the
assigned in program [603]– converted number in program [150] converted number in program [437]
[604] “DIL 1:N Extension “ISDN DDI Translation Table.” “Multiple Subscriber Number Set.”
and Delayed Ringing – Day /
Night” receive calls.
DDI MSN
A call is received at a specific A call is received at the pre-assigned

extension, assigned in programs extension, assigned in programs
[151]–[152] “ISDN DDI Ringing [438]–[439] “Extension Ringing
Assignment – Day / Night,” Assignment – Day / Night for ISDN,”
directly using the DDI service. directly using the MSN ringing
(Refer to the DDI feature.) service. (Refer to the MSN Ringing
Service feature.)
3-88 Features
3 Features I
Conditions • After ISDN assignments, you should reset the system so that the
assignments are effective.
• If “Disable” is assigned in programs [420]/[429] “ISDN Ring Service
Assignment — Day / Night” and an extension is not assigned in
programs [407]–[408] “DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night,” the call will
be received by DIL 1:N.
2.7 System Restart
[150] ISDN DDI Translation Table
[422] ISDN Port Type
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[424] ISDN Configuration
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode
[426] ISDN TEI Mode
[437] Multiple Subscriber Number Set
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment — Day/Night for ISDN MSN
[440] TD286 ISDN Port Type
[441] TD286 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[442] TD286 ISDN Configuration
[443] TD286 ISDN Data Link Mode
[444] TD286 ISDN TEI Mode
• The recommended parameter combinations are listed below. The
underlined selections are recommended.
[422]/[440] [423]/[441] [424]/[442] [425]/[443] [426]/[444]
Program ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Date ISDN TEI
Type Active Mode Configuration Link Mode Mode
CO Call/ Point Call/ Fix
(DDI) Permanent Permanent
CO Call/ Call/ Automatic

Parameter (MSN) Permanent Multipoint Permanent
Extension Call/ Multipoint Call Automatic

Permanent
Features 3-89
I 3 Features
Direct Dialling In (DDI) Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service
Operation References Not Applicable.
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Extension

Description The system supports terminal equipment with separate power
supplies. For example, an ISDN telephone, G4 Facsimile and
personal computers which are connected to an optional ISDN S0
Line Unit or Card. A maximum of eight terminal units can be
connected to each ISDN S0 bus with point-to-multi-point
configuration. However, only up to two units can be used
simultaneously. Terminal equipment can be addressed individually
with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN). The MSN consists of
the ISDN extension number and an additional digit, 00 through 99.
If MSN is not assigned, all equipment on the same S0 bus are called
simultaneously.
The following bearer capabilities can be supported:

Transfer Mode Transfer Capability
Circuit Unrestricted digital
Circuit Speech
Circuit 3.1 kHz Audio
The functions of terminal equipment are similar to single line

telephone functions except for the following features:
• Automatic Callback Busy • Conference
• Call Forwarding • Do Not Disturb
• Call Hold • Log-In / Log-Out
• Call Park • Message Waiting
• Call Pickup • Paging – Group Answer
• Call Transfer • Pickup Dialling
• Call Waiting • Timed Reminder
• Completing of Calls to Busy
Subscriber (CCBS)
3-90 Features
3 Features I
Conditions • After ISDN assignments, you should reset the system so that the
assignments are effective.
• Class of Service and department code for ISDN port apply to all
terminal equipment on the same S0 bus.
• Each port can be assigned as follows:
*1 and *2: can be either an external or internal ISDN S0 line.
*1: when assigned as internal, the corresponding analog CO ports or
ISDN ports become available.
If the KX-TD286 is installed together with the KX-TD281 or KX-
TD282, it is not possible to assign the same port as an external ISDN S0
line. If it is done, only the port of the KX-TD286 becomes available.
TD816 TD1232
CO ISDN TD282 TD280 TD286 CO ISDN TD281 TD280 TD286
No. Port No. Port
1, 2 1 *2 — *1 1, 2 1 External — *1
3, 4 2 — — *1 3, 4 2 External — *1
5, 6 3 — *2 *2 5, 6 3 *2 — *1
7, 8 4 — *2 *2 7, 8 4 *2 — *1
— 5 — — Internal 9, 10 5 — *2 *2
— 6 — — Internal 11, 12 6 — *2 *2
2.7 System Restart
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port
[017] TD286 Extension Number Set
[018] TD286 Extension Name Set
[019] Budget Management on TD286 Port
[422] ISDN Port Type
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[424] ISDN Configuration
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode
[426] ISDN TEI Mode
Features 3-91
I 3 Features
[427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone
[440] TD286 ISDN Port Type
[441] TD286 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[442] TD286 ISDN Configuration
[443] TD286 ISDN Data Link Mode
[444] TD286 ISDN TEI Mode
[445] TD286 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
[446] TD286 ISDN Extension Progress Tone
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment — Day / Night for ISDN
MSN
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night for
ISDN Extension
[627] TD286 Class of Service
[629]–[630] Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment — Day / Night for
TD286 Extension
• The recommended parameter combinations are listed below. The

underlined selections are recommended.
[422]/[440] [423]/[441] [424]/[442] [425]/[443] [426]/[444]
Program ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Date ISDN TEI
CO Call/ Point Call/ Fix
(DDI) Permanent Permanent
CO Call/ Call/ Automatic

Parameter (MSN) Permanent Multipoint Permanent
Extension Call/ Multipoint Call Automatic

Permanent
Operation References Operation

—User Manual
3-92 Features
3 Features I
Intercept Routing
Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls. There are
two types of Intercept Routing. In the first case, a call cannot be
placed to the called party. This is called Rerouting. In the second
case the call is not answered within a programmed time period.
This is called Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA).
Items which can have the Intercept Routing destination are:
(1) CO Line Group, (2) Extension, and (3) Hunting Group.
Conditions • Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N, TAFAS, Call
Forwarding, and Station Hunting.
• The final destination of intercepted calls must be programmed for day
and night modes. There are four possible destinations:
1) an extension 4) a phantom extension
2) an external pager 5) a voice mail extension
3) a hunting group
• Intercept Routing is activated as shown below, depending on the
combination of incoming type and called destination.
• If Call Forwarding to CO Line feature is set at the IRNA destination,
the call will be forwarded to the specific outside party.
Extension External Pager/ Hunting Group
including Operator Internal ISDN/
Phantom Extension
Assigned CO line No incoming calls No incoming calls
DIL 1:N group are received. are received.
Registered Assigned CO line Assigned hunting
DIL 1:1 extension group group
Registered Assigned CO line Assigned hunting
DDI extension group group
No more Intercept No more Intercept Assigned hunting
Intercept Routing Routing group
[203] Intercept Time
[620]–[621] Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night
Features 3-93
I 3 Features
Intercom Calling
Description Allows the extension user to call another extension user within the
system.
Conditions • Extension numbers are assigned to all extensions by system

programming. An extension number is programmed to be two, three, or
four digits. The ISDN extension number is programmed to be one, two
or three digits.
• Names can be given to extension numbers by system programming.
An extension number and a name, if programmed, is shown on the
display PT during an intercom call.
• DSS buttons permit one-touch access to an extension and provide Busy
Lamp Field.
• KX-T7235, KX-T7431, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 users can make an
extension call with an extension dialling directory on the display.
• After dialling an extension number, the user will hear one of the
following:
Ringback tone: indicates that the other extension is being called.
Confirmation tone: indicates that the user can perform Voice
Calling.
Busy tone: indicates that the other extension is busy.
Do Not Disturb tone: indicates that the other extension has
DND assigned.
[018] TD286 Extension Name Set
Customising the Buttons – DSS Button

Busy Lamp Field Button, Direct Station Selection
(DSS)

3-94 Features
3 Features L
Description Least Cost Routing (LCR) is a system programmable feature that
automatically selects the least expensive route available at the time
a call is made. Previous programming eliminates the need for the
user to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier.
The appropriate CO line group is selected and an appropriate
access code is added before the number is outpulsed.
General Description
The dialling plan for a long distance call could be as follows:
0NXX-NXX-XXXX
0NXX-NXXXXX
(N=2-9; X=0-9)
<Example>
London 0207
0208
Birmingham 0121
Edinburgh 0131
Glasgow 0141
Liverpool 0151
Manchester 0161
Tyneside 0191
Wearside 0191
Other Areas 0NXX
The charged fee is decided by the first digits of the dialled number
and time zone per carrier. For example, if charged fee by a
carrier is as follows, program the carrier’s fee in time zones.
The system compares each carrier’s charged fee and selects
the least expensive carrier for the call.
Features 3-95
L 3 Features
Example of Charged Fee for Carrier
Area Area 1 Area 2 ••• Area 8
021,0333,0444 031,0344,0455 ••• 061,091,0355
Area Code 0555, 0666 0566, 0677 0577, 0588
Peak Rate •••
(9 a.m.–1 p.m., Mon.–Fri.) £1.00 £2.00 £5.00
Standard Rate £0.75 £1.50 £3.50

(8 a.m.–9 a.m. and 1 a.m.–6 p.m., Mon.–Fri.) •••
Cheapest Rate
(6 p.m.–8 a.m., Mon.–Fri.) £0.50 £1.00 ••• £2.00
(6 a.m., Fri.–8 p.m., Mon.)
LCR Programming consists of the following items:

Common Tables
(1)LCR Mode (Program [7000])
This program is used to turn on or off the LCR mode. If turned off,
calls are sent to CO lines selected according to the Automatic
Access CO Line Group Assignment table (Program [103]). If
turned on, calls are sent to appropriate lines according to LCR
programming tables. (Default=Disable)
If LCR mode is turned on, the user-dialled number is compared
with the following tables:
(2) BTL Access Code Set (Program [7002])
This program is used to store the British Telecom Line (BTL)
Access Code. (Default=121) If the system finds out the same
number as the user-dialled number in this table, the call is sent to
the CO lines selected from the Automatic Access CO Line Group
Assignment table (Program [103]).
(3) Emergency Dial Number Set (Program [311])
This is used to store emergency dial numbers. The dial numbers
defined in this table are not applied to LCR and Toll Restriction. If
the system finds out the same number as the user-dialled number in
this table, the call is sent to the CO lines selected from the
Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment table (Program
[103]).
Emergency dial table
Entry Dial
1 999
2 112
• •
• •
• •
10
3-96 Features
3 Features L
(4) Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment (Program
[103])
Usually this table is used for automatic line access in non-LCR
mode. In LCR mode, if the system cannot find out the dialled
number in Carrier Access Tables or LCR Routing Plan Tables, or
if the system finds out the same number as the user-dialled number
in Emergency Dial Number Set table or LCR Exceptional Code Set
table, this table is used to select a CO.
Automatic access CO line group table

Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CO line group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Carrier Access Tables

Note: (1) LCR Carrier Code (Program [7X21])
The ‘X’ in the following
This is used to store each carrier’s access code. Example: Mercury
program addresses
Communications Line (MCL)=131. If the system finds out the
substitute:
X=carrier number 1-8
same number as the user-dialled number in this table, the call is
sent to the carrier’s line selected from the LCR CO Line Group
Assignment table (Program [7X23]).
(2)LCR CO Line Group Assignment (Program [7X23])
This program is used to assign CO lines available to access each
carrier.
LCR Routing Plan Tables

(1) LCR Leading Digit Entry (Program [7X01])
The user-dialled area code is compared with this table. If the
system finds out the same number in the table, a corresponding
LCR Time and Fee Set table (Program [7X11]) is applied to the
call.
(2) LCR Time and Fee Set (Program 7X11)
This table is used to register each carrier’s fee in pounds per minute
in each time zone. The system compares the current time and each
carrier’s charge fee by this table in order to decide the least
expensive carrier.
Features 3-97
L 3 Features
Example of programming tables
Route Plan Table 1
Leading digit table 1 Time zone and fee table 1
01 021 Monday Tuesday ••• Sunday
02 0333 Start time Fee Start time Fee ••• Start time Fee
03 0444 8:00AM 0.75 8:00AM 0.75 ••• All day 0.50
04 0555 9:00AM 1.00 9:00AM 1.00 •••
05 0666 1:00PM 0.75 1:00PM 0.75 •••
• • 6:00PM 0.50 6:00PM 0.50 •••
• •
• •
80
• •
• •
• •
Route Plan Table 8

03 0355 8:00AM 3.50 8:00AM 3.50 ••• All day 2.00
04 0577 9:00AM 5.00 9:00AM 5.00 •••
05 0588 1:00PM 3.50 1:00PM 3.50 •••
• • 6:00PM 2.00 6:00PM 2.00 •••
• •
• •
80
(3) LCR Carrier Modify Command (Program [7X22])

When the carrier is decided, this table is used to modify the user-
dialled number as appropriate for the carrier. This table has the
following commands:
C : Insert carrier code
P : Send a pause
T : Change to tone (DTMF) mode
A : Insert an Authorization code
I : Insert an Itemized code
H : Home Position — the original number is put here
A maximum of 16 commands can be assigned to a carrier.
3-98 Features
3 Features L
(4) Authorization Code Set (Program [7X24])
This is used to register an authorization code of a carrier to a CO
line. The code is inserted at the ‘A’ position of the LCR Carrier
Modify Command.
Example
Authorization code table
CO Authorization
No. Code
01 11111
02 22222
03 33333
• •
• •
• •
24 12121
(5) Itemized Code Set (Programs [7003] and [7004])

This is used to register an itemized code of an extension. The code
is inserted at the ‘I’ position of the LCR Carrier Modify Command.
Example
Itemized code table
Extension Itemized
No. Code
201 201
202 202
203 203
• •
• •
• •
364 364
(6) LCR Exceptional Code Set (Program [7X20])

This table is used to assign area codes that are excepted from LCR
routing plans of the specified carrier. If the system finds out the
same number as the user-dialled area code in this table, the call is
sent to the CO line selected from Automatic Line Access CO Line
Group Assignment table.
Features 3-99
L 3 Features
Example
LCR exceptional code table
01 0235
02 0332
• •
• •
• •
80
Programming Examples
(A) If you use BTL/MCL
If you use MCL only for long distance calls, you may program the
following tables to decide the carrier. In the table the wild card
characters “ ” substitute all the digits except the codes in the
LCR Exceptional Code Set table. All the dialled numbers except
for the excepted codes are sent to the MCL. The excepted codes
are sent to the BTL.
(1) Route Plan Table 1
02 Start time Fee Start time Fee ••• Start time Fee
03 •••
04 •••
05 •••
• • •••
• •
• •
80
(2) Exceptional code set table
01 0235
02 0332
• •
• •
• •
80
(B)If you use BTL/MCL/SPLASH TELECOM Line

If you use BTL/MCL/SPLASH TELECOM Line for long distance
calls, you may program the following tables to decide the carrier.
If you enter all area codes available, you should program eight
hundreds area codes. However, you can use the wild card
characters “ ” for the largest number of area code. The wild
card can be programmed at only one location of all the Leading
Digit Entry tables 1 through 8 and the Exceptional Code Set table.
3-100 Features
3 Features L
(1) Carrier Table for MCL
Route Plan Table 1 (“A” rate calls up to 56km)
03 0444 8:00AM 0.75 8:00AM 0.75 ••• All day 0.50
04 0555 9:00AM 1.00 9:00AM 1.00 •••
05 0666 1:00PM 0.75 1:00PM 0.75 •••
• • 6:00PM 0.50 6:00PM 0.50 •••
• •
• •
80
Route Plan Table 2 (“B1” rate calls on frequently used route over 56km)
03 0355 8:00AM 1.50 8:00AM 1.50 ••• All day 1.00
04 0577 9:00AM 2.00 9:00AM 2.00 •••
05 0588 1:00PM 1.50 1:00PM 1.50 •••
• • 6:00PM 1.00 6:00PM 1.00 •••
• •
• •
80
Route Plan Table 3 (“B” rate calls over 56km)

03 8:00AM 3.50 8:00AM 3.50 ••• All day 2.00
04 9:00AM 5.00 9:00AM 5.00 •••
05 1:00PM 3.50 1:00PM 3.50 •••
• • 6:00PM 2.00 6:00PM 2.00 •••
• •
• •
80
Exceptional table (Local Call)

01 0235
02 0332
• •
• •
• •
80
Features 3-101
L 3 Features
(2) Carrier Table for SPLASH TELECOM Line
Route Plan Table 1 (“A” rate calls up to 56km)
03 0444 8:00AM 0.50 8:00AM 0.50 ••• All day 0.40
04 0555 9:00AM 1.00 9:00AM 1.00 •••
05 0666 1:00PM 0.50 1:00PM 0.50 •••
• • 6:00PM 0.40 6:00PM 0.40 •••
• •
• •
80
Route Plan Table 2 (“B1” rate calls on frequently used route over 56km)
03 0355 8:00AM 1.20 8:00AM 1.20 ••• All day 1.20
04 0577 9:00AM 2.30 9:00AM 2.30 •••
05 0588 1:00PM 1.70 1:00PM 1.70 •••
• • 6:00PM 1.20 6:00PM 1.20 •••
• •
• •
80
Route Plan Table 3 (“B” rate calls over 56km)

03 8:00AM 4.50 8:00AM 4.50 ••• All day 1.00
04 9:00AM 5.00 9:00AM 5.00 •••
05 1:00PM 4.50 1:00PM 4.50 •••
• • 6:00PM 1.00 6:00PM 1.00 •••
• •
• •
80
Exceptional table (Local Call)

01 0235
02 0332
• •
• •
• •
80
3-102 Features
3 Features L
LCR Sequence chart
START
Dial 9 or
Dial 81-88 or
Press CO button or
Press Group-CO button or
Press Loop-CO button
INTERCOM indicator is on.
Check dialled number with emergency Hit Selects CO from Automatic access
dial table or BTL access code table CO line group table and dials out
Not Hit
Check dialled number with LCR Hit

carrier code table
Not Hit
[LCR sequence] [Carrier forced sequence]
Obtains each carrier’s charged fee by area Selects CO from LCR CO line group table
code and current time
CO indicator is on.
Compares each carrier’s charged fee and Modifies number by using LCR
selects least costly carrier carrier modification table
Selects CO in the LCR CO line group table Sends out number to CO
If the system cannot find out the area code

Modifies number by using LCR carrier
in LCR leading digit table or the area code
modification table
matches LCR exceptional code
Sends out number to CO Selects CO from Automatic

access CO line group table
and sends out number to CO
Features 3-103
L 3 Features
Conditions • Toll Restriction check is done before LCR is applied.
• LCR works according to the selected dialling plan. If the user-dialled
number is not found in the dialling plans, the dialled number is sent out
with Local Access (Automatic line access) Code.
• This feature also applies to Call Forwarding – to CO Line.
• The same code with different digits may be assigned in program [7X01]
“LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8” or in program [7X20]
“LCR Exceptional Code Set.” In this case, the code which has smaller
digits takes the more expensive route is priority. To prevent this, enter
“ ” (wild card) after the code with the smaller digits. Examples are
shown below:
<Examples>
(1) The code priority is as follows:
“044” in program [7201] > “0444” in program [7101]
In this case, “044 ” should be assigned in program [7201].
• When making a call to an ISDN line using the memory dialling, and the
number has a pause in it, the number after the pause will be sent to the
line as DTMF signals. This function is useful when accessing a special
network service which can be accessed only by the DTMF signaling.
Program [990], Area 07 – bit 1, is used to enable or disable this function
(default: disabled).
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic line access / LCR
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
[311] Emergency Dial Number Set
[677] PS Itemized Code Set
[7000] LCR Mode
[7002] BTL Access Code
[7003] Itemized Code Set
[7004] Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set
[7X01] LCR Leading Digit Entry
[7X11] LCR Time and Fee Set
[7X20] LCR Exceptional Code Set
[7X21] LCR Carrier Code
[7X22] LCR Carrier Modify Command
Note: [7X23] LCR CO Line Group Assignment
X=carrier number 1-8 [7X24] Authorization Code Set
3-104 Features
3 Features L
Line Access, Automatic

Features 3-105
L 3 Features
LED Indication, CO Line
Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the buttons
associated with CO lines tell the line conditions with a variety of
lighting patterns. This allows the user to determine which lines are
idle and which lines are in use. The table on the next page shows
the lighting patterns and line conditions according to the CO button
type.
LED Indicator CO Line Status

Off Idle
Green On I-use
Green slow flash I-hold
Green moderate flash I-Exclusive Hold
Green rapid flash Hold Recall / Incoming call
Red On Other-use
Red slow flash Other-hold
Flashing light (winks) patterns
Slow flash
Moderate flash
Rapid flash
1s
Conditions Red slow flash indication appears on the S-CO button only.

Button, Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Single-CO (S-CO)
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
3-106 Features
3 Features L
LED Indication, Intercom

Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicator of the INTERCOM
button indicates the line condition with a variety of lighting
patterns. This allows the user to see the current state of the
intercom line. The table below shows the lighting patterns and the
intercom line conditions.
INTERCOM Button Intercom Status
Off Idle
Green on Intercom call / Conference established
Green slow flash Intercom call hold
Green moderate flash Intercom call exclusive hold /
Consultation hold
Green rapid flash Incoming intercom / doorphone call
Conditions None

Busy Lamp Field
Features 3-107
L 3 Features
Description Limited Call Duration is a system programmable feature that
disconnects an outside call when a specified timer expires. A
warning tone is sent to the extension user 15 seconds, 10 seconds,
and 5 seconds before the time-limit. Limiting the call duration can
be enabled or disabled by Class of Service (COS) for each
extension.
Conditions It is programmable to select the limited call, either incoming and

outgoing call or outgoing call only.

Call Forwarding – to CO Line Call Transfer, Screened – to
CO Line

Description Allows the extension user to dial the automatic line access number
and access an idle line from the CO line groups assigned for the
extension. The proprietary telephone user can use the Loop-CO
button in place of the access number.
Conditions • This feature functions with Least Cost Routing (LCR), if LCR is
enabled. If so, the least expensive route is automatically selected.
• Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines
available to access.
• An idle CO line is selected from the CO line groups assigned to the
station. If one CO line group is available, an idle line is selected from
that group. If multiple CO line groups are available, the CO line group
hunting sequence is determined by system programming.
3-108 Features
3 Features L
• This feature requires a CO button (G-CO, L-CO or S-CO) assignment
on a proprietary telephone (PT). Dialling the line access code selects a
CO button on a PT according to the priority:
S-CO > G-CO > L-CO on a hunted CO line group
• If Idle Line Preference – Outgoing is set on the telephone, the user can
access an idle line only by going off-hook.
• The system waits for a programmed time before dialling after a CO line
is seized.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic line access / LCR
[211] Dial Start Time


Line Access, CO Line Group

Description Allows the extension user to dial access a CO line group. An idle
line is selected from the CO line group. To specify a CO line
group, dial the feature number (the default setting is “8”) and a
desired CO line group number (1 through 8). A proprietary
telephone user can also specify a CO line group by pressing a
Group-CO button.
Conditions • Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines

• An idle line is selected in sequence from the lines in the specified CO
line group.
• Group-CO buttons must be programmed prior to use.
• If Idle Line Preference – Outgoing is set on the telephone, the user can
access an idle line only by going off-hook.
Features 3-109
L 3 Features
[100] Flexible Numbering, CO line group line access
Customising the Buttons – Group-CO (G-CO) Button

Button, Group-CO (G-CO) CO Line Group
CO Line Connection
Assignment – Outgoing

Line Access, Direct

Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to select a CO line by
pressing an idle CO button, which automatically establishes
handsfree operation mode and allows the user to perform On-Hook
Dialling. The user need not press the SP-PHONE button,
MONITOR button nor lift the handset.
Conditions • There are three types of CO buttons which can be programmed on an

extension: Single-CO button, Group-CO button, and Loop-CO button.
• Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines
Customising the Buttons – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button
3-110 Features
3 Features L
Button, Group-CO (G-CO) CO Line Connection Assignment
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO) – Outgoing
Button, Single-CO (S-CO)

Line Access, Individual

Description Allows the proprietary telephone user one-button access to a CO
line without having to dial a line access code.
Conditions • Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines

• This feature requires a Single-CO (S-CO) button assignment on a
• The system waits for a programmed time before dialling after a CO line
is seized.
— Day / Night
Customising the Buttons – Single-CO (S-CO) Button

Button, Single-CO (S-CO) CO Line Connection
Assignment – Outgoing

Features 3-111
L 3 Features
Line Preference – Incoming (No Line / Prime Line / Ringing Line)
Description A proprietary telephone user can select the method used to answer
incoming calls from the following three line preferences:
(1) No Line Preference
No line is selected when you go off-hook. You must select
a line to answer.
(2) Prime Line Preference
You can assign a prime line beforehand and answer a call
on that line, when multiple calls are received
simultaneously.
(3) Ringing Line Preference
When you go off-hook, you answer the call ringing at your
telephone.
Conditions • Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting.
• If Prime Line Preference is selected and an incoming call arrives from a
line other than the prime line, it cannot be answered just by going off-
hook. The Prime Line should be assigned to the Single-CO button.
• If Ringing Line Preference is selected, going off-hook does not answer
a line programmed for “no ring” even though there is an incoming call.
Going off-hook during the delay time does not answer a line
programmed for “delayed ringing.”
• A single line telephone is always set to Ringing Line Preference and
cannot be changed.
Initial Settings – Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming

3-112 Features
3 Features L
Line Preference – Outgoing (Idle Line / No Line / Prime Line)
Description A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line
preference to originate calls from the following three line
preferences:
(1) Idle Line Preference:
When you go off-hook, you are connected to an idle line.
An idle line is automatically selected from the pre-assigned
lines.
(2) No Line Preference:
No line is selected when you go off-hook. You must select
a line to make a call.
(3) Prime Line Preference:
When you go off-hook, you are connected to the pre-
assigned line. Assign a line as your prime line beforehand.
Conditions • Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting.
• To set Prime Line Preference, one prime line is selected from intercom
or CO lines.
• The CO lines used by users must be connected by programming.
• To select Idle Line Preference, CO lines available for the user should be
programmed. Also CO lines available for Automatic Line Access
should be assigned.
• The user can override the Idle / Prime Line Preference temporarily to
select a specific line. To select it, press the desired line access button
(INTERCOM or CO button) before going off-hook or pressing the SP-
PHONE / MONITOR button; or if Full One-Touch Dialling is enabled,
press One-Touch Dialling, DSS, REDIAL, or SAVE button.
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Initial Settings – Preferred Line Assignment – Outgoing
Customising the Buttons – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button


Features 3-113
L 3 Features
Live Call Screening (LCS)†
Description Allows a proprietary telephone user to monitor their voice mailbox
while incoming callers are leaving a message and, if desired,
intercept the call. The voice mailbox can be monitored in one of
two ways — Hands-free or Private.
Hands-free Mode
The voice mailbox is monitored through the built-in speaker
of the proprietary telephone.
Private Mode
The proprietary telephone sounds an alert tone when callers
are connected to the voice mailbox. To monitor the call, the
user goes off hook on the handset or speakerphone.
Alert Tone
1s
To intercept the call in either Hands-Free or Private mode, press the

LCS button.
A single line telephone, which is connected with a proprietary
telephone in parallel, can be also used to monitor a recording
message. Be sure that the Live Call Screening on the connected
proprietary telephone has been activated.
This feature is useful when you are out with a portable handset of a
cordless telephone (SLT). The handset sounds an alert tone to let
you know that a message is being recorded. To intercept the call,
lift the handset and flash the hookswitch.
Conditions • When the extension user is having a conversation, a call waiting tone is
sent. The user can put an existing call on hold before accessing LCS.
• A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Live Call Screening
button.
• To prevent unauthorized monitoring, a three-digit password must be set
by the LCS user. If the user forgets his password, it can be cleared by
the operator.
• Each extension can be programmed to either close the mailbox or keep
recording the conversation after the call is intercepted.
3 Features L
System Programming,
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
Initial Settings – Live Call Screening Private Mode Set
Customising the Buttons — Live Call Screening Button
Live Call Screening Cancel Button

—User Manual If a Voice Processing System is Connected
– Screening calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
Operator Operation – Extension Control
Changing the Settings – Live Call Screening Password Control
Lockout
Description If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, they are both
disconnected from the speech path automatically. This feature
applies to extension and outside calls. Reorder tone is sent to the
off-hook party before it is disconnected.
Conditions In the case of a single line telephone (SLT), if nothing is dialled within a
certain period of time after the other party goes on-hook, reorder tone is
sent to the SLT and then it is disconnected from the speech path.
Features 3-115
L 3 Features
Log-In / Log-Out
Description Assigns an extension to join (log-in) or leave (log-out) a hunting
group. Extensions in log-out status receive no calls by Station
Hunting but can receive other calls, unlike the DND feature.
Conditions • There should be at least one extension that is in log-in status. Only one
log-in extension cannot be set in log-out status.
• The lighting patterns of Log-In/Log-Out button and the status are
shown below.
Lighting pattern CO Line Status
Red on Log-Out (no reception)
Flashing Red Log-In (multiple reception)
Off Log-In
[100] Flexible Numbering, log-in / log-out
Customising the Buttons – Log-In / Log-Out Button

Station Hunting Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

—User Manual Leaving a Call Distribution Group (Log-In / Log-Out)
3-116 Features
3 Features M
Manager Extension
Description One extension in the system can be assigned as the system
manager. This extension can perform system programming.
Conditions • Besides the manager extension, the extension that is connected to the
jack 1 is able to perform system programming.
• If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the manager extension, the
proprietary telephone user is regarded as the manager.
• Manager extension can print out and clear the system working report.
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night
Message Waiting
Description The system supports the ability to inform the called party of a
message waiting. The user, with a MESSAGE button, knows there
is a message if the LED of the MESSAGE button is lit red. If the
button is neither provided nor assigned, the called party hears
special dial tone, when he / she goes off-hook. Pressing the lit
MESSAGE button also means to call back the called party or listen
to the messages which are stored in the mailbox of the Voice
Processing System.
Conditions • For the proprietary telephone which is provided with no MESSAGE

button, a flexible CO button can be assigned as the MESSAGE button
either by system or station programming.
• Cancelling the message can be performed from the extension setting it
or from the extension receiving it.
• The system supports a maximum of 128 simultaneous messages.
• Messages are always left on the original extension. It is not sent to a
Call Forwarding or Station Hunting destination.
• A single line telephone user will hear the ring tone if a message is
received. It is programmable to set the ring tone interval by system
programming.
Features 3-117
M 3 Features
[100] Flexible Numbering, Message waiting
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
[990] System Additional Information Area 01 – Bit 15, Area 05 – Bit 4
Customising the Buttons – Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button

Dial Tone, Distinctive Voice Mail Integration

– Leaving a message waiting indication (Message Waiting)
Operation – Using User-supplied Equipment
If a Voice Processing System is Connected – Voice mail integration
Microphone Mute
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone,
for privacy reasons.
Conditions • This is effective for the microphone only; only your voice will be muted
during a handsfree conversation.
• The user can hear the other party’s voice during Microphone Mute.

—User Manual Mute
3-118 Features
3 Features M
Mixed Station Capacities
Description This system supports a wide range of telephone sets, not only
Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPT) and Analogue Proprietary
Telephones (APT) in the Digital Super Hybrid System, but also
single line LD telephones (10 pps / 20 pps, employing dial pulse
signals) and single line MF4 telephones. The super hybrid method
used in this system allows any telephone to be connected to an
extension jack without an adaptor.
Conditions • If a telephone is replaced by another one, the stored data (such as

feature button storage) is held for the new one.
• It is possible to ignore the pulse dial by system programming. In this
case, a single line LD telephone does not function.
[121] Pulse Dial Reception Assignment
Features 3-119
M 3 Features
Module Expansion
Description The KX-TD816 starts with 8 extension jacks and the KX-TD1232
starts with 16 extension jacks. It can be expanded by installing
optional cards and units.
For both systems:
• An 8-Station Line Unit adds 8 extension jacks.
• A 4-CO Line Unit adds 4 CO line jacks.
• A 2-ISDN S0 Line Unit adds 2 ISDN S0 lines.
• A 6-ISDN S0 Line Unit adds 6 ISDN S0 lines.
For KX-TD816 only:
• A 4-CO Line Card adds 4 CO line jacks.
• A 2-ISDN S0 Line Card adds 2 ISDN S0 lines.
For KX-TD1232 only:
• An 8-CO Line Card adds 8 CO line jacks.
• A 4-ISDN S0 Line Card adds 4 ISDN S0 lines.
The KX-TD816 can have a maximum of one 8-Station Line Unit,

one of 4-CO Line / 2-ISDN S0 Line / 6-ISDN S0 Line Cards and
one of 4-CO Line / 2-ISDN S0 Line Units.
The KX-TD1232 can have a maximum of two 8-Station Line Unit,
one of 8-CO Line / 4-ISDN S0 Line / 6-ISDN S0 Line Cards and
one of 4-CO Line / 2-ISDN S0 Line Units.
Conditions • The number of extension jacks may be different from the number of
telephones if the Parallelled Telephone or the eXtra Device Port feature is
enabled. These features allow one extension jack to have two telephones.
• When an expansion unit is installed, the unit identification is set by
system programming.

EXtra Device Port (XDP) Parallelled Telephone
3-120 Features
3 Features M
Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN) Ringing Service
Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN line call to a
pre-assigned extension. One ISDN port can support a maximum of
ten Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN).
Assignable destinations are: (1) Operator, (2) extension,
(3) Hunting Group, (4) TAFAS, (5) modem, (6) Phantom extension,
(7) Voice Mail extension and (8) ISDN extension.
The extensions which are assigned in programs [438]–[439]
“Extension Ringing Assignment – Day / Night for ISDN” receive a
call if the dialled number matches the stored MSN.
<Example>
[437] [438] Extension Ringing [439] Extension Ringing

ISDN Port Location Multiple Subscriber Assignment — Day Assignment — Night
No. No. Number Set for ISDN for ISDN
01 -1 2011111 201 201
-2 2012222 202 202
:
-10
Conditions • An incoming MSN number is converted as programmed in [111] “ISDN

DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment.”
• To use the MSN ringing service, “MSN” must be selected in program
[420]/[429] “ISDN Ring Service Assignment — Day / Night.”
• If an MSN number through the ISDN line does not match the number
assigned in program [437] “Multiple Subscriber Number Set,” the call
will not be received. If no MSN numbers are assigned in program
[437], the call will be sent to an extension according to DIL 1:1 or DIL
1:N.
• When using point-to-multi-point configuration with a Basic Rate
Interface (BRI), we recommend not connecting another ISDN
equipment in parallel with your system. As only two channels can be
used at one time with the BRI, other ISDN equipment may monopolize
the channels.
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension – Day / Night
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment — Day / Night for ISDN
Features 3-121
M 3 Features
Music on Hold
Description While a party is on hold, music is automatically sent.
Conditions • Operations such as Call Hold, Exclusive Call Hold or Consultation

Hold generates Music on Hold. In case of Call Transfer, it is possible to
assign either Music on Hold or ringback tone is generated.
• The system has an internal music source. However it may be necessary to
connect a user-supplied external music source such as a radio to the system.
Up to two music sources can be connected per system. It is required to
select the internal or external music source in program [990], Area 02 –
bit 10.
• The music source is used for Music on Hold and / or BGM. Select a
music source for each usage.
• Music on Hold of the Music Source 1 can be changed to a beep tone in
program [990], Area 07 – bit 7.
Area 07 – Bit 7

3-122 Features
3 Features N
Night Service
Description This supports both Night and Day modes of operation. The system
operation for originating and receiving calls can be different for day
and night modes. The system operation for restricting toll calls can
be arranged separately to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night.
Switching of the Day / Night Mode
Day / Night mode can be switched either automatically at a pre-
assigned time or manually by the pre-assigned extension or the
operator at any time desired.
Class of Service programming determines the extensions that can
perform it.
Automatic Night Service: The system will switch the Day /
Night mode at the programmed time each day. The starting
time of the Day / Night mode can be set for each day.
Manual Night Service: Operator and the pre-assigned
extension can switch the Day / Night mode manually.
Conditions The following programming items may be assigned in a different way

between day mode and night mode:
[021]–[022] Doorphone Call Forwarding — Day / Night
[137]–[138] UCD Time Table Assignment — Day / Night
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment — Day / Night for
ISDN MSN
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialling
— Day / Night
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
— Day / Night
— Day / Night
— Day / Night for ISDN Extension
[620]–[621] Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night
[629]–[630] Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment — Day /
Night for TD286 Extension
Features 3-123
N 3 Features
[100] Flexible Numbering, Night service mode
[101] Day / Night Service Switching Mode
[102] Day / Night Service Starting Time
[513] Night Service Access
Customising the Buttons – Night Button

—User Manual Checking the Day / Night Service Status
Operator Operation – System Control
Day / Night Service
No Reply Group
Description Extensions or ring groups can belong to the no reply group. If the
floating number of this group is dialed, the call is hunted in the
group in the order of registration at a pre-programmed “Call
Forwarding — No Answer Time.” If the called extension or ring
group is busy, the call skips to the next extension or the ring group.
A no reply group can be a Station Hunting type.
.
Conditions • Types of calls whose destination can be the no reply group are:
Outside calls — DIL1:1; DDI; IRNA; Hunting Group-Overflow
Intercom calls — Extension; Transfer
• The floating number of the hunting group is used for all other hunting
types, Circular, Voice Mail (VM), Automated Attendant (AA), Uniform
Call Distribution (UCD) and Ring.

Floating Extension Station Hunting
3-124 Features
3 Features N
Notebook Function
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to store the phone number in
the memory during conversation on the phone or on-hook status.
The stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation.
Conditions • The outside line, which was connected when the user stored the number is
selected when re-dialling the number. If the line is busy, the busy tone is sent.
• The pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the CO line access
number and the following phone number (Automatic Pause Insertion).

—User Manual Saving a Number (Notebook Function)
Features 3-125
O 3 Features
Description OHCA allows you to inform a busy extension that another call is
waiting by talking through the built-in speaker of the called party’s
proprietary telephone. If the existing call is using the handset,
the second conversation is made with the speakerphone so that the
called party can talk to two parties independently. OHCA is
performed the same way as Busy Station Signalling (BSS) or
Whisper OHCA. It depends on the telephone type used by the called
party whether Call Waiting, OHCA or Whisper OHCA is activated
by the operation. If the called telephone is one of the following,
OHCA becomes active: KX-T7130, KX-T7235, KX-T7436.
Conditions • Class of Service programming determines which extensions can

perform this feature.
• If none of three features, Call Waiting, OHCA or Whisper OHCA is set
at the called party, the caller will hear a reorder tone.

Busy Station Signaling (BSS) Whisper OHCA
Call Waiting

Off-Hook Monitor
Description Allows the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, and KX-T7436 digital proprietary
telephone users to let the other users listen to the conversation
through the built-in speaker, while continuing the same call using the
handset.
Conditions This is effective with a handset conversation.
3-126 Features
3 Features O
[148] Off-Hook Monitor

—User Manual Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-Hook Monitor)
One-Touch Dialling
Description One-Touch Dialling offers the proprietary telephone (PT) user one-
touch access to a desired party or system feature. This is enabled
by storing an extension number, a telephone number or a feature
number of up to 24-digits on a One-Touch Dialling button. The
number of buttons available depends on the type of PT. One-Touch
Dialling buttons can be programmed to flexible buttons: CO, DSS
or PF (Programmable Feature).
Conditions • It is possible to store an account code into a One-Touch Dialling button.

• Speed Dialling, One-Touch Dialling, manual dialling, Last Number
Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used together.
• It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by
dividing it and storing it in two One-Touch Dialling buttons. In this
case, a line access code should not be stored on the second button.
• If the Full One-Touch Dialling is enabled, there is no need to go off-
hook, before pressing the One-Touch Dialling button.
Initial Settings – Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment
Customising the Buttons – One-Touch Dialling Button


—User Manual Easy Dialling – With one touch button (One-Touch Dialling)
One-Touch Access for System Features
Features 3-127
O 3 Features
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Description This feature, if programmed, allows the Console and the
proprietary telephone user to hold an outside call and quickly
transfer it to an extension. While talking to an outside party,
pressing a DSS button on the console or the proprietary telephone
provides automatic hold and transfer. There is no need to press the
TRANSFER button. The extension starts ringing immediately.
Conditions • One-Touch Transfer cannot be performed when there is another call on

Consultation Hold.
• If One-Touch Transfer mode is disabled, the user transfers an outside
call by pressing the TRANSFER button followed by the DSS button.
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button

Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS)

3-128 Features
3 Features O
Operator
Description The system supports up to two operators during day and night
modes separately. Any extension can be appointed as an operator.
The extension assigned as an operator has the ability to perform the
following operations:
• Controlling Incoming Call Log Lock mode
• Clearing the Live Call Screening Password
• Performing the Hotel Application
• Printing / clearing the System Working Report
• Setting / clearing the Remote Station Lock
• Switching the Class of Service – primary / secondary
• Switching Day / Night mode manually
• Turning Background Music – External on and off
• Recording / playing outgoing messages
Only Operator 1 has the ability to perform the following operations:
• Setting the Automatic Overflow
• Setting the Hurry-Up Transfer
• Receiving the Alert Indication
• Receiving the call which is transferred from DND extension
Conditions • If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the operator’s extension, the
proprietary telephone user is regarded as the operator.
• The operator can be assigned as a destination of the Transfer Recall by
system programming.
• The Direct Dialling In call which is denied to receive by the extension
or is dialled improper number is forwarded to the operator.
• The Alert Indication is only available for Operator 1 in Day mode.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Night service mode, Background music –
external, Primary COS select, Secondary COS select, Timed
reminder remote, Incoming call log lock, Live call screening
password control, System working report, outgoing messages
[129] Operator Queue
Customising the Buttons – Hurry-Up Button,
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
Features 3-129
O 3 Features
Operation References Operator Operation
—User Manual
Operator Call
Description Allows the extension user to call an extension operator by dialling
the feature number, if at least one operator is assigned. There can
be one or two extensions assigned as Operator 1 and 2.
When an operator call (default: 0) is made, the call is connected to
Operator 1. If the Operator 1’s line is busy, the call is connected to
Operator 2.
Conditions None
[100] Flexible Numbering, Operator call, Operator 1 call, Operator 2 call

– To an operator (Operator Call)
3-130 Features
3 Features O
Outgoing Message (OGM)
Description Allows the extension assigned as an operator to record outgoing
voice messages. There are two types of outgoing messages that can
be recorded.
UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) message:
If assigned in the UCD Time Table, this message is played
when all extensions in an UCD group are busy or not available.
There can be four different UCD messages.
Timed Reminder message:
This message is used in Timed Reminder. When answering
the Timed Reminder alarm (often used as a wake-up call), the
user will hear this message. There can be only one Timed
Reminder message.
After recording these messages, the operator can also play them
back for confirmation.
Conditions • A Message Unit or Card is required to program the OGM. One unit or
card can be installed per system. System Connection*1 permits two
Message Units or Cards.
• If only one system has the Message Unit or Card during System
Connection*1, the UCD message can be activated only in the system which
has the unit or card, but the Timed Reminder message can be activated in
both systems. If both systems have their own Message Unit or Card, the
same UCD or Timed Reminder message is recorded for both simultaneously.
• A maximum of four messages can be recorded per Message Unit or
Card, and two messages can be played at the same time.
• To use the Timed Reminder message, the recorded OGM number must
be selected by system programming.
2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit / Message Unit*2 Installation
2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card*2 / Message Card Installation
[216] Outgoing Message Time
[818] Timed Reminder Message Assignment

Timed Reminder Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

—User Manual Recording Outgoing Messages
*1: Available for the KX-TD1232 only. Features 3-131

P 3 Features
PAGING FEATURES – SUMMARY
Description Paging allows you to make a voice announcement to multiple
persons at the same time. Your message is announced over the
built-in speakers of proprietary telephones and / or external
speakers (external pagers). The paged person can answer your page
from a nearby telephone. Making and answering a page is possible
from either a proprietary or single line telephone. You can do
paging with a call on hold in order to transfer the call (Paging and
Transfer). It is also possible to deny the page.
Paging features are classified as follows:
Paging – All
Paging – External
Paging – Group
Paging – All
Description Allows you to make a voice announcement from the speakers of the
proprietary telephones and from the external paging devices
(external pagers). If one of the paged persons answers your paging,
you can talk to the person through the connected line.
Conditions • If System Connection* is established, paging is performed to all

proprietary telephones and all external paging devices in both systems.
• The confirmation tone is sent to extensions, when the paging is made or
answered. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers, before the voice
announcement. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• The ringing or busy extension cannot receive a page.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external, Paging – external answer /
TAFAS answer, Paging – group, Paging – group answer, Paging –
deny
Customising the Buttons – Paging Deny Button

3 Features P
Operation References Operation – Making / Answering an Announcement

—User Manual Operation – Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
Denying the Paged Announcement (Paging – DENY)
Paging – External
Description Allows you to make a voice announcement using external paging
devices (external pagers). Up to two pagers can be contained per
system. It is possible to select one or two pagers to perform your
paging. Any telephone user can answer your Paging – External.
Conditions • Previous connection of an external pager is required.

• External pagers can be used for TAFAS, Paging – External, or
Background Music (BGM) – External in this order. For example, if
Paging – External is overridden by TAFAS, reorder tone is returned to
the performer of the Paging – External. If BGM is overridden by
another higher priority, it is interrupted and starts again when the higher
priority is finished.
• If System Connection* is established, up to four pagers are available.
• The confirmation tone is sent to the extensions and external pager,
when the paging is made or answered. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
• The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers before the voice
announcement. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external, Paging – external answer /
TAFAS answer, Paging – deny

P 3 Features
Paging – Group
Description Allows you to select an extension group and make a voice
announcement. All the proprietary telephones in the group will
receive the page. If a member of the paged group answers your
paging, you can talk to the person through the connected line.
Conditions • To select all groups pages all extensions.

• Confirmation tone is sent when the page is made or answered.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – group, Paging – group answer,
Paging – deny

Extension Group

3-134 Features
3 Features P
Description Any proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with a
single line telephone. The following two combinations of
telephones are available:
(1)APT + SLT (an analogue proprietary telephone and a
single line telephone/device)
(2)DPT + SLT (a digital proprietary telephone and a single
line telephone/device)
When a parallel connection is made, an extension user can make
and answer a call using either telephone.
Conditions • The proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to perform normal

operations whether or not the SLT is enabled.
• In the SLT + DPT combination, if one telephone goes off-hook while
the other telephone is on a call, the call is switched to the former.
• In the SLT + APT combination, if one telephone goes off-hook while
the other telephone is on a call, a three-party call is established. If one
user goes on-hook, the other user continues the call.
• When receiving a call;
The SLT is enabled; Both the PT and the SLT ring except when the PT
is in Handsfree Answerback mode or Voice Alerting mode.
The SLT is disabled; PT rings but the SLT does not ring. However the
SLT can answer the phone.
• When the SLT is in operation, the display and LED indicator on the
paired PT will show in the same way as if the PT is in operation.
• If APT + SLT are used, the extension user cannot originate a call from
the SLT if the APT is:
– playing BGM
– in programming mode
– receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker.
• If eXtra Device Port feature is available, a DPT+ SLT can act as
• Call Waiting tone can be heard only by PT.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Parallel telephone mode
Customising the Buttons – Paralleled Telephone Connection Button
Features 3-135
P 3 Features

—User Manual Setting the Parallel Connected Telephone Ringer (Paralleled Telephone)
Pause Insertion, Automatic

Description This function is used to insert a pre-assigned pause between the CO
line access number, the host PBX, or carrier access code and the
successively dialled digits.
Conditions • This feature requires previous programming of CO line access number

and host PBX access codes as well as assignment of the pause duration.
• This feature works for Speed Dialling, One-Touch Dialling, Last
Number Redial, Saved Number Redial, Pickup Dialling, Call
Forwarding – to CO Line as well as for ordinary calls.
• Pressing the PAUSE button in dialling number inserts a pause for a pre-
assigned time.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic line access / LCR, CO line group
line access
[412] Pause Time

Host PBX Access Toll Restriction
3-136 Features
3 Features P
Phantom Extension
Description Allows the system to route the calls to a phantom extension. A call
to a phantom extension arrives at an extension who has the
corresponding Phantom Extension button. A Phantom Extension
button can be assigned by Station Programming.
Conditions • Types of calls whose destination can be the phantom extension are:
Outside calls – DIL 1:1; DDI; IRNA; Hunting Group-Overflow
• You can call the phantom extension by pressing the Phantom Extension
button or by dialling the phantom extension number. If several
extensions have the same phantom extension button, they will ring
simultaneously.
• A phantom number must be assigned by System Programming before
assigning the Phantom Extension button by Station Programming.
• There is a maximum of 128 phantom numbers. Each number has two to
four digits, consisting of numbers 0 through 9.
• The phantom number cannot be used for feature settings such as Call
Forwarding.
• The lighting patterns and status of the Phantom Extension button are
shown below.
Lighting pattern Phantom Extension Status
Off Idle
Red on Calling a phantom extension
Green rapid flash Incoming call
• A DSS button can be assigned as the Phantom Extension button so that
the operator can use the button for transferring a call.
[130] Phantom Extension Number Assignment
Customising the Buttons – Phantom Extension Button
– To set a phantom extension ringing or not

—User Manual Easy Dialling – To a Phantom extension
Features 3-137
P 3 Features
Pickup Dialling
Description Allows an extension user to make an outgoing call by going off-
hook, if the user has previously stored the telephone number. This
feature is also known as Hot Line.
Conditions • An LD telephone without the “#” button cannot program this feature.
For programming the phone number, replace the LD telephone with a
telephone with the “#” button temporarily.
• The user uses a feature number to enable or disable pickup dialling.
• If the feature is enabled and the user goes off-hook, dial tone is
generated for the waiting time and then dialling starts. During the
waiting time the user can dial another party, overriding the Pickup
Dialling function.
• If the user answers an incoming call or retrieves a call on hold, the
Pickup Dialling feature does not work.
• If the proprietary telephone is provided with PF 12 button, the stored
number of PF12 button is common to the one for Pickup Dialling.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Pickup dialling
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
Customising the Buttons – Pickup Dialling Button

—User Manual Easy Dialling – To a pre-set party by going off-hook (Pickup Dialling)
Power Failure Restart

Description Returning on electricity, the system restarts the stored data
automatically. Before restarting, the system records the error logs
if necessary.
Conditions • If System Connection* is established, the Slave system makes a copy of

the restored data of the Master system.

3 Features P
• In the event of a power failure, system memory is protected by the
factory-provided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the
memories of Camp-On and Call Park. However if the system finds the
wrong system data, the indication “Memory data loss” is displayed on
the display proprietary telephone of Operator 1.
Power Failure Transfer

Description If a power failure should happen, or during a system-off-line state,
single line telephone (SLT) which is connected the Power Failure
jack should be connected straight to specific CO lines.
Connections between the CO lines and the SLTs are as follows:
KX-TD816
The power failure transfer jacks – CO 1, 2, 5
KX-TD1232
The power failure transfer jacks of Master System – CO 1, 2, 9
The power failure transfer jacks of Slave System – CO 13, 14, 21
Conditions • Only SLT is available during a power failure.

• If the power is restored during a call using a SLT, the call is
disconnected.
2.5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer

Power Failure Restart
Features 3-139
P 3 Features
Predial
Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to check and correct
the dialled number in on-hook state before going off-hook. When
going off-hook, making a call is initiated.
Conditions • This feature is available during stand-by state only.

• A line access number is always required to make an outgoing outside
call.
• Making a call is performed at the time the handset is lifted up or the CO
or SP-PHONE button is pressed.

Private Call
Description Allows the user to exclude private calls from the SMDR printout.
When making a private call, if the user enters the pre-set account
code, the dialled number is not included in the SMDR printout.
Conditions • It is required to program the account code for private calls in program
[105] “Account Code.” The location 001 of the entries is used as the
account code for this feature.
• To prevent private calls, clear the entry above.
[105] Account Codes
Change Fee Management

Account Code Entry Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)

—User Manual Calling without Restrictions – Using an account code (Account Code
Entry)
3-140 Features
3 Features P
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Description This feature allows the extension user to change from pulse dial to
tone (DTMF) dial so that the user can access special services such
as computer-accessed long distance service.
Conditions • This feature works only on CO lines set to Pulse Dialling mode or Call
Blocking mode.
• Dial Type Selection provides selection of a dial mode for each CO line.
• Changing tone to pulse is not possible.
[402] Dial Mode Selection

Dial Type Selection

—User Manual Calling without Restrictions – Changing the dialling mode (Pulse to Tone
Conversion)
Features 3-141
Q 3 Features
Quick Dialling
Description Quick Dialling offers the extension user one-touch access to a
desired party. This is enabled by storing an extension number or a
telephone number up to 24-digits as a quick dial number.
Conditions • Up to eighty quick dial numbers can be stored.

• For example, Quick Dialling is convenient for room service calls in a
hotel.
• You must assign a feature number first in program [104] “Quick Dial
Assignment,” and then a quick dial number in program [009] “Quick
Dial Number Set” in order for Quick Dial to be effective.
Example: If you want to dial “1” to call extension 201;
1) Change or clear the feature numbers which have “1” in the first digit
in program [100].
2) Assign “1” in the location number 01 in program [104].
3) Assign “201” in a quick dial location number 01 (same location
number as the location number 01 in program [104]) in program [009].
Now you can dial the quick dial number 1 to call extension 201.
• Quick Dialling is available even if the toll restriction level is 6 which
denies the intercom callings.
[009] Quick Dial Number Set
[104] Quick Dial Assignment

—User Manual Easy Dialling – Using a single digit number (Quick Dialling)
3-142 Features
3 Features R
Recall
Description The RECALL or FLASH/RCL button is used to allow a digital
proprietary telephone user to disconnect from the current call and
originate another call without hanging up first.
Conditions • By default setting, pressing RECALL or FLASH/RCL button with a

digital proprietary telephone works as External Feature Access. By
changing the programmed data, it works as Recall (disconnection).
• Pressing the RECALL or FLASH/RCL button re-starts the conversation
duration, outputs an SMDR record, inserts the automatic pause, and
checks toll restriction level again.
• It is required to enable this function at the locked extension and toll-
restricted extension by system programming.

External Feature Access
Features 3-143
R 3 Features
Redial, Automatic
Description This is a special feature for the digital proprietary telephones, that
provides automatic redialling of the last dialled, saved number or
call log, if the called party is busy. If the Last Number Redial,
Saved Number Redial, CO Incoming / Outgoing Call Log operation
or Notebook function is performed handsfree, the telephone set will
hang up and try again after a pre-determined period of time.
Conditions • Redial Repeat Time and Interval Time can be changed by system
programming.
• Pressing RECALL or FLASH/RCL button allows the system to cancel
this feature.
• If any dialling operation is done during Automatic Redial, this function
is finished.
• This feature is not available with KX-T7250.
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time

Redial, Last Number Redial, Saved Number

—User Manual Redial
Redial, Last Number

Description Every telephone in the system automatically saves the last
telephone number dialled to a CO line and allows the extension
user to dial the same number again.
Conditions • With a proprietary telephone, REDIAL button is used to carry out Last
Number Redial. With a single line telephone, the feature number is
used.
• The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least
one digit to be sent to a CO line is dialled. Dialling a CO line access
code alone does not change the memorized number.
• Certain types of proprietary telephones allow automatic multiple
redialling (Automatic Redial).
3-144 Features
3 Features R
[100] Flexible Numbering, Last number redial

Redial, Automatic

—User Manual Redial – Redialling the last number you dialled (Last Number Redial)
Redial, Saved Number

Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to save a telephone number
and redial the number afterwards. The user can store it while in
conversation on a CO line. The saved number can be redialled
many times until another one is stored.
Conditions • Certain types of proprietary telephones (PT) allow automatic multiple

redialling (Automatic Redial).
• If the SAVE button is not provided on your PT, it is possible to assign a
flexible button to be the SAVE button.
Customising the Buttons – SAVE Button

Button, Flexible Redial, Automatic

—User Manual Redial – Saving the number and redialling (Saved Number Redial)
Features 3-145
R 3 Features
Description The operator is given the privilege of controlling Electronic Station
Lockout on any station.
Conditions Remote Station Lock Control is superior to Electronic Station Lockout.

If Station Lockout has already been set by the extension user and Remote
Station Lock is set by the operator, cancelling the lock is only possible by
the operator.

Operation References Operator Operation – Extension Control

—User Manual Changing the Settings – Remote Station Lock Control
Reverse Circuit
Description This feature can be used to detect a reversal of CO line polarity
from Central Office, when trying to make a CO line call. This is
useful for determining the start and completion of CO line calls.
Conditions This feature needs system programming for each CO line.
[416] Reverse Circuit Assignment
3-146 Features
3 Features R
Ringing, Delayed
Description If Direct In Lines (DIL) 1:N is established, a telephone set is
originally set to ring instantly. This setting can be changed to
delayed ringing, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) on a CO
line number basis.
Conditions • This feature does not apply to DIL 1:1 calls.

• If delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) is assigned to an
extension, the extension can answer an incoming call during no ring or
the delay time by pressing the flashing button.

Ringing, Discriminating
Description Allows the extension user to identify the incoming call by the
ringing pattern. (See Section 5.1 “Tone / Ring Tone.”)
Conditions • When there are multiple incoming calls and the extension goes from
off-hook to on-hook, the calls are rung according to the following
priority:
<1> Consultation Hold Recall
<2> An incoming call from a line in which the Prime Line
Preference – Incoming function has been set (with a
proprietary telephone only)
<3> Call Waiting
<4> Incoming calls; Hold Recall; Transfer Recall
• If multiple incoming calls arrive at an on-hook extension
simultaneously, priority as to which calls should be rung is generally on
a “first-come, first-served” basis. In the case of proprietary telephones
(PT), however, when the Prime Line Preference – Incoming function
has been set, this line takes precedence.
• Incoming TAFAS calls can be identified by ringing signals sent out
from external pagers. The ringing pattern is the same as the outside
calls.
Features 3-147
R 3 Features
• The digital PT user can select a desired tone frequency for each CO
button and the INTERCOM button.

Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls
Ring Group
Description All extensions in a ring group ring simultaneously by dialling the
floating number of the extension group. A ring group can be a
Station Hunting type.
Conditions • Types of calls whose destination can be the ring group are:
Outside calls — DIL1:1; DDI; IRNA; Hunting Group-Overflow
Intercom calls — Extension; Transfer
• The floating number of the hunting group is used for all other hunting
types, Circular, Voice Mail (VM), Automated Attendant (AA), Uniform
Call Distribution (UCD) and No Reply.

Floating Station Station Hunting
3-148 Features
3 Features R
Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to select the desired
ringer frequency for each CO button. This provides discrimination
of incoming outside calls.
Conditions There are eight ringer frequencies available. One of them can be assigned
to a CO button that is assigned as each of the following buttons: Single-
CO, Group-CO, or Loop-CO button. It is not possible to assign a ringer
frequency to any other button.
Customising the Buttons – To distinguish the ringing tones for each CO
button

Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to select the desired
ringer frequency for the intercom button. This distinguishes
incoming intercom calls.
Conditions There are eight ringer frequencies available. One of them can be assigned
to an intercom button.
Customising the Buttons – To change the ringing tone for intercom calls
Features 3-149
S 3 Features
Secret Dialling
Description Allows an extension user to conceal all or part of a registered
telephone number that normally appears on the display during
System Speed Dialling or One-Touch Dialling. Numbers can be
assigned to Programmable Feature buttons on PT and Consoles.
When a display telephone user makes a call to the telephone
number that is set to Secret Dialling, all or part of the number does
not appear on the display. Additionally, KX-T7235, KX-T7431,
KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 model telephones are capable of secret
dialling for “Station Speed Dialling” numbers.
Conditions • When storing a number, press the INTERCOM button at the beginning
and the end of the number to be concealed.
• You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number.
• The concealed part will be printed out by SMDR.
Operation – Using the Display Proprietary Telephone .....User Manual,
Using the KX-T7531, KX-T7533, KX-T7536 or KX-T7235
– Storing the names and numbers for station speed dialling
Customising the Buttons – One-Touch Dialling Button

One-Touch Dialling System Speed Dialling
Special Display Features – Station Speed Dialling
3-150 Features
3 Features S
Special Display Features
The KX-T7235, KX-T7431, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 feature a
display that allows the user to originate calls or to access system
facilities with ease. The display prompts the user with information
related to the desired feature. Examples of this special function are
shown below:
CO Outgoing Call Log
Extension Dialling
Hotel Application (operator only) (→ See the “HOTEL
APPLICATION.”)
Station Speed Dialling
System Feature Access Menu
System Speed Dialling
CO Outgoing Call Log

Description Provides a KX-T7235 and KX-T7436 display of the last dialled
telephone numbers and allows the user to perform redialling the
number by pressing the associated button.
Conditions The oldest telephone number will be eliminated when over the limited
numbers are dialled out.

—User Manual Using the KX-T7531, KX-T7533, KX-T7536 or KX-T7235 – Using the
KX-T7536 / Using the KX-T7235 – Outgoing Call Log
Features 3-151
S 3 Features
Extension Dialling
Description Provides a display of extension names and numbers. The user can
call an extension by pressing the associated function button.
Conditions System programming of extension numbers and names is required.

KX-T7531 / Using the KX-T7533 / Using the KX-T7536 / Using the KX-
T7235 – Extension Dialling

Description A list of the names and telephone numbers stored for One-Touch
Dialling is displayed allowing the user to make a one-touch call by
name without having to know the number.
Conditions • It is necessary to program One-Touch Dialling Numbers and Names

into the 10 function buttons F1 through F10.
• It is programmable to select the first display, number or name.
Operation – Using the Display Proprietary Telephone .....User Manual,
Using the KX-T7531, KX-T7533, KX-T7536 or KX-T7235
– Storing the names and numbers for station speed dialling

One-Touch Dialling
3-152 Features
3 Features S
T7235 – Station Speed Dialling
System Feature Access Menu

Description This feature provides a display of the system features available at
any time and allows the user to have access to the desired features.
Conditions • The available features are:

Call Park
Call Pickup, Group
Call Forwarding (set / cancel)
Do Not Disturb (set / cancel)
Message Waiting
Paging (access / answer)
• In addition to the features above, the operator can have the display of
the following features:
Class of Service (primary / secondary)
Night Service (pre-assigned extension also)

T7235 – System Feature Access
Features 3-153
S 3 Features
Description A list of the names stored for System Speed Dialling is displayed.
This allows the user to dial by name without having to know the
telephone number. All the user needs to do is press the button
associated with the desired name.
Conditions • The numbers and names for System Speed Dialling must be
programmed.
• If a name is not stored for a number, it is not displayed and cannot be
called with this feature.


T7235 – System Speed Dialling
3-154 Features
3 Features S
Station Hunting
Description If a call reaches a floating number of a hunting group, Station
Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the
hunting group. There are a maximum of 32 hunting groups. Idle
extensions are automatically hunted according to the programmed
type. There are six hunting types available – Circular, UCD
(Uniform Call Distribution), Voice Mail (VM), Automated
Attendant (AA), Ring and No Reply.
Circular hunting: The extensions are hunted until an idle
one is found, regardless of the jack number.
UCD: Refer to “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)” in this
section.
AA hunting: All of the AA ports are hunted until an idle one
is found to permit AA Service.
VM hunting: All of the VM ports are hunted until an idle
one is found to permit VM Service.
Ring: All of the extensions in the group ring simultaneously.
No Reply hunting: The extensions are hunted in the order of
registration at a programmed “Call Forwarding — No
Answer” time. If the called extension is busy, the call hunts
the following extensions.
One hunting type is selected for each hunting group. The hunting
order corresponds to the order of registration in program [131]. For
VM/AA Hunting, an incoming call to any extension number which
belongs to a hunting group is hunted as well.
Hunting Type
Circular VM/ UCD Ring No
Incoming Call AA Reply
Arrives at
Floating Extension ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Extension which belongs to a ✓
hunting group
✓: A call is hunted.
Conditions • Even if the called extension has set Do Not Disturb, or Call Forwarding,
they are disregarded and the call reaches to the extension.
Features 3-155
S 3 Features
[132] Hunting Group Name Assignment
[133] Hunting Overflow

Hunting group Ring Group
Log-In / Log-Out Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
No Reply Group
3-156 Features
3 Features S
Description Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records
detailed call information for outside calls. A printer connected to
the EIA (RS-232C) port can be used to print incoming and
outgoing outside calls as well as print a hard copy of system
programming. To print the record of system programming items
that have been assigned, use the program [802] “System Data
Printout.” To print the charge fee, use the station programming. To
print the call records, use the program [800] “SMDR Incoming /
Outgoing Call Log Printout,” which allows you to print out the
following records:
• Record all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls.
• Record all incoming outside calls.
An example of a printed call record:
Date Time Ext CO Dial Number ANS Duration Cost:£ Acc CD
24/06/99 10:00AM 200 01 0344853233 00:05'12 00012.00 12345

24/06/99 10:10AM 01 0344853233 0'12 12345 TR
24/06/99 10:20AM 200 01 0344853233 0'10 00:20'12 12345 FW
24/06/99 10:30AM 202 01 MARY WARD RC
24/06/99 10:38AM 205 03 0924312111 0'22 AN
24/06/99 10:40AM 201 03 1022220 0'45 NA
24/06/99 10:42AM 202 01 <Private> 00:3'10 09876
• • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • •
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Example of SMDR printout format:

Explanation
(1) Date: shows the date of the call as Day / Month / Year.
(2) Time: shows the end time of a call as Hours:Minutes /
AM or PM.
(3) Ext: shows the extension number, floating number, etc.
that engaged in a call.
(4) CO: shows the CO line number used for the call.
(5) Dial Number
Outgoing call: shows the other party’s telephone
number (maximum 20 digits). Valid digits are 0 through
9, , #, P (if PAUSE button is pressed), or the mark
“=” (if a host PBX access code is entered).
Features 3-157
S 3 Features
Received call: shows that indicates ‘Incoming.’ If
the call is carried by an ISDN network, also shows the
name or telephone number of the calling party.
Private call: shows <Private>.
(6) ANS: shows the ring duration of the incoming call in
Minutes / Seconds.
(7) Duration: shows the duration of the call in Hours /
Minutes / Seconds.
(8) Cost: shows the amount of charged fee; Pulse or Pounds.
(9) Acc (Account Code): shows the account code appended to
the call.
(10) CD (Condition Code): shows call handling type with the
following codes:
TR: Transfer
FW: Call Forwarding to CO Line
RM: Remote access to a modem
RC: Received an incoming call
AN: Answered an incoming call
NA: Unanswered an incoming call
DP: Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line
Conditions • Connect a printer provided with an EIA (RS-232C) interface to the EIA
(RS-232C) connector located on the main unit. After connecting a
printer, do not press the RETURN key, if provided on the printer, in 10
seconds.
• When programmed for outgoing toll calls only, printing occurs only for
calls which start with the numbers stored in any Denied Code Table from
levels 2 to 6. If LCR is employed, not the user-dialled but the modified
number is checked against these tables.
• This system can store information up to 100 calls. If more calls are
originated or received, previous records are deleted starting from the
oldest one.
• It is possible to select the SMDR format, page length, skip perforation
and page width. If 80 characters for page width is selected, the last five
digits of account codes are not printed out.
• This data is not deleted when you reset the system.
• If the system clock is not set by system programming or if the calendar IC
is out of order, the date and time is not printed out.
• If Register Recall signal is manually sent out during a conversation, the
call record is printed and a new record is started.
• “(8) Cost” is printed out in the format selected in program [117] “Charge
Display Selection.”
• It is programmable to enable or disable the printout of secret dial
numbers.
3-158 Features
3 Features S
• If the account code stored in location 001 of the programming table is
dialled, the dialled number is not printed out to SMDR (Private Call).
Refer to the seventh line on an example of printed call records.
• When the paper of the printer runs out or the printer is out-of-service, the
indication “Check Printer” is displayed on the telephone of Operator 1.
• It is possible to select whether or not to print out the data when the system
receives a call and a call is answered.
• It is possible to select whether the account code is printed out or not. If it
is not printed out, it is shown in dots.
[000] Date and Time Set
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2
Area 07 – Bit 14
Features 3-159
S 3 Features
Station Program Clear
Description Allows the extension user to cancel the functions set on the user’s
own telephone. The following functions will be cancelled by this
feature:
Absent Message Capability – The message set on the
telephone
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Background Music that has been turned on
Call Forwarding
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting enabled
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
CO Incoming Call Information Log – Over-stored mode
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
Log-Out status
Message Waiting – All the messages that have been left by
other extension users
Parallelled Telephone enabled
Paging Deny
Pickup Dialling
Timed Reminder
Conditions None
[100] Flexible Numbering, Station program clear

—User Manual Clearing the Feature Settings at Your Extension (Station Program Clear)
3-160 Features
3 Features S
Station Programming
Description Allows the proprietary telephone (PT) user to customize the extension
to their needs. The following are the programming items available:
For any PT,
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Flexible Button Assignment
Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming / Outgoing
Station Programming Data Default Set
For digital PT,
Handset / Headset Selection
For display PT,
Charge Fee Reference (pre-assigned extensions only)
Self-Extension Number Confirmation
For digital display PT (KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 and KX-
T7235 only),
Station Speed Dialling Number / Name Assignment
For operator extension PT only,
Incoming Call Log Lock Control
Live Call Screening Password Control
Detailed information and programming instructions are described
in the User Manual, Station Programming.
Conditions During Station Programming, the PT is considered to be in busy status.
Operator Operation – Extension Control ......................User Manual
Changing the Settings
Features 3-161
S 3 Features
Station Programming Data Default Set
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to return all the following
items programmed on the telephone to default setting.
Programming Items Default

Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Tone 1
Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment On
Handset / Headset Selection Handset
Intercom Alerting Assignment Ringing
Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming Ringing Line
Preferred Line Assignment – Outgoing Intercom Line
Live Call Screening Mode Set Hands-free mode
Station programming is used to set or cancel these items at

individual telephones.
Conditions None
Initial Settings – To clear all settings

Station Programming
3-162 Features
3 Features S
Description Allows an extension user to store frequently dialled numbers in
order to place a call with abbreviated dialling. It is performed by
dialling the feature number and a speed dial number from 0 through
9. Up to 10 numbers can be stored for each telephone.
Conditions • Station Speed Dialling can be followed by manual dialling to

supplement the dialled digits.
• You may make a call with One-Touch Dialling button, instead of
Station Speed Dialling.
• The single line telephone (SLT) may be replaced with a proprietary
telephone (PT) temporarily to store one-touch dialling into memory.
The Function Buttons F1 through F10 are corresponded to speed dial
numbers as follows:
F1 — 0 F6 — 5
F2 — 1 F7 — 6
F3 — 2 F8 — 7
F4 — 3 F9 — 8
F5 — 4 F10 — 9
[100] Flexible Numbering, Station speed dialling, Station speed dialling
programming

One-Touch Dialling

—User Manual Easy Dialling – Using numbers stored at your extension (Station Speed
Dialling)
Features 3-163
S 3 Features
System Connection*
Description System Connection allows two main units (KX-TD1232) to work
together as one system. This expands the capacity of the system,
number of extensions, CO lines and so on. Two connected systems
are called the master and the slave systems.
A maximum capacity of the system is as follows:
Item Maximum Quantity Maximum Quantity

(Single System) (System Connection)
CO Line 12 24
Extension Jack 32 64
Console 4 8
Doorphone 2 4
Door Opener 2 4
External Pager 2 4
Music Source 2 4
Conditions • The following resources can be used by either system:

(a) External pagers
(b) Music sources used for Music on Hold
(c) Music sources used for Background Music (BGM)
(d) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR); EIA (RS-232C)
ports
(e) Call Parking areas
• System Inter Connection Card (KX-TD192), optional expansion cards
to connect both systems, must be installed for this feature.
• Once this feature is employed, the data adjustment in both systems are
performed at the programmed time (default is 1:00) every day. The
time can be changed by programming.
Connection References Section 2, Installation,

2.4.12 System Connection
[115] Adjust Time

3 Features S
System Data Default Set
Description This system permits re-initialization of system-programmed data.
If all the programmed data is cleared, the system will restart with
the default setting.
Conditions The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5.2,
“Default Values.”
Operation References Section 2, Installation,

2.8 System Data Clear

Description This system can be programmed and administered using a personal
computer. The EIA/Remote Programming & Diagnosis floppy is
required to perform this feature. There are two programming
methods:
On-Site Programming
By connecting a personal computer (PC) to your system, system
programming and maintenance can be performed locally. There are
two ways available to perform the above:
(Method 1.) Using the EIA (RS-232C) port
Connect the PC to the EIA (RS-232C) port provided. The main
unit has an EIA (RS-232C) port which can be used for either
system administration or SMDR.
(Method 2.) Using a modem
Install the optional Remote Card or Unit. Connect the PC to an
extension jack. Assign the floating number of the modem in
system programming. Dial this number from the PC.
Features 3-165
S 3 Features
Remote Programming
You can perform system programming and maintenance from a
remote site using a PC. Install the Remote Card / Unit and assign
the floating number of the modem in system programming.
Starting system administration from a remote location can be done
in the following ways.
• Call an extension (probably the operator) from a remote
location and request a transfer to the modem.
• Assign the modem as the destination of the DIL 1:1 feature.
Conditions • A proprietary telephone can be used to perform system programming.

• Only one access is allowed to system programming at any one time.
• To access system administration, a valid password must be entered.
The password is factory-programmed and can be changed.
• System administration can be performed on-line except for the
procedures of diagnosis.
If the system goes off-line, the system functions as if it was in power
failure. (Refer to Power Failure Transfer feature.)
Connection References Section 2, Installation,

2.4.8 Remote Card Installation*1
2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit*2 / Message Unit Installation
2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card / Message Card*2 Installation
[814] Modem Standard
[817] TD197 Baud Rate Set

System Programming with Station Message Detail
Proprietary Telephone Recording (SMDR)
3-166 Features *1: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

3 Features S
System Programming with Proprietary Telephone
Description This system can be programmed with a personal computer or a
proprietary telephone (PT).
Proprietary telephones available for system programming are: KX-
T7431; KX-T7433; KX-T7436; KX-T7230; KX-T7235; and KX-
T7130 (Display Proprietary Telephones).
Two extensions are allowed to perform system programming. The
extensions available are:
(1) An extension that is connected to jack 1.
(2) An extension that is assigned as a manager.
For more information and programming instructions, refer to
Section 4, “System Programming.”
Conditions • During system programming the system operates normally.

• During system programming the extension is considered to be busy.
• The display on the PT permits interactive programming.
• Only one access is allowed to system programming at any one time.
• To access system administration, a valid password must be entered.
The password is factory-programmed and can be changed.
• A personal computer can be used to perform system programming.

Features 3-167
S 3 Features
Description This feature supports 500 abbreviated dial numbers available to all
users. A system speed dial number is dialled out by pressing the
AUTO button and a 3-digit code (000 through 499). It is possible to
store five hundred 24-digit telephone numbers per system
(maximum).
Conditions [For proprietary telephone users only]

• Speed Dialling, One-Touch Dialling, manual dialling, Last Number
Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used in combination.
[For single line telephone users only]
• If a stored feature number includes “ ” or “#,” LD single line
telephones cannot use it.
[100] Flexible Numbering, System speed dialling
— Day / Night

Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialling

—User Manual Easy Dialling – Using numbers stored in the system (System Speed
Dialling)
3-168 Features
3 Features S
System Working Report
Description The Digital Super Hybrid System automatically records the
system’s working state. A printer connected to the EIA (RS-232C)
port can be used to print the recorded data.
Recorded contents are as follows:

1. Date of record
• The date and time when cleared
• The date and time when printed out
2. Incoming calls
• The number of incoming calls
• The number of answered incoming calls
• The number of unanswered incoming calls
• The ratio of the answered calls to the incoming calls
Number of answered calls

✕ 100 (%)
Number of incoming calls
• The average time from receipt of call to answer of the

incoming and answered calls
• The average duration time of talk of the answered calls
3. Outgoing calls
• The number of access requested
• The number of access succeeded
• The number of access failed
• The ratio of access succeeded
Number of access succeeded

✕ 100 (%)
Number of access requested
• The average duration of the dialled calls

These records can be deleted by the manager and the operator, and
new data will be recorded thereafter.
Conditions Connect a printer to the EIA (RS-232C) connector located on the main
unit. After connecting a printer, do not press the RETURN key, if
provided on the printer, in 10 seconds.
Features 3-169
T 3 Features
[100] Flexible Numbering, System working report
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2


—User Manual Printing the System Working Report
Terminate
Description The Terminate button is used to allow the proprietary telephone
user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without
hanging up first.
Conditions • Pressing the Terminate button disconnects the conversation, outputs an

SMDR record, and get an internal dial tone.
• The proprietary telephone is provided with no Terminate button
originally. However a flexible CO button can be assigned as the
Terminate button either by system or station programming.
Customising the Buttons – Terminate Button

3-170 Features
3 Features T
Time-Out, Variable
Description Provides timers to control various features or functions.
The following timers are programmable:
System Timer Items Range

Automatic Redial Interval Time n✕10 s, n: 3 – 120
Automatic Redial Repeated Times 1 – 12 times
Call Forwarding – No Answer Time-Out 1 – 12 rings
CO Dial Starting Time n✕100 ms, n: 0 – 40
Doorphone-to-CO Line Call Duration Time 0 – 300 s
Extension-to-CO Call Duration Time 1 – 64 min
Hold Recall Time 0 – 240 s
Intercept Routing Time-Out 3 – 48 rings
Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 0 – 64 min
Outgoing Message Duration Time 0 / 16 / 32 / 64 s
Pickup Dialling Waiting Time 0–8s
Ring-Off Detection Time 6 / 11 s
SMDR Duration Count Starting Time 0 – 60 s
Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time 30 – 240 s
Toll Restriction First Digit Time-Out 5 – 120 s
Toll Restriction Inter-digit Time-Out 5 – 30 s
Transfer Recall Time 3 – 48 rings
CO Line Group Timer Items
Disconnect Time 0.5 / 2.0 / 4.0 s
Register Recall Signal Time Disable / 80 / 96 / 112 /
200 / 300 / 400 / 500 /
600 / 700 / 800 / 900 /
1000 / 1100 / 1200 ms
Pause Time 1.5 / 2.5 / 3.5 / 4.5 / 5.5
/ 6.5 s
CO Line Timer Items
CPC Signal Detection Time (Incoming) n✕8 ms, n: 02 – 75
DTMF Digit Time 96 / 160 ms
Extension Timer Items
Delayed Ringing Count Disable / Immediate /
2 / 4 / 6 / 8 rings /
No ring
Features 3-171
T 3 Features
Voice Mail Integration Timer Items
DTMF Signal Duration 80 / 160 ms
DTMF Signal Waiting Time 0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 s
after VPS Answer
DTMF Signal Waiting Time 0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 s
after VPS calls Extension
[203] Intercept Time
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
[215] Ring-Off Detection Time
[217] Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time
[218] Doorphone-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
[404] DTMF Time
[405] CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set
[412] Pause Time
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bits 10 through 14,
Area 02 – Bits 11, 12, 14 and 15, Area 07 – Bits 15 and 16
3-172 Features
3 Features T
Timed Reminder
Description Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm ringing at a preset
time as a wake up or reminder. This feature can be programmed to be
active only once or every day. With the optional unit or card, a voice
message can be recorded for this feature.
Conditions • Be sure that the system clock works.

• Setting a new time clears the preset time when either the operator or the
extension set the time.
• The alarm continues for a programmed period of time (default: 30
seconds). To stop it, lift the handset or, with a proprietary telephone,
press any button.
• When the user goes off-hook during the alarm tone, Time Announce is
sent. When setting, the set time can be heard by Time Stamp function.
• To use a voice message, the optional Message Unit or Card is required.
• A voice message can be recorded by the operator (OGM: Outgoing
Message) and then the OGM number must be selected by the the program
[818] “Timed Reminder Message Assignment.” When the user goes off-
hook during the alarm, a pre-recorded voice message is sent.
2.4.9 9600bps Speed Remote Unit* / Message Unit Installation
2.4.10 9600bps Speed Remote Card / Message Card* Installation
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder
[217] Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time
[818] Timed Reminder Message Assignment

HOTEL APPLICATION – Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)

—User Manual Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
*: Available for the KX-TD816 only. Features 3-173

T 3 Features
Toll Restriction
Description Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature that, in
conjunction with the assigned Class of Service, can prohibit certain
extension users from placing unauthorized toll calls.
Every extension is programmed to belong to one of eight Classes of

Service. Each Class of Service is programmed to have a toll
restriction level for day mode and night mode.
There are eight toll restriction levels available. Toll restriction level
1 is the highest level and the level 8 is the lowest. That is, level 1
allows all toll calls and levels 7 and 8 disallows all toll calls.
Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining pre-
programmed deny and excepted code tables.
Denied Code Tables

An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a toll
restriction level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the
selected Denied Code Tables. If the leading six digits of the dialled
number (not including the line access code) are not found in the
table, the call is made. There are five system programs for Denied
Code Tables: [301]-[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2
through 6: each program is used to make up a Denied Code Table
for Levels 2 through 6 respectively.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited.
These numbers are defined as denied codes. Each table can store
up to 20 denied codes, each of which consisting of seven digits.
Excepted Code Tables

These tables are used to override a programmed denied code. A
call denied by the selected Denied Code Tables is checked against
the selected Excepted Code Tables, and if a match is found, the call
is made.
There are five system programs for these tables:
[306]-[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6:
each programming is used to make up an Excepted Code Table for
Levels 2 through 6.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the
denied codes. These numbers are defined as excepted codes. Each
table can store up to 20 excepted codes, each of which consisting of
seven digits.
3-174 Features
3 Features T
Applicable Denied and Excepted Code Tables depend on the
assigned toll restriction level of an extension as follows:
Denied Code Tables Excepted Code Tables

Level 1 None None
Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tables for Levels 2 through 6
Level 3 Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 through 6
Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 to 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6
Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 to 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6
Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 to 6 Tables for Level 6
Level 7 None None
Level 8 None None
[Explanation]
Level 1: allows all calls.
Level 2: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Table
for Level 2 except the codes stored in Excepted
Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6.
Level 3: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables
for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6.
for Levels 2 through 4 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 4 through 6.
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 5 and 6.
Excepted Code Table for Level 6.
Level 7: Allows intercom calls only.
Level 8: Allows operator calls only.
Features 3-175
T 3 Features
Flow Chart of
Toll Restriction
The user makes a toll call.
Yes
Is the call made by System Speed
Dialling ?
No
No Is TRS Override for System
Speed Dialling enabled?
Yes
Levels 7, 8 What is the extension – toll Level 1

restriction level?
Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
No
Is the dialled number found in
applicable Denied Code Tables?
Yes
Is the dialled number found in Yes

applicable Excepted Code Tables?
No
The call is denied. Reorder

The call is allowed.
Tone is returned to the user.
3-176 Features
3 Features T
Conditions • Toll restriction checks are applied to the following:
(1) Account Code Entry
(2) Dial Access, Automatic
(3) Least Cost Routing (LCR)
(4) Line Access, CO Line Group
(5) Line Access, Individual
(6) System Speed Dialling
• Emergency call numbers such as Police or Fire Department numbers
should be stored in program [311] “Emergency Dial Number Set” so
that they are excepted from toll restriction.
• If a stored Host PBX access code is found in the dialled number, a toll
restriction check starts for succeeding telephone number.
• Toll restriction for System Speed Dialling can be assigned in the Class
of Service setting.
• It is programmable whether the “ ” or “#” the user dials is to be
checked or not on the Toll Restriction code. This is useful to prevent
unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central
Offices’ exchange system.
• It is programmable to admit the press of the RECALL or FLASH/RCL
button, during an outside call on the extensions in levels 7 and 8.
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
[311] Emergenvy Dial Number Set
— Day / Night

Toll Restriction Override by Toll Restriction Override for
Account Code Entry System Speed Dialling
Features 3-177
T 3 Features
Description Allows the extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to
make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone. The user can carry
out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before
dialling the telephone number.
Conditions • The toll restriction level of the user is changed to level 2 by this feature.
Thus this can be used by extension users assigned a toll restriction level
from 3 through 8. The levels 1 and 2 are not changed.
• A Class of Service which is assigned Account Code Entry – Verified
Toll Restriction Override permits the class members to override their
toll restrictions.
• Up to 40 account codes can be programmed for Verified Account code
operation. These are used for Toll Restriction Override.
• If the user does not enter any account code or enters an invalid account
code, an ordinary toll restriction check is done.
Flow Chart of TRS Override by Account Code Entry
TRS Override by Account Code Entry is attempted.
Option Verified - All Calls

What is the account code mode?
Verified - Toll Restriction Override

No
Is the entered code identified with the stored codes?
Yes
Yes Is the entered code identified
Is the TRS level Level 1? with the stored code?
No
Yes No
TRS level changes to Level 2.
The call is not allowed.

Toll Restriction check starts. Reorder tone is returned
to the user.
3-178 Features
3 Features T
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry

Account Code Entry Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialling

Description Calls originated by System Speed Dialling are restricted depending
on the extension’s toll restriction level for System Speed Dialling.
Conditions Same as the conditions of Toll Restriction feature except that the data for
System Speed Dialling are used as the toll restriction levels.
[100] Flexible Numbering, System speed dialling
— Day / Night

System Speed Dialling Toll Restriction
Features 3-179
T 3 Features
Description A tone signal is sent from the external pager when an incoming
outside call is received. Any extension user can answer the call.
Conditions • Connect a user-supplied external paging device.

• Two external pagers can be installed per system. System Connection*
permits four pagers (maximum). These pagers are numbered from 1
through 4. To answer an incoming call dial the feature number and 1 to
4. The feature number is the same as that used to answer Paging –
External.
• Floating numbers of pagers are programmable.
• TAFAS can be used in the following cases:
a) The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the DIL
1:1 destination. In this case all the incoming calls on the
specified line will be signalled.
b) The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the
Intercept Routing destination. In this case incoming calls
redirected to the destination will be signalled.
c) The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the
Direct Dialling In destination.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user before being connected to the
caller. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer

Floating Station

—User Manual Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any
Station [TAFAS])
3-180 Features *: Available for the KX-TD1232 only.

3 Features T
Two-Way Recording into the Voice Mail†
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to record the conversation
into one’s mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the phone.
Note:
When you record Two-Way telephone conversations, you should
inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded.
Conditions • A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Two-Way Record

button or a Two-Way Transfer button.
• When all the voice mail ports are busy, pressing the Two-Way Record
button sends an alarm tone.
• When all the voice mail ports are busy, pressing the Two-Way Transfer
button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone.
System Programming,
Customising the Buttons — Two-Way Record Button,
Two-Way Transfer Button

—User Manual If a Voice Processing System is Connected – Recording a conversation
(Two-Way Recording)
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Features 3-181
U 3 Features
Description Allows incoming calls to be distributed uniformly to a specific
group of extensions called an UCD group. Calls to an UCD group
hunt for an idle station in a circular way. This UCD feature is
particularly helpful when a certain extension receives a high
volume of calls compared with other extensions.
If all extensions in an UCD group are busy or not available, the
incoming outside call will be handled by the UCD Time Table.
An outline sketch of an UCD is shown below.
(1) When a number of calls have arrived (2) When the 1st call arrives at extension A,
at an UCD group, the 1st call is sent to the 2nd call is sent to extension B.
extension A first.
3rd call in queue
Calls have arrived at an UCD group.
2nd call in queue
3rd call in queue

UCD group
2nd call in queue
1st call in queue Extension B
(When extension B is
UCD group busy or UCD log out
has been set at
Extension A extension B, the call is
sent to extension C.)
(When extension A is busy
or UCD log out has been
set at extension A, the call Extension C
is sent to extension B.)
Extension B Extension A
(When extension B is busy
set at extension B, the call
is sent to extension C.)
Extension C (3) When the 2nd call arrives at extension C,

the 3rd call will be sent to extension A.
(When extension C is busy
set at extension C, the call
is sent to extension A.)
3-182 Features
3 Features U
(4) When all extensions in an UCD group are busy or not available, the incoming outside call
will be handled by the UCD Time Table.
An example is shown below.
UCD Time Table Assignment Sequence Assignment
UCD FN TT TT SEQUENCE
1 291 1 1 S1→ 4T → 4T → TR →
2 292 2 2 S1→ 2T → → →
: : : 3 S4→ RT → → →
32 4 TR→ → → →
UCD : UCD Group Number (1 – 32) S1 : Send Outgoing Message (OGM) 1
FN : Floating Number of the Hunting Group S2 : Send OGM 2
TT : Time Table Number (1 – 4) S3 : Send OGM 3
S4 : Send OGM 4
TR : Transfer to overflow extension
RT : Return to top
Blank : Disconnect the line
1T : Timer – 16 seconds
Sequence Activation Examples
❒ S4 → → → → : Sends OGM 4 and then disconnects the line.
❒ S4 → TR →N/A→N/A→N/A : Sends OGM 4 and then transfers to an overflow extension.
❒ S4 → 1T → → → : Sends OGM 4, Music on Hold for 16 seconds and then disconnects
the line.
❒ S1 → S2 → S3 → → : Sends OGM 1, OGM 2, OGM 3 and then disconnects the line.
❒ S4 → 1T → S1 → → : Sends OGM 4, Music on Hold for 16 seconds, OGM 1 and then
disconnects the line.
❒ S4 → 1T → 4T → RT →N/A : Sends OGM 4, Music on Hold for 16 + 64 seconds and then
OGM 4 again.
❒ S4 → RT →N/A→N/A→N/A : Sends OGM 4 repeatedly.
❒ TR →N/A→N/A→N/A→N/A : Directly transfers to an overflow extension.
❒ RT →N/A→N/A→N/A→N/A : Waits for an idle extension. The caller hears a ringback tone.
(Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA) works.)
❒ →N/A→N/A→N/A→N/A : Waits for an idle extension. The caller hears a ringback tone.
(IRNA works.)
❒ 1T → → → → : Waits for an idle extension. The caller hears a ringback tone.
(IRNA does not work.)
❒ 1T → RT →N/A→N/A→N/A : Waits for an idle extension. The caller hears a ringback tone.
(IRNA does not work.)
❒ 1T → TR →N/A→N/A→N/A : Waits for an idle extension for 16 seconds and then transfers to an
overflow extension.
† N/A: not available for assignment.
Features 3-183
U 3 Features
Note:
• The UCD Time Table is not available for incoming extensions or transferred calls.
• The overflow extension is the IRNA destination of the hunting group or the CO line
group assigned by program [134]–[135] “Hunting Intercept — Day / Night” or
[409]–[410] “Intercept Extension — Day / Night”. If both of them are assigned, the
IRNA destination of the hunting group will be effective.
• If the overflow extension is not assigned, the system will not answer the call and
waits for an idle extension.
• If the Time Table number is not assigned, the system will not answer the call. In this
case, IRNA will be employed.
• In sequence assignment, “Sx” can be assigned to a space other than the first only
when another “Sx” is assigned in the first space.
• In sequence assignment, an assignment after “TR”, “RT” or “Blank” is not available.
• If a timer is the first item in a Time Table sequence, it will delay answering
according to the Timer’s setting. The caller will hear a ringback tone.
• Music on Hold after an OGM can be changed to a ringback tone by program [990]
“System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bit 1.”
Conditions • UCD can be used in the following cases:

a) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Direct In Lines
(DIL) 1:1 destination.
b) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Intercept Routing
destination.
c) The floating number of UCD is dialled from an extension.
d) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Direct Dialling In
(DDI) destination.
e) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the UCD Overflow
destination.
• This feature requires assigning an UCD group in System Programming.
An extension can belong to two or more UCD groups.
• The floating number can be assigned on a hunting group basis. The
UCD group is based on the hunting group.
• It is possible to set the log-in or log-out status on an extension basis.
An UCD call can be sent to an extension in log-in status within the
UCD group, but cannot be sent to extensions in log-out status. If the
extension would like to leave the group temporarily, the extension sets
the log-out status by the feature number to prevent UCD calls being
sent to his/her extension. When the extension re-joins the group, the
extension sets the log-in status.
• If all extensions are in log-out status, the system will not answer the
call. In this case, IRNA will be employed.
3-184 Features
3 Features U
[137]–[138] UCD Time Table Assignment — Day / Night
[139] UCD Time Table

Log-In / Log-Out Station Hunting
User Programming (Manager Programming)

Description User Programming (Manager Programming) can be programmed
by the end user. Programs whose address are [0XX] can be
changed by the user.
Conditions None
System Programming.......................................................User Manual
Features 3-185
V 3 Features
Description This system can accommodate Voice Processing System (VPS)
equipment, which offers the user a Voice Mail and an Automated
Attendant Services. If an extension user has set Call Forwarding
destination to the VPS, a calling party will be forwarded to the
VPS and can leave a voice message in the mailbox of the
extension. When a call is transferred to the VPS by the Call
Forwarding or Intercept Routing – No Answer features, the
mailbox number is sent to the VPS automatically with DTMF
signalling (Follow On ID). Up to eight extension jacks can be
connected to VPS as extensions in the system.
System Explanation
1. Voice Mail Service
1.1 Call Forwarding to VM
If an extension user sets Call Forwarding (C. FWD) whose
destination is the VPS, an incoming call is forwarded to the
VPS under the proper conditions. The system sends to the
VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at
that time. Therefore the calling party can leave his / her
message in the mailbox of the desired extension without
knowing the mailbox number.
Outside call
DIL 1:1
System
Intercom
Call
VPS
C.FWD
Extension VM 1 VM 2
VM Hunting
Chain
VM X VM 3
3-186 Features
3 Features V
Outside call
DIL 1:1
System
VPS
C.FWD
Operator Extension VM 1 VM 2
Transfer
VM Hunting
Chain
VM X VM 3
1.2 Intercept Routing to VM

If a CO line is set as Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA)
whose destination is the VPS, an outside call is forwarded to
the VPS under the proper conditions. The system sends to
the VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at
that time. Therefore the calling party can leave his / her
message in the mailbox of the desired extension without
knowing the mailbox number.
Outside call
DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N
System
VPS
IRNA
Extension VM 1 VM 2
VM Hunting
Chain
VM X VM 3
Features 3-187
V 3 Features
1.3 Transferring to VM
The extension user can transfer an outside call to the VPS so
that calling party can leave his / her message in the mailbox
of the desired extension. The extension user should use the
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to
the VPS. Pressing this button and entering the extension
number allows the extension user to transfer the call to the
mailbox of the corresponding extension.
Outside call
System
(1) Transfer VPS

(2) Transfer
Extension Extension VM 1 VM 2
busy/no answer (Operator) by VM Transfer
Button VM Hunting
Chain
VM X VM 3
1.4 Changing from VM to Automated Attendant (AA)

The Automated Attendant Service is automatically activated
in the following cases:
1) The incoming call is not answered by the operator and
IRNA is activated.
2) The operator is assigned as a destination of DIL 1:1 and
the operator sets the Call Forwarding to VPS.
Outside call
DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N
System
VPS
C.FWD, IRNA
Operator VM→AA 1 VM→AA 2
VM→AA X VM→AA 3
3-188 Features
3 Features V
1.5 Listening to a Recorded Message
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS can turn on the
MESSAGE button indicator of the corresponding telephone
as a notification to the user of the telephone. The VPS
notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in
his / her mailbox. When the MESSAGE button indicator is
lit, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back
the stored message.
2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service

2.1 AA to Extension
AA receives and answers an outside call and offers services
such as transferring to a specified extension or the
corresponding mailbox by the DTMF signalling which is
sent from the calling party.
Outside call
DIL 1:1
System
VPS
Transfer
Extension AA 1 AA 2
AA Hunting
Chain
AA X AA 3
Features 3-189
V 3 Features
Conditions • A VPS can be assigned as the destination of the following features:
Intercept Routing – No Answer
In these functions, the caller to the extension need not know the
mailbox number of the called extension because the code is
automatically transmitted to the VPS (Follow On ID function). If a DIL
1:N call is transferred to the VPS by IRNA, your system transmits the
mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the receiving extensions.
• A mailbox number is a respective extension number by default. The
mailbox number can be changed, only if program [990] “System
Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 8” is set to “free.”
• Pressing the Voice Mail Transfer button and dialling the extension
number allows the extension user to transfer to the corresponding
mailbox. In this case, Follow On ID function is available.
• The Voice Mail extension should be set to Data Line Security to
achieve proper recording.
• The KX-TD1232 has two Extension Cards and can have two 8-Station
Line Units. It is recommended that you do not connect more than two
VM ports to each card or units.
Common Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb, Message
waiting
[113] VM Status DTMF Set
[114] VM Command DTMF Set
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes
[990] System Additional Information, Area 01 – Bits 10 through 15,
Area 02 – Bit 8
Customising the Buttons – MESSAGE Button,
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
3-190 Features
3 Features V
For VM Service Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type (Select Voice Mail Hunting.)
For AA Service Section 4, System Programming,

[106] Station Hunting Type (Select Automated Attendant Hunting.)

Call Forwarding – All Calls Call Forwarding – No Answer
Call Forwarding – Busy Intercept Routing
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Station Hunting
Answer

—User Manual If a Voice Processing System is Connected – Voice mail integration
Features 3-191
V 3 Features
Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones†
Description The Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice
Processing System can be connected to the Digital Super Hybrid
System (DSHS) in a tightly integrated fashion.
The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension
number configuration information and the VPS automatically
creates mailboxes with this data (Automatically Configuration —
Quick Setup).
Conditions • A maximum of one VPS can be connected to each DSHS cabinet.

• A maximum of six DSHS jacks can be connected to a digital
proprietary telephone capable VPS. Because a digital proprietary
telephone connection supports up to two simultaneous voice calls, only
one DSHS jack needs to be connected for each two VPS ports.
• Connect the jacks and ports in ascending order. In other words, the
lowest number DSHS jack used for VPS connection must be connected
to the lowest number VPS port.
• The VPS data is transmitted to the VPS on the lowest jacks port.
• Only extensions which are assigned as “Connect” in the program [611]
can have mailboxes.
• The voice mail service codes and names can be stored in station speed
dialling.
[126] Voice Mail Number Assignment
[127] Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment
[128] Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment
[611] Extension Connection Assignment
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment

3 Features V
Volume Control – Speaker / Handset Receiver / Headset / Ringer
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to change the following as
desired:
Handset receiver volume
Headset volume
Ringer volume
Speaker volume
Conditions The control method depends on the telephone type:

• With a KX-T7400 series digital proprietary telephone, rotate the Jog
Dial in the desired direction to select the desired volume level.
With a KX-T7200 series digital proprietary telephone, press the volume
control button (VOLUME ∧ / ∨ UP / DOWN) to select the desired
volume level.
However the ringer volume of KX-T7420, KX-T7425, KX-T7220 and
KX-T7250 is selected with Ringer Volume Selector (OFF / LOW /
HIGH).
• With other proprietary telephones, slide the following levers located on
the left side of the telephone.
Volume Control (MIN – MAX)
Handset Headset
Volume Selector (NORMAL / MID / HIGH)
Ringer Volume Selector (OFF / LOW / HIGH)
Features 3-193
W 3 Features
Whisper OHCA
Description When attempting to call a busy extension, Whisper OHCA allows
the extension user to notify the busy party through the handset,
which will only be heard by the party. Only KX-T7400 series
telephone users can send or receive the Whisper OHCA.
Conditions • Class of Service programming determines which extensions are able to

perform this feature.
• You can select receiving Call Waiting tone, Off-Hook Call
Announcement (OHCA), Whisper OHCA or none of these at your
extension. However, the setting may change depending on each
telephone setting or the telephone type as listed below.
Calling Party’s Called party’s call waiting mode

OHCA OFF ON
COS mode 0: Cancel 1: Call Waiting 2: OHCA 3: Whisper OHCA
Disable Call Waiting disabled Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone
OHCA, Whisper OHCA, OHCA,
Enable (default) Call Waiting disabled Call Waiting tone
Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone
<Example> If the user selects 3 (Whisper OHCA mode);
– If using the KX-T7400 series telephone handset .............Whisper OHCA
– If using the KX-T7400 series telephone SP-PHONE ......Call Waiting tone
– Other.................................................................................Call Waiting tone
• If the Whisper OHCA sender does not use a KX-T7400 series telephone,
it will work as OHCA. If the receiver does not use a KX-T7400 series
telephone, the announcement may also be heard by the other party.
• It is possible to enable the Whisper OHCA by any telephone by system
programming. However, it may not work properly. (E.g. the
announcement may be heard by the other party.)

Busy Station Signaling (BSS) Off-Hook Call Announcement
Call Waiting (OHCA)

3-194 Features
Section 4
System Programming
This section provides step-by-step programming instructions
for a proprietary telephone.
4.1 General Programming Instructions
Default Setting
This system has a default factory setting. If any of the
programming needs to be changed, you will find the necessary
information in Section 3, “Features.” This makes the system very
simple to install and customize as required by the customer. Any
required changes can be written in “Programming Tables.”
Required Telephone Set

One of the following telephone sets is required for System
Programming:
• Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT): KX-T7230, KX-T7235,
KX-T7431, KX-T7433,
KX-T7436
• Analog Proprietary Telephone (APT): KX-T7130
Extensions Used for Programming

Connect one of the above-mentioned telephone sets to either of the
following:
• Jack number 1
• Jack programmed as a manager extension
To assign the manager extension, see Section 4.2 [006] “Operator /
Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night.”

Manager programming items are allowed for any display
proprietary telephone user in the system. See Section 4.1.4 “User
Programming.”
4-2 System Programming

4.1.1 Using Proprietary Telephones
Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display DPT
Three soft buttons are provided just below the display on the
display of Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPT), KX-T7230, KX-
T7235, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436. The functions of these soft
buttons vary as the programming procedures advance step by step.
Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are
shown on the lower line of the display. (See “Viewing the Display”
on page 4-6 for more information on the display lines.)
If the SHIFT button indicator is on, two functions are available
with each soft button. To alternate between the two functions,
press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display.
Soft button variations

Type 1
Example:
CLR NEXT KX-T7230 Display
Buttons
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
Type 2
Press SHIFT
to alternate SKP- PREV
SKP+ CLR NEXT
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
Type 3
Press SHIFT
to alternate <- SEL- PREV
-> SEL+ NEXT
Type 4
Press SHIFT
to alternate
A B C a b c
System Programming 4-3

Type 5
Press SHIFT
to alternate
SKP+ SEL NEXT SKP- CLR PREV
You can use either the soft buttons or the overlay buttons. (For
overlay buttons, refer to “Using the Overlay” below.)
Throughout programming you will see instructions such as “Press
PREV.” If you use soft buttons, this means press SHIFT, release
SHIFT and then press Soft 3. The (PREV) function is performed.
Note If you use soft buttons and if programming instructions tell you to press
the following buttons, you may press soft buttons shown below.
Instructions Soft button

SELECT SEL+,SEL-,or SEL
CLEAR CLR
Using the Overlay

A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory.
This overlay should be used at all times while in programming
mode since the functions of the telephone keys change while in
programming mode as follows: (The original functions are in
parentheses.)
During Normal Operation During Programming

(PAUSE) PAUSE / PROGRAM
(SP-PHONE) NEXT
(REDIAL) PREV (PREVIOUS)
(AUTO ANSWER / MUTE) SELECT
(RECALL) RECALL
(FLASH / RCL) FLASH
(TRANSFER) CLEAR
(FWD / DND)
(CONF) –/
(INTERCOM) SECRET
(AUTO DIAL / STORE) STORE
(HOLD) END

Location of Controls with the Overlay
The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KX-
T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 while in
programming mode. KX-T7431 is the same as KX-T7433 except
for the Soft and SHIFT buttons.
KX-T7230 KX-T7235
PROGRAM Soft-1 Soft-2 Soft-3 SHIFT

PROGRAM SHIFT
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3
SECRET PAUSE CLEAR

SECRET PAUSE CLEAR
1 2 3 1 2 3
VOLUME VOLUME
4 5 6 4 5 6
STORE STORE
7 8 9 7 8 9
SELECT SELECT
0 0
PREV RECALL END NEXT PREV RECALL END NEXT
KX-T7433 KX-T7436
Soft-1 Soft-2 Soft-3 SHIFT Soft-1 Soft-2 Soft-3 SHIFT
SECRET PROGRAM PAUSE CLEAR SECRET PROGRAM PAUSE CLEAR
ABC DEF STORE ABC DEF STORE
GHI JKL MNO

FLASH SELECT GHI JKL MNO
FLASH SELECT
PQRS TUV WXYZ PQRS TUV WXYZ
OPER OPER
PREV END NEXT PREV END NEXT

Viewing the Display
The display gives you helpful information, such as what you should
do now, what you have done, etc..
The KX-T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7433 and the KX-T7436 utilize
two information lines for programming. The upper line is called the
Message Line and the lower one is called the Function Line.
The Message Line (upper) shows you what you should do or what
you should select. It also allows you to confirm what you have just
entered. The display capacity is 16 digits. If your entry exceeds the
capacity, you can shift the display by pressing or button.
The Function Line (lower) shows the current function of the soft
buttons. These functions change with the programming procedures.
SYS-PGM NO? → ← Message Line

CLR NEXT ← Function Line
KX-T7230 Display
CLR NEXT ← Function Line
CLR NEXT ← Function Line KX-T7235 / KX-T7436 Display
KX-T7433 Display
Before entering the programming mode

Before entering programming mode, confirm that:
• Your telephone is on-hook.
• No calls are on hold at your telephone.
Entering the programming mode

Press PROGRAM (or PAUSE) + + # and enter your System
Password (default=1234).
• The display shows the Initial Message: SYS-PGM NO?→
Note • If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button, substitute it
with the PAUSE button.
• If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM (or PAUSE)
button is pressed, it is cancelled.
• The System Password entered is not shown on the display. The System
Password can be changed by System Programming. Refer to Section
4.3 [107] “System Password.”
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy
extension.
• Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any
one time.

4.1.2 Programming Ways
Advancing to the next stage
When “SYS-PGM NO?→” is displayed, you can select one of the
following:
• To go to program [000], press the NEXT button.
• To go to another program, enter the 3-digit program address.
Rotation of jack number

Each jack of the Digital Super Hybrid System supports the
connection of a digital proprietary telephone and a single line
device with different extension numbers (eXtra Device Port: XDP
function). To program this function it is necessary to assign two
parts for each jack. The first part of jack one is 01-1. The second
part of jack one is 01-2. The first part of jack two is 02-1 and so
on. The NEXT and PREV buttons can be used to move from jack
to jack as required.
Example;
NEXT NEXT NEXT
#01-1 #01-2 #02-1 #02-2 ......
PREV PREV PREV
Note The first part of a jack is for a DPT of a XDP-assigned jack. The second
part is for a single line device. Program [600] “EXtra Device Port”
assigns which jacks are XDP.
Storing your data

Press STORE to store your data.
• The STORE indicator lights red and a confirmation tone is
emitted.
* Confirmation tone (one beep)
After pressing STORE, you will hear a beep. This informs you
that storage is completed.
* Alarm tone (three beeps)
If you hear this alarm, your entry is not valid.
Making another selection within the same program address

• To make the next higher selection, press NEXT.
• To make the previous selection, press PREV.
• To make a specific selection, press SELECT and then enter the
number.

4.1.2 Programming Ways
Going to another program address
After pressing STORE, you can go to another program with either
of the following two methods:
(1) • To go to the next larger program address:
Press Soft 1 (SKP+) or VOLUME (DOWN).
• To go to the next smaller program address:
Press SHIFT + Soft 1 (SKP–) or VOLUME (UP).
(2) To go to a specific program address:
Press END, then enter the Program Address.
Method (1) is useful when you want to perform a series of
programs consecutively. For example, to change the programming
in addresses [0XX], use this method. You can move from [000] to
[001], from [001] to [002], and so on by pressing the SKP+ or
VOLUME . You can move in reverse order from [008] to [007],
etc. by pressing the SKP– or VOLUME .
This method can also be used to move between neighboring
program groups: For example, you can move between the program
addresses of the largest [0XX] and [100], the largest [1XX] and
[200], and so on. Also, you can move between the smallest
program address [000] and the largest one [9XX]. Program
addresses [7XXX] are arranged between [6XX] and [8XX].
Method (2) is useful when you wish to jump to another program
address. For example, you have just finished with program [006]
and now you want to go to program [301]. Neither SKP+/
VOLUME nor SKP–/VOLUME is convenient in this case.
So you should press END and enter 301.
Note The following programming instructions assume that you have already
entered the programming mode and that you will use Method (2).
Confirming the entries

You may review the stored programming without making any
changes.
Going back to the operation mode

Two ways are available to go back to the operation mode:
(1) Lift the handset while in programming mode.
(2) When the Initial Message: SYS-PGM NO?→ is displayed,
press the PROGRAM (or PAUSE) button.
(To display the Initial Message, press END.)

4.1.3 Entering Characters
You can enter characters to store names or messages by using the
dialing key pad, buttons or the Jog Dial.
See the Combination Tables below.
Combination Tables
SHIFT & Soft SHIFT + SHIFT + SHIFT + SHIFT + SHIFT +
Combination S1 S1 S2 S2 S3 S3 SHIFT +S1 SHIFT +S2
Pressing
SELECT
(Times)
Keys 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 Q q Z z ! ?
2 2 A a B b C c
3 3 D d E e F f
4 4 G g H h I i
5 5 J j K k L l
6 6 M m N n O o
7 7 P p Q q R r S s
8 8 T t U u V v
9 9 W w X x Y y Z z
0 0 . , ’ : ;
* / + – = < >
# # $ % & @ ( )
Combination Table 1
Rotating
Jog Dial
(Pulses)
Keys
Note • The alphabetical characters
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 correspond to the letters shown
1 1 Q q R r S s T t on the twelve dialing keys on the
2 2 A a B b C c D d proprietary telephone. (except
3 3 D d E e F f G g symbols)
4 4 G g H h I i J j • In Combination Table 1:
5 5 J j K k L l M m If your telephone is a KX-T7431,
do not use the provided SELECT
6 6 M m N n O o P p
button. Use the AUTO
7 7 P p Q q R r S s ANSWER/MUTE button which
8 8 T t U u V v W w becomes the SELECT button
9 9 W w X x Y y Z z when using the overlay.
0 0 ! ? . , ’ : ; • In Combination Table 2:
* / + – = < > # $ If you keep rotating the Jog Dial,
# # $ % & @ ( ) A a all of the characters in the table
will be displayed.
Combination Table 2

Please see the following example which shows how to select a
desired character.
For example, to select the letter “M”:
Select either of the following three methods:
(1) Using the SHIFT and Soft buttons
(for KX-T7230 / KX-T7235 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 only)
* See Combination Table 1.
1. Press 6. (“M” belongs to “6.”)
• The Function Line shows: M N O
2. Press the Soft 1 (M) button.
(Press SHIFT to display the lower case of the above letters.)
(2) Using the SELECT button
2. Press the SELECT button once.
• Pressing the SELECT button an appropriate number of
times gives you the desired letter. Pressing SELECT
twice gives the letter “m., pressing three times gives “N,”
and so on.
(3) Using the Jog Dial
(for KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 only)
2. Rotate the Jog Dial one pulse.
• Rotating the Jog Dial an appropriate number of pulses
gives you the desired letter. Rotating the Jog Dial two
pulses gives the letter “m,” rotating three pulses gives
“N,” and so on.
OR
1. Press any dialing keypad.
2. Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired character appears.
• If you keep rotating the Jog Dial, all of the characters will
be displayed. For example, If you rotate the Jog Dial after
pressing 2, characters will appear in the following order:
A a B b ···· Z z (space) ! ? . , ’ : ; * / + – = < >
# $ % & @ ( ) A a B b ····

Example of entering characters: to enter “Mike”:
Using method (1)
The display shows:
1. Enter 6. 6
M N O
2. Press Soft 1 (M). M

M N O
3. Enter 4. M4
G H I
4. Press SHIFT. M4
g h i
5. Press Soft 3 (i). Mi

g h i
6. Enter 5. Mi5
j k l
7. Press Soft 2 (k). Mik
j k l
8. Enter 3. Mik3
d e f
9. Press Soft 2 (e). Mike
d e f
Using method (2)

The display shows:
1. Enter 6. 6
2. Press SELECT. M
3. Enter 4. M4
4. Press SELECT six times. Mi
5. Enter 5. Mi5
6. Press SELECT four times. Mik
7. Enter 3. Mik3
8. Press SELECT four times. Mike
System Programming 4-11.0

Using method (3)
The display shows:
1. Enter 6. 6
2. Rotate Jog Dial one pulse. M
3. Enter 4. M4
4. Rotate Jog Dial six pulses. Mi
5. Enter 5. Mi5
6. Rotate Jog Dial four pulses. Mik
7. Enter 3. Mik3
8. Rotate Jog Dial four pulses. Mike
OR
1. Enter 2. 2
2. Rotate Jog Dial until “M” appears. M
3. Enter 2. M2
4. Rotate Jog Dial until “i” appears. Mi
5. Enter 2. Mi2
6. Rotate Jog Dial until “k” appears. Mik
7. Enter 2. Mik2
8. Rotate Jog Dial until “e” appears. Mike
Notes • To erase all the letters, press CLEAR.

• To erase the last letter, press .
4-11.1 System Programming

Blank
4-11.2
4.1.4 User Programming Mode
Some programming items are accessible by any display proprietary
telephone user in the system.
The programmable items are manager programs [000] through
[022].
Entering the user programming mode

You can access these programs by entering the User Programming
Mode as follows:
Before entering the mode, confirm that:
• Your telephone is on-hook.
• No calls are on hold at your telephone
Press PROGRAM (or PAUSE) + + and enter the User

Password (default: 1234)
After entering the mode, perform the same programming steps as

the system programming steps in each program address.
Note • If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button, substitute it
with the PAUSE button.
• If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM (or PAUSE)
button is pressed, it is cancelled.
• The User Password is not shown on the display. The password can be
changed by system programming. Refer to Section 4.3 [120] “User
Password.”
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy
extension.
• Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one
time.

4.1.5 Example of Programming
The following programming instructions assume that you have
already entered the programming mode and that you will employ
method (2) on page 4-8.
Example: Program [001] “System Speed Dialing Number Set”
Sample of Description Explanation
001 (1) 4.2 Manager Programming(2) (1) Program address: This address is printed at the top
of every page to allow you to quickly find the
System Speed Dialing Number Set(3) desired program.
Description (4) Used to program the System Speed (2) Running title: tells you which group the program
Dial numbers. These numbers are belongs to.
available to all extension users. There (3) Program title.
are 500 numbers from 000 through (4) Provides a more detailed description of the
499. program.
(5) Shows you choices that you can assign.
Selection (5) • Speed dial number: 000 through 499 (6) Shows you the default (factory setting).
• Telephone number: 24 digits (max.)
(7) Shows you programming procedures step by step.
Default(6) All speed dial numbers – Not stored • While programming, use the overlay.
Programming (7)
1. Enter 001.(8) • Before starting to program, enter the
Display: SPD Number Set(9)
programming mode. (See “Entering the
programming mode” on page 4-6.)
2. Press NEXT.(10) (8) Enter the program address.
Display: SPD Code?→(11) (9) The display shows the program title. If your
3. Enter a speed dial number. telephone has soft buttons, the lower line shows
To enter speed dial number 000, the functions that are currently assigned to them.
you can also press NEXT. (10) Press either Soft 3 (NEXT) shown on the display
Display example: 000:Not or the NEXT shown on the overlay.
Stored(12) (11) The message line advises you to enter a speed dial
4. Enter a telephone number. (13) number.
(12) If the telephone number has already been stored,
To delete the current entry, press
the number is displayed.
CLEAR. (14)
To change the current entry, press (13) Enter the telephone number that you want to store.
CLEAR and the new number.
Your entry is displayed as you enter the digits.
(14) Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry.
5. Press STORE.(15)
(15) Your entry is now stored.
6. To program another speed dial
The indicator lights red and a confirmation tone
number, press NEXT or
lets you know that storage is complete.
PREV, or SELECT and the
desired speed dial number.(16) (16) Select the best way for you to store another speed
dial number. Pressing the NEXT / PREV allows
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6. (17)
you to select the next higher / lower speed dial
8. Press END. (18) number. You can also keep pressing them until the
desired one is displayed. If you press SELECT

4.1.5 Example of Programming
Sample of Description Explanation
001 4.2 Manager Programming and the desired speed dial number, the selected
code is displayed.
System Speed Dialing Number Set (contd.) (17) You can continue to program another entry.
(18) After you have stored all your entries, finish this
Conditions (19) • There is a maximum of 500 speed program by pressing END. After pressing END
dial numbers. Each speed dial you can go to any program address you desire.
number has a maximum of 24 digits.
You can return to the Initial Message mode any
time by pressing END.
The valid characters are 0 through
9, and # keys, RECALL or To go to the next lager program address, do not
FLASH, PAUSE, SECRET and – press END but press Soft 1 (SKP+) or
(hyphen) buttons. VOLUME .
• To go to the next smaller program address, do not
• press END but press SHIFT + Soft 1 (SKP-) or
• VOLUME .
• (19) Tells you what you should notice or consider when
(20) doing the programming.
Special Display Features (20) Lists all of the features related to the
— System Speed Dialling programming. These features are described in
System Speed Dialing Section 3.
Programming Structure
Program Address Programming Group Description
[0XX] Manager Programming These programs may meet frequent changes
requested by the customer.
[1XX] System Programming Entire system programming.
[2XX] Timer Programming Flexible system timer setting.
[3XX] TRS Programming Assignment of Toll Restriction.
[4XX] CO Line Programming Setting of CO line and CO line group values.
[5XX] COS Programming Setting of Class of Service (COS).
[6XX] Extension Programming Setting of extension values.
[7XXX] LCR Programming Assignment of Least Cost Routing.
[8XX] Resource Programming Assignment of customer-supplied peripherals
connected to the system.
[9XX] Option Programming Used to answer the user’s requirements or
troubles, if needed.

4.2 Manager Programming 000
Date and Time Set
NOTICE
It is assumed that you have read Section 4.1 “General Programming Instructions.” The use of
the soft buttons is discussed in the section, therefore we will not make any reference to them in
the following instructions. At any time the soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay
keys.
Description Sets the current date and time.
Selection • Day: 1 through 31

• Month: Jan. through Dec.
• Year: 00 through 99
• Day of the week: SUN / MON / TUE / WED / THU / FRI / SAT
• Hour: 1 through 12
• Minute: 00 through 59
• AM / PM
Default 1 Jan. ’94 SAT 12:00 AM
Programming 1. Enter 000.

Display: Day/Time Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: 1 Jan. ’94 SAT
3. Enter the day.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new day.
4. Press .
5. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed.
6. Press .
7. Enter the year.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new year.
8. Press .
9. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is

displayed.

000 4.2 Manager Programming
Date and Time Set (contd.)
10. Press STORE.
11. Press NEXT.

Display example: 12:00 AM
12. Enter the hour.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new hour.
13. Press .
14. Enter the minute.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new minutes.
15. Press .
16. Press SELECT for AM or PM.
17. Press STORE.
18. Press END.
Conditions • After changing an entry, you can press STORE. You do not have
to perform all of the rest of the steps.
• To go back to the previous field, press at steps 4 through 9 and
steps 13 through 16.
• If you hear the alarm after pressing STORE, check that the date is
valid.
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.

Display, Time and Date

System Speed Dialling Number Set
Description Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers. These numbers
are available to all extension users. The stored numbers are also
applied to CO Incoming Call Information Display / Log features.
Selection • Speed dial number: 000 through 499

Default All speed dial numbers – Not stored

Display: SPD Number Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?–>
3. Enter a speed dial number.

To enter speed dial number 000, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 000: Not Stored
4. Enter a telephone number.

To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or

PREV, or SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers. Each speed dial
number has a maximum of 24 digits. The valid characters are 0
through 9, , and # keys, RECALL or FLASH, PAUSE, SECRET
and – (hyphen) buttons.
– To store the register recall signal, press RECALL or FLASH.
Note: The stored recall will be in effect only during an
established call. (Refer to Section 3 “External Feature
Access.”)
– To store a hyphen, press the “–” button.

System Speed Dialling Number Set (contd.)
– To store a pause, press PAUSE.

(Refer to Section 3 “Pause Insertion, Automatic.”)
– To store the feature number to convert pulse signals to DTMF
signals, press the # keys.
(Refer to Section 3 “Pulse to Tone Conversion.”)
– To prevent the display of all or part of the number, press SECRET
before and after confidential parts of the number. The SECRET
button must always be entered in a pair. Or your entry is not
stored. (Refer to Section 3 “Secret Dialling.”)
• If you are storing an external number, include the line access code
(default=9, 81 through 88) before the number. When dialling, a pause
is automatically inserted after the code. If the programmed pause time
(in program [412] “Pause Time”) is 1.5 or 2.5 seconds, it is required to
store a pause manually after the line access code.
• If you are storing an account code, enter the account code before the
line access code. (Refer to Section 3 “Account Code Entry.”)
• If you are storing a number for CO Incoming Call Information Display
with name, enter “–” (hyphen) after the line access code. The system
starts to compare the calling party’s number with the System Speed
Dialling Number stored after “–.” Example : 9–12345678
(Refer to Section 3 “CO Incoming Call Information Display.”)
• It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by
storing it in two speed dial numbers. A line access code should not be
stored in the second speed dial number.
• To go to another speed dial number at steps 3 through 6, press
SELECT and start with step 3.
• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display,
press or .
• Program [002] “System Speed Dialling Name Set” is used to give
names to speed dial numbers.

CO Incoming Call Information Log
Special Display Features — System Speed Dialling

System Speed Dialling Name Set
Description Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in

program [001] “System Speed Dialling Number Set.” KX-T7235,
KX-T7431, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 telephones show the stored
name when performing System Speed Dialling. The stored names
are applied to the CO Incoming Call Information Display / Log
features.
Selection • Speed dial number: 000 through 499

• Name: 10 characters (max.)
Default All speed dial numbers – Not stored

Display: SPD Name Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?–>
3. Enter a speed dial number.

To enter speed dial number 000, you can also press NEXT.
4. Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Speed dial numbers are programmed in program [001] “System

Speed Dialling Number Set.”
• There is a maximum of 500 names. Each name has a maximum of 10
characters.
• To go to another speed dial number at steps 3 through 6, press
SELECT and start with step 3.

CO Incoming Call Information Log
Special Display Features — System Speed Dialling

Extension Number Set
Description Assigns an extension number to each extension.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16 (-1 / -2)

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2)
(-1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Extension Number: 2 through 4 digits
Default KX-TD816: Jack 01-1 through 16-1 = 201 through 216;

Jack 01-2 through 16-2 = 301 through 316
KX-TD1232:Jack 01-1 through 64-1 = 201 through 264;

Display: EXT Number Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
3. Enter a jack number.

To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display: #01-1:EXT201
4. Enter an extension number.

5. Press STORE.
6. To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and the desired jack number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX-TD816, and 128

extension numbers for KX-TD1232. Each extension number can be
two, three, or four digits, consisting of 0 through 9. The and # keys
cannot be used.
• In the case of KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.

Extension Number Set (contd.)
• An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits

disagree with the setting of the program [100] “Flexible Numbering,
(01) – (16) 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is
assigned as the leading digit, some extensions have two digits and some
have three digits. If two digits are assigned, some have three digits and
some have four digits.
• Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack. If XDP is disabled
for the jack in program [600] “EXtra Device Port,” the extension
number of the second part (XX-2) is not available. (XX=jack number)
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment
of program [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set,” [017] “TD286
Extension Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number
Assignment,” [130] “Phantom Extension Number Assignment” and
[813] “Floating Number Assignment.” Valid entry examples: 10 and
11; 10 and 110. Invalid entry examples: 10 and 106; 210 and 21.
• Program [004] “Extension Name Set” is used to give names to
extension numbers.

Flexible Numbering
Intercom Calling
Special Display Features — Extension Dialling

Extension Name Set
Description Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in program

[003] “Extension Number Set.”

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2)
Default All jacks – Not stored

Display: EXT Name Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->

number.
Display: #01-1:Not Stored
4. Enter a name.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 32 names for KX-TD816, and 128 names for
KX-TD1232. Each name has a maximum of 10 characters.
• Program [003] “Extension Number Set” is used to assign extension
numbers.
on page 4-7.

Display, Call Information Intercom Calling
Special Display Features — Extension Dialling

Flexible CO Button Assignment
Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on proprietary

telephones from a centralized telephone.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64
• Button Code (plus parameter, if required):
Button Code Parameter

0 (Single-CO) KX-TD816: 01 through 16 (CO line number)
KX-TD1232: 01 through 54 (CO line number)
1 (DSS) 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
2 (One-Touch) 24 digits max. (Telephone number)
3 (Message Waiting) None
4 (FWD/DND) None
5 (Save) None
6 (Account) None
7 (Conference) None
80 (Log-In/Log-Out) 2 through 4 digits (Hunting group extension number)
81 (Hurry-Up) 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
82 (Voice Mail Transfer) 2 through 4 digits (Voice mail extension number)
83 (Two-Way Record)† 2 through 4 digits (Voice mail extension number)
84 (Two-Way Transfer)† 2 through 4 digits (Voice mail extension number)
85 (Live Call Screening)† None
86 (Live Call Screening Cancel)† None
87 (Alert) None
88 (Phantom Extension) 2 through 4 digits (Phantom extension number)
8 00 (Night) None
8 01 (Call Pickup Deny) None
8 02 (Call Waiting) None
8 03 (Calling Line Identification Restriction) None
8 04 (Connected Line Identification Restriction) None
8 05 (DND for Direct Dialling In Call) None
8 07 (Paging Deny) None
8 08 (Paralleled Telephone Connection) None
8 09 (Pickup Dialling) None
8 10 (Call Forwarding from Hunting 2 through 4 digits (Forwarding hunting group
Group) extension number)
8 11 (Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO Line) KX-TD816:1 or 2 (Doorphone number)
KX-TD1232: 1 through 4 (Doorphone number)
8# (One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold) 24 digits max. (Telephone number)
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital System Programming 4-23
Flexible CO Button Assignment (contd.)

9 (Terminate) None
(Loop-CO) None
# (Group-CO) 1 through 8 (CO line group number)
CO (ringer frequency) 1 through 8 (Ring tone type number)
Default • KX-TD816
All jacks – CO buttons 1 through 8 = Single-CO 01 through 08;
Ring tone type 2
• KX-TD1232
All jacks – CO buttons 1 through 24 = Single-CO 01 through 24;
Ring tone type 2

Display: Flexible Key Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?→

Display: PT–PGM Mode
4. Press a CO button to be changed.

The display shows the contents pre-assigned to the button.
Display example: CO-01
5. Enter a button code (plus parameter, if required).

To change the parameter, press CLEAR and the new parameter.
6. Press STORE.
7. • To program another CO button of the same jack, repeat steps
4 through 6.
• To program another jack, press SELECT and repeat steps 3
through 6.
8. Press END.
Cancelling 1. Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above.

2. Enter 2.
3. Press STORE.
4. Press END.

Flexible CO Button Assignment (contd.)
Conditions • A centralized telephone is a telephone connected to jack 01 or a jack

programmed as a manager extension in program [006] “Operator /
Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night.”
• There is a maximum of 16 proprietary telephones for KX-TD816, and
64 proprietary telephones for KX-TD1232.
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available. Jack
numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• The number of the CO buttons available depends on the telephone type.
(Refer to Section 3 “Buttons on Proprietary Telephones.”) To program
24 CO buttons, use the proprietary telephone, KX-T7230.
• If you press the same CO button again in step 5, you can select a
desired ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring
tone. When you enter the tone type number (1 through 8), you will hear
the selected tone type until STORE is pressed. This selection is
possible only for the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single-CO,
Group-CO, or Loop-CO.

Button, Flexible Buttons on Proprietary Telephones

Blank
4-24.2
Operator / Manager Extension Assignment — Day / Night
Description Assigns the jack number for a manager and / or operators. The
manager extension can perform system programming. The
operator has the ability to perform operator services.
Selection • OPE-1 (operator 1) (Day / Night) / OPE-2 (operator 2) (Day /

Night) / MNGER (manager)
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16
Default Operator 1 (Day / Night) and Manager – Jack 01;

Operator 2 – Not stored

Display: Operator/Manager
2. Press NEXT to program Operator 1.

Display: OP-1-Day:Jack01
To program another item, you can also keep pressing NEXT or PREV
until the desired one is displayed.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new jack number.
4. Press STORE.
5. To program another item, press NEXT or PREV.
7. Press END.
Conditions • Up to two operators and a manager can be programmed.

• The manager cannot be assigned the jack number of the Console Port
set in program [007] “Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment.”
• If the assigned jack is in eXtra Device Port mode, the proprietary
telephone jack is treated as the manager / operator extension.
• If there is no operator or manager, press CLEAR in step 3.

Manager Extension Operator

Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
Description Assigns the jack numbers for the Console and the paired extension.
Selection • Console number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 04

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 08 (for Master),
09 through 16 (for Slave)
• Jack number for Console:
• Jack number for paired extension:
Default All Consoles – Not stored

Display: DSS Console Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display: DSS NO?–>
3. Enter a Console number.

To enter Console number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: DSS–01:# P:#
4. Enter a jack number for the console.

5. Press .
6. Enter a jack number for the paired extension.

Display example: DSS–01:#02 P:#03
7. Press STORE.

Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment (contd.)
8. To program another Console, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and the desired Console number.
10. Press END.
Conditions • The jack number for the Console and that for the paired extension must
be entered together.
• Multiple Consoles cannot be assigned to the same Console jack.
• Multiple Consoles can be paired with the same proprietary telephone
jack.
• A Console jack cannot be assigned the jack 01 and the jack number of
Manager set in program [006] “Operator / Manager Extension
Assignment — Day / Night.”
• If all incoming outside calls are set to ring at the operator extension
telephone in program [407]–[408] “DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night,”
assigning the Consoles to the operator extension makes the operator’s
job much easier.
• If a Console - assigned jack is programmed for eXtra Device Port, an
SLT can be connected to the jack in parallel with the console.
• If an SLT is assigned as the pair extension, the paired Console will not
function.

Console

Absent Messages
Description Used to program the absent messages. An absent message, if set by

the station user, is displayed on the calling extension’s telephone to
show the reason for the user’s absence.
Selection • Message number: 1 through 9
• Message: 16 characters (max.)
Default 1: Will Return Soon 5: Out Until %%/%%
2: Gone Home 6: In a Meeting
3: At Ext %%% 7 through 9: Blank (not stored)
4: Back at %%:%%

Display: Message Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display: MSG NO?–>
3. Enter a message number.
To enter message number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: MSG1:Will Return
4. Enter the message.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new message.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another message, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired message number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of nine messages. Messages 1 through 6 are
programmed at the factory but can be changed. Each message has a
maximum of 16 characters.
• You can enter a maximum of seven “%” characters per message which
can be programmed at each user’s station. The station user can enter 0
through 9, and # for the % characters. If the user enters digits less
than the number of “%” characters, it is recommended to fill the
remaining “%” characters with “#” or “ .”
• If there are 4-digit extension numbers available in your system, add one
“%” to Message 3.
• To display parts of the message which have scrolled off the display,
press or .

Quick Dial Number Set
Description Stores up to eighty quick dial numbers.
Selection • Location number: 01 through 80

• Desired quick dial number: 24 digits (max.)
Default All locations – Not Stored

Display: Quick Dial
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?→
3. Enter a location number.

To enter location number 01, you can also press NEXT.
4. Enter a desired quick dial number.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and the desired location number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eighty quick dial numbers. A maximum of 24

digits, consisting of 0 through 9, , #, RECALL or FLASH, PAUSE,
or – (hyphen), can be assigned to a quick dial number.
• Before programming, assign a feature number for each location first in
program [104] “Quick Dial Assignment.”

Quick Dialling

Budget Management
Description Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the extension basis.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2),

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2),
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Charge limitation (Charge): 0 through 99999999
Default All jacks – 0 £

Display: Charge Limit
2. Press NEXT.

number.
Display example: #01–1: 0 £
4. Enter a charge limitation.

To delete the charge limitation, press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • If the charge limitation is set “0,” no restriction is applied.
• To assign all jack number to one selection, press the key in step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
“Assignment of Denomination.”

Budget Management

Charge Margin and Tax Rate
Description Assigns the margin rate of a telephone charge and the tax rate to the
total charge. This program is used for printing out the total charge
when a guest checks out.
Selection Margin (%): 0.0 through 999.9

Tax (%): 0.0 through 200.0
Default Margin : 0.0%, Tax 1,2 and 3: 0.0%

Display: Charge Margin
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Margin : 0.0%
3. Enter a charge margin rate (whole number part).

4. Press .
5. Enter a charge margin rate (decimal fraction part).
6. Press STORE.
7. Press NEXT.
Display: Tax 1 : 0.0%
8. Enter a tax rate (whole number part).

To delete the tax rate, press CLEAR.
9. Press .
10. Enter a tax 1 rate (decimal fraction part).
11. To program another tax rate, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired tax rate number.
13. Press STORE.
14. Press END.
Conditions None

HOTEL APPLICATION – Check-In / Check-Out

ISDN Extension Number Set
Description Assigns an extension number to each port which is connected to the

ISDN S0 unit or card.
Selection • Port number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 04

KX-TD1232 – 03 through 06, 09 through 12
Default All ports – Not stored

Display: ISDN EXT.Num Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?→
3. Enter a port number.

To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display: #03:Not Stored

5. Press STORE.
6. To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and the desired port number.
8. Press END.

ISDN Extension Number Set (contd.)
Conditions • Each extension number can be one, two or three digits, consisting of 0
through 9. The and # keys cannot be used.
• A multiple subscriber number (MSN) is determined regarding to this
assignment. The MSN must be up to 4 digits, consisting of the assigned
extension number and an additional number (1 or 2 digits). The MSN
additional number digit can be selected in programs [427] “ISDN
Extension Multiple Subscriber Number” and [445] “TD286 ISDN
Extension Multiple Subscriber Number.”
Example) In case that the ISDN extension number is assigned “3”;
30 through 39 are effective as MSN’s. The extension user can call any
terminal equipment on the ISDN S0 bus with MSN individually.
Pressing “30” calls all extensions on the ISDN S0 bus simultaneously.
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
disagree with the setting of the program [100] “Flexible Numbering, 1st
through 16th hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is assigned as the
leading digit, some extensions have one through three digits. If two
digits are assigned, some have three digits.
of programs [003] “Extension Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail
Extension Number Assignment,” [130] “Phantom Extension Number
Assignment” and [813] “Floating Number Assignment.” Valid entry
examples: 10 and 11; 10 and 110. Invalid entry examples: 10 and 106;
210 and 21.
• Program [013] “ISDN Extension Name Set” is used to give names to
the extension numbers.


ISDN Extension Name Set
Description Assigns names to the ISDN extension numbers programmed in

program [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set.”

Default All ports – Not stored

Display: ISDN EXT. Name
2. Press NEXT.

4. Enter a name.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12
are for the Slave, if available.


Budget Management on ISDN Port
Description Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the ISDN port basis.
Selection • Port number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 04, ( =all ports)

KX-TD1232 – 03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
Default All ports – 0 £

Display: ISDN Charge Lim.
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #03: 0 £

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.

• To assign all port to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.

Budget management

Charge Rate Fractional Point Assignment
Description Assigns how many decimal places to set for the charge rate.
Selection Number of decimal places: 0 through 8
Default 2

Display: Decimal Point
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Fraction place 2
3. Enter the desired number.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • This program is used when the rate is assigned in program [016]
“Charge Rate Assignment.”
• According to this assignment, the charge is displayed during the
conversation and shown on the SMDR print out.
• This assignment is used for the charge fee reference.


Charge Rate Assignment
Description Assigns the rate to each CO line.
Selection • CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08, 09,

(9=for KX-TD290, =all CO lines)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24, 25,
(25=for KX-TD290, =all CO lines)
• Charge rate: 9 digits max. (including the decimal point)
Default 0.01

Display: Charge Rate Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?→
3. Enter a CO line number.

To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: 0.01
4. Enter a charge rate (to the left of the decimal point).

5. Press .
6. Enter a charge rate (to the right of the decimal point).

7. Press STORE.
8. To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and the desired CO line number.
10. Press END.

Charge Rate Assignment (contd.)
Conditions • A maximum of nine digits, consisting of 0 through 9, can be assigned as

the rate. The number of decimal places depends on the assignment in
program [015] “Charge Rate Fractional Point Assignment.”
• When the ISDN card or unit is installed to the system, the rate cannot
be assigned per CO line. The rate which is assigned to the lowest CO
line number is used for the other lines.
For example, when the KX-TD280 is installed to the KX-TD1232, the
rate assigned to CO09 is used for CO 10 through 12.
• If a different rate is assigned to each CO line, the extension charge fee,
account code charge fee and total extension charge fee meters will not
be displayed correctly. In this case, the meter is calculated by the rate
assigned to CO01.
• When the ISDN S0 line unit or card is installed, you have to restart the
system after programming. Otherwise, the correct charge may not be
displayed. See the “2.7 System Restart” section.


TD286 Extension Number Set
Description Assigns an extension number to each port which is connected to the

ISDN S0 unit TD286.

Default All ports – Not Stored

Display: TD286 EXT.Number
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Port NO?→

To enter port number 01, you can also press NEXT.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • Each extension number can be one through three digits, consisting of 0
• A multiple subscriber number (MSN) is determined regarding this
assignment. The MSN consists of the assigned extension number and
an additional digit, 0 through 9.
Example) In case that the ISDN extension number is assigned “3”;
30 through 39 are effective as MSN’s. The extension user can call any
terminal equipment on the ISDN S0 bus with MSN individually.
Pressing “30” calls all extensions on the ISDN S0 bus simultaneously.
• For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master
System and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.

TD286 Extension Number Set (contd.)

disagree with the setting of the program [100] “Flexible Numbering, 1st
through 16th hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is assigned as the
leading digit, some extensions have one through three digits. If two
digits are assigned, some have three digits.
of programs [003] “Extension Number Set,” [012] “ISDN Extension
Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment,” [130]
“Phantom Extension Number Assignment” and [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.” Valid entry examples: 10 and 11; 10 and 110. Invalid
entry examples: 10 and 106; 210 and 21.
• Program [018] “TD286 Extension Name Set” is used to give names to
the extension numbers.


TD286 Extension Name Set
Description Assigns names to the TD286 extension numbers programmed in

program [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set.”


Display: TD286 EXT. Name
2. Press NEXT.

4. Enter a name.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new name.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master


Budget Management on TD286 Port
Description Assigns the charge limitation of a call on a TD286 port basis.
Selection • Port number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 06,

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 12,
( =all ports)
Default All ports – 0

Display: TD286 Charge Lim
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01: 0

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.

• To assign all ports to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.
System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave, if available.

Budget management Charge Fee Reference

4.2 Manager Programming 021-022
Doorphone Call Forwarding — Day / Night
Description Assigns the phone number where doorphone calls are forwarded.
This feature is one of the ISDN service.
Selection • Doorphone number: 1 through 4 (3,4 is for KX-TD1232 only.)

• Line access code: 9 or 81 through 88
• Phone number: 24 digits (max.) (including a line access code) /
Disable (not forwarded)
Default All doorphone numbers – Disable
Programming 1. Enter a program address (021 for day or 022 for night).
Display example: D-phone FWD Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: D-phone NO?→
3. Enter a doorphone number.

Display example: #1:Disable
4. Enter a line access code and a phone number.

To assign no forwarding, press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program the other doorphone, press NEXT.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. Press END.
Conditions • When “Disable” is selected, the call is received by the extension

programmed in [607]–[608].

Night Service

100 4.3 System Programming
Flexible Numbering
Description Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature

numbers for system features.
Selection • Selection number: 01 through 85 (See “Feature Number List” on

page 4-37 and 4-38 for the corresponding features.)
• Feature number: 1 or 2 digits (for selection numbers 01 through 16);
1 through 3 digits (for selection numbers 17
through 85)
Default See “Feature Number List” on page 4-37 and 4-38.

Display: FLX Numbering
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Select NO?→
3. Enter a selection number.

To enter selection number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01. 1—EXT BL:2
4. Enter the feature number.

To delete the feature number, press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another selection, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired selection number.
8. Press END.
To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers

(01) through (16) 1st through 16th extension blocks;
1. Enter 100.
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter 00.
Display: All Feature CLR?
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.

4.3 System Programming 100
Flexible Numbering (contd.)
Conditions • Each extension block has one or two digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
Assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective blocks.
• Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programs [003]
“Extension Number Set,” [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set,” [127]
“Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment,” [130] “Phantom
Extension Number Assignment” and [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.”
• Each feature number has one through three digits, consisting of 0
through 9, , and #.
• If or # is included in a feature number, dial pulse telephone users
cannot access the feature.
• Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid. Valid entry
example: 30 and 31, 210 and 211. Invalid entry example: 5 and 5, 30
and 301.
• If you delete a feature number, the feature cannot be used by dialling
operation.
• You can remove all the feature numbers except selections (01) through (16).
• To clear an extension block (01) through (16), it is required to change the
corresponding numbers assigned in programs [003] “Extension Number
Set,” [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension
Number Assignment,” [130] “Phantom Extension Number Assignment”
and [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”

Flexible Numbering
Number Feature Default
Feature Number List 01 1st hundred extension block 2
02 2nd hundred extension block 3
03 - 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None
17 Operator call 0
18 Automatic line access / LCR 9
19 CO line group line access 8
20 System speed dialling
21 Station speed dialling 6
22 Station speed dialling programming 60
23 Doorphone call 61
24 Paging – external 62
25 Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer 42
26 Paging – group 63
27 Paging – group answer 43
28 Call pickup, CO line 4
29 Call pickup, group 40
30 Call pickup, directed 41
31 Call hold 50
32 Call hold retrieve – intercom 51
33 Call hold retrieve – CO line 53

Flexible Numbering (contd.)

34 Last number redial #
35 Call park / call park retrieve 52
36 Account code entry 49
37 Door opener 55
38 External feature access 64
39 Station program clear 790
40 Message waiting 70
42 Call forwarding / do not disturb 710
43 Call pickup deny 720
45 Call waiting / OHCA / whisper OHCA 731
47 Pickup dialling 74
48 Absent message 750
49 Timed reminder 76
50 Electronic station lockout 77
51 Night service mode 78
52 Parallel telephone mode 69
53 Background music – external 65
54 Paging – deny 721
55 Primary COS select 791
56 Secondary COS select 793
57 Log-in / log-out 45
60 Automatic callback busy cancel 46
61-69 Not available —
70 Timed reminder remote 7
71 Call log, incoming 56
72 Do not disturb for DDI 54
73 CLIR 59
74 COLR 58
75 Incoming call log lock 57
76† Live call screening password control† 799
77 System working report 794
78 Super extra device port (SXDP) 48
79 Outgoing message 712
80 CLIP / COLP 711
81 Reserved —
82 Call Forwarding from hunting group 714
83 Doorphone call forwarding to CO line 715
84 Doorphone call forwarding mode switch 716
85 CCBS cancel 713
4-38 System Programming †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Day / Night Service Switching Mode
Description This program is used to determine if night mode is automatic or

manual.
Selection Manual / Auto (automatic)
Default Manual

Display: Day/Night Mode
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: D/N Mode:Manual
3. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • If automatic switching is assigned, day / night mode is switched at the

time programmed in [102] “Day / Night Service Starting Time.”
• The pre-assigned extension and the operator can switch the day / night
mode at any time.

Night Service

Day / Night Service Starting Time
Description Sets the starting time on a day of the week basis, when automatic
day / night switching is programmed in program [101] “Day / Night
Service Switching Mode.”
Selection • Day of the week selection number:

1 (Sunday) / 2 (Monday) / 3 (Tuesday) / 4 (Wednesday) /
5 (Thursday) / 6 (Friday) / 7 (Saturday) / (every day of the
week)
• Hour: 1 through 12 / Disable (no switching)
• AM / PM
Default Every day of the week – Day – 9:00 AM / Night – 5:00 PM

Display: Day/Night Time
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Day of Week?–>
3. Enter the day of the week selection number.

To select Sunday, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Sun-Day: 9:00 AM
To select night mode, press NEXT.
Display example: Sun-Nig: 5:00 PM
4. Enter the hour.

To set no switching, keep pressing SELECT until “Disable” is
displayed and go to step 9.
If SELECT is pressed, the display shows the previous entry. If the
previous setting was “Disable,” press SELECT to enter the starting
time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
5. Press .
6. Enter the minute.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new minutes.
7. Press .

Day / Night Service Starting Time (contd.)
9. Press STORE.
10. To program another day / night mode or day of the week,

press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and the day of the
week selection number.
12. Press END.
Conditions • To select the desired day, you may keep pressing NEXT at step 3. To
assign every day of the week to one selection, press the key at step
3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Sunday.
• If day / night switching is unwanted, select “Disable” at step 4.

Night Service

Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
Description Assigns the sequence in which CO line groups will be accessed

when in Automatic Line Access mode. When a user dials the
feature number for automatic line access (default=9) or presses the
L-CO button, an idle line is hunted in the programmed CO line
group order.
Selection CO line group number: 1 through 8,

eight entries (max.) in desired order
Default 12345678

Display: Local Access
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Access:12345678
3. Enter the CO line group numbers in priority from top to

bottom.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new order.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eight CO line groups. Up to eight CO line

group numbers can be entered.
• Automatic Line Access feature works only if Least Cost Routing mode
is turned off in program [7000] “LCR Mode.”

Line Access, Automatic Line Preference – Outgoing
Line Access, Direct

Quick Dial Assignment
Description Assign a feature number for each quick dial location number.

• Feature number: 4 digits (max.)

Display: FLX Quick Dial
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter a quick dial number.

Display example:01: Not Stored
4. Enter a desired number.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eighty quick dial numbers. A maximum of four

digits, consisting of 0 through 9, can be assigned to a quick number.

Quick Dialling

Blank
4-42.2
Account Codes
Description Assigns the account codes for Account Code Entry, Verified – All
Calls and Verified – Toll Restriction Override modes. If Verified –
All Calls is assigned in program [508] “Account Code Entry
Mode,” an account code is required to make an outside call. If
Verified – Toll Restriction Override is assigned, an account code is
only required for a toll call and overrides toll restriction.

• Account code: 10 digits (max.)
Default All locations – Not stored

Display: Account Code
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: 001:Not Stored
4. Enter an account code.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new account code.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 128 verifiable account codes. Each code has a
maximum of 10 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• Program [508] “Account Code Entry Mode” is used to select the
Account Code Entry mode.
• Account codes having “99” in any part or ending with “9” are invalid,
as “99” is used as a delimiter when entering an account code.
• The account code recorded in location 001 is not printed out on the
SMDR (Private Call feature).

Account Code Entry Private Call

Station Hunting Type
Description Used to enable or disable hunting and set the Station Hunting type
for each hunting group. There are six Station Hunting types
available: Circular, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), Voice Mail
(VM), Automated Attendant (AA), Ring, and No Reply . If
circular hunting is assigned for a group, all of the extensions in the
group are hunted until an idle one is found. If VM hunting is
assigned, all of the VM ports of an extension group are hunted
until an idle one is found to permit Voice Mail Service. If AA
hunting is assigned, all of the AA ports of an extension group are
hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service. If UCD is
assigned, group members are hunted in circular way, starting at the
extension following the last one called. If Ring hunting is assigned,
all of the extensions in the group ring simultaneously. If No Reply
hunting is assigned, the extensions in the group are hunted in order
of registration for a programmed interval of time.
Selection • Hunting group number: 01 through 32
• Disable (no hunting) / Circular / VM (voice mail) /
AA (automated attendant) / UCD / Ring / No Reply
Default All hunting groups – Disable

Display: Hunt Type
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Group NO?→
3. Enter a hunting group number.
To enter hunting group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01: Disable
displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another hunting group, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired hunting group number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection*) for connection to a Voice Processing System as VM or
AA port.

Hunting Group Station Hunting
No Reply Group Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Ring Group Voice Mail Integration
4-44 System Programming *: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

System Password
Description Assigns the password required for entering system programming

mode and for maintenance from a personal computer.
Selection Password: 4 through 7 digits
Default 1234

Display: System Password
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Password:1234
3. Enter a password.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new password.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • The password can be from four to seven digits long. The valid numbers
are from 0 through 9.
• If less than four digits are entered, they are not stored.

System Programming with Proprietary Telephone

Description Enables or disables the function of automatically holding the

outside call when a DSS button on the Console or proprietary
telephone is pressed.
Selection Enable / Disable
Default Enable

Display: DSS Auto Hold
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Auto HLD:Enable

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions This assignment applies to all DSS buttons on all Consoles and on all
proprietary telephones in the system.


Expansion Card / Unit Type
Description Assigns the type of expansion cards/units to be used in the Master

and Slave Systems. This allows the system to identify the card
and/or unit in each expansion location.
Selection KX-TD816
• Areas 1; 2; 3 = 1 (Inside the system): C (4CO) / S (2S0)
2; 3 (Expansion Area): C (4CO) / S (2S0) /
S2 (6S0) / S3 (1 PRI) / E (EXT)
KX-TD1232
• Master / Slave
• Areas 1; 2; 3; 4 = 1 (Inside the system): C (8CO) / S (4S0)
2; 3; 4 (Expansion Area): C (4CO) / S (2S0) /
S2 (6S0) / S3 (1 PRI) / E1 (EXT1) / E2 (EXT2)
Default KX-TD816: C; C; E
KX-TD1232: Master and Slave – C; C; E1; E2
Programming KX-TD816
1. Enter 109.
Display: Expansion Card
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Mast.:C;C;E

displayed.
4. Press .
displayed.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are
completed.
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
KX-TD1232
1. Enter 109.
2. Press NEXT to program Master System.

To program “Slave,” press NEXT again.
Display example: Mast.:C;C;E1;E2

Expansion Card / Unit Type (contd.)

displayed.
4. Press .
displayed.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are
completed.
7. Press STORE.
If only one system is in operation, go to step 8.
8. Press NEXT to program Slave System.

Display example: Slav. :C;C;E1;E2

10. Press END.
Conditions • When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data
Clear, the application for location will use practical installation instead
of the system default setting.
• For KX-TD816, there is one expansion area inside the system, area 1,
and there are two expansion areas on the system, area 2 and 3 from
bottom to top.
and there are three expansion areas on the system, area 2, 3 and 4 from
bottom to top.
• If the Slave System of KX-TD1232 is out-of-service, skip the steps 8
and 9.
• After changing the setting, to make your setting effective, turn the
Power Switch off and on again. Otherwise the previous setting will be
maintained.

Module Expansion

Network Type Assignment
Description Assigns the type of ISDN network.
Selection BT / EURO - BT
Default BT

Display: Network Type
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: BT

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None

ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number Assignment
Description Assigns the removed digits and added number to a subscriber’s

number and the DDI number sent from the network to make an
extension number which receives the call.
Selection • CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,

( =all CO lines)
• Removed digit: 0 through 16 (0=no deletion)
• Added number: 4 digits (max.)
Default All CO lines – 0 (removed digit), Not stored (added number)

Display: DDI Removed/Add
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter the CO line number.
4. Enter the digit(s) to be deleted.

5. Press .
Display example: CO01:3,
6. Enter the number(s) to be added.

7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions Example:
If the removed digits are assigned as “6” and the added number is
assigned as “2,” the number sent from the network is changed as follows:
85492603 (DDI number: 2 digits)
Six digits are deleted and “2” is added, and the number becomes “203.”


VM Status DTMF Set
Description Sets the DTMF signals (“inband”) that are transmitted to the Voice
Processing System (VPS), by the Panasonic telephone system,
under all the dial and connect events which the VPS can occur.
The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
signals:
RBT (ringback tone) : This signal is sent when calling an
extension.
BT (busy tone) : This is sent when the called extension is
busy.
ROT (reorder tone) : This is sent when the dialled number is
invalid.
DND (DND tone) : This is sent when the other extension has
DND assigned.
Answer : This is sent when the other extension
answers the call.
Disconnect : This is sent when the other extension
hangs up.
Confirm (confirmation tone) :
This is sent when the feature number for
“Message Waiting Lamp” is valid.
FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone) :
Not available (reserved).
FWD VM BT (FWD to VM busy tone) :
This is sent when the called extension
has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone) :
Not available (reserved).
Selection • RBT / BT / ROT / DND / Answer / Disconnect / Confirm /

FWD VM RBT / FWD VM BT / FWD EXT RBT
• DTMF signal number: 3 digits (max.)
Default RBT – 1; BT – 2; ROT – 3; DND – 4; Answer – 5; Disconnect – #9

Confirm – 9; FWD VM RBT – 6; FWD VM BT – 7; FWD EXT
RBT – 8

Display: VM Status Set
2. Press NEXT to program ringback tone status.

To program another status, keep pressing NEXT until the desired
status is displayed.
Display example: RBT :1

VM Status DTMF Set (contd.)
3. Enter a DTMF signal number.

4. Press STORE.
5. To program another selection, keep pressing NEXT or PREV

until the desired selection is displayed.
7. Press END.
Conditions • A DTMF signal number can have a maximum of three digits, consisting
of 0 through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• The DTMF signals are sent to the extensions in the extension group that
is assigned as “VM” or “AA” in program [106] “Station Hunting
Type.”


VM Command DTMF Set
Description Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice

Processing System (VPS). There are four commands available:
Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
(A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail (VM) Service
(1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox
number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message
without knowing the mailbox number.
• Required entries (selections):
LV-MSG (Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the
port.
AA-SVC (Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is
effective in program [990], Area 05 – bits 2 and 3, the “AA-SVC”
command is sent to a VM port if an incoming outside call is
answered by the VM port.
• Other programming required (program addresses): [106]; [602];
[609]; [990], Area 05 – bits 2 and 3; [990], Area 02 – bit 8
(2) Hearing the message at the extension
If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button
indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear
the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
GETMSG (Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM
port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
VM-SVC (Voice Mail Service): The “VM-SVC” command is a
code transmitted preceding the “GETMSG” command above.
This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
MESSAGE indicator.
• Other programming required (program addresses): [609]; [990],
Area 02 – bit 8
(B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant (AA) Service
An AA port answers an incoming outside call to provide AA
services, such as call transfer, receiving a message.
VM-SVC (Voice Mail Service): The “VM-SVC” command is a
code transmitted before “LV-MSG” code if Operator transfers a
call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that
the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
• Other programming required (program addresses): [106], [131]

VM Command DTMF Set (contd.)
Selection • LV-MSG / GETMSG / AA-SVC / VM-SVC

• DTMF signal number: 16 digits (max.)
Default LV-MSG – H; GETMSG – H; AA-SVC – #8 ; VM-SVC – #6

Display: VM Command Set
2. Press NEXT to program the LV-MSG command.

To program another command, keep pressing NEXT until the desired
command is displayed.
Display example: LV-MSG:H
3. Enter a DTMF signal number.

4. Press STORE.
5. To program another selection, keep pressing NEXT or PREV
until the desired selection is displayed.
7. Press END.
Conditions • A command signal number can have a maximum of 16 digits,

consisting of 0 through 9, , #, RECALL or FLASH, and PAUSE.
• The RECALL or FLASH button is available only for LV-MSG and
GETMSG commands to store “H” which means “Home Position.”
• If “H” is stored for “LV-MSG,” a mailbox number programmed in
program [609] “Voice Mail Access Codes” or an extension number will
be sent to the VM port (Follow On ID function). If certain codes are
required before and after the ID code, insert “H” between the codes, as
“aaaHbbb.” If nothing is stored, it will operate as “H.”
• If “ H” is stored for “GETMSG,” a mailbox number programmed in
program [609] “Voice Mail Access Codes” or an extension number will
be sent to the port succeeding the “ .”


Adjust Time
Description Used to set the time for checking the normality of the system.
Every day at the programmed time, system data is checked. If an
error is checked, it is recorded onto error log.
Selection • Hour: 1 through 12

• AM / PM
Default 1:00 AM

Display: Adjust Time
2. Press NEXT to program hour.

Display example: 1:00 AM
3. Enter the hour.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new hour.
4. Press to program minute.
5. Enter the Minute.

To change the current entry, enter the new minute.
6. Press to program AM / PM.
8. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Conditions You cannot leave the entry empty.

ROM Version Display
Description Confirms the version of the ROM of Master and Slave Systems.
Display example: P111A50101A
Version Date
Selection System Number: KX-TD816 – 0

KX-TD1232 – 0 (Master) / 1 (Slave)
Default Not applicable.

Display: ROM Version
2. Press NEXT.
Display: System NO?–>
3. Enter the System Number.

The display shows the ROM version of the specified system.
4. To confirm the other system, press SELECT and enter the

System Number.
The display shows the ROM version of the specified system.
5. Press END.
Conditions • The out-of-service system number is unacceptable.

• For KX-TD816, you can enter the system number “0” only. Skip step
4.

Charge Display Selection
Description Selects the display format used for charge display.
Selection Pulse / Pound
Default Pound

Display: Charge Meter
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Pulse

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None


Charge Fee Reference Extension Assignment
Description Assigns extensions that can refer to charges.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, ( =all jacks)

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, ( =all jacks)
• Enable / Disable
Default All jacks – Enable

Display: Charge Refer Ext
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01: Enable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
• To assign all jack numbers to one selection, press the key at step 3.


Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set
Description Assigns the identification code (ID code) required to verify

charges.
Selection ID Code: 4 digits (0000 through 9999)
Default 1234

Display: Charge ID Code
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Code:1234
3. Enter an ID code.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new code.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None


User Password
Description Assigns the password required for entering User Programming

(Manager Programming) mode.
In the User Programming Mode, any display proprietary telephone
user in the system can set the programs [000] through [022].
Selection Password: 4 through 7 digits
Default 1234

Display: User Password
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Password:1234
3. Enter a password.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new password.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • The password can be from four to seven digits long. The valid numbers
are from 0 through 9.
• If less than four digits are entered, they are not stored.


Pulse Dial Reception Assignment
Description Assigns whether the pulse dial from the extension can be received
or not by the system.
Selection Puls : Enable / Puls : Disable
Default Puls : Enable

Display: Ext Pulse Dial
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Ext Puls:Enable

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None

Mixed Station Capacities

Automatic Door Open Assignment
Description Assigns whether the door is automatically unlocked or not, when

the Call button is pressed.
Selection • KX-TD816 – D1 – Day / D1 – Night / D2 – Day / D2 – Night

KX-TD1232 – D1 – Day / D1 – Night / D2 – Day / D2 – Night /
D3 – Day / D3 – Night / D4 – Day / D4 – Night
(D1: Doorphone 1, D2: Doorphone 2, D3: Doorphone 3,
D4: Doorphone 4)
Default All selections – Disable

Display: Auto. Door Open
2. Press NEXT to program D1–Day.

To program another status, keep pressing NEXT until the desired one
is displayed.
Display example: D1-Day: Disable

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. To program another selection press NEXT or PREV until the

desired selection is displayed.
7. Press END.
Conditions This programming is applied to the doorphone which provides the door
opener.

Door Opener

Hotel Application
Description Assigns whether the hotel application is enabled or disabled.
Selection Disable / Enable
Default Disable

Display: Hotel Apply Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Hotel : Disable

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions If “Enable” is selected, the menu “Hotel” is displayed on the operator

extension’s KX-T7235 or KX-T7436, and “Check-In / Check-Out”
feature is available.

HOTEL APPLICATION

Assignment of Denomination
Description Assigns the Denomination required for your country.

Selection 2 characters (Max.)
Default £

Display: Denomination
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Denomi.: £
3. Enter a denomination.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new
denomination.
To enter characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions If more than two characters are entered, they are ignored.


Voice Mail Number Assignment †
Description Assigns the jack number corresponding to the voice mail port for
data transmission to the Voice Processing System.
Selection KX-TD816
• Jack number: 02 through 16
KX-TD1232
• Master / Slave
• Jack number: 02 through 32 / Master; 33 through 64 / Slave
Default All jacks — Blank
1. Enter 126.
Display: VMS Port Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Mast1:# # #

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new jack
number.
4. Press to enter another jack number.

5. Repeat steps 3 through 4 to enter another jack number.
6. Press STORE.
7. Press NEXT to program another jack number.

9. Press STORE.
10. Press END.
KX-TD1232
1. Enter 126.
Display: VMS Port Asn
2. Press NEXT to program the Master System.


To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new jack
number.
Voice Mail Number Assignment (contd.)
4. Press to enter another jack number.

6. Press STORE.

9. Press STORE.
10. Press NEXT to program the Slave System.
Display example: Slav1:# # #

12. Press STORE.
Display example: Slav2:# # #
14. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to enter other jack numbers.

15. Press STORE.
16. Press END.
Conditions • A maximum of six jacks can be assigned (twelve jacks during System
Connection for KX-TD1232).
• Neither Jack number 01 nor the manager extension can be assigned as a
voice mail port jack.
• The jack numbers correspond to the voice mail port in numerical order.
Example: Stored jack numbers: Jacks 02, 03, 05, 08, 11, 13
Jack 02=Voice mail numbers 01, 02; Jack 03=Voice mail numbers 03, 04;
Jack 05=Voice mail numbers 05, 06; Jack 08=Voice mail numbers 07, 08;
Jack 11=Voice mail numbers 09, 10; Jack 13=Voice mail numbers 11, 12

Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones

Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment †
Description Assigns the extension number for the voice mail number. These numbers
can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
Selection • Voice mail number (VM): KX-TD816 – 01 through 12

• Extension Number: 2 to 4 digits
Default VM-01=265, VM-02=266, VM-03=267, VM-04=268, VM-05=269,

VM-06=270, VM-07=277, VM-08=278, VM-09=281, VM-10=282,
VM-11=283, VM-12=284, VM-13=271, VM-14=272, VM-15=273,
VM-16=274, VM-17=275, VM-18=276, VM-19=279, VM-20=280,
VM-21=285, VM-22=286, VM-23=287, VM-24=288
Display: VM EXT NO. Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: VM NO?–>
3. Enter a voice mail number.
To enter voice mail number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display: VM-01:#02-1:265
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another voice mail number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired voice mail number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • You cannot leave an entry empty.
• For the KX-TD1232, VM-01 through VM-12 are for the Master system
and VM-13 through VM-24 are for the Slave system, if available.
• Double entries and incompatible entries for extension numbers are invalid.
To avoid making an invalid entry, check the other extension numbers in
programs [003] “Extension Number Set,” [012] “ISDN Extension
Number Set,” [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set,” [130] “Phantom
Extension Number Assignment” and [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.”
• The display shows “VM-XX:#YY-1:ZZZ” in step 3.
“XX” means the voice mail number. “YY” means the jack number of
the voice mail port programmed in [126] “Voice Mail Number
Assignment”.
“-1” of YY-1 means the first part of jack number in digital line.
YY-2 means the second number of the jack number in digital line.

Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment †
Description Assigns each voice mail number to a voice mail extension group
number.
Selection • Voice mail number (VM): KX-TD816 – 01 through 12,

( =all voice mail numbers)
• Voice mail extension group number (EXG) = 1 through 8
Default All voice mail numbers = EXG 1

Display: VM EXT Group Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display: VM NO?–>
3. Enter a voice mail number.

To enter voice mail number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: VM-01:#02-1:EXG1
4. Enter the voice mail extension group number.

To change the current entry, enter the new number.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another voice mail number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired voice mail number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, VM-01 through VM-12 are for the Master system
and VM-13 through VM-24 are for the Slave system, if available.
• The display shows “VM-XX:#YY-1:EXG Z” in step 3.
“XX” means a voice mail number. “YY” means the jack number of the
voice mail port programmed in [126] “Voice Mail Number Assignment”.
“-1” of YY-1 means the first part of jack number in digital line.
“YY-2” means the second part of the jack number in digital line.
• To assign all voice mail numbers to one selection, press the key in
step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for
voice mail number 01.

4-68 System Programming †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
Operator Queue
Description Assigns the limited number of queue and the number of Hurry-Up.
Selection • Queue: 0 through 8

• Number of Hurry-Up : 0 through 8
Default Queue : 8, H-UP : 4

Display: Operator Queue
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Queue:8, H-UP: 4
3. Enter a queue.
4. Press .
5. Enter a number of Hurry-Up.

6. Press STORE.
7. Press END.
Conditions The queue should be longer than the number of Hurry-Up.

Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer

Phantom Extension Number Assignment
Description Assigns the phantom extension number.

• Phantom extension number: 2 through 4 digits

Display: Phantom NO.
2. Press NEXT.

4. Enter a phantom extension number.

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 128 phantom extension numbers. Each number

has two to four digits, consisting of numbers 0 through 9.
• The first one or two digits of the phantom extension numbers are
subject to program [100] “Flexible Numbering, (01) through (16) 1st
through 16th hundred extension blocks.”
• Phantom extension numbers and other extension numbers should be
unique. Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are
invalid. Valid entry example: 10 and 11, 10 and 110; Invalid entry
example: 10 and 106, 210 and 21.
• To avoid making an invalid entry, check the other extension numbers in
Number Set,” [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set,” [127] “Voice
Mail Extension Number Assignment” and [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.”

Phantom extension

Hunting Group Assignment
Description Assigns the extension numbers which belong to each hunting

group. An incoming call is hunted in the order of registration
except for Ring hunting.

• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits, 12 numbers (max.) /
Disable (No entry)
Default Location number 01 through 32 – Disable

Display: Hunt Group Asn
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: 01:01 Disable

5. Press STORE.
6. To program another extension to the same group, press
NEXT and repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. To program another hunting group, press SELECT and
repeat steps 3 through 6.
8. Press END.
Conditions • One extension can belong to more than one hunting group
simultaneously.
• You can assign the floating number of the Ring hunting group for No
Reply hunting.
• It is possible to assign the ISDN extension numbers. In this case, the
MSN additional number can be added. The MSN must be up to 4 digits,
consisting of an ISDN extension number and an additional number (1 or
2 digits). The MSN additional number digit can be selected in programs
[427] “ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number” and [445] “TD286
ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number.”

Hunting Group Station Hunting

Hunting Group Name Assignment
Description Assigns a hunting group name to the hunting group. When an

incoming outside call is received, the assigned name and the
extension number of the group are displayed on the LCD.

Default All hunting groups – Not Stored

Display: Hunt Group Name
2. Press NEXT.

Display: 01: Not Stored
4. Enter a name.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another group, press NEXT or PREV, or

8. Press END.
Conditions None

Hunting Group
Station Hunting

Hunting Overflow
Description Assigns the limited number of a queue and the management of an

incoming call when the queue is full. There are three types of
management mentioned below:
Overflow: When the queue is full, a new incoming call is
transferred to the Intercept destination for the group.
If the number in the queue is assigned as “0” and all extensions
are busy or logout, the call is transferred to the Intercept
destination for the group.
Busy Tone: This assignment is available only when the call is
made through an ISDN line or intercom call. If the queue is
full, a busy tone is sent to a caller. If the number in the queue
is assigned as “0” and all extensions are busy or logout, a busy
tone is sent to the caller. If the call is made through an analog
line, the number in the queue is assigned as “0,” and all
extensions are busy or logout, the caller will hear a ringback
tone but the call cannot be received.
No: As the queue is treated as infinite, overflow will not occur and
a busy tone will not be sent. The call will be kept waiting until
any extension in the group becomes idle (or logs in).
IRNA starts.

• Call management : OVF (Overflow) / Busy (Busy Tone) / No
• The number in the queue: 0 through 8, 1 digit
Default All hunting groups – Busy, 0

Display: Hunt Overflow
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: 01: Busy, 0

displayed.
5. Press .

Hunting Overflow (contd.)
6. Enter the number in the queue.

7. Press STORE.
8. To program another group, press NEXT or PREV, or

8. Press END.
Conditions None

Hunting Group
Station Hunting

4.3 System Programming 134-135
Hunting Intercept — Day / Night
Description Sets the Intercept destination in both day and night modes for each
hunting group.

• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits / Disable (no Intercept
Routing)
Default All hunting groups – Disable — Day / Night
Display example: Hunt Intercp Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Group NO.?→
3. Enter the hunting group number.

Display example: 01: Disable

To disable Intercept Routing, press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another hunting group, press NEXT or PREV, or

8. Press END.
Conditions • You can set the extension numbers in programs [003] “Extension
“Phantom Extension Number” and also floating numbers of the external
ringer, hunting groups, and pagers in program [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.”

Intercept Routing

137-138 4.3 System Programming
UCD Time Table Assignment — Day / Night
Description Assigns the Time Table when all extensions in the Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) group are busy.
Selection • UCD group number: 01 through 32

• Time Table number: 1 through 4
Default All UCD groups – Not Stored
Display example: UCD T.Table Day
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter a UCD group number.

To enter UCD group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: UCD01: Not Stored
4. Enter a Time Table number.

Display example: UCD01:1
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions • If the Time Table number is not assigned, the system will not answer
the call and waits for any extension to become idle. In this case,
Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA) will be employed.


UCD Time Table
Description Assigns the queuing sequence in the Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD) Time Table. The queuing sequences are as follows:
S1 : Sends the outgoing message 1.
TR : Transfers to the overflow extension.
RT : Returns to the top of the sequence.
Blank : Disconnects.
1T : Timer — 16 seconds
Selection • Time Table number: 1 to 4

• S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / TR / RT / 1T / 2T / 3T / 4T / Blank
Default All time tables – Not Stored

Display: UCD T.Table
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Table No.?→
3. Enter a Time Table number.

To enter Time Table number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 1: → → → →
4. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.

Display example: 1:S4→ → → →
5. Press .
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • “Sx” can be assigned to a space other than the first only when another
“Sx” is assigned in the first space.
• An assignment after “TR,” “RT” or “Blank” is not available.


Off-Hook Monitor
Description Enables or disables to perform the Off-Hook Monitor.
Default Enable

Display: Off-Hook Monitor
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Monitor:Enable

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions Off-Hook Monitor is only available for the KX-T7431, KX-T7433 and
KX-T7436 telephone users.

Off-Hook Monitor

ISDN DDI Translation Table
Description Assigns a destination location of incoming DDI numbers.

Incoming DDI numbers are received at extensions assigned to each
location number.

• DDI number: 16 digits max.

Display: DDI Assign
2. Press NEXT.

4. Enter a DDI number.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • The DDI number can be a maximum of 16 digits. Valid numbers are
from 0 to 9.
• Programs [151]–[152] “ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment — Day /
Night” are used to assign an extension to each location number in the
day and night modes.
• This program becomes available when “DDI” is selected in program


151-152 4.3 System Programming
ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Description Assigns the destination of each DDI number in the day and night modes.

• Extension number: 1 to 4 digits / 0 (operator) / Not Stored
Display example: DDI Ring Day
2. Press NEXT.

4. Enter an extension number or 0.

Display example:000:EXT 201
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • Each extension number can be 1 to 4 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.

• When “0” is assigned, the incoming DDI number is sent to the
destination assigned in program [990] “System Additional Information,
Area 01 – Bits 5 and 6.”
• These programs become available when “DDI” is selected in program
• You can set the extension numbers in programs [003] “Extension
Number Set,” [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set,” [017] “TD286
Extension Number Set,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number
Assignment,” [130] “Phantom Extension Number Assignment” and also
floating numbers in program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”

4.3 System Programming 151-152
ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment — Day / Night (contd.)
• When assigning ISDN extension numbers, the MSN additional number

can be added. The MSN must be up to 4 digits, consisting of an ISDN
additional number digit can be selected in programs [427] “ISDN
Extension Multiple Subscriber Number” and [445] “TD286 ISDN
Extension Multiple Subscriber Number.”


Description Assigns whether the Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber

(CCBS) function is enabled or disabled.
Default Disable

Display: CCBS
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: CCBS: Disable

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None


Blank
4-69.14
200 4.4 Timer Programming
Hold Recall Time
Description Assigns the length of the hold recall timer. This timer is used to
alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period
of time.
Selection Time (seconds): 0 through 240 (0=Hold Recall disabled)
Default 60 s

Display: Hold Recall Time
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 60 sec
3. Enter the time.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • Select “0” if Hold Recall is not required.


Hold Recall

4.4 Timer Programming 201
Transfer Recall Time
Description Sets the number of rings before the transfer recall occurs. If a
transferred call is not answered before the programmed time of
rings, the call returns to the original caller.
Selection Number of rings: 3 through 48
Default 12 rings

Display: Transfer Recall
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:12 rings
3. Enter the number of rings.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number of
rings.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • One ring is equivalent to five seconds.



Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
Description Sets the number of rings for the Call Forwarding – No Answer
feature. If a call is not answered before the programmed number of
rings, the call is forwarded to the destination.
Default 3 rings

Display: No Answer Time
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 3 rings

rings.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.

• This timer is also used for Intercept Routing.


Intercept Time
Description Sets the number of rings for the Intercept Routing – No Answer
(IRNA) feature. If a call is not answered before the programmed
number of rings, the call is redirected to the programmed station.
Default 12 rings

Display: Intercept Time
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 12 rings

rings.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.

• Programs [409]–[410] “Intercept Extension — Day / Night”
[620]–[621] “Extension Intercept Routing” are used to program the
destination of Intercept Routing on a CO line group basis in day and
night modes.
• If the original extension has set Call Forwarding – No Answer,
Intercept Timer starts after the Call Forwarding.

Intercept Routing

Pickup Dial Waiting Time
Description Sets the number of seconds for Pickup Dialling. If the telephone
user lifts the handset, the programmed party is called when the time
expires.
Selection Time (seconds): 0 through 8
Default 1s

Display: Pickup Dial Time
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:1 sec
3. Enter the time.

To change the current entry, enter the new time.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions This time gives the user an opportunity to dial digits before the automatic
dialling process takes place.

Pickup Dialling

Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an outside
party. If an outside call is originated or answered by a programmed
extension user and the timer expires, the call is disconnected.
Selection Time (minutes): 1 through 64
Default 10 min

Display: CO Dur. Time
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:10 min
3. Enter the time.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • This time-out applies to extensions to which Limited Call Duration is

assigned by program [502] “Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration
Limit.”
• This time cannot be set to zero or be left empty.


First Digit Time
Description Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of outside dial
tone and the first digit dialled on an outgoing outside call. If an
extension user fails to dial any digits during this time, the DTMF
receiver is released.
Default 10 s

Display: 1st Digit Time
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter the time.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • This timer is used for toll restriction checking.


Toll Restriction

Inter Digit Time
Description Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing

toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this
time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
Toll Restriction check is completed.
Default 10 s

Display: Inter Digit Time
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter the time.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.


Toll Restriction

Automatic Redial Repeat Times
Description Sets the number of times Automatic Redial is tried. Automatic

redialling of the last dialled or saved number is done up to the
specified number of times.
Selection Number of times: 1 through 12
Default 4 times

Display: Redial Times
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Attempt: 4
3. Enter the number of times.

times.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • Program [210] “Automatic Redial Interval Time” is used to set the
interval time between Automatic Redial attempts.

Redial, Automatic

Automatic Redial Interval Time
Description Sets the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts.
Selection Time (seconds): 3 through 120 (✕10 is the actual time)
Default 12 (120 s)

Display: Interval Time
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter the time.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • You enter a number from 3 through 120. The actual time is 10 times
your input.
• Program [209] “Automatic Redial Repeat Times” is used to set the
number of times Automatic Redial is tried.

Redial, Automatic

Dial Start Time
Description Sets the number of milliseconds the system waits before dialling
after a CO line is seized.
Selection Time (milliseconds): 0 through 40 (✕100 is the actual time)
Default 0 ms

Display: CO Dial Start
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 000 msec
3. Enter the time.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • You enter a number from 0 through 40. The actual time is a 100 times
your input.

Line Access, CO Line Group
Line Access, Direct
Line Access, Individual

Call Duration Count Start Time
Description Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of
dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.
When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and
this timer expires, the system starts counting the call. A display
telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and
the duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.
Default 0s

Display: SMDR Durat Time
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter the time.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • The timer starts counting after all the digits are dialled. This timer is
not applied to incoming calls. The timer for incoming calls starts
immediately.


Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
Description Sets the Message Waiting ring interval time for a single line
telephone.
Selection Time (minutes) : 0 through 64
Default 0 min

Display: MW Ring Time
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Interval: 10 min
3. Enter the time.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new time.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions When the internal time is set “0,” the telephone does not ring for Message
Waiting notification.

Message Waiting

Ring-Off Detection Time
Description Sets the ring-off time so that the system can detect that the central
office stops ringing.
Selection Time (seconds) : 6 / 11
Default 6s

Display: Ring Detect Time
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Time : 6 sec

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None

Outgoing Message Time
Description Sets the maximum allowable recording time for outgoing messages
(OGM).
Selection Time (seconds): 0 / 16 / 32 / 64 (0=no recording)
Default 32, 0, 32, 0 (for OGM 1 through 4 from left to right)

Display: OGM MSG Time
2. Press NEXT to program the time for OGM 1.

Display example: OGM:32, 0,32, 0

displayed.
4. Press to program the time for OGM 2.

displayed.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program the time for OGM’s 3 and 4.
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Enter the times starting from the left for OGM 1 to OGM 4.
• The total time of the outgoing messages cannot exceed 64 seconds.

Outgoing Message (OGM) Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time
Description Sets the number of seconds the Timed Reminder alarm rings.
Default 30 s

Display: Timed Remind
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Reminder: 30sec
3. Enter the time.

To change the current entry, enter the new time.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None

HOTEL APPLICATION – Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)
Timed Reminder

Doorphone-to-CO Line Call Duration Time
Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation between a caller
at a doorphone and an outside party. When the timer expires, the
call is disconnected.
Selection Time (minutes): 0 through 30 (✕ 10 is the actual time)
Default 0 sec

Display: Door-CO Dur.Time
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter the time.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions You can enter a number from 0 through 30. The actual time is 10 times
your input.
If the duration time is set to "0", there is no time limit.


Blank
4-83.4
301-305 4.5 TRS Programming
TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
Description These allow you to specify the numbers which are toll-restricted for
each toll restriction level as follows:
Program [301]: restricts levels 2 through 6
Program [305]: restricts level 6

• Toll call number: 7 digits (max.)
Programming 1. Enter a program address (301 through 305).

Display example: TRS Deny LVL–2
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>

4. Enter a toll call number.

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 20 toll call numbers which can be restricted for
each program. Each number has a maximum of seven digits, consisting
of 0 through 9, and . The character “ ” can be used as a wild card
character.
• Programs [306]–[310] “TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through
6” are used to assign exceptions to these numbers. Programs
[500]–[501] “Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night” are used to set the
toll restriction value for each COS.

Toll Restriction

4.5 TRS Programming 306-310
TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
Description These allow you to assign numbers which are exceptions to the toll
restriction specified in programs [301] through [305] as follows:
Program [306]: applies to level 2
Program [307]: applies to levels 2 through 3
• Exceptional number: 7 digits (max.)
Programming 1. Enter a program address (306 through 310).

Display example: TRS Excp LVL–2
2. Press NEXT.
4. Enter an exceptional number.

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions There is a maximum of five numbers for each program. Each number has
a maximum of seven digits, consisting of 0 through 9, and . The
character “ ” can be used as a wild card character.

Toll Restriction

311 4.5 TRS Programming
Emergency Dial Number Set
Description Stores up to 10 emergency call numbers.

Emergency numbers are not subject to toll restriction, Account
Code – Verified or Electronic Station Lockout.

• Emergency number: 3 digits (max.)
Default Location 01 – 999 / Location 02 – 112

Display: Emergency Dial
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: 01: 999
4. Enter an emergency number.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions There is a maximum of 10 emergency numbers. Each number has a

maximum of three digits, consisting of 0 through 9.

Toll Restriction

4.6 CO Line Programming 400
Description Used to identify the CO lines which are connected to the system(s).
This prevents users from originating a call to a line which is not
connected.
Selection • CO line number:

KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, ( =all CO lines)
• Connect / No Connect
Default All CO lines – Connect

Display: CO Connection
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO01:Connect

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• CO09 through CO16 of KX-TD816 and CO025 through CO54 of KX-
TD1232 become available when the expansion unit KX-TD290 is
installed in the main unit. However, CO09 through CO16 or CO09
through CO54 of the maximum number of B channels which are
assigned in the program [450] “PRI Configuration” can be set to
“Connect.” We recommend to set the required number of B channel to
“Connect.”
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.


401 4.6 CO Line Programming
CO Line Group Assignment
Description Each CO line must be assigned to a CO line group. This program
defines the CO line group assignment for each CO line. For
example, if there are multiple telephone service companies available,
the CO lines can be grouped by company.
Selection • CO line (CO) number:

• CO line group (TRG) number: 1 through 8
Default CO01 – TRG 1; CO05 – TRG 5;

CO02 – TRG 2; CO06 – TRG 6;
CO03 – TRG 3; CO07 – TRG 7;
CO04 – TRG 4; From CO08 – TRG 8

Display : Trunk Group Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>

Display example: CO01:TRG1
4. Enter the CO line group number.

To change the current entry, enter the new CO line group number.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
TD 1232 become available when the expansion unit KX-TD290 is
installed in the main unit.
• To assign all CO lines to one CO line group, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.

CO Line Group

Dial Mode Selection
Description Each CO line can be programmed for DTMF, pulse (rotary) or call
blocking. This program assigns your choice for each line.
DTMF: The dialling signals from an extension, either tone or pulse, are
converted to tone signals and transmitted to the CO line.
Pulse: The dialling signals from an extension, either tone or pulse, are
converted to pulse signals and transmitted to the CO line.
Call blocking: If your central office can receive both DTMF and pulse signals but
you are contracted for pulse, select this mode. When dialling on
the line with an MF4 telephone, only the pulse signals are sent to
the CO line.
• DTMF / Pulse / C. Block (call blocking)
Default All CO lines – DTMF

Display : CO Dial Mode
2. Press NEXT.
Display : CO Line NO?–>

Display example: CO01:DTMF

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.

Dial Mode Selection (contd.)
• To assign all lines to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• If DTMF is assigned, set the DTMF time of the line in program [404]
“DTMF Time.”
• If pulse or call blocking is assigned, set the pulse speed of the line in
program [403] “Pulse Speed Selection,” and set the pulse break ratio
and inter-digit pause in program [990] “System Additional Information,
Area 02 – bits 7, 12 and 11,” if needed.

Dial Type Selection

Pulse Speed Selection
Description A CO line set for pulse or call blocking mode in program [402]
“Dial Mode Selection” can have two pulse rates, 10 pps (low) and
20 pps (high). This program sets the pulse speed for each CO line
set to pulse or call blocking mode.

• 10 pps / 20 pps
Default All CO lines – 10 pps

Display: Pulse Speed
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO01:10pps

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
• The pulse speed required is determined by the CO or PBX line.
• Program [990] “System Additional Information, Area 02 - Bit 07, 11
and 12” are used to select a pulse break ratio and inter-digit pause, if
needed.

Dial Type Selection

DTMF Time
Description A CO line set to DTMF mode in program [402] “Dial Mode

Selection” can have two settings. This program sets the duration of
the DTMF signals sent to a CO line set to DTMF mode.

• Time (milliseconds): 96 / 160
Default All CO lines – 96 ms

Display: DTMF Time
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO01: 96msec

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
• The DTMF time required is determined by the CO line or PBX line.

Dial Type Selection

CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set
Description Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on

incoming outside calls. If this is programmed, the system
disconnects the line when the CPC Signal is detected.

• Time (milliseconds): Disable (no detection) / 02 through 75 (✕ 8
is the actual time)
(See the table on the following page.)
Default All CO lines – 44 (352 ms)

Display : CPC Detection
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO01:Disable
4. Enter the time, or press CLEAR to select “Disable.”

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
• You may disable CPC Signal Detection for a CO line.
• Program [415] “CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set” is used to
program CPC Signal Detection for outgoing outside calls.


CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set (contd.)
CPC Signal Detection Time Table
Entry Time (ms) Entry Time (ms) Entry Time (ms)

02 16 27 216 52 416
03 24 28 224 53 424
04 32 29 232 54 432
05 40 30 240 55 440
06 48 31 248 56 448
07 56 32 256 57 456
08 64 33 264 58 464
09 72 34 272 59 472
10 80 35 280 60 480
11 88 36 288 61 488
12 96 37 296 62 496
13 104 38 304 63 504
14 112 39 312 64 512
15 120 40 320 65 520
16 128 41 328 66 528
17 136 42 336 67 536
18 144 43 344 68 544
19 152 44 352 69 552
20 160 45 360 70 560
21 168 46 368 71 568
22 176 47 376 72 576
23 184 48 384 73 584
24 192 49 392 74 592
25 200 50 400 75 600
26 208 51 408

4.6 CO Line Programming 407-408
DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
Description The Direct In Lines (DIL) 1:1 feature allows incoming outside calls
to be directed to a specific extension. When a CO line is assigned
as DIL 1:1, it is necessary to assign the destination. These
programs specify the extension number for day or night mode.
Selection • CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08, ( =all CO lines)

• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits / Disable (no DIL 1:1)
Default All CO lines – Disable — Day / Night
Display example: DIL 1:1 Asn Day
2. Press NEXT.
To disable DIL 1:1, press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available. CO
line numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• You set the extension numbers in program [003] “Extension Number
Set,” ISDN extension numbers in program [012] “ISDN Extension
Number Set” and [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set,” voice mail
extension numbers in program [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number
Assignment,” phantom extension numbers in program [130] “Phantom
Extension Number Assignment” or floating numbers of pagers in
program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• If a CO line is also programmed for DIL 1:N in program [603]–[604]
“DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night,” it is
regarded as a DIL 1:1 line.
Direct In Lines (DIL) Night Service

409-410 4.6 CO Line Programming
Intercept Extension — Day / Night
Description Intercept Routing provides an automatic re-direction of calls which

cannot or have not been answered. These programs set the
destination in both day and night modes for each line group.
Selection • CO line group (TRG) number: 1 through 8,

( =all CO line groups)
• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits / Disable (no Intercept Routing)
Default All CO line groups – Disable — Day / Night
Display example: TRG Intercpt Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?–>
3. Enter the CO line group number.

To enter CO line group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: TRG1:Disable

5. Press STORE.
6. To program another CO line group, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line group number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • You set the extension numbers in program [003] “Extension Number
Set,” ISDN extension numbers in program [012] “ISDN Extension
Number Set” and [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set,” voice mail
extension numbers in program [127] “Voice Mail Extension Number
Assignment,” phantom extension numbers in program [130] “Phantom
Extension Number Assignment” or floating numbers of pagers in
program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.” You cannot assign the
floating number of the modem.
• To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1.
• Program [401] “CO Line Group Assignment” is used to assign each CO
line to a CO line group.
Intercept Routing

Host PBX Access Codes
Description Assigns Host PBX access codes. If the system is installed behind a
host PBX system, an access code is required to make an outside
call. Up to four codes can be stored for a CO line group assigned
the line.

• Access code: 1 or 2 digits, four different entries (max.)
Default All CO line groups – Not stored

Display : TRG Host PBX NO.
2. Press NEXT.
Display : TRK GRP NO?–>
3. Enter a CO line group number.

Display example: TRG1: , , ,
4. Enter an access code.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new access code.
Display example: TRG1:01, , ,
5. To enter more access codes for the same CO line group, press
and enter the access codes until all the required entries
are completed.
Display example: TRG1:01,08,10,22
6. Press STORE.

9. Press END.

Host PBX Access Codes (contd.)
Conditions • This program is only required if a host PBX line is connected to the
system. Program [401] “CO Line Group Assignment” is used to assign
the line to a CO line group.
• There is a maximum of four access codes per CO line group. Each
code has one or two digits, consisting of 0 through 9, and .
• If conflicting access codes (such as 8 and 81) are stored for the same
CO line group, the 1-digit code (8) only will be in effect.
• When the programmed codes are dialled, Automatic Pause Insertion
and Toll Restriction are applied to the calls. The programmed pause
time (in program [412] “Pause Time”) is automatically inserted after the
access code.
• To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line
group 1.

External Feature Access Pause Insertion, Automatic
Host PBX Access

Pause Time
Description Assigns the length of the pause time. The programmed pause time
is automatically inserted after a line access code or a host PBX
access code programmed in [411] “Host PBX Access Codes” or
manually inserted if the PAUSE button is pressed by the user.
Selection • CO line group number: 1 through 8, ( =all CO line groups)

• Time (seconds): 1.5 / 2.5 / 3.5 / 4.5 / 5.5 / 6.5
Default All CO line groups – 3.5 s

Display: TRG Pause Time
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: TRG1:3.5sec
4. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
group 1.
• If the programmed pause time is 1.5 or 2.5 seconds and you are storing
an external number in program [001] “System Speed Dialling Number
Set,” it is required to store a pause manually after the line access code.

Host PBX Access Pause Insertion, Automatic

Register Recall Signal Time
Description Assigns the length of the register recall signal time. If your system
is installed behind a host PBX, External Feature Access (EFA) is
necessary to obtain its services. To enable it, select a required
register recall signal sending time for the CO line group.
• Time (milliseconds): Disable (no EFA) / 80 / 96 / 112 / 200 / 300 /
400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 / 900 / 1000 /
1100 / 1200
Default All CO line groups – 96 ms
Display: Register Recall
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: TRG1: 96msec

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • You may disable EFA, if not required. The Recall feature will be in
effect in place of EFA. Program [414] “Disconnect Time” is used to
select the time required for the Recall feature.
• The register recall signal time required is determined by the central
office or the host PBX lines.
group 1.

External Feature Access Recall

Disconnect Time
Description Determines the amount of time between successive accesses to the

same CO line.

• Time (seconds): 0.5 / 2.0 / 4.0
Default All CO line groups – 2.0 s

Display: TRG Discnct Time
2. Press NEXT.
Display : TRK GRP NO?–>

To program CO line group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: TRG1:2.0sec
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • The disconnect time must be longer than the requirements of the central
office or the host PBX.
group 1.

Recall

CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set
Description Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between
the originated outside call and the established outside call. If this is
enabled, the system disconnects the line with the time set in
program [405] “CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set” when CPC
Signal is detected.

• Enable (detection) / Disable (no detection)
Default Disable

Display: CPC Outgoing Asn
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • Some central offices (CO) may send CPC-like signals during the
dialling sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminated. If
your CO is such a type, select “Disable.”
• Program [405] “CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set” is used to set
CPC Signal Detection Time.
• In the case of KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master


Reverse Circuit Assignment
Description Enables or disables to detect Reverse Circuit.

• Regular (no detection) / Reverse (detection)
Default All CO lines – Regular

Display: Reverse Circuit
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO01:Regular

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.

Reverse Circuit

Subscriber Number Assignment
Description Assign the subscriber number which is assigned to a CO line by a

central office for Calling Line Identification Presentation or
Connected Line Identification Presentation.

Default All CO lines – Not stored

Display: Telephone Number
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO01: Not Stored
4. Enter a telephone number.

5. Press STORE.
6. To program another CO line number, press NEXT or PREV,
or SELECT and the desired CO line number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The valid characters are 0 through 9.

• In case of the KX-TD1232, CO 01 through CO 12 are for the Master
System and CO 13 through CO 24 are for the Slave, If available.
TD 1232 become available when the expansion unit KX-TD290 is
installed in the main unit.
• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display,
press or .

Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)

4.6 CO Line Programming 420/429
ISDN Ring Service Assignment — Day / Night
Description Assign the contract status of the Direct Dialling In (DDI) Service or
Multiple Subscriber Number on a CO line basis in both day and
night modes. This setting is also used for Calling Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP) and Connected line
Identification Presentation (COLP).

• DDI / MSN / Disable
Default All CO lines – DDI — Day / Night
Display example: DDI Service Day
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO01: DDI

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
• To assign all CO lines to one, press the key in step 3. In this case,
the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• If “DDI” is selected, the subscriber number and extension number is
provided to ISDN for CLIP and COLP.


CO Line Name Assignment
Description Assigns the company or customer names to each CO line so that the
operator or extension user can find the destination where the caller
is trying to reach before answering.

Default All CO lines – Not stored

Display: CO Line Name
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO01:Not Stored
4. Enter a name.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
• There is a maximum of 24 names. Each name has a maximum of 10
characters.


ISDN Port Type
Description Assigns the type of each port either CO line or extension line on
ISDN port basis.

( =all ports)
• CO (CO line) / Extension
Default All ports – CO

Display: ISDN Line Type
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #03:CO

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.


ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
Description Assigns the active mode of Layer 1 on ISDN port basis.

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 12, ( =all ports)
• Permanent / Call
Default All ports – Permanent

Display: L1 Active Mode
2. Press NEXT.

To enter a first port, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Permanent

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


ISDN Configuration
Description Assigns the configuration on ISDN port basis.

• Point (point to point) / Multipoint (point to multipoint)
Default All ports – Point

Display: Access Mode
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #03:Point

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
• If one equipment is connected to the ISDN port, select “Point,” If
multiple equipment are connected, select “Multipoint.”


ISDN Data Link Mode
Description Assigns the data link mode on ISDN port basis.

Default All ports – Permanent

Display: Data Link Mode
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #03:Permanent

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another port number, press NEXT or PREV, or

8. Press END.


ISDN TEI Mode
Description Assigns the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) mode on ISDN port
basis.

• Fix 0 through 63 / Automatic
Default All ports – Fix 0

Display: TEI Assign
2. Press NEXT.

To enter a Port 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01:Fix 0
4. Enter TEI.
To assign “Automatic,” press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
• If the “Point” is selected in program [424], assign the fixed TEI. If
“Multipoint” is selected, assign “Automatic.”
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01.


ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
Description Selects whether the Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) is

allocated to each terminal equipment on ISDN S0 bus or not on
ISDN port basis. Additional number for MSN can be 1 or 2 digits.

( =all ports)
• Disable (no number) / 1 digit / 2 digits
Default All ports – Disable

Display: MSN Service
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


ISDN Extension Progress Tone
Description Enables or disables to send the progress tone to ISDN extension on

ISDN port basis.

( =all ports)
• Enable / Disable (no tone)

Display: ISDN EXT Tone
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


Multiple Subscriber Number Set
Description Assigns a maximum of ten multiple subscriber numbers (MSN) on

an ISDN S0 port basis.

• Location number: 01 through 10
• MSN: 16 digits (max.)
Default All ports – All locations – Not Stored

Display: MSN Assign
2. Press NEXT.

4. Press NEXT or PREV until the desired location number is

displayed.
Display example: 01:01: Not Stored
location number
port number
5. Enter a MSN.
6. Press STORE.
7. To program another location, press NEXT or PREV.
9. To program another port, press SELECT and the desired

port number.
11. Press END.
Conditions • Each MSN consists of 0 through 9.

• For the KX-TD1232, port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master


4.6 CO Line Programming 438-439
Extension Ringing Assignment — Day / Night for ISDN MSN
Description Determines the extension which receives a call on a multiple

subscriber number (MSN) basis of the ISDN S0 port in both day
and night modes.

• Extension number: 1 through 4 digits / 0 (operator)
Default All ports – All locations – Disable — Day / Night
Display example: MSN Ring Day
2. Press NEXT.

4. Press NEXT or PREV until the desired location number is

displayed.
Display example: 01:01: Disable
location number
port number
6. Press STORE.
7. To program another location, press NEXT or PREV.
9. To program another port, press SELECT and the desired

port number.
11. Press END.

438-439 4.6 CO Line Programming
Extension Ringing Assignment — Day / Night for ISDN MSN (contd.)
• Each extension number consists of 0 through 9. The and # keys
cannot be used.
• You can set the extension numbers in programs [003] “Extension
“Phantom Extension Number Assignment” and also floating numbers of
the external ringer, hunting groups, and pagers in program [813]
“Floating Number Assignment.”
• When assigning ISDN extension numbers, the MSN additional number
can be added. The MSN must be up to 4 digits, consisting of an ISDN
additional number can be selected in programs [427] “ISDN Extension
Multiple Subscriber Number” and [445] “TD286 ISDN Extension
Multiple Subscriber Number.”
• When “0” is assigned, the incoming MSN number is sent to the
destination assigned in program [990] “System Additional Information,
Area 01 – Bits 5 and 6.”

Night Service

TD286 ISDN Port Type
Description Assigns the type of each port either CO line or extension line on a
TD286 ISDN port basis.

( =all ports)
• CO (CO line) / Extension
Default All ports – Extension

Display: TD286 Line Type
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:Extension

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD816, port numbers 05 and 06 are fixed as “Extension.”


TD286 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
Description Assigns the active mode of Layer 1 on a TD286 ISDN port basis.

( =all ports)
Default All ports – Call

Display: TD286 L1 Mode
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:Call

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


TD286 ISDN Configuration
Description Assigns the configuration on a TD286 ISDN port basis.

( =all ports)
• Point (point to point) / Multipoint (point to multipoint)
Default All ports – Multipoint

Display: TD286 Accs. Mode
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:Multipoint

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • For KX-TD1232, port number 01 through 06 are for the Master System
and 07 through12 are for the Slave, if available.
• If one equipment is connected to the ISDN port, select “Point.” If
multiple equipment are connected, select “Multipoint.”


TD286 ISDN Data Link Mode
Description Assigns the data link mode on a TD286 ISDN port basis.

( =all ports)
Default All ports – Call

Display: TD286 Link Mode
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:Call

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


TD286 ISDN TEI Mode
Description Assigns the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) mode on a TD286

ISDN port basis.

( =all ports)
• Fix 0 through 63 / Automatic
Default All ports – Automatic

Display: TD286 TEI Assign
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:Automatic
4. Enter the TEI.

To assign “Automatic,” press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
• If the “Point” is selected in program [442], assign the fixed TEI. If
“Multipoint” is selected, assign “Automatic.”


TD286 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
Description Selects whether the Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) is

allocated to each terminal equipment on TD286 ISDN S0 bus or
not on an ISDN port basis. Additional number for MSN can be 1
or 2 digits.

( =all ports)
• Disable (no number) / 1 digit / 2 digits

Display: TD286 MSN
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
• You must assign the extension number to an ISDN terminal beforehand.
For details, refer to your terminal’s manual.


TD286 ISDN Extension Progress Tone
Description Enables or disables to send the progress tone to TD286 ISDN

extension on an ISDN port basis.

( =all ports)
• Enable / Disable (no tone)

Display: TD286 EXT Tone
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


500-501 4.7 COS Programming
Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
Description Each extension must be assigned a Class of Service (COS). These

programs set the toll restriction value for each COS in day or night
mode.
Selection • COS number: 1 through 8, ( =all COS)

• Level number: 1 through 8
Default All COS – Level 1 — Day / Night
Display example: TRS Level Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3. Enter a COS number.

To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1:1
4. Enter a level number.

5. Press STORE.
6. To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and the desired COS number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• Program [601] “Class of Service” is used to assign a Class of Service to
each extension.

Night Service Toll Restriction

4.7 COS Programming 502
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit
Description This program allows you to restrict the duration of outside calls on
a Class of Service (COS) basis.

• Disable (no limit) / Enable (limit)
Default All COS – Disable

Display: CO Durat. Limit
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: COS1:Disable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • An outside call originated or answered by the programmed extension

user is disconnected when the time specified in program [205]
“Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time” expires.
• Extensions in the limited classes cannot establish a CO-to-CO call, that
is, cannot transfer / forward an outside call to another CO line.
• To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
each extension.
• Program [990] “System Additional Information, Area 02– Bit 02” is
used to program Limited Call Duration to be done for outgoing calls
only.

Call Forwarding – to CO Line Limited Call Duration

503 4.7 COS Programming
Call Transfer to CO Line
Description This program determines which Classes of Services (COS) are

allowed to perform the Call Transfer to CO Line function.

Default All COS – Enable

Display: Transfer to CO
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: COS1:Enable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
each extension.


Call Forwarding to CO Line

allowed to perform the Call Forwarding to CO Line function.

• Disable / Enable

Display: Call FWD to CO
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
each extension.


Do Not Disturb Override

allowed to perform Do Not Disturb (DND) Override.


Display: DND Override
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
each extension.

Do Not Disturb (DND) Override

Account Code Entry Mode
Description There are three account code modes: Option, Verified-All Calls and
Verified-Toll Restriction Override. This program determines the
mode to be used by each Class of Service (COS).
Option mode: The user can enter any account code, if needed.
Verified – All Calls mode:
The user must always enter a pre-assigned account code to make a
CO call.
Verified – Toll Restriction Override mode:
The user must enter a pre-assigned account code when the user
needs to override toll restriction.

• Option / Verify – All (Verified-All Calls) / Verify – Toll
(Verified-Toll Restriction Override)
Default All COS – Option

Display: Call Accounting
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: COS1:Option
displayed.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
• Station programming is used to define the Account Codes for the
Verified modes.
each extension.

Account Code Entry

509-510 4.7 COS Programming
Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling – Day / Night
Description These programs set the toll restriction value used in System Speed
Dialling for each Class of Service (COS) in day or night mode.
When the user makes a call with System Speed Dialling, the system
will check the phone number with this level.

• Level number: 1 through 8
Default All COS – Level 1 – Day / Night
Display: SPD TRS LVL Day
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: COS1:1
4. Enter a level number.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this

Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialling

Door Opener Access
Description Enables or disables to unlock the door opener by feature number on

a Class of Service (COS) basis.


Display: Door Opener
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: COS1: Enable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this

Door Opener

Night Service Access
Description Enables or disables the ability to switch the Day/Night service on a

Class of Service (COS) basis.


Display: Night Service
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: COS1: Enable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
• The operator extension can switch the mode regardless of setting.

Night Service

Description Enables or disables the ability to reject Direct Dialling In call on a

Class of Service (COS) basis.


Display: DND for DDI
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→

Display example: COS1: Disable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
• The operator extension cannot reject the call regardless of setting.


Calling Line Identification Restriction
Description Enables or disables the Calling Line Identification Restriction

(CLIR) Service on a Class of Service (COS) basis.


Display: CLIR
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→

Display example: COS1-Disable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this


Connected Line Identification Restriction
Description Enables or disables the Connected Line Identification Restriction

(COLR) Service.


Display: COLR
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→

Display example: COS1: Disable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


CFU / CFB / CFNR Assignment
Description This program determines which Class of Service (COS) can

perform CFU, CFB and CFNR features.


Display: CFU/CFB/CFNR
2. Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?→


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
case, the display will show the contents programmed for COS 1.

Call Forwarding — by ISDN Line

Description Enables or disables to perform the Off-Hook Call Announcement

(OHCA) and Whisper OHCA on a Class of Service (COS) basis.


Display: OHCA
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→

Display example: COS1:Enable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
each extension.

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
Whisper OHCA

Call Forwarding from Hunting Group
Description Enables or disables to perform the Call Forwarding from Hunting

Group on a Class of Service (COS) basis. Calls arriving at any
Hunting Groups (“All”) or just calls arriving at your Hunting Group
(“Connect”) can be forwarded to your extension.

• Disable / Connect (connected Hunting Group) /
All (all Hunting Groups)

Display: Hunt Group FWD
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→

Display example: Bkl1:Disable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


Description Enables or disables to perform the Doorphone Call Forwarding to

CO Line on a Class of Service (COS) basis.


Display: Door Phone FWD
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


600 4.8 Extension Programming
EXtra Device Port
Description EXtra Device Port (XDP) allows a single line telephone (SLT) to be
connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone
(DPT). This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and
DPT of the programmed jack work as independent extensions.

Default All jacks – Disable

Display: XDP Assign
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
• Immediately after changing your assignment, changed setting may not
work for a maximum of eight seconds.


4.8 Extension Programming 601
Class of Service
Description Programs each extension for a Class of Service (COS). The COS
determines the call handling abilities of each extension.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per
extension.
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2),
• COS number: 1 through 8
Default All jacks-1/2 – COS 1, COS 1
Display: COS Assign
2. Press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1:COS1, COS1
4. Enter a COS number for primary number.
5. Press .
6. Enter a COS number for secondary number.
7. Press STORE.
10. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services. Every extension must
be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming
of programs [5XX] and [991]. The restriction of program [991], bits 1
through 4, applies only for analogue outside lines.
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one COS, press the key in step 3. In this case,
the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.


Extension Group Assignment
Description Assigns each extension to an extension group. Extension groups

are used for Group Call Pickup and Paging – Group.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
• Extension group number: 01 through 16, ( =all groups)
• Disable (not belong) / Enable (belong)
Default All jacks-1/2 – Extension group 1:Enable

Display: EXT Group Asn
2. Press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering the jack number.
Display example: #01-1:EG01:Enabl
4. Enter the extension group number.
You can also keep pressing or until the desired extension
group number is displayed.
displayed.
6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of sixteen extension groups. Each extension can

belong to more than one group.
• For the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master
on page 4-7 of the Installation manual.
• To assign all jacks to one extension group, press the key in step 3.

Call Pickup, Group Extension Group
Paging – Group

4.8 Extension Programming 603-604
DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Description A DIL 1:N line can be assigned to ring more than one extension.
All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to
the specified extensions. These programs assign the extensions and
the notification method for each CO line in both day and night
modes.

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2),
• CO line number:
• Disab (disable) / Immdt (immediate ringing) / 2RNG (2 ring
delay) / 4RNG (4 ring delay) / 6RNG (6 ring delay) /
8RNG (8 ring delay) / No RNG (no ring)
Default All jacks-1/2 – all CO lines – Immediate ringing — Day / Night
Display example: DIL 1:N Asn Day
2. Press NEXT.

number.
Display example: #01-1:CO01:Immdt

You can also keep pressing or until the desired CO line
number is displayed.

displayed.
6. Press STORE.
7. To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT

and the desired jack number.

603-604 4.8 Extension Programming
DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night (contd.)
9. Press END.
Conditions • An extension can be assigned as the destination of as many CO lines as

is required.
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection, press the key at
step 3 or step 4. In these cases, the display shows the contents
programmed for Jack 01 or for CO01.
• There are six notification methods:
(1) Immediate ringing: rings immediately
(2) 2 ring delay
(3) 4 ring delay
(4) 6 ring delay
(5) 8 ring delay
(6) No ring: only the indicator flashes
(7) Disable: no incoming call
• When you change the jack number by pressing NEXT or PREV, the
CO line number is not changed. Example #03-1:CO06.....Press
NEXT.....#03-2:CO06

Direct In Lines (DIL) Ringing, Delayed
Night Service

Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Description Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an extension in

both day and night modes. The extension users can make outgoing
CO calls using the assigned CO lines.

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2),
• CO line number:
• Enabl (enable) / Disab (disable)
Default All jacks-1/2 – all CO lines – Enable — Day / Night
Display example: CO Out Day
2. Press NEXT.

number.
Display example: #01-1:CO01:Enabl
4. Enter the desired CO line number, or keep pressing or

until the desired CO line is displayed.

displayed.
6. Press STORE.
7. To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT

and the desired jack number.
9. Press END.

Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night (contd.)
Jack numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection, press the key at
step 3 or 4. In these cases, the display shows the contents programmed
for Jack 01 or CO01.
• To assign no CO line group for a station, press CLEAR at step 4.

Night Service

Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Description These programs assign the extensions which will ring when a
doorphone call is received during the day and night modes.
Programmed extensions are also allowed to open the door.

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2),
• Doorphone number:
KX-TD816 – 1 and 2, two entries (max.)
KX-TD1232 – 1 through 4, four entries (max.)
Default Jack 01-1– All doorphones; Other jacks – no doorphone — Day /

Night
Display example: Doorphone in Day
2. Press NEXT.

number.
Display example: #01-1:1234
4. Enter the doorphone numbers.

To assign no doorphone, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new doorphone
numbers.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.

Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night (contd.)

on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
• Two doorphones can be installed in each system. In the case of KX-
TD1232, doorphones 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System, 3 and
4 in the Slave, if available.
• You can enter up to two (for KX-TD816) or four (for KX-TD1232)
doorphone numbers for each extension.

Door Opener Night Service
Doorphone Call

Voice Mail Access Codes
Description Assigns a mailbox number for each extension, only if program [990]
“System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 8” is set to “free.”

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2),
• Mailbox number: 16 digits (max.)
Default All jacks – Not stored

Display: Mailbox ID Code
2. Press NEXT.
number.
Display example: #01-1:Not Stored
4. Enter a mailbox number.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
on page 4-7.
• The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection for KX-TD1232) for connection to a Voice Processing
System as the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant ports.
• Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits, consisting of 0
through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the
display, press or .


Description Assigns whether the extension can perform all accesses or not.

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2),
Default All jacks – Connect

Display: Ext Connection
2. Press NEXT.

number.
Display example: #01–1: Connect

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • The extension of the jack number 01 should be set to “Connect.”

• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01.


Data Line Security
Description Sets or cancels the Data Line Security mode on an extension basis.

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2),
• On / Off
Default All jacks – Off

Display: Data Mode
2. Press NEXT.

number.
Display example: #01–1: Off

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
on page 4-7.

Data Line Security

ISDN Class of Service
Description Programs each ISDN port for a Class of Service (COS). The COS
determines the call handling abilities of each port.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per port.

( =all ports)
Default All ports – COS 1, COS 1

Display: ISDN COS Assign
2. Press NEXT.

To enter a first number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:COS1,COS1

5. Press .
7. Press STORE.
10. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services. Every ISDN
extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the
COS Programming of programs [5XX] and [991]. The restriction of
program [991], Bit 1 through 4, applies only for analogue outside
lines.

Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day / Night for ISDN Extension
Description Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an ISDN

extension in both day and night modes. The extension users can
make outgoing outside calls using the assigned CO lines.

( =all ports)
• CO line number:
Default All ports – all CO lines – Enabl — Day / Night
Display example: CO Out(ISDN) Day
2. Press NEXT.

To enter first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:CO01:Enabl


displayed.
6. Press STORE.

9. Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09
through 12 are for the Slave, if available.

Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day / Night for ISDN Extension (contd.)
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO 01.
• When you change a port number by pressing NEXT or PREV, the CO
line number is not changed.
Example #03:CO02.......Pressing NEXT....#04:CO02

Night Service

Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment †
Description Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording the

conversation after the call is intercepted.

• Stop Record / Keep Record
Default All jacks – Stop Record

Display: LCS Rec. Mode
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:Stop Record

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another jack number, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and desired jack number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
on page 4-7.

Live Call Screening (LCS)
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night
Description Sets the Intercept Routing destination of for each jack in both day
and night modes.
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits / Disable (no Intercept
Routing)
Default All jacks – Disable — Day / Night
Display example: EXT Intercep Day
2. Press NEXT.

To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering the jack
number.
Display example: #01-1: Disable

5. Press STORE.
6. To program another jack number, press NEXT or PREV, or
8. Press END.
Conditions • You can set the extension numbers in programs [003] “Extension
“Phantom Extension Number” and also floating numbers of hunting
groups, and pagers in program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• When “Disable” is selected, Intercept Routing is provided according to
the assignment in program [409]–[410].

Intercept Routing

Incoming Call Display
Description Allows you to choose between three display types when an

incoming call is received.
“Caller” means the incoming caller’s telephone number and name
are displayed. “CO Line” means the CO line number and CO line
name assigned in the program [421] are displayed. “DDI” means
the called party’s DDI number and extension name are displayed.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16,

( =all jacks)
• Display Types: Caller / CO Line / DDI
Default All jacks – Caller

Display: Incoming Display
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:Caller

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master


CLIP / COLP Number Assignment for Extension
Description Assigns a CLIP/COLP number for each extension.

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
• CLIP/COLP number: 16 digits (max.)
Default All jacks – Not Stored

Display: CLIP/COLP NO.
2. Press NEXT.

number.
Display example: #01-1:Not Stored
4. Enter a CLIP/COLP number.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • Each CLIP/COLP number consists of 0 through 9.

• For the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIP / COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension
Description Assigns a CLIP/COLP number for each ISDN extension port.

( =all ports)

Display: ISDN CLIP/COLP
2. Press NEXT.

To enter port number 01 or 03, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Not Stored

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.

case, the display shows the contents programmed for the first port.


TD286 Class of Service
Description Programs each TD286 ISDN port for Class of Service (COS). The
COS determines the call handling abilities of each port.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per port.

( =all ports)
Default All ports – COS1, COS1

Display: TD286 COS Assign
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:COS1, COS1

5. Press .
7. Press STORE.
10. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services. Every ISDN extension

must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS
Programming of programs [5XX] and [991]. The restriction of program
[991] – bits 1 through 4, applies only for analog outside lines.
• For KX-TD1232 port number 01 through 06 are for the Master System
• To assign all ports to the same selection press the key in step 3. In

Class of Service

Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day / Night for TD286 Extension
Description Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by a TD286

extension in both day and night modes. The extension users can
make outgoing outside calls using the assigned CO lines.

( =all ports)
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
( =all CO lines)
Default All ports – all CO lines – Enabl — Day / Night
Display example: CO Out(TD286) Day
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:CO01:Enabl


displayed.
6. Press STORE.

9. Press END.

Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day / Night for TD286 Extension (contd.)
• To assign all CO lines to the same selection, press the key in step 4.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO 01.
• When you change a port number by pressing NEXT or PREV, the CO
line number is not changed.
Example #01:CO02.......Pressing NEXT....#02:CO02

Night Service

CLIP / COLP Number Assignment for TD286 Extension
Description Assigns a CLIP/COLP number for KX-TD286 ISDN extension.

( =all ports)

Display: TD286 CLIP/COLP
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: #01:Not Stored

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


Blank
4-142.8
4.9 LCR Programming 7000
LCR Mode
Description Allows you to turn on or off the Least Cost Routing (LCR) mode.
LCR, if enabled, selects the least expensive route to be used for an
outside call.
Selection On / Off
Default Off

Display: LCR Mode
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: LCR:Off

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions If “Off” is selected, the Automatic Line Access feature functions in place
of LCR.


Blank
4-144
BTL Access Code
Description Stores the BTL (British Telecom Line) access code.
Selection BTL access code: 10 digits (max.)
Default 121

Display: BTL Access Code
2. Press NEXT.
Display: example: 121
3. Enter a BTL access code.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions The BTL access code can be a maximum of 10 digits, consisting of 0

through 9.


7003 4.9 LCR Programming
Itemized Code Set
Description Registers an itemized code applied to an extension.

The registered code is inserted into the “I” command position
stored in program [7X22] “LCR Carrier Modify Command.”

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2)
• Itemized code: 4 digits (max.)
Default KX-TD816: Jack 01-1 through 16-1 = 201 through 216;

KX-TD1232:Jack 01-1 through 64-1 = 201 through 264;

Display: Itemized Code
2. Press NEXT.

To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT. To select the
second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1: Not Stored
4. Enter an itemized code.

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 32 itemized codes for KX-TD816, and 128

itemized codes for KX-TD1232. Each code has a maximum of 4 digits,
consisting of 0 through 9.


Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set
Description Registers an itemized code applied to an ISDN extension.



Display: ISDN Itemized CD
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>

Display example: #03: Not Stored

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.



7005 4.9 LCR Programming
TD286 Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set
Description Registers an itemized code applied to an TD286 ISDN extension.


KX-TD1232 – 01 - 12

Display: TD286 Itemize CD
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>

Display example: #01: Not Stored

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.



4.9 LCR Programming 7X01
LCR Leading Digit Entry
Description By entering numbers into leading digit plan for a maximum of eight
carriers, you are starting the process to determine which CO line
group will be used to route the call.
Selection • Program address: 7X01, X: 1-8 (carrier number)

• Leading digit number: 7 digits (max.)
Default Carrier 1; Location 1 –

All other locations – Not stored
Programming 1. Enter a program address (7X01).

Display example: LCR L-Digit C1-1
2. Press NEXT.

4. Enter a leading digit number.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 80 leading digit numbers. Each number has a

maximum of 7 digits, consisting of 0 through 9, and . The character
“ ” can be used as a wild card character.

7X01 4.9 LCR Programming
LCR Leading Digit Entry (contd.)
• The same code with different digits may be assigned in this program or
in program [7X20] “LCR Exceptional Code Set.” In this case, the code
which has smaller digits takes the more expensive route is priority. To
prevent this, enter “ ” (wild card) after the code with the smaller
digits. Examples are shown below:
<Examples>


LCR Time and Fee Set
Description Assigns time schedules and charged fees for a maximum of a

maximum of eight carriers. It is possible to split a day into four
time zones max. so that the least expensive line is selected for that
time. According to the service hours and charges offered by your
carriers, enter the starting time of each zone.
Selection • Program address: 7X11, X=1-8 (carrier number)

• Day of the week selection number: 1 through 7
1: Sunday 5: Thursday
2: Monday 6: Friday
3: Tuesday 7: Saturday
4: Wednesday
• Time schedule: 1-4
• Starting time: 01-12 (hours), 00-59 (minutes), A(a.m.)/P(p.m.)
• Fee: 00-99 (pounds), 00-99 (pence)
Default Not stored

Display: Time & Fee C1-1
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Week NO?–>
3. Enter a day of the week selection number.

To program Monday, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: mo1:12:00A:10.10
To program another time schedule of the day, keep pressing NEXT or

PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed.
4. Enter the starting time (hours and minutes), moving the

cursor with or buttons.
5. Press to select AM/PM.

LCR Time and Fee Set (contd.)
7. Press to enter the fee.
8. Enter the fee (pounds and pence), moving the cursor with
and buttons.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new fee.
9. Press STORE.
10. To program another time schedule, press NEXT or PREV.
12. Press END.
Conditions The times must be programmed in sequence from Time-1 to Time-4.


LCR Exceptional Code Set
Description Assigns dialling numbers that are excepted from LCR routing plans
of the specified carrier. They are sent out to a CO selected from
automatic access CO line groups.
Selection • Program address: 7X20, X: 1-8 (carrier number)

• Exceptional code: 7 digits (max.)

Display example: EXCP Digit C1
2. Press NEXT.

4. Enter an exceptional code.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 80 exceptional codes for each carrier. Each

code has a maximum of 7 digits, consisting of 0 through 9, and .
The character “ ” can be used as a wild card character.

LCR Exceptional Code Set (contd.)
• The same code with different digits may be assigned in this program or
in program [7X01] “LCR Leading Digit Entry.” In this case, the code
which has smaller digits takes the more expensive route is priority. To
prevent this, enter “ ” (wild card) after the code with the smaller
digits. Examples are shown below:
<Examples>


LCR Carrier Code
Description Assigns carrier access codes used for LCR feature.

• Carrier code: 10 digits (max.)
Default Program 7121 (carrier 1) –131;

Other programs (carriers 2-8) – Not stored

Display example: Carrier Code C1
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: 131
3. Enter the carrier code.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions There is a maximum of 8 carrier codes. Each code has a maximum of 10

digits, consisting of 0 through 9.


LCR Carrier Modify Command
Description Assigns modification commands applied to carrier numbers.

Dialled numbers are modified according to the programmed
commands. Available commands are as follows:
C : Insert carrier code
P : Send pause
T : Change to tone (DTMF) mode
A : Insert Authorization code
I : Insert Itemized code
H : Home Position

• C/P/T/A/I/H, 16 entries (max.)
Default Program 7122 (carrier 1) – CPTAIH;


Display example: Modify Command C1
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: CPTAIH

displayed.
4. To select other commands for the same carrier, press and

press SELECT for the desired command until all the required
entries are completed.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and repeat steps 4 and 5.
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions There is a maximum of 8 carriers, each of which can be given a

maximum of 16 commands.


LCR CO Line Group Assignment
Description Assigns CO line groups that correspond to an LCR carrier.

• CO line group number: 1 through 8, eight entries (max.)
Default Program 7123 (carrier 1) – 12345678;


Display example: Trunk Group C1
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter CO line group numbers in succession.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new numbers.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions There is a maximum of 8 carriers, each of which can be given a

maximum of 8 CO line groups.


Authorization Code Set
Description Registers an authorization code applied to a CO line.

The registered code is inserted into the “A” command position

• CO line number:
• Authorization code: 20 digits (max.)
Default All programs – Not stored

Display example: Authorize Code C1
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: CO Line NO?–>
3. Enter CO line number.

Display example: CO01: Not Stored
4. Enter an authorization code.

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 16 CO lines for KX-TD816 and 54 CO lines for

KX-TD1232, each of which can be given an authorization code.
• Each authorization code has a maximum of 20 digits, consisting of
0 through 9 and PAUSE.
• To assign one authorization code to all CO lines, press the key at
step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for
CO01.
• If the authorization code is already stored, “Already Set” is displayed at
step 3.
• To display parts of the commands which have scrolled off the display,
press or .


4.10 Resource Programming 800
SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
Description Used to determine which calls will produce an SMDR printout.
Selection • Outgoing calls: All (all calls) / Toll (toll calls only) /
Off (no printing)
• Incoming calls: On (all calls) / Off (no printing)
Default All calls – Off

Display: Duration Log
2. Press NEXT to program outgoing calls.

Display: Outgoing:Off

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press NEXT to program incoming calls.

Display: Incoming:Off

displayed.
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • It is necessary to connect a printer to the EIA (RS-232C) port provided

on the system.
• After connecting a printer, do not press the RETURN key, if provided
on the printer, in 10 seconds. Otherwise, the usage of the EIA port is
changed to system programming and printout will not occur.
• If “Toll” is selected, the system will print out all the calls starting from
the numbers stored in programs [301]–[305] “TRS Denied Code Entry
for Levels 2 through 6.”


801 4.10 Resource Programming
SMDR Format
Description Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the
printer. Page length determines the number of lines per page. Skip
perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of
every page. Page width determines the number of characters per line.
Selection • Page length (lines): 4 through 99

• Skip perforation (lines): 0 through 95
• Page width (characters): 80 / 100
Default Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0; Page width – 80

Display: SMDR Format
2. Press NEXT to program page length.

Display example: Page Length:66
3. Enter the page length.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new page length.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press NEXT to program skip perforation.
Display example: Skip Perf: 0
6. Enter the skip perforation.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new skip perforation.
7. Press STORE.
8. Press NEXT to program page width.
Display example: Page Width: 80

displayed.
10. Press STORE.
11. Press END.
Conditions • The page length should be four lines or more longer than the skip
perforation length.
• If 80 characters for page width is selected, the last five digits of account
codes are not printed out.
• A title is positioned on the first three lines on every page.
• The programmed format becomes valid only if the EIA (RS-232C)
cable is connected. If a printer is already connected, disconnect it and
connect again. Otherwise the former format becomes valid.


System Data Printout
Description Starts or stops printing of the system data. All the current system-
programmed data is printed out.
Selection Start / Stop

Display: System Data Dump
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Print-Out:Start
3. Press STORE to start printing.

Printing starts.
To stop printing in the middle of printing, press SELECT and go to
step 4.
When printing is completed, the display shows:
Display: Print-Out:Finish
4. Press STORE.
Display: Print-Out:Stop
5. Press END.
Conditions • It is necessary to connect a printer to the EIA (RS-232C) port provided

on the system.
• You may stop printing by pressing the END button, while records are
being printed out.
• You cannot restart the printout while records are being output.


Music Source Use
Description Assigns the music source to be used for Music on Hold and
Background Music (BGM).
Selection • Hold / BGM

• Music source number: KX-TD816 – 1 or 2 / No Use
KX-TD1232 – 1 through 4 / No Use
Default Hold and BGM – Music 1

Display: Music Source Use
2. Press NEXT to program Music on Hold.

Display example: Hold:Music1
3. Enter a music source number.

To select no music source, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, enter the new music source number.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press NEXT to program BGM.
Display example: BGM :Music1
6. Enter a music source number.

To select no music source, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, enter the new music source number.
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The music source is a user-supplied item. Two music sources can be
installed per system. For KX-TD1232, music sources 1 and 2 are
connected to the Master System, 3 and 4 are to the Slave, if available.
Any music source can be used by either system.
• The system is provided with an internal music source. By default
setting, external music source is used as Music Source 1. Program
[990] “System Additional Information, Area 02 – Bit 10” is used to
select internal music source for Music Source 1.
• To disable music, press CLEAR at steps 3 and 6.
• Program [804] “External Pager BGM” is used to enable / disable BGM
for each external pager.

Background Music (BGM) Music on Hold

External Pager BGM
Description Used to determine whether external pagers will receive Background

Music (BGM). BGM –External is turned on and off by the
operator.
Selection • External pager number: KX-TD816 – 1 or 2

• Disable (sends no BGM) / Enable (sends BGM)
Default All external pagers – Disable

Display: Ext–Pag BGM
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Pager NO?–>
3. Enter an external pager number.

To enter pager number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Pager1:Disable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another pager, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and the desired external pager number.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The external pager is a user-supplied item. Two external pagers can be
installed per system. For KX-TD1232, external pagers 1 and 2 are
installed in the Master System, 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.
• Program [006] “Operator / Manager Extension Assignment” is used to
assign an extension as an operator.
• Program [803] “Music Source Use” is used to select the music source to
be used for BGM.


External Pager Confirmation Tone
Description Used to remove the confirmation tone for external pagers. The
default setting sends confirmation tone 2 to the external pagers
before paging is broadcast. This programming applies to all the
external pagers.
Selection On / Off
Default On

Display: Ext-Pag Ack-Tone
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Tone:On

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions The external pager is a user-supplied item. Two external pagers can be
installed per system. For KX-TD1232, external pagers 1 and 2 are
installed in the Master System, 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.

Confirmation Tone Paging – External
Paging – All

4.10 Resource Programming 806-807
EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2
Description Assigns the communication parameters for the EIA (RS-232C)

interface for Port 1 (for KX-TD816 and Master System of KX-
TD1232) or Port 2 (Slave System of KX-TD1232).
New line code: Select the code for your printer or personal computer. If your
printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with carriage
return, select “CR.” If not, select “CR+LF.”
Baud rate: A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the
system to the printer or personal computer.
Word length: A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.
Parity: A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error
in the string of bits composing a character. Make an appropriate
selection depending on the requirements of your printer or personal
computer.
Stop bit: A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a
character. Select an appropriate value depending on the
requirements of your printer or personal computer.
Selection • New line code: CR+LF / CR

(CR=Carriage Return, LF=Line Feed)
• Baud rate (baud): 150 / 300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600
• Word length (bits): 7 / 8
• Parity bit: None / Mark / Space / Even / Odd
• Stop bit length (bits): 1 / 2
Default New line code = CR+LF; Baud rate = 9600; Word length = 8;
Parity bit = Mark; Stop bit = 1 — Port 1 / Port 2
Programming 1. Enter a program address (806 for Port 1 or 807 for Port 2).
Display example: RS232C Paramet.1
2. Press NEXT to program new line code.

Display example: NL-Code:CR+LF

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press NEXT to program baud rate.

Display example: Baud Rate:9600

displayed.

806-807 4.10 Resource Programming
EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2 (contd.)
7. Press STORE.
8. Press NEXT to program word length.

Display example: Word Lengt:8bits

displayed.
10. Press STORE.
11. Press NEXT to program parity bit.

Display example: Parity:Mark

displayed.
13. Press STORE.
14. Press NEXT to program stop bit.

Display example: Stop Bit:1bit

displayed.
16. Press STORE.
17. Press END.
Conditions • The following combinations are invalid.
Parity Word Length Stop Bit

Mark 8 2
Space 8 1
Space 8 2
• The program address of the out-of-service system port is unacceptable.


Floating Number Assignment
Description Assigns the floating numbers for the External Pager, modem,
Digital Test Access (DTA) and Hunting Groups. These numbers
can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station
access.
Selection • Floating station: KX-TD816 – Pager1 / Pager2 / DTA /

Hunting Groups 01 through 32
KX-TD1232 – Pager1 / Pager2 / Pager3 /
Pager4 / MODEM / DTA /
Hunting Groups 01 through 32
• Floating number: 2 through 4 digits
Default KX-TD816 – Pager 1=296; Pager 2=297; DTA=299;

Hunting Groups 01 through 32=Not stored
KX-TD1232 – Pager 1=296; Pager 2=297; Pager 3=396;
Pager 4=397; MODEM=399; DTA=299;
Hunting Groups 01 through 32=Not stored

Display: FLT EXT NO.
2. Press NEXT to program Pager 1.

Display example: Pager1:EXT296
To program another floating station, keep pressing NEXT or PREV
until the desired floating station is displayed.
3. Enter a floating number.

To program no floating number, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new floating
number.
4. Press STORE.
5. To program another floating station, keep pressing NEXT or

PREV until the desired floating station is displayed.
7. Press END.
Conditions • A floating number is composed of two to four numerical digits, 0

through 9.

Floating Number Assignment (contd.)
• The leading one or two digits of the floating numbers are subject to
program [100] “Flexible Numbering, (01) through (16) 1st through 16th
hundred extension blocks.”
• Floating numbers and extension numbers should be unique. Double
entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid. Valid entry
example: 10 and 11, 10 and 110; Invalid entry example: 10 and 106,
210 and 21.
• You can leave the entry empty.
• To avoid making an invalid entry, check the other extension number in
Number Set,” [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set,” [127] “Voice
Mail Extension Number Assignment” and [130] “Phantom Extension
Number Assignment.” The default of each extension number is as
follows:
Not stored
Not stored
[127] Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment
265 through 288
[130] Phantom Extension Number Assignment
Not stored

Floating Station

Modem Standard
Description Assigns the modem standard. There are two standards available –
BELL and CCITT.
Selection BELL / CCITT
Default CCITT

Display: MODEM Standard
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: MODEM:CCITT

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions Select the standard used by your modem.


TD197 Baud Rate Set
Description Assigns the KX-TD197 modem standard. There are two standards
available – BELL and CCITT-V.34.
Selection • Master / Slave

• BELL / V.34-9600 / V.34-14400 / V.34-19200 / V.34-28800 /
V.34-33600
Default Master and Slave – V.34-33600

Display: TD197 Type
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Mast.:V.34-33600

displayed.
4. Press NEXT.
Display example: Slave:V.34-33600

displayed.
6. Press STORE.
7. Press END.
Conditions • Normally, if V.34-33600 is selected, the modem’s transmission is as fast

as possible. However, if the line quality is not good and causes many
errors, please select the lower speed standard.


Timed Reminder Message Assignment
Description Assigns the message number which is used when the Outgoing
Message (OGM) for Timed Reminder is set.
Selection Message number: 1 to 4
Default Not Stored

Display: T.Remind MSG Asn
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: MSG:Not Stored
3. Enter a message number.

Display example: MSG:1
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions None

Timed Reminder

990 4.11 Option Programming
System Additional Information
Description Allows the following programming items to be changed, if

required. Each bit in each Area represents a programming item.
Chart for the Areas and Bits

Bit Number
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Display Example Area 01 0010100010000101
Area 02 1110011001101100
Area 03 0000000000000000
Area 04 1111111100000000
Area 05 1111100111111110
Area 06 1111101111111010
Area 07 1111111111111111
Explanation
Area Bit Description Selection Default References
01 1 Sound source during transfer. 0 : ringback tone 1 • CALL
1 : Music on Hold TRANSFER
FEATURES
• Music on Hold
2 Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly 0 : Consultation 0 Call Hold
and then replacing the handset (during a Hold
CO line call (single line telephones only). 1 : disconnection
3 Result of pressing the RECALL or 0 : disconnection 1 • External
FLASH/RCL button on proprietary signal Feature Access
telephones (during an outside call). 1 : register recall • Recall
signal
4 Enables or disables the CO Pulse 0 : disable 0 Dial Type
feedback tone. 1 : enable Selection

4.11 Option Programming 990
System Additional Information (contd.)

01 5 Selects the destination during the day 0 : DIL 1:N 0 Direct Dialling
mode, when operator number is sent as a 1 : Operator In (DDI)
Direct Dialling In number.
6 Selects the destination during the night 0 : DIL 1:N 0 Direct Dialling
mode, when operator number is sent as a 1 : Operator In (DDI)
Direct Dialling In number.
7 Selects the operation when the Master 0 : Reset 0 None
and Slave system of KX-TD1232 are automatically
disconnected. 1 : Not reset
8 Enables or disables the dial tone between 0 : disable 1 None
obtaining a CO line and dialling the 1 : enable
phone number when using the one-touch
dial, redial or speed dial function.
9 Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly 0 : Consultation 0 Consultation
(single line telephones only). Hold Hold
1 : disconnection
10 Sets the duration of the DTMF signals 0 : 80 ms 0 Voice Mail
sent to the Voice Processing System 1 : 160 ms Integration
(VPS) ports.
12, 11 Sets the time the system waits before 00 : 0.5 s 10 Voice Mail
sending DTMF signals (such as a mailbox 01 : 1.0 s Integration
number) to the VPS after the VPS 10 : 1.5 s
answers a call. 11 : 2.0 s
14, 13 Sets the time the system waits before 00 : 0.5 s 10 Voice Mail
sending DTMF signals (programmed in 01 : 1.0 s Integration
[113]) to the VPS after the VPS calls an 10 : 1.5 s
extension. 11 : 2.0 s
15 Determines whether the system turns off 0 : system 0 • Message
the Message Waiting lamp or the VPS, 1 : VPS Waiting
when the user hears a message recorded • Voice Mail
in a mailbox. Integration
16 Reserved
02 1 If an outside party is transferred and 0 : extension 0 Call Transfer,
unanswered, assigns whether Transfer 1 : Operator 1 Unscreened – to
Recall occurs at the originating transfer Extension
extension or at the Operator 1.
2 If Limited Call Duration is enabled in 0 : both calls 0 Limited Call
program [502] “Extension-to-CO Line Call 1 : outgoing calls Duration
Duration Limit,” assigns if Limited Call only
Duration is done for both outgoing and
incoming calls or for outgoing calls only.


02 3 Allows you to remove confirmation tone 0 : disable 1 Confirmation
4. By default, a beep tone sounds when a 1 : enable Tone
three-party conference is started / ended.
4 Determines whether the dialled “ ” and 0 : no check 1 Toll Restriction
“#” will be checked by Toll Restriction. 1 : check
This assignment is required for certain
central offices (CO) to prevent toll fraud.
Some CO’s ignore the user-dialled “ ”
and “#.” If your CO is such a type, select
“0” (no check).
5 Enables or disables the Recall function 0 : disable 0 Recall
when receiving an outside call at a locked 1 : enable
or toll-restricted station. Recall, if
enabled, allows the user to make an
outside call using the same line at the
station. This is also allowed for those
extensions that have Account Code –
Verified – All Calls mode assigned, if “0”
(disconnection signal) is selected in Area
01 – bit 3 above.
6 Allows you to remove Confirmation Tone 0 : disable 1 Confirmation
3. This tone is sent when a conversation 1 : enable Tone
is established just after dialling the feature
numbers for accessing the following : Call
Pickup, Paging, Paging Answer, TAFAS
Answer, Hold Retrieve and Call Park
Retrieve.
7 A CO line set to pulse or call blocking 0 : 60% 0 Dial Type
mode in program [402] “Dial Mode 1 : 67% Selection
Selection” can have two settings. This
assigns the pulse break ratio during dial
pulsing. Select an appropriate ratio
depending on the standard in your
country.
8 Determines whether an extension’s 0 : extension 0 Voice Mail
mailbox number is substituted by the number Integration
extension number or is programmable 1 : free
(free). If a call is forwarded or rerouted to
the VPS, this system automatically
transmits the mailbox number to the VPS
to specify the user’s mailbox. To make it
programmable, select “1 (free),” then
assign the number in program [609]
“Voice Mail Access Codes.”


02 9 Assigns the first display of a digital 0 : names 0 Special Display
display proprietary telephone (KX-T7431 1 : numbers Features –
/KX-T7433/KX-T7436/KX-T7235) in Station Speed
Station Speed Dialling. Dialling
10 Assigns the source of Music Source 1 for 0 : internal music 1 • Background
Music on Hold and BGM. source Music (BGM)
1 : external music • Background
source Music (BGM)
– External
• Music on Hold
12, 11 Selects the inter-digit pause for pulse 00 : 630 ms 01 None
dialling. 01 : 830 ms
10 : 1030 ms
13 Selects the intercom dial tone frequency. 0 : normal 0 None
1 : distinctive
15, 14 Sets the maximum time for detecting a 00 : 1000 ms 11 None
hooking flash signal from the SLT. 01 : 300 ms
10 : 196 ms
11 : 172 ms
16 Reserved
03 1-16 These bits are provided to assign PAD 0 : 0 dB 0 None
Switch Control (volume control of 1 : -3 dB
04 1-8 received calls on a CO line). This can be
assigned for each CO line.
The bits 1 through 16 in Area 03
correspond to CO lines 1 through 16 and
the bits 1 through 8 in Area 04
correspond to CO lines 17 through 24.
The CO lines 9 through 24 are only
available for KX-TD1232.
9 Prevents or allows a call originated by an 0 : prevent 1 Voice Mail
AA port of the VPS to another AA port. 1 : allow Integration
10 Prevents or allows sending pulse dialling 0 : prevent 1 None
signals during an outside call. 1 : allow
11 Enables or disables the SMDR printout of 0 : disable 1 Station Message
secret dial numbers. 1 : enable Detail Recording
(SMDR)
12 Enables or disables the Digital Test 0 : enable 1 None
Access. 1 : disable
13-16 Reserved


05 1 Reserved
2 Selects the result when an outside call is 0 : disable 1 Voice Mail
routed by Call Forwarding to a voice mail 1 : enable Integration
port which is in Automated Attendant
(AA) service mode. [For both Inband and
Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT)
Integration]
disable : AA service mode
enable : The mode will change to the
Voice Mail (VM) service mode
and a Follow-On ID is sent.
When the voice mail port is in VM
service mode, this program is not
affected.
3 Selects the result when an outside call is 0 : disable 1 Voice Mail
routed to a voice mail port by IRNA. 1 : enable Integration
[For both Inband and DPT Integration]
When the voice mail port is in VM
service mode:
enable : VM service mode
disable : The mode will change to the AA
service mode. [Only when
Inband]
When the voice mail port is in AA service
mode:
enable : The mode will change to the
VM service mode and a Follow-
On ID is sent.
disable : AA service mode
4 Determines how an SLT user replies to a 0 : off-hook and 1 Message Waiting
message left by the Message Waiting feature number
feature. 1 : off-hook
5 Determines how to treat an extension user 0 : sends an alarm 1 Budget
who reaches the pre-assigned limit of the sound and then Management
Budget Management feature. disconnects the
line in fifteen
seconds.
1 : sends an alarm
sound
6 Determines whether an data (the date and 0 : enable 1 HOTEL
room number) is printed out or not when 1 : disable APPLICATION
a guest checks-in and checks-out.


05 7 Determines whether to send an absent 0 : SMDR 1 • Absent
message, No.6-9, to an extension or to (printer) Message
output it to the printer when the feature 1 : extension Capability
number is dialled. Outputting the message • HOTEL
to the printer is useful when informing a APPLICATION
receptionist of the cleaning status of a
room or the total of the minibar at the
hotel.
8 Determines whether or not a new page 0 : enable 1 HOTEL
will start whenever printing out the data 1 : disable APPLICATION
in the Hotel Application feature.
9 Determines whether or not to print out the 0 : enable 1 Station Message
data when the system receives a call and a 1 : disable Detail Recording
call is answered. (SMDR)
10-16 Reserved
06 1 Disables or enables sending dial tone 0 : disable 0 None
after seizing a CO line. 1 : enable
2 Reserved
3 Assigns whether the system disconnects 0 : disconnect 0 None
the CO line or not if nothing is dialled 1 : do not
after seizing a CO line. disconnect
4 Reserved
5 Selects the way to access a CO line to 0 : Dial 9 or press 1 Least Cost
apply LCR. L-CO button. Routing (LCR)
1 : any dialling
method
6 Assigns if pressing the HOLD button 0 : Hold Retrieve 1 • Call Hold,
twice acts as Exclusive Hold or Hold 1 : Exclusive Hold Exclusive
Retrieve. • Call Hold
Retrieve
7 Assigns whether the system displays the 0 : display 1 None
authorization code while programming in 1 : do not display
program [7X24] “Authorization Code
Set.”
8-9 Reserved
10 When an incoming call reaches the 0 : receive 1 None
Hunting Group (Circular, UCD, Ring and 1 : not receive
No Reply), this program determines
whether the extension where the Do Not
Disturb (DND) feature is set receives the
call or not.


06 11 When an incoming call reaches the 0 : receive 1 None
Hunting Group (Circular, UCD, Ring and 1 : not receive
No Reply), this program determines
whether the extension where the Call
Forwarding feature is set receives the call
or not.
12 Enables or disables the display of the 0 : enable 1 HOTEL
margin rate during an outside call. 1 : disable APPLICATION
13 Enables or disables the SMDR printout of 0 : enable 1 HOTEL
the margin rate. 1 : disable APPLICATION
14 Selects the extension whose itemized 0 : Operator 1 1 Doorphone Call
code is used for a doorphone call 1 : Jack 01-1 Forwarding to
transferred to an outside party, and its CO Line
charge account destination.
15 Assigns whether the operator can set the 0 : enable 1 Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb (DND) feature. 1 : disable (DND)
16 Reserved
07 1 Enables or disables the LCR with DTMF 0 : enable 1 Least Cost
function. 1 : disable Routing (LCR)
2 Assigns the incoming bell frequency for 0 : 32 Hz 1 None
SLT. 1 : 25 Hz
3-5 Reserved
6 Determines which telephone can activate 0 : any telephone 1 Whisper OHCA
the Whisper OHCA feature. 1 : KX-T7400
series
telephone only
7 Selects a beep tone or a music source for 0 : beep tone 1 Music on Hold
Music on Hold of the Music Source 1. 1 : music source
8 Selects the bearer when using the single 0 : Speech 1 None
line telephone (SLT). For Orange 1 : 3.1k Audio
Network, select Speech.
9-13 Reserved
14 Determines whether the account code is 0 : shown in dots 1 Account Code
printed out or not (shown in dots) by the 1 : shown Entry
SMDR.
16, 15 Sets the time the system waits before 11 : 5 s 11 Completion of
sending a CCBS signal (by dialling “6” or 10 : 10 s Calls to Busy
pressing “CCBS” button) while hearing 01 : 15 s Subscriber
dial tone 4. 00 : 20 s (CCBS)

Selection • Area code: 01 through 12 (08 through 12 are reserved)

• Selection: See “Selection” on pages 4-168 through 4-174 for each
area.
Default See “Default” on pages 4-168 through 4-174.

Display: System Add Inf.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Area NO?→
3. Enter an area code (01 through 12).

4. Keep pressing or to move the cursor to the desired bit.
5. Enter your selection (0 or 1).

To change the current entry, press STORE and the new selection.
6. To program another bit, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. Press STORE.
8. To program another area, press SELECT and the desired

area code.
10. Press END.
Conditions None
Feature References See “References” on pages 4-168 through 4-174.

COS Additional Information
Description Allows the following programming item to be changed, if required.

Bits 4, 3, 2, 1: Sets the number of digits allowed to dial out during
an analogue outside call on a Class of Service (COS) basis. If an
outside party hangs up and the extension user tries to dial out still
on the CO line, the system will disconnects the line at the time the
assigned number of digits are dialled.
This program can be added if CPC Signal Detection is not provided
by the CO.
Bit 5: Enables or disables the Call Forwarding – Follow Me feature
on a COS basis.
Other bits: Reserved.
Display Example
Bit Number
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1111111111110000

• Selection for bits 4, 3, 2, 1:
0000: no limit / 0001: 1 digit / 0010: 2 digits / 0011: 3 digits /
0100: 4 digits / 0101: 5 digits / 0110: 6 digits / 0111: 7 digits /
1000: 8 digits / 1001: 9 digits / 1010: 10 digits / 1011: 11 digits /
1100: 12 digits / 1101: 13 digits / 1110: 14 digits / 1111: 15 digits
• Selection for bit 5: 0 : disable / 1 : enable
Default Bits 4, 3, 2, 1: All COS – 0000 / Bit 5: All COS – 1

Display: COS Add Inf.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?→

4. Keep pressing or to move the cursor to the desired

bit.

COS Additional Information (contd.)
5. Enter your selection (0 or 1).

To change the current entry, press STORE and the new selection.
6. To program another bit, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. Press STORE.
8. To program another COS, press SELECT and the desired

COS number.
10. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS numbers to one selection, press the key in step 3.


Section 5
List
This section lists tone, ring tone and default values of system
programming.
5.1 Tone / Ring Tone
<TONE> 1 sec
Confirmation Tone 1
Confirmation Tone 2
Confirmation Tone 3
Confirmation Tone 4
Dial Tone 1
Dial Tone 2
Dial Tone 3
Dial Tone 4
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
Ringback Tone

Tone
5-2 List
5.1 Tone / Ring Tone
<TONE> 15 sec
Hold Recall
Call Waiting Tone 1

(CO/intercom)
5 sec
Call Waiting Tone 2

(intercom)
Call Waiting Tone 2

(CO)
4 sec
Hold Tone
<RING TONE>
1 sec
Intercom Calls /
Intercom Hold Recall
Outside Calls /
Outside Hold Recall
Doorphone Calls /
Timed Reminder
Callback Ringing
(Camp-on Recall)
List 5-3
5.2 Default Values
Address Program Default
Manager Programming
[000] Date and Time Set 1 Jan. ’94 SAT 12:00 am
[001] System Speed Dialling Number Set Not Stored
[002] System Speed Dialling Name Set Not Stored
[003] Extension Number Set • KX-TD816
Jack 01-1 through 16-1=201 through 216
• KX-TD1232
[004] Extension Name Set Not Stored
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • KX-TD816
CO buttons 1 through 8 of all jacks – Single-
CO 01 through 08; ringing tone type 2
• KX-TD1232
CO buttons 1 through 24 of all jacks=Single-
CO 01 through 24; ringing tone type 2
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Operator 1 (Day / Night) and manager – Jack 01;
Assignment Operator 2 – Unassigned
[007] Console Port and Paired Telephone Not Stored
Assignment
[008] Absent Messages 1: Will Return Soon; 2: Gone Home
3: At Ext %%%; 4: Back at %%:%%
5: Out Until %%/%%; 6: In a Meeting
7 through 9: Not Stored
[009] Quick Dial Number Set Not Stored
[010] Budget Management 0£
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate 0, 0%
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set All ports – Not Stored
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set All ports – Not Stored
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port All ports – 0 £
[015] Charge Rate Fractional Point 2
Assignment
[016] Charge Rate Assignment 0.01
[017] TD286 Extension Number Set All ports – Not Stored
[018] TD286 Extension Name Set All ports – Not Stored
[019] Budget Management on TD286 Port All ports – 0
[021]–[022] Doorphone Call Forwarding — All doorphones – Disable
Day / Night
System Programming
[100] Flexible Numbering See page 4-37 and 4-38.
5-4 List
5.2 Default Values
[101] Day / Night Service Switching Mode Manual
[102] Day / Night Service Starting Time Every day of the week – Day=9:00 am /
Night=5:00 pm
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group 12345678
Assignment
[104] Quick Dial Assignment Not Stored
[105] Account Codes Not Stored
[106] Station Hunting Type All hunting groups – Disable
[107] System Password 1234
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button Enable
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type • KX-TD816: C;C;E
• KX-TD1232: C;C;E1;E2 (Master and Slave)
[110] Network type Assignment BT
[111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / All CO lines – Removed digit=01; Added
Added Number Assignment number=Not Stored
[113] VM Status DTMF Set RBT=1; BT=2; ROT=3; DND=4; Answer=5;
Disconnect=#9; Confirm =9; FWD VM RBT=6;
FWD VM BT=7; FWD EXT RBT=8
[114] VM Command DTMF Set LV-MSG=H; GETMSG= H; AA-SVC=#8;
VM-SVC=#6
[115] Adjust Time 1:00 am
[116] ROM Version Display Not applicable
[117] Charge Display Selection Pound
[118] Charge Fee Reference Extension All jacks – Enable
Assignment
[119] Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set 1234
[120] User Password 1234
[121] Pulse Dial Reception Assignment Puls: Enable
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment Disable
[123] Hotel Application Disable
[125] Assignment of Denomination £
† [126] Voice Mail Number Assignment All jacks – Blank (Not Stored)
† [127] Voice Mail Extension Number VM-01=265, VM-02=266, VM-03=267,
Assignment VM-04=268, VM-05=269, VM-06=270,
VM-07=277, VM-08=278, VM-09=281,
VM-10=282, VM-11=283, VM-12=284,
VM-13=271, VM-14=272, VM-15=273,
VM-16=274, VM-17=275, VM-18=276,
VM-19=279, VM-20=280, VM-21=285,
VM-22=286, VM-23=287, VM-24=288
† [128] Voice Mail Extension Group All voice mail numbers – EXG 1
Assignment
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital List 5-5
5.2 Default Values
[129] Operator Queue Queue: 8, H-UP: 4
[130] Phantom Extension Number Not Stored
Assignment
[131] Hunting Group Assignment All hunting groups – Disable
[132] Hunting Group Name Assignment Not Stored
[133] Hunting Overflow All hunting groups – Busy, 0
[134]–[135] Hunting Intercept — Day/Night All hunting groups – Disable (Day / Night)
[137]–[138] UCD Time Table Assignment — All UCD groups – Not Stored
Day / Night
[139] UCD Time Table All time tables – Not Stored
[148] Off-Hook Monitor Enable
[150] ISDN DDI Translation Table All locations – Not Stored
[151]–[152] ISDN DDI Ringing Assignment All locations – Not Stored
— Day / Night
[153] Completion of Calls to Busy Disable
Subscriber (CCBS)
Timer Programming
[200] Hold Recall Time 60 s
[201] Transfer Recall Time 12 rings
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time 3 rings
[203] Intercept Time 12 rings
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time 1s
[205] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration 10 min
Time
[207] First Digit Time 10 s
[208] Inter Digit Time 10 s
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times 4 times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time 120 s
[211] Dial Start Time 0 ms
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time 0s
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 0 min
[215] Ring-Off Detection Time 6s
[216] Outgoing Message Time 32, 0, 32, 0
[217] Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time 30 s
[218] Doorphone-to-CO Line Call 0s
Duration Time
TRS Programming
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for Not Stored
Levels 2 through 6
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Not Stored
Levels 2 through 6
5-6 List
5.2 Default Values
[311] Emergency Dial Number Set Location 01 – 999; Location 02 – 112;
Others – Not Stored
CO Line Programming
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment All CO lines – Connect
[401] CO Line Group Assignment CO01=TRG 1; CO02=TRG 2;
CO03=TRG 3; CO04=TRG 4;
CO05=TRG 5; CO06=TRG 6;
CO07=TRG 7; (KX-TD816)
CO08 through CO16=TRG 8;
(KX-TD1232)
CO08 through CO54=TRG8
[402] Dial Mode Selection All CO lines – DTMF
[403] Pulse Speed Selection All CO lines – 10 pps
[404] DTMF Time All CO lines – 96 ms
[405] CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set All CO lines – 352 ms
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension – Day/Night All CO lines – Disable—Day/Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension – Day/Night All CO line groups – Disable—Day/Night
[411] Host PBX Access Codes Not Stored
[412] Pause Time All CO line groups – 3.5 s
[413] Register Recall Signal Time All CO line groups – 96 ms
[414] Disconnect Time All CO line groups – 2.0 s
[415] CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Disable
[416] Reverse Circuit Assignment All CO lines – Regular
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment Not Stored
[420]/[429] ISDN Ring Service Assignment All CO lines – DDI
— Day / Night
[421] CO Line Name Assignment Not Stored
[422] ISDN Port Type All CO lines – Enable
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode Not Stored
[424] ISDN Configuration All ports – CO
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode All ports – Permanent
[426] ISDN TEI Mode All ports – Point
[427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber All ports – Permanent
Number All ports – Fix 0
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone All ports – Disable
[437] Multiple Subscriber Number Set Not Stored
[438]–[439] Extension Ringing Assignment All ports – All locations – Disable (Day /
— Day / Night for ISDN MSN Night)
[440] TD286 ISDN Port Type All ports – Extension
[441] TD286 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode All ports – Call
[442] TD286 ISDN Configuration All ports – Multipoint
[443] TD286 ISDN Data Link Mode All ports – Call
List 5-7
5.2 Default Values
[444] TD286 ISDN TEI Mode All ports – Automatic
[445] TD286 ISDN Extension Multiple All ports – Disable
Subscriber Number
[446] TD286 ISDN Extension Progress All ports – Disable
Tone
[450] PRI Configuration KX-TD816 : 0YY – – / CRC4 : Enable
KX-TD1232 : 0YYYY / CRC4 : Enable
[451] PRI Reference CO KX-TD816 : All CO limes (PRI line) – CO5
KX-TD1232 : All CO lines (PRI line) – CO9
[452] CO – to – TIE Transfer All CO line groups – Disable
[453] TIE – to – CO Transfer All CO line groups – Disable
[454] TIE – to – TIE Transfer All CO line groups – Enable
[455] TIE Secunty Type Non
[456] Line Hunting Sequence All CO line groups – Large → Small
[457] Voice Path Type All CO lines – 4 Wire
[458] Voice Level (Transmit) All CO lines – 3db
[459] Voice Level (Receive) All CO lines – 3db
[460] TIE Receive Dial All CO line ports – Yes
COS Programming
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level – Day / All COS – Level 1 (Day / Night)
Night
[502] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration All COS – Disable
Limit
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line All COS – Enable
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line All COS – Disable
[507] Do Not Disturb Override All COS – Disable
[508] Account Code Entry Mode All COS – Option
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level for All COS – Level 1 (Day / Night)
System Speed Dialling – Day / Night
[511] Door Opener Access All COS – Enable
[513] Night Service Access All COS – Enable
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In All COS – Disable
Call
[516] Calling Line Identification All COS – Disable
Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification All COS – Disable
Restriction
[518] CFU / CFB / CFNR Assignment All COS – Disable
[519] Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) All COS – Enable
[520] Call Forwarding from Hunting Group All COS – Disable
[521] Doorphone Call Forwarding to CO All COS – Disable
Line
5-8 List †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital
5.2 Default Values
Extension Programming
[600] EXtra Device Port All Jacks – Disable
[601] Class of Service All Jacks-1/2 – COS 1, COS 1
[602] Extension Group Assignment All Jacks-1/2 – Extension group 1 – Enable
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed All Jacks-1/2 – All CO lines – Immediate
Ringing — Day / Night Ringing (Day / Night)
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line All Jacks-1/2 – All CO lines – Enable (Day /
Assignment — Day / Night Night)
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment Jack 01-1 – All doorphones;
— Day / Night Other jacks – No doorphone (Day / Night)
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes Not Stored
[611] Extension Connection Assignment All jacks – Connect
[612] Data Line Security All jacks – Off
[613] ISDN Class of Service All ports – COS 1, COS1
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line All ports – All CO lines – Enabl (Day / Night)
Assignment — Day / Night for ISDN
Extension
† [617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode All jacks – Stop Record
Assignment
[620]–[621] Extension Intercept Routing — All jacks – Disable (Day / Night)
Day / Night
[622] Incoming Call Display All jacks – Caller
[623] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment All jacks – Not Stored
for Extension
[624] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment All jacks – Not Stored
for ISDN Extension
[627] TD286 Class of Service All ports – COS 1, COS 1
[629]–[630] Outgoing Permitted CO line All ports – All CO lines – Enabl (Day / Night)
Assignment — Day / Night for
TD286 Extension
[632] CLIP / COLP Number Assignment All ports – Not Stored
for TD286 Extension
LCR Programming
[7000] LCR Mode Off
[7002] BTL Access Code 121
[7003] Itemized Code Set • KX-TD816
• KX-TD1232
List 5-9
5.2 Default Values
[7004] Iternal ISDN Itemized Code Set All Ports – Not Stored
[7005] TD286 Internal ISDN Itemized Code set All Ports – Not Stored
[7X01] LCR Leading Digit Entry Carrier 1–Location 1=
Other locations – Not Stored
[7X11] LCR Time and Fee Set Not Stored
[7X20] LCR Exceptional Code Set Not Stored
[7X21] LCR Carrier Code Carrier 1 – 131; Other carriers – Not Stored
[7X22] LCR Carrier Modify Command Carrier 1 – CPTAIH; Other carriers – Not Stored
[7X23] LCR CO Line Group Assignment Carrier 1 – 12345678;
Other carriers – Not Stored
[7X24] Authorization Code Set Not Stored
Resource Programming
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call All calls – Off
Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0;
Page width – 80
[802] System Data Printout Not Applicable
[803] Music Source Use Hold and BGM – Music 1
[804] External Pager BGM All external pagers – Disable
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone On
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters – New line code – CR+LF; Baud rate – 9600;
Port 1/ Port 2 Word length – 8; Parity bit – Mark;
Stop bit – 1 (Port1 / Port2)
[813] Floating Number Assignment • KX-TD816: Pager 1=296; Pager 2=297;
DTA=299; Hunting groups 01 through 32
=Not Stored
• KX-TD1232: Pager 1=296; Pager 2=297;
Pager 3=396; Pager 4=397; MODEM=399;
DTA=299; Hunting groups 01 through 32
=Not Stored
[814] Modem Standard CCITT
[817] TD197 Baud Rate Set Master and slave – V.34-33600
[818] Timed Reminder Message Not Stored
Assignment
Option Programming
[990] System Additional Information See pages 4-168 through 4-174.
[991] COS Additional Information See page 4-176.
5-10 List
Section 6
Troubleshooting
This section provides information for system and telephone
troubleshooting.
6.1 Troubleshooting
6.1.1 Installation
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION

Extension does not operate. Bad printed circuit board Exchange printed circuit board for
(Extension Card). another printed circuit board.
Bad connection between Take that extension and plug it into

the system and extension. the same extension port using a
short telephone cord. If the
telephone does not work,
connection between the system and
the extension must be repaired.
A telephone with an A-A1 Use a 2 wires cord.

relay is connected. Set the A-A1 relay switch of the
telephone to “OUT” or “OFF”
position.
Bad extension. Take that extension and plug it into

another extension port that is
working. If the telephone does not
work, replace the phone.
Improper reset operation. Press the Reset Button.
Noise in external paging. Induced noise on the wire Use a shielded cable as the
between the system and the connection wire between the
amplifier. system and amplifier. A short
shielded cable is recommended.
Volume distortion from Excessive input level from Decrease the output level of the
external music source. external music source. external music source by using the
volume control on the music
source.
Speed Dialling or One- Bad programming. Enter the CO line access number
Touch Dialling does not (9, 81 through 88) into program-
function. ming.
6-2 Troubleshooting
6.1 Troubleshooting
6.1.2 Connection
Connection between the DSHS and a proprietary telephone:
No CAUSE SOLUTION
Can you dial
The A/B is connected to the H/L. Use the correct cord (inner 2
an extension?
wires are for A/B and the
H● ● H outer 2 wires are for H/L).
A● ● A
B● ● B
L● ● L
DSHS extension
*The P1/P2 is connected to the L/H. Use the correct cord (2 wires
second from the outside for
P2 ● ● P2
H● H/L and the outer 2 wires are
● H
A● ● A for P1/P2).
B● ● B
L● ● L
P1 ● ● P1
DSHS extension
Connection between the DSHS and a single line telephone:
Yes CAUSE SOLUTION

The A/B is connected to the H/L. Use the correct cord (inner 2
wires are for A/B).
H● ● • If a telephone equipped
A● ● A
B● ● B with an A-A1 relay is
L● ● connected to the DSHS, set
the A-A1 relay switch of
DSHS extension the telephone to “OFF.”
(Continued to the
following page.)
Troubleshooting 6-3
6.1 Troubleshooting
Connection between the central office and the DSHS:
CAUSE SOLUTION
(Continued from the
CO lines are connected to the A/A. Reconnect the CO lines to
previous page.)
the paired A/B of the
● A telephone jack using 2-
● ● B conductor wiring.
● ● A
Can you dial No ● B
out on a CO
line? CO line DSHS
CO lines are connected to the A/B that is

not in a pair.
● A
● ● B
● ● A
● B
CO line DSHS
6.1.3 Operation
• When using the speaker- • The HANDSET / • When the headset is not used, set
phone mode with a HEADSET selector of the HANDSET / HEADSET
proprietary telephone the KX-T7130 is set to selector to the “HANDSET”
KX-T7130, nothing is the “HEADSET” position.
audible. position.
• When using the speaker- • The “HEADSET” mode • When the headset is not used,
phone/monitor mode with is selected by station pro- select the “HANDSET” mode by
a digital proprietary gramming, station programming.
telephone, nothing is “Handset/Headset
audible. Selection.”
The unit does not ring. The Ringer Volume Set to “HIGH” or “LOW.”
Selector is set to “OFF.”
During a power interrup- • A DPT or APT is • Disconnect the DPT or APT and
tion, extensions connected connected to the jack. connect a single line telephone.
to Power Failure Transfer • The dialling mode (tone • Set the Tone / Pulse switch to the
jacks do not operate. or pulse) is improper. other position.
6-4 Troubleshooting
6.1 Troubleshooting

• During system Interface between the Connect the interface between the
connection* operation, systems is disconnected. systems and press the Reset Button
originating an intercom/ on both systems.
outside call from a system
to the other system is not
possible.
• The indication “System
Link Down” is displayed
on the proprietary
telephone of Operator 1.
Originating an outside call, The corresponding CO Program the CO button. See
Call Transfer, or Conference button does not exist on the Section 4.2 [005] “Flexible CO
cannot be performed. proprietary telephone. Button Assignment.”
DECT PS cannot be The manager DPT is Connect the manager DPT to the
registered. connected to the slave master cabinet.
cabinet.
6.1.4 Using Reset Button

If the system does not operate properly, use the Reset Button.
(If Master and Slave Systems are in operation by System
Connection, reset both systems.)
Before using the Reset Button, try the system feature again to
confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.
Notes:
(a) When the System Clear Switch is set to “NORMAL,” pressing
the Reset Button causes the following:
1. Camp-on is cleared.
2. Calls on Hold are terminated.
3. Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated.
4. Calls in progress are terminated.
5. Call Park is cleared.
Other data stored in memory except the above are not cleared.
(b) When the System Clear Switch is set to the “CLEAR” position,
you must press the Reset Button with caution, because all data
stored in memory will be cleared by the following operation:
pressing the Reset Button and setting the System Clear Switch
to the “ NORMAL” position while the Power Indicator is
flashing.
*: Available for KX-TD1232 only. Troubleshooting 6-5

6.1 Troubleshooting
Operation
(A) If the system does not operate properly,
1. Make sure that the System Clear Switch is set to the
“NORMAL” position.
2. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool.
(B) If the system still does not operate properly,
1. Set the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.
3. Return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL”
position while the Power Indicator is flashing (approxi-
mately within 10 seconds).
(C) If the system still does not work, switch the power off and on
again after five minutes.
(D) If the system still does not work,
1. Switch the power off.
2. Set the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.
3. Switch the power on.
5. Set the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position
while the Power Indicator is flashing (approximately
within 10 seconds).
(E) If the system still does not work, switch the power off. If car
batteries are connected to the system, disconnect them, too.
Then consult an authorized service person.
When the power supply stops, extensions connected to Power

Failure Transfer jacks are automatically connected straight to
specific CO lines:
KX-TD816 — CO 1, CO 2 and CO 5
KX-TD1232 — CO 1, CO 2, CO 9, CO 13, CO 14 and CO 21.
Connect single line telephones to the Power Failure Transfer

jacks.
6-6 Troubleshooting
Section 7
PRI Section
This section provides information on using the Primary Rate
Interface (PRI) ISDN line with the optional expansion unit.
7.1 Overview
The KX-TD290 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN Expansion
Unit adds one PRI ISDN line.
When this unit is installed in the KX-TD816, the maximum number
of available CO lines is limited to 12 and when it is installed in the
KX-TD1232 for the system connection, the maximum number of
available CO lines is limited to 38.
Therefore, if another CO card or unit is used, it is required to program
which area it is installed in by program [450] beforehand. One PRI
ISDN line adds 8 CO lines (CO 09 through 16) to the KX-TD816 and
adds 30 CO lines (CO 25 through CO54) to the KX-TD1232.
This unit cannot be installed in the KX-TD1232 Slave system.
D1232
D816
Panasonic
Panasonic
1 PRI ISDN line can be added.
1 PRI ISDN line can be added.
[109] Expansion Card/Unit Type — Assign “S3” to the desired area.
Section 7.3, System Programming
[450] PRI Configuration
[451] PRI Reference CO
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO
(L-CO) Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Assign the following buttons to Flexible (CO) buttons.

– Single CO button(s) (09 through 16 for KX-TD816/25 through 54 for
KX-TD1232)
– Group CO button(s) (Assign the CO line group number which CO lines
09 through 16 or 25 through 54 belong to.)
– Loop–CO button(s)

Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN)
7-2 PRI Section

7.2 Installation
7.2.1 Location of the Optional Units
Precautions To protect the printed circuit boards (P-boards) from static electricity, do
not touch parts on the P-boards in the main unit and on the optional units.
KX-TD816 One 8-Station Line Unit (KX-TD170) and either one CO

Line/ISDN Line Unit (KX-TD180, KX-TD280, KX-TD286 or KX-
TD290) can be installed to any expansion area. You must use the
KX-TD170-➂ when you install the KX-TD290. The former KX-
TD170 does not work properly with the KX-TD290. Please see
the back of the unit and check “➂” is marked.
➂
MODEL NO.KX-TD170
One extension line unit

Area 2 8-Station Line Units, KX-TD170
Area 1
line units
Panasonic
• 1-PRI ISDN Line Unit, KX-TD290
D816
Expansion Unit
Connectors
Remove the cover

plate(s) on the
front cover.
Notes • When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data
• System Programming is required for location identification.
Refer to program [109], “Expansion Card/Unit Type,” in Section 4.
Default: Area 1= 4-CO Line Unit, Area 2= 8-Station Line Unit
PRI Section 7-3

7.2.1 Location of the Optional Units
KX-TD1232 A maximum of two 8-Station Line Units (KX-TD170) and/or one
CO Line/ISDN Line Units (KX-TD180, KX-TD280, KX-TD286 or
KX-TD290) can be installed to any expansion area. You must use
the KX-TD170-➂ when you install the KX-TD290. The former
KX-TD170 does not work properly with the KX-TD290. Please
see the back of the unit and check “➂” is marked.
➂
MODEL NO.KX-TD170
Area 3
Max. two extension line units
8-Station Line Units, KX-TD170
Area 2
Area 1
line units
Panasonic
• 1-PRI ISDN Line Unit, KX-TD290
Expansion Unit D1232
Connectors
Remove the cover

plate(s) on the
front cover.
Notes • ISDN card/unit installation should not be done only in the Slave system
for system connection.
• When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data
• System Programming is required for location identification. Refer to
program [109], “Expansion Card/Unit Type,” in Section 4.
Default: Area 1= 4-CO Line Unit, Area 2, 3= 8-Station Line Unit
7-4 PRI Section

7.2.2 Installing the Unit (KX-TD290)
The following procedures can be used to install the Primary Rate
Interface (PRI) ISDN Expansion Unit (KX-TD290).
Default KX-TD816: bottom = 4-CO Line Unit,
top = 8-Station Line Unit
KX-TD1232: bottom = 4-CO Line Unit,
middle and top = 8-Station Line Unit
1. Loosen the two the screws on the cover 3. Hook the cabinet on the main unit and slide
plate. Insert fingers into the slits to the cabinet to the left until it is secured.
remove the cover plate.
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panasonic
4. Loosen the outside screw and slide the

Slit cover to the right.
Slit
Panaso
nic

removed, as needed.
Panasonic
2. Connect the cabinet cord to the connec-

tor in the main unit firmly. Outside screw
5. Secure the inside screw (included) to

D1232
fix the cabinet to the main unit.
Inside screw
Panasonic
Panasonic
Note Be sure to fix the inside screw to the main

unit, or the unit may not work properly.
PRI Section 7-5

7.2.2 Installing the Unit (KX-TD290)
6. Prepare the required plugs. 10. Cover the cords with the cord holder
(included).
TB ← From
To the unit ← RB
RA
TA
Network
2
1
Cord holder
Panasonic
RB ← From
To the unit ← TB
TA
RA
Network
7. Insert the plug into a jack on the unit. 11. Fix the cords to the wall at the shown
position so that the front cover can be
opened.
8
7
6 RB
IS
D
N 5 RA
D
IG
IT
A
L
S
U
P
E
R
H
Y
B
R
ID
S
Y
4
S Panasonic
TE
M
2C
O
3
2 TB
1 TA
P
an
as
on
ic
View of TEL Jack

Note • If two or three expansion units are
installed, cut the cabinet covers on
the lower cabinets to allow the cords
from upper cabinet to go down
through the cabinet covers. To guard
Jacks from the Central Office the cords, smooth the cut edge.
Cut here
8. Tie up all the cords into a bundle. If
other cords are coming from the upper
cabinets, tie them, too.
9. Close the cabinet cover and secure the

outside screw.
7-6 PRI Section

7.3 PRI System Programming 450
PRI Configuration
Description Assigns the number of B channels which are actually used out of
the 8 PRI line channels (for KX-TD816) or 30 PRI line channels
(for KX-TD1232) and the installation location of the CO line card
(KX-TD181 or KX-TD182) or BRI card (KX-TD281 or KX-
TD282), the CO line unit (KX-TD180), or BRI unit (KX-TD280 or
KX-TD286). The CRC4 mode can be also assigned.
Selection KX-TD816
• B channel number and installation spot: 8 Y– – –/0 YY – –
(Y=the card can be installed, – =this area is not changeable)
ex.: 8 Y – – –
Not available.
Status of the expansion area of the system.
Status of the basic area of the system.
the number of available B channels
Programming example:
1. To install TD290 and TD282: 8 Y– – –
KX-TD1232
• B channel number and installation spot: 30 Y–NN/30 N–YN/
30 N–NY/26 Y–NY/
26 N–YY/ 22 Y–YN/
18 Y–YY/0 YYYY
(Y=the card can be installed, – =this area is not changeable,
N=the card is not installed.)
ex.: 30 Y – N N
Status of the expansion area of the slave system.
Status of the basic area of the slave system.
Status of the expansion area of the master system.
Status of the basic area of the master system.
the number of available B channels
Programming example:
1. To install TD290 and TD281 to the Master system: 30 Y–NN
2. To install TD290 to the Master and TD280 to the Slave systems:
30 N–NY
• CRC4: Disable / Enable
Default KX-TD816: 0 YY – – / CRC4: Enable

KX-TD1232: 0 YYYY / CRC4: Enable
PRI Section 7-7

450 7.3 PRI System Programming
PRI Configuration (contd.)

Display: PRI Config.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: 0 YYYY
3. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired combination of the

channel number and the card status is displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press NEXT to assign the CRC4 mode.

Display example:CRC4:Enable
6. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is dis-

played.
7. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For KX-TD1232, when system connection is activated, the maximum

number of available CO lines is limited to 38. Therefore, this program
is required.
• For KX-TD1232, when you assign the number of B channels to 18, 22 or
26, ISDN Fractional Service must be provided by a telephone company.
• The available CO line numbers in program [400] are changed according
to this program, but the maximum number of B channels of CO09
through CO16 (for KX-TD816) and CO25 through CO54 (for KX-
TD1232) which are assigned in this program can be set to “Connect.”
Moreover, the CO line of the card which is set at the area of “N” cannot
be set to “Connect.”
• If you use all ports of the KX-TD286 as CO lines, the status of both the
basic and expansion area of the slave system must be “Y.” The avail-
able combinations are: “26 N–YY,” “18 Y–YY” or “0 YYYY.”
7-8 PRI Section

7.3 PRI System Programming 451
PRI Reference CO
Description Assigns which CO line number system data each PRI line uses
except for the following programs:
• [401] CO Line Group Assignment
• [419] Subscribers Number Assignment
• [421] CO Line Name Assignment
After assigning this program, the following program data will
become available for PRI line CO 09 through CO16 (for KX-
TD816) or CO 25 through 54 (for KX-TD1232).
• [111] ISDN DDI / MSN Removed Digit / Added Number
Assignment
• [407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
• [420]/[429] ISDN Ring service Assignment — Day / Night
• [603]–[604] DIL 1:N extension and Delayed ringing — Day / Night
• [605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
• [615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night for ISDN Extension
• [629]–[630] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night for TD286 Extension
• [659]–[660] PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night
• [661]–[662] PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night
Selection KX-TD816
• CO line number of PRI line: 09 through 16, ( =all CO lines)
• CO line number: 1 through 8
KX-TD1232
• CO line number of PRI line: 25 through 54, ( =all CO lines)
• CO line number: 01 through 24
Default KX-TD816: All CO lines (PRI line) – CO 5

KX-TD1232: All CO lines (PRI line) – CO 9
Display: PRI Reference CO
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter the CO Line number of PRI.

Display example:CO25 : CO 9
4. Enter the desired CO Line number.
PRI Section 7-9

451 7.3 PRI System Programming
PRI Reference CO (contd.)
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master system
and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• CO09 through CO16 become available when the expansion unit KX-
TD290 is installed in the KX-TD816 and CO25 through CO54 become
available when the expansion unit KX-TD290 is installed in the KX-
TD1232.
• To assign all CO lines to the same selection, press the key in step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO09 for
the KX-TD816 and CO25 for the KX-TD1232.
7-10 PRI Section

Section 8
DECT Portable Station Section
This section provides information on the wireless system,
which can be optionally equipped with the basic system.
8.1 Overview
To connect the wireless system, the following equipment is required.
Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144)

One KX-TD144 supports up to two Cell Stations (KX-TD142) and
four wired extensions. One KX-TD144 can be installed to the KX-
TD816 and up to two KX-TD144s can be installed to the KX-
TD1232.
Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD146)

One KX-TD146 supports up to six Cell Stations (KX-TD146).
One KX-TD146 can be connected to the KX-TD816 and up to two
KX-TD146s can be connected to the master KX-TD1232.
CS: Cell Station (KX-TD142)

This unit determines the range of the supporting PSs. Up to four
calls can be made at the same time in one range.
PS: DECT Portable Station (KX-TD7500)

Up to 16 PSs in the KX-TD816 system and up to 64 PSs in the KX-
TD1232 system can be assigned as extensions. For more details
about the PS, please refer to the User Manual.
8-2 DECT Portable Station Section

8.2 Wireless System Installation
8.2.1 Wireless System Outline
System Capacity
Connectable Number of Cell Station (KX-TD142)

Main Unit
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232 KX-TD1232 × 2
Interface Unit
KX-TD144 2 2 2
KX-TD144 × 2 – 4 4
KX-TD146 6 6 6
KX-TD146 × 2 – 12 12
KX-TD144+ – 8 8
KX-TD146
Connectable Number of Portable Station (KX-TD7500)
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232 KX-TD1232 × 2
PS (Portable Station) 16 64 64
RF Specifications
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Radio Access Method Multi Carrier TDMA-TDD
Frequency Band 1.881 – 1.907 MHz
Number of Carriers 10
Carrier Spacing 1.728 MHz
Gross Bit Rate 1.152 bps
Carrier Multiplex TDMA, 24 (T × 12, R × 12) sliots per frame
Frame Length 10 msec
Modulation Scheme GFSK
Roll–off factor = 0.5 50% roll–off in the transmitter
Data Coding for Modulator Differencial Coding
Voice CODEC 32 Kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.721)
Transmission Output Max. 250 mW
DECT Portable Station Section 8-3

8.2.1 Wireless System Outline
Procedure Flow Chart
Consider the service area required for the

(See pages 8-5 through 8-8.)
users by referring to Site Planning.
Install a Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-

TD144 / KX-TD146) to the main unit.
Connect a Cell Station (KX-TD142) to the

KX-TD144 / KX-TD146.
Survey the site for the Cell Station. (See pages 8-18 through 8-28.)
Mount the Cell Station on the wall. (See page 8-29.)
Note The master CS number must be assigned before using a Cell Station.
(Refer to the program [680] “Cell Station Number Assignment for
Master CS” in Section 8.4.)

8.2.2 Site Planning
Choosing the best site for the Cell Station (KX-TD142) requires
careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best location
may not always be convenient for installation. Please read the fol-
lowing information before you install the unit.
Characteristics of Radio Waves
The transmission of radio waves and the operating range depend

on the structure and materials of the building.
Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can inter-
fere with radio waves.
Such equipment may create noise or interfere with the performance
of the portable station.
The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of
radio waves.
Cell Station
1. Reflection
Column
2. Diffraction
3. Penetration
1. Radio waves are reflected by objects such as those made of

metal.
2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.
3. Radio waves penetrate objects such as those made of glass.

8.2.2 Site Planning
The Relationship between Radio Waves and
Building Structure and Materials
• The transmitting range is affected more by the building materials

and thickness of the material than the number of obstacles.
• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive
objects and rarely penetrate them.
• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely
reflected by them.
• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.
• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves
when they reach objects made from various materials.
OBJECT MATERIAL TRANSMISSION TENDENCY

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves penetrate them.
Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is,
the more radio waves are reflected.
Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.
Glass with wire nets Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be reflected.
Glass covered with Radio waves are weakened considerably when they penetrate
heat-resistant film windows.
Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is,
the more radio waves are reflected.
Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them.
Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.
Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is,
the more radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.
Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.
Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and rarely
penetrate them.
Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are weakened.

8.2.2 Site Planning
Installation Preparation
1. Prepare a drawing of the building where you want to install the

Cell Station (CS).
(A drawing which shows the size or main structural material of
the wall, partition wall or ceiling is preferable.)
2. Consider the service area required for the users.
3. Examine the service area on the drawing.
1) Make a circle around the installable area by determining the
radio transmission range (inside: 25 – 50 m, outside: 70 – 100
m). Note that a CS cannot be installed outside a building.
2) If more than one CS is required, the radio transmission
ranges should overlap. The overlapping range should be at
least 5 to 10 meters.
<Basic location> <Location example for a building

which has an object in the centre.>
Object
CS CS
5 – 10 m Cell Stations
(KX-TD142)

8.2.2 Site Planning
Precautions
• The Cell Station should be kept free of dust, moisture, high tem-
perature (more than 40˚C), low temperature (less than 5˚C),
vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• If a backup system for use during a Cell Station power failure is
required, set the system cable resistance within 20 Ω.
• Keep distance between the equipment listed below in order to
prevent noise, interference or the disconnection of a conversa-
tion.
EQUIPMENT DISTANCE
Cell Station and office equipment such as a computer, more than 1.8 meters
telex, fax, etc., or microwaves.
Cell Station and portable station more than 1 meter
Two portable stations more than 0.5 meter
Portable station and proprietary wired telephone more than 1 meter
The system and Cell Station more than 2 meters
Note • In Cell Station overlap areas, if the signal from one Cell Station
becomes weak, the DECT portable station will start call handover to
the next Cell Station. However if there is no free channel for a call
handover, the DECT portable station will remain with its current Cell
Station until out of range and the call is lost.
• Too many Cell Stations in a small area can cause problems due to con-
flicts over which signal channels each Cell Station can use.
Ideally Cell Stations should be a minimum of 25 to 40 meters apart.

8.2.3 Location of the Unit
KX-TD816 with the KX-TD144
One Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144) can be installed to

any of the two expansion areas on the KX-TD816. Up to two Cell
Stations (KX-TD142) can be connected to the KX-TD144.
Expansion
area 2
Expansion CS INF
DECT
area 1
KX-TD144
DECT
Panasonic
KX-TD142
D816
Expansion Unit
Connector
Remove the front cover
plate(s).
Note System Programming is required for location identification. Refer to

Default : Area 1 = 4-CO Line Unit
Area 2 = 8-Station Line Unit
Select “E” for the Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144). This type is
the same for an 8-Station Line Unit (KX-TD170).

Up to two Cell Station Interface Units (KX-TD144) can be

installed to any of the three expansion areas on the KX-TD1232.
Up to two Cell Stations (KX-TD142) can be connected to the KX-
TD144.
Expansion
area 3
Expansion
area 2
DECT
CS INF
Expansion KX-TD144
area 1
DECT
KX-TD142
Panasonic
D1232
Expansion Unit
Connectors
Remove the front cover

plate(s).
Note • System Programming is required for location identification. Refer to

Areas 2 and 3 = 8-Station Line Unit
Select “E1” or “E2” for the Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144).
Both types are the same for an 8-Station Line Unit (KX-TD170).
• KX-TD144 and KX-TD142 can only be connected to the Master
System.

One Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD146) can be installed to

any of the two expansion areas on the KX-TD816. Up to six Cell
Stations (KX-TD142) can be connected to the KX-TD146.
Expansion
area 2
KX-TD142
Expansion CS INF
DECT
area 1
KX-TD146
DECT
Panasonic
DECT
D816
DECT
Expansion Unit
Connector
Remove the front DECT
cover plate(s).
DECT
AC Adapter (KX-A277E)

Area 2 = 8-Station Line Unit
Select “E” for the Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD146). This type
is the same for an 8-Station Line Unit (KX-TD170).
• One AC adapter (KX-A277E) is necessary for each KX-TD146.

Up to two Cell Station Interface Units (KX-TD146) can be

installed to any of the three expansion areas on the KX-TD1232.
Up to six Cell Stations (KX-TD142) can be connected to the KX-
TD146.
Expansion
area 3
Expansion KX-TD142
area 2 CS INF
DECT
KX-TD146
Expansion
area 1 DECT
DECT
Panasonic
D1232
DECT
Expansion Unit
Connectors
DECT
Remove the front

cover plate(s). DECT
AC Adapter (KX-A277E)

Areas 2 and 3 = 8-Station Line Unit
Select “E1” or “E2” for the Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD146).
Both types are the same for an 8-Station Line Unit (KX-TD170).
• KX-TD146 and KX-TD142 can only be connected to the Master
System.
• One AC adapter (KX-A277E) is necessary for each KX-TD146.

8.2.4 Installing the Unit
The following procedures can be used to install a Cell Station
Interface Unit (KX-TD144 / KX-TD146) to the main unit, and then
the Cell Station (KX-TD142) to the Cell Station Interface Unit.
The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as the main unit.
1. Loosen the two screws on the cover 3. Hook the cabinet on the main unit and slide
plate. Insert your fingers into the slits the cabinet to the left until it is secured.
to remove the cover plate(s).
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panasonic
Slit
4. Loosen the outside screw and slide the
Slit cover to the right.
Panaso
nic

removed as required.
Panasonic
2. Connect the cabinet cord of the Cell Outside screw

Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144 /
KX-TD146) to the connector in the
main unit firmly. 5. Secure the inside screw (included) to
fix the cabinet to the main unit.
D1232
Inside screw
Panasonic
Panasonic
Note Be sure to fix the inside screw to the

main unit, or the unit may not work
properly.

6. Wireless Extension Connection
Use a Cell Station Cord (4-conductor wiring – included) and 4-pin plug (included) to connect
the cell station line. There are 2 plugs for the KX-TD144 and 6 plugs for the KX-TD146 to
connect the Cell Stations.
Maximum length of the cable: AWG 24 (ø 0.6 mm): Under 1 km
6-1. Insert the wires of the 4-conductor wiring cord into the holes
in the plug to connect pins “D1”, “D2”, “V1” and “V2”.
D1: Data 1 V1: Voltage +
D2: Data 2 V2: Voltage –
Press the transparent part into the black part.
Insert the other end of the wires into the modular plug.
Note: Do not peel off the wire coating. Insert the wires all the way.
2
1
4-pin plug Modular plug

D1 D1
V1 V1
V2 V2
D2 D2
6-2. Insert the 4-pin plug into a cell station jack on the unit, and
attach the ferrite core (included) to the plug cord.
KX-TD144 KX-TD146
CS CS
no. no. D1
D1
V1
2 V1 6 V2
V2
D2
D2
5
C C
S S
IN IN
F F 6C
S 4
3
1 2
P
an P
1
an
as as
on on
ic ic
5 cm
Ferrite Core
To the Cell Station Roll the cord once around
the ferrite core and close
Connect the ground terminal to ground.
the core.
Note: If other expansion units are
Note: Put it in the cabinet
installed, the frame ground connection
when closing the cabinet cover.
is required for only one unit.

6-3. Insert the modular plug into the Cell Station, and attach the
ferrite core (included) to the plug cord.
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ferrite Core
Roll the cord once
around the ferrite core
15 cm
and close the core.
6-4. Survey the site for the Cell Station by testing the radio signal.
Refer to Section 8.2.5, “ Site Survey.”
Note • System Programming is required to assign an extension number to each

portable station.
• For the KX-TD146, an AC adapter is necessary.
The same AC outlet should be used for the main PBX unit and a Cell
Station Interface Unit.
C
S
IN
F
P
an
as
Wrap the cord once around on

ic
the upper hook and pass

through the lower hook.
Section 8.4, DECT PS System Programming
[650] PS Registration
[653] PS Extension Name Set
[671] PS Extension Number Set
[672] PS Password Set
[681] PS Radio System ID Reference
Feature References Section 8.3, DECT Portable Station Features

Digital Wireless Connection

7. Wired Extension Connection (KX-TD144 only)
A Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144) can support four wired extensions as well as wire-
less extensions.
Use 4-pin plugs to connect the wired extensions.
7-1. Insert the required telephone wires into the holes in the plug.
Press the transparent part into the black part.
Note: Do not peel off the wire coating. Insert the wires all the way.
2
1
4-pin plug
D1 D1
T T
R R
D2 D2
Jack
D1 no.
C
S T
IN
F R
20
D2 (28)
19
(27)
18
(26)
P
an
as
on
17
ic
(25)
Connect the ground terminal to

To extensions ground.
Note: If other expansion units are
installed, the frame ground connec-
tion is required for only one unit.

8. Tie all of the cords into a bundle. If Note If two expansion units are installed, cut
other cords are exposed in the upper the cabinet cover(s) on the lower cabi-
cabinet, tie them also. net(s) to allow the cords from the upper
9. Close the cabinet cover and secure the cabinet to go down through the cabinet
outside screw. cover(s). To protect the cords, smooth
10. Cover the cords with the cord holder any cut edges.
(included).
Cut here
D1232
SAFETY CAUTION for KX-TD144

Cord holder The small cover which provides access to
Panasonic
connectors CN402, CN403, CN404 and

CN405 shall not have its cable knock-out
section removed, unless another expansion
unit is mounted above which would prevent
finger access via the cable knock-out open-
11. Fix the cords to the wall as shown so ing. This safety requirement is necessary to
that the front cover can be opened. protect users from network voltages.
D1232DIGITAL SUPER HYBRID SYSTEM
Panasonic

8.2.5 Site Survey
Site Survey Specification
The KX-TD7500 portable station has Radio Signal Test Mode

which monitors the state of link as one of the means to determine
the site planning for the KX-TD142. In the mode, the frame loss
and signal strength of a synchronous slot, and the signal strength of
the other slots can be measured when the portable station is linking
with the KX-TD142.
Flow Chart of the Site Survey
Check the Cell Station ID number. (See pages 8-19 and 8-20.)
Assign the Cell Station ID number to the PS. (See page 8-21.)
Unplug the cable from the Cell Station. (See page 8-22.)
Prepare the DIP-Switch of the Cell Station for

(See page 8-23.)
the Radio Signal Test mode.
Locate the Cell Station temporarily and con-

(See page 8-24.)
nect the AC power cord.
Survey the site using the PS. (See pages 25 through 27.)
Were the correct results obtained?

No
Yes
Disconnect the AC power cord, set the DIP-
Switch to the normal mode, and plug in the (See page 8-28.)
cable.

8.2.5 Site Survey
Checking the Cell Station ID Number
Use a personal computer to check the Cell Station (CS) ID number.

File: E1232BE.EXE
Main Menu Display
Input Format
1. In the Main Menu Display
Enter 2 and press the ENTER key to select “System Data
Programming(INTERACTIVE)”.
2. In the System Data Programming Main Menu Display

Enter 2 and press the ENTER key to select “Station”.
3. In the Station Menu Display

Enter 26 and press the ENTER key to select “CS
Information”.
The CS Information Display appears as shown on the next page.

8.2.5 Site Survey
CS Information Display
CS ID number (10 digits)

Example:
The CS ID number of CS number 03 is “8012301260”.
The CS ID number of CS number 04 is “8012300360”.
The location of the CS numbers are shown below.

KX-TD144: CS 01, CS02, CS07, CS08
KX-TD146: CS 01 through 12
KX-TD144 KX-TD146
CS 012
CS 08
EXPI 2 EXPII 2
CS 07 CS INF
CS 07 CS INF
CS 02 CS 06
EXPI 1 EXPII 1
CS INF CS INF
CS 01
Panasonic
CS 01 Panasonic
Master Master
* EXPI : KX-TD144 (Cell Station Interface Unit)

EXPII: KX-TD146 (Cell Station Interface Unit)
One EXP for the KX-TD816 and a maximum of two EXPs for the
KX-TD1232 can be installed per system.

8.2.5 Site Survey
Assigning the Cell Station ID Number to the PS
1. Set the PS Power Switch to ON while

pressing (Talk), (Flash) FUNCTION<0-4>
and at the same time.
Example
2. Press ABC
.
CS NO?(1-8)
3. Enter the Cell Station number. Example
CS ID1=
→
4. Press (Talk). Example
CS ID1=
→
5. Enter the Cell Station ID number. Example
• To enter letters, press the following but-
CS ID1=
A (Hold) D (Function) →0123456789
B OK (OK) E (Redial)
C (Book) F (Flash)
tons.
Example
6. Press (Talk).
CS NO?(1-8)
• The assignment is completed.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to assign other

Cell Station ID numbers.
8. Press CLR (Transfer) to return to the initial FUNCTION<0-4>

display.

8.2.5 Site Survey
Unplugging the Cable from the Cell Station
After assigning the Cell Station ID number to the PS, unplug the
cable from the Cell Station once.
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

8.2.5 Site Survey
DIP-Switch Setting
After unplugging the Cell Station once, set the DIP-Switch as fol-
lows.
1. Switch the Radio Signal Test Switch from OFF to ON.

2. Set the Channel Number Switches as desired.
DIP-Switch
Channel Number Switch Radio Signal
(Default: Channel 0) Test Switch
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
ON
OFF
0
0
1 2 3 4 5 6
Channel 1 Channel 4 Channel 7

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Note • To see the signal strength of more than one Cell Station, the channel
for each Cell Station needs to be set.
• Up to eight Cell Stations can be surveyed at the same time. If more
than one Cell Station is in Radio Signal Test mode, each DIP-Switch
channel must be different.

8.2.5 Site Survey
Connecting an AC Adaptor to the Cell Station
After setting the DIP-Switch, connect an AC Adaptor

(KX-A11BS1: 230 ACV, 50Hz or KX-A311E: 230 – 240 ACV,
50Hz) to the Cell Station.
Note • Only use an AC Adaptor for the Site Survey.

8.2.5 Site Survey
Radio Signal Test using the PS
After locating the Cell Station(s) temporarily, execute the Radio
Signal Test using the PS.
The PS scans whether there is a Cell Station it can link with on
channel 0 right after entering the Radio Signal Test mode. The
channel to be scanned can be changed by pressing the appropriate
0 through 9 keys.

2. Press .
• To survey other slots, scroll by
pressing (Next) or (Previous).
• To survey other channels, enter the chan-
nel number (0 through 9).
Example:
When synchronised When not synchronised
CH0 SLOT:06 SYNC Abbreviation of CH0 SLOT:06

L:12 0000/0100 SYNCHRONOUS L:12
Channel number Frame counter (0000 – 9999)

(0 – 9)
Frame error (0000 – 9999)
Slot number (00 – 23)
Signal strength level (00 – 12)
Level:00 Out of range

Level:01 Catches noise easily or disconnects.
Level:02 – 07 May catch noise.
Level:08 – 10 Good
Level:11 – 12 Better
RECOMMENDATION
• Frame error : 0000

• Signal strength level : more than level 08

8.2.5 Site Survey
3. To record the result;
3-1. Press (Talk).

• Attention!! ALL BOOK DATA
All directory data will be cleared. IS CLEARED!!
To return to the test result display,
press CLR (Clear).
ARE YOU SURE?
TALK=YES,TRANS=NO
3-2. Press (Talk).

• To clear all log data, press LOG NO.?(0-9)
(Flash). FLASH=ALL CLR
Example
3-3. Enter the log number
(0 through 9).
LOG NO.?(0-9) 0
FLASH=ALL CLR
Example
3-4. Press (Talk).
LOG NO.?(0-9) 0
• The result is recorded. STORED
Note • The results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are saved
each time a channel is set. If the same channel is set, the new results
override the previous ones. Therefore, a measurement of 10 channels x
24 slots in total can be made.
• If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many error coun-
ters), change the allocation of the Cell Station and repeat the site sur-
vey to select the best location.
• When a slot is synchronised in step 2 (“SYNC” is displayed), the other
slots in the same channel show “OTHER”.
• Please do not use several PSs for the test simultaneously. This may
cause interference problems, so that the test may not be executed prop-
erly.

8.2.5 Site Survey
Referring to the recorded Radio Signal Test result

2. Press .
RESULT OF SCAN
LOG NO.?(0-9)
3. Enter the desired log number Example

(0 through 9).
RESULT OF SCAN
LOG NO.?(0-9) 0
4. Press (Talk). Example
• The results of channel 0 and slot 0 will

be displayed. CH0 SLOT:00 SYNC
L:12 0000/0100
• To go to another slot, scroll by press-
ing (Next) or (Previous).
To go to another channel, enter the
channel number (0 through 9).

8.2.5 Site Survey
After the Site Survey
After obtaining the proper measurement results, the following pro-
cedures are required before mounting the Cell Station to the wall.
1. Disconnect the AC Adaptor.
2. Switch the Radio Signal Test Switch of the Cell Station from
ON to OFF.
Radio Signal Test Switch

1
1
ON
OFF
0
1 2 3 4 5 6
3. Connect the cable from the Cell Station Interface Unit to the
Cell Station, and pass the cord through the groove on the unit.
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

8.2.6 Wall Mounting
1. Place the template (included) on the wall to mark the two screw
positions.
2. Install the two screws (included) into the wall.
3. Hook the Cell Station on the screw heads.
Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Walls

In step 2, drill two holes and drive the anchor plugs (included)
with a hammer flush to the wall. Then install the screws into the
anchor plugs.

8.3 DECT Portable Station Features

Description The system supports the connection of a DECT Portable Station (PS),
KX-TD7500. It can be used in the system with other telephones.
Conditions • The KX-TD816 system supports up to 16 PSs and the KX-TD1232 sys-
tem supports up to 64 PSs.
• To support the PSs, a Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144 / KX-
TD146) and a Cell Station (KX-TD142) are required.
• Up to four calls can be made at the same time in the range.
• If you do not want your PS to ring, you can select the VIBRATION fea-
ture, which is convenient while in a meeting, etc.
• The following procedures are required to utilise a PS:
1) Assign the radio system ID in program [680] “Cell Station Number
Assignment for Master CS.”
2) Reset the system.
3) Register a PS in program [650] “PS Registration.”
Section 8.4, DECT PS System Programming
[020] PS Flexible CO Button Assignment
[651] PS Termination
[653] PS Extension Name Set
[654] SXDP Assignment
[655] PS Budget Management
[656] PS Charge Verification Assignment
[657] PS Class of Service
[658] PS Extension Group Assignment
[659]–[660] PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night
[661]–[662] PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
[663]–[664] PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
[665] PS Voice Mail Access Codes
[667] PS Extension Connection Assignment
[668] PS Data Line Security
[671] PS Extension Number Set
[673] PS CLIP / COLP Number Assignment
[674]–[675] PS Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night
[676] PS Incoming Call Display
[677] PS Itemized Code Set
[680] Cell Station Number Assignment for Master CS
[681] PS Radio System ID Reference
[682] Radio Information Data Clear

Operation References DECT Portable Station
—User Manual
PS Feature Conditions
Most of the features described in Section 3 are supported by a system
with a DECT Portable Station (PS). However the following features
are not supported.
Executive Busy Override – CO Line
Handsfree Operation
– PS is not provided with a built-in speaker.
Live Call screening (LCS)
Microphone Mute
Off-Hook Monitor
Operator
– As a PS cannot be assigned as an operator, it cannot perform
the operator service features.
Paging – DENY
Paralleled Telephone
Phantom Extension
Redial, Automatic
The list below describes the available feature conditions which are
required with a PS.
TITLE PS CONDITION
Budget Management • Program [655], “PS Budget Management,” is required to assign the
charge limit of a call on a PS basis.
Button, Flexible • Program [020], “PS Flexible Button Assignment,” is used to deter-
mine the use of the PS flexible buttons.
Call Forwarding • “FWD” is displayed as notification while on-hook.

• The FWD/DND button can be activated by selecting it on the display.
Refer to “Selecting the Feature Button on the Display” in the User
Manual.
• The FWD/DND button can be assigned on a flexible button.
However, the LED of the flexible button does not work.
Calling / Connected Line • Program [673], “PS CLIP / COLP Number Assignment,” is required
Identification Presentation to assign the CLIP / COLP number for each PS.
(CLIP / COLP)

TITLE PS CONDITION
Charge Fee Reference • The charge fee reference allowed for a PS is determined by program
[656], “PS Charge Verification Assignment.”
Class of Service (COS) • Program [657], “PS Class of Service,” is required for assigning each
PS a Class of Service (COS).
CO Incoming Call • The display type for a PS when an incoming call is received can be
Information Display selected by program [676], “PS Incoming Call Display.”
CO Line Connection • Program [661]–[662], “PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment

Assignment – Outgoing — Day / Night,” is used to determine the CO line which can be
accessed by a PS.
Conference • The Conference button can be activated by selecting it on the display.

Manual.
• The Conference button can be assigned on a flexible button.
Console • The Console cannot work with a PS.
Data Line Security • Data Line Security for a PS can be set or cancelled by program [668],
“PS Data Line Security.”
Direct In Lines (DIL) • A PS can be assigned as the DIL 1:N destination. In this case, program
[659]–[660], “PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night,” is required.
• Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1:1. When the line is busy, the PS is
out of range or the PS power switch is OFF.
Do Not Disturb (DND) • “DND” is displayed as notification while on-hook.

• The FWD/DND button can be activated by selecting it on the display.
Manual.
• The FWD/DND button can be assigned on a flexible button.
Door Opener • Program [663]–[664], “PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day /

Night,” is required for assigning each PS to receive a doorphone call
Doorphone Call or to open the door.
Extension Connection • Program [667], “PS Extension Connection Assignment,” is used to

Assignment assign whether the PS user can perform all accesses or not.

TITLE PS CONDITION
Extension Group • The PS extension group can be used with the Group Call Pickup.
• The PS extension group can be assigned in program [658] “PS
Extension Group Assignment.”
Flexible Numbering • In addition to current flexible numbering, the feature number for the
Super EXtra Device Port (SXDP) can be assigned. For details, refer to
the program [100], “Flexible Numbering.”
Handset / Headset • To use a headset with your PS, just connect the user-supplied headset
Selection to the PS. Moreover, it is possible to answer calls without lifting up
the PS or pressing any key. In this case, PS Programming, “Automatic
Answer Mode Set,” is required to select the answering mode.
Handsfree Answerback • This feature allows PS users to answer calls, all or intercom, without
lifting up the PS or pressing any key only when the user-supplied
headset is connected to the PS. If the PS user receives a call in this
mode, a handsfree conversation is established immediately after the
user hears beep tone and the caller hears a confirmation tone.
PS Programming, “Automatic Answer Mode Set,” is required to
select the answering mode.
Hunting Group • Program [131], “Hunting Group Assignment,” is required to assign

each PS to a hunting group.
• PSs are hunted in the No Reply or Ring hunting mode. If another
hunting mode is selected in program [106], “Station Hunting Type,”
Station Hunting PSs are skipped.
• In Ring hunting mode, a maximum of four PSs ring simultaneously.
If the connected CS is busy, the PSs are skipped.
Intercept Routing • Program [674]–[675], “PS Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night,”
is required for assigning the Intercept Routing destination for each PS.
• The possible destinations of intercepted calls are as follows.
1) a wired extension
2) an external pager
A PS cannot be a destination.
Least Cost Routing (LCR) • Program [677], “PS Itemized Code Set” is required for assigning the
itemized code for each PS.
LED Indication, CO Line • The LED indicators of the Flexible CO buttons do not work while on-
hook.

TITLE PS CONDITION
Message Waiting • “ ” is displayed as notification.
• The Message button can be activated by selecting it on the display.
Manual.
• The Message button can be assigned on a flexible button. However,
the LED of the flexible button does not work.
Module Expansion • In addition to the current expansion unit, a Cell Station Interface Unit
(KX-TD144 / KX-TD146) can be installed to the system.
One KX-TD144 supports up to two Cell Stations (KX-TD142). And
one KX-TD146 supports up to six Cell Stations. One KX-TD144 /
KX-TD146 can be installed to the KX-TD816, and up to two KX-
TD144s / KX-TD146s can be installed to the KX-TD1232.
Night Service • PS users cannot confirm the current mode on the display.
Paging — All / Group • PS users can page and answer a page, which is being announced over
a nearby wired proprietary telephone or external pager. However, you
cannot be directly paged at the PS.
Pulse to Tone Conversion • The Tone button can be activated by selecting it on the display. Refer
to “Selecting the Feature Button on the Display” in the User Manual.
User Programming • Program [020], “PS Flexible Button Assignment,” can also be
(Manager Programming) changed by any display proprietary telephone user in the system.
Voice Mail Integration • A mailbox number can be assigned for each PS in program [665], “PS
Voice Mail Access Codes.”

Call Directory
Description PS users can store names and/or phone numbers in the directory.
A stored number is dialled out by selecting a name or phone num-
ber in the directory.
There are four types of directory features, including one PS directo-
ry and three PBX directories, as follows.
PS Dialling Directory:
PS users can make an outside call by selecting privately-assigned
names and phone numbers (100 max.).
PBX System Speed Dialling Directory:
PS users can make a call via the system by selecting system-
assigned names and phone numbers (500 max.).
PBX Extension Dialling Directory:
PS users can make a call via the system by selecting system-
assigned extension names.
PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory:
PS users can make a call via the system by selecting privately-
assigned names and phone numbers (10 max.).
Conditions • It is possible to lock the PS Dialling Directory contents.
DECT Portable Station – Customising Your PS............User Manual,
PS Programming – Directory Lock Control
Operation References DECT Portable Station – Operation

—User Manual Using the all Directory

PS Programming
Description PS users can change the default settings of PS Programming
according to their needs.
There are two passwords, a PS Programming password and System
Lock password, to enter into the programming mode. The PS
Programming password is programmed in PS Programming, and
the System Lock password is programmed in the initial PS registra-
tion or in PS Programming. The displayed PS programming menu
differs depending on the password level as follows.
Level 0: A password is not required.
Level 1: A PS Programming password is required.
Level 2: A System Lock password is required.
The combination of the passwords are as follows.
System Lock Disable Disable Enable Enable

PS Programming Disable Enable Disable Enable
System Lock Level Level
— —
Password 0–2 0–2
PS Programming Level Level
— —
Password 0–2 0–1
No Password
Level Level Level Level
or
0–2 0 0–1 0
Incorrect Password

The programming items and their password levels are as follows.
Password level Programming Item

0 Keypad Backlight Mode Set
0 Key Tone Set
0 Ringer Pattern Selection
0 Vibration and Ring Type Selection
0 Display Language Selection
1 Directory Lock Control
0 Quick Answering Mode Set
0 Automatic Answering Mode Set
0 Automatic Answer Delay Selection
2 DECT System Selection
0 Standby Display Selection*
0 Date / Time Display Selection*
1 Memory Clear
2 PS Registration Cancellation
0 Guidance Menu Set
1 PS Programming Password Set
2 DECT System Lock Password Set
*: Only displayed when registered to a Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System and “ ”
is displayed.
Conditions • If only one DECT system is connected, the “DECT System Selection”
display will not appear.
• If your PS is not registered, the “DECT System Selection” and “PS
Registration Cancellation” displays will not appear.
DECT Portable Station – Customising Your PS............User Manual,
PS Programming
Operation References None

Super EXtra Device Port (SXDP)

Description The Super EXtra Device Port (SXDP) allows a DECT portable sta-
tion (PS) to be used in parallel with a proprietary wired (PT) or sin-
gle line telephone (SLT). When in the SXDP mode, your PS can
make or receive calls as usual, but can also receive calls reaching
the paired telephone.
Conditions • This feature can only be set from a PS. The wired telephone can enable
or disable this feature in program [654] “SXDP Assignment” (default:
enable).
• When the paralleled wired telephone receives a call, both the wired tele-
phone and PS will ring. If either of the paralleled telephones is busy, it
is not possible to make a call from the other telephone.
• Types of incoming calls which are received while in SXDP mode are:
Outside calls – DIL 1:1; Intercept Routing; DDI; MSN; IRNA
Other type of calls will not be sent to the PS.
• When you receive a call reaching the paired telephone by the PS or
when making a call from a PS, the display message of the wired tele-
phone is shown on the calling or called party’s display (e.g., extension
number and name).
• Paralleled telephones can call each other or transfer a call by dialling
their own extension number.
• If a PS receives a call by its own extension number, it works as usual.

• The following list shows the conditions when using a certain feature
while in SXDP mode.
FEATURE CONDITION
Call Log, Outgoing • The memory of Call Log is used together. The call logged by
the wired telephone can be used by the PS and vice versa.
Budget Management • The call charge of the PS is included with the wired tele-
phone. If the pre-assigned limit is reached, both telephones
cannot make further calls without authorisation.
Call Forwarding • Calls to the wired telephone due to the setting of the wired
telephone.
• The Call Forwarding – All feature for the wired telephone
can be set from a PS so that all incoming calls to the wired
telephone will be forwarded to the desired destination.
Class of Service (COS) • The COS level of the wired telephone becomes available.
Do Not Disturb (DND) • Calls to the wired telephone due to the setting of the wired
telephone.
Electronic Station Lockout • The PS can make a call even if the wired telephone is locked.
Pickup Dialling • The memory of the Pickup Dialling exists individually.
Redial, Saved Number • The memory of the Saved Number Redial of the wired tele-
phone cannot be used by the PS.
Station Speed Dialling • The memory of the Station Speed Dialling (PS Dialling
(PS Dialling Directory) Directory) exists individually.
[100] Flexible Numbering, Super extra device port (SXDP)
[654] SXDP Assignment
Operation References DECT Portable Station – Operation

—User Manual Using Your PS in Parallel with the Wired Telephone
(Super EXtra Device Port [SXDP])

8.4 DECT PS System Programming
DECT PS System Programming Conditions
Most of the system programming described in Section 4 is
supported by a system with a DECT portable station (PS).
In addition, the programs which are described in the following
pages are required to use the PS.
Use your display proprietary wired telephone for

programming. Programming with a PS is only required for
program [650], “PS Registration” and [681], “PS Radio System
ID Reference.”
Note For location identification of the Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-TD144 /
KX-TD146), refer to program [109], “Expansion Card/Unit Type,” in
Section 4. Then select “E” for the Cell Station Interface Unit (KX-
TD144 / KX-TD146) with the KX-TD816, or “E1” or “E2” with the KX-
TD1232. This type is the same for an 8-Station Line Unit (KX-TD170).

8.4 DECT PS System Programming 020
PS Flexible CO Button Assignment
Description Used to determine how the flexible CO buttons are used on PSs.
Selection • PS registration number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16

• Flexible CO button number: 1 through 3
• Button Code (plus parameter, if required)

0 (Single-CO) TD816: 01 through 16 (CO line number)
TD1232: 01 through 54 (CO line number)
1 (DSS) 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
2 (One-Touch Dialling) 24 digits max. (Telephone number)
3 (Message Waiting) None
4 (FWD/DND) None
5 (Save) None
6 (Account) None
7 (Conference) None
80 (Log-In/Log-Out) 2 through 4 digits (Hunting group extension number)
82 (Voice Mail Transfer) 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
83 (Two-Way Record)† 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
84 (Two-Way Transfer)† 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
8# (One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold) 24 digits max. (Telephone number)
9 (Terminate) None
(Loop-CO) None
# (Group-CO) 1 through 8 (CO line group number)
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital

Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that
supports digital proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
Default All PSs – CO button 1 = Loop-CO

CO buttons 2 and 3 = Not stored

Display: PS Flexible Key
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

020 8.4 DECT PS System Programming
PS Flexible CO Button Assignment (contd.)
3. Enter the PS registration number.

You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration
Display: PT-PGM Mode
4. Press the CO button to be changed.

The display shows the button pre-assignment.
Display example: CO-01
5. Enter the button code (plus parameter, if required).

To change the parameter, press CLEAR and enter the new parameter.
6. Press STORE.
7. • To program another CO button for the same PS, repeat

steps 4 through 6.
• To program another PS, press SELECT and repeat steps 3
through 6.
8. Press END.
Cancelling 1. Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above.
2. Enter 2.
3. Press STORE.
4. Press END.

Button, Flexible

PS Registration
Description Assigns a registration number and an extension number to each PS.

Steps 1 through 5 and 22 through 24 must be operated with your
display PT, and steps 6 through 21 with the PS whose registration
number is to be set.
Selection (With a display PT)

• PS registration number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16
• PS extension number: 2 through 4 digits
(With a PS)
• DECT system number: 1 through 4
• PS password: 4 digits
• System lock password: 1 through 4 digits
Default All PSs – Not stored
Programming (With a display PT)

1. Enter 650.
Display: PS Registration
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:Not Stored
4. Enter the PS extension number.

Display example: PS01:Ext 281
5. Press STORE.
• Display (if enabled): Executing
Continue programming from step 6 with a PS within five minutes.
• Display (if disabled): Rejected

The Cell Station (CS) may not be connected or not working. After
connecting the CS or resetting the PBX, wait for at least one minute
and try again from the beginning.
(With a PS)
6. Slide the Power switch ON.
7. Press the Function button.
Display: KEY
8. Press the Book button twice.

Display: PROGRAMMING
9. Press the Auto/OK button.

PS Registration (contd.)
10. Press the Book button repeatedly until the display below
appears.
Display: REGISTRATION

Display example: DECT-SYS-NO.
1234
12. Enter the DECT system number.

Display example: DECT-SYS-NO.
1

Display example: ENTER PASSWORD
=
14. Enter the PS password.

Display example: ENTER PASSWORD
=****
You will hear a confirmation tone.

Display: DECT-SYS LOCK
=DISABLE
16. Press the Book button to select “DISABLE” or “ENABLE”

for the System Lock.
Display: DECT-SYS LOCK
=DISABLE

Display example(if disabled): UNLOCKED
Display example(if enabled): ENTER PASSWORD
=
18. If you select “ENABLE” in step 16, enter a System Lock

password.
Display: ENTER PASSWORD
=****

Display: REENTER PASSWORD
=
20. Enter the System Lock password again.

Display: REENTER PASSWORD
=****

Display: LOCKED

PS Registration (contd.)
(With a display PT)

22. To program another PS, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT
and the desired PS registration number.
24. Press END.
Conditions • It is possible to search the display by pressing # (Next) or (Previous)

in steps 8 and 10.
• You can assign an extension number to each PS also in program, [671]
“PS Extension Number Set.”
• The PS password can be assigned in program [672], “PS Password Set.”
• One PS must have only one registration number. It is not possible to
assign the different registration number for one PS.
• If the PS extension number or the PS password is changed after
registering, the PS cannot be used until it is registered again in this
program.
• Do not press END after step 15, or it may not registered correctly.
• To re-assign the PS, which is set the System Lock, to the other DECT
system, it is required to cancel the System Lock first in PS Programming,
“DECT System Lock Password Set.”
• Register the PS from a manager DPT connected only to the master
cabinet.


PS Termination
Description Deletes a stored PS so that it cannot be used in the system.


Display: PS Termination
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:EXT 281
4. Press STORE.
Display: Executing
The system searches for the PS registration number while “Executing”

is blinking, and deletes the registration after it is found.
Display example: Deleted
5. To delete another PS, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT

7. Press END.
Even if “Rejected” is displayed in step 4 above, you can delete

the PS. In this case, Registration Clear on the PS (PS
Programming) is required.
Display: Rejected (The PS is not registered correctly.)
The display changes after few seconds as follows.
Display: Delete?
5. If you do not want to delete the PS, go to step 7.

PS Termination (contd.)
6. Press STORE.
7. To delete another PS, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT

9. Press END.
Conditions • Deleting the same PS registration number from the PS by PS

Programming is only necessary when it is deleted after “Rejected” is
displayed in this program.
• If a PS registration is terminated in this program, all the PS assignments
and its extension assignments will return to the default settings. If you
only want to change the PS, retaining all the assignments, re-enter the
replacing PS on the old PS registration number in program [650] “PS
Registration.” In this case, you should reset the system so that the
assignment is activated.
• Register the PS from a manager DPT connected only to the master
cabinet.


PS Extension Name Set
Description Assigns names to the PS extension numbers programmed in

program [671], “PS Extension Number Set.”


Display: PS EXT Name Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

4. Enter the name.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


SXDP Assignment
Description Disables or enables the Super EXtra Device Port (SXDP) feature
for wired extensions.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16 (-1 / -2),

KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2),
(-1= first part, -2= second part, =all jacks)
Default All jacks – Enable

Display: SXDP Assign
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter the jack number.

number.
Display example: #01-1:Enable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for the jack 01.
assignment is activated.

Super EXtra Device Port (SXDP)

PS Budget Management
Description Assigns the charge limit for a call on a PS basis.
Selection • PS registration number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16,

( =all PS registration numbers)
• Charge limit (Charge): 0 through 99999999
Default All PSs – 0 £

Display: PS Charge Limit
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01: 0 £
4. Enter a charge limit.

To delete the charge limit, press CLEAR.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • If the charge limit is set “0,” no restriction is applied.

• To assign all PSs to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has
the lowest PS registration number.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by program
[125] “Assignment of Denomination.”

Budget Management

PS Charge Verification Assignment
Description Assigns the PS which is allowed to refer or clear the charge

information on the extension, CO line, account code, and total.

Default All PSs – Enable

Display: PS Charge Refer
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:Enable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

7. Press END.
Conditions • To assign all PSs to one selection, press the key in step 3. In this


PS Class of Service
Description Programs each PS a Class of Service (COS). The COS determines

the call handling abilities for each PS. Primary and secondary COS
numbers can be assigned for each PS.

Default All PSs – Primary / Secondary – COS 1

Display: PS COS Assign
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:COS1, COS1
4. Enter a primary COS number.

5. Press .
6. Enter a secondary COS number.
7. Press STORE.
10. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eight Classes of Service. Every PS must be

assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to COS Programming in
programs [5XX] and [991].
• To assign all PSs to one COS, press the key in step 3. In this case,
the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the
lowest PS registration number.


PS Extension Group Assignment
Description Assigns each PS to an extension group. Extension groups are used

for Group Call Pickup and Paging – Group

• Extension group number: 01 through 16
Default All PSs – Extension group 01 – Enabl

Display: PS EXT Group
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:EXG01:Enabl
4. Enter an extension group number.

You can also keep pressing or until the desired extension
group number is displayed.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new
extension group number.

6. Press STORE.
9. Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 16 extension groups. Each PS can only

belong to one group.

Call Pickup, Group Extension Group
Paging – Group

659-660 8.4 DECT PS System Programming
PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night
Description A DIL 1:N line can be assigned to call more than one extension.
All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to
the specified PSs. This program assigns the PSs for each CO line
in both the day and night modes.

• CO line number : KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
( =all CO lines)
Default All PSs – all CO lines – Disable – Day / Night
Display example: PS DIL 1:N Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:CO01:Disab


displayed.
6. Press STORE.

9. Press END.

8.4 DECT PS System Programming 659-660
PS DIL 1:N Extension — Day / Night (contd.)
Conditions • To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 4. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for ]CO line 01.
• When you change the PS registration number by pressing NEXT or
PREV, the CO line number will not changed.
<Example> PS01:CO06.....Press NEXT.....PS02:CO06

Night Service

PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Description Determines which CO lines can be accessed by a PS in both the day

and night modes. PS users can make outgoing outside calls using
the assigned CO lines.

• CO line number : KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
( =all CO lines)
Default All PSs – all CO lines – Enable – Day / Night
Display example: PS CO Out Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:CO01:Enabl


displayed.
6. Press STORE.

9. Press END.

8.4 DECT PS System Programming 661-662
PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night (contd.)
Conditions • To assign all PSs or all CO lines to one selection, press the key in
step 3 or 4. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for
CO line 01 or the PS which has the lowest PS registration number.
• To not assign a CO line for a PS, press CLEAR in step 4.
• When you change the PS registration number by pressing NEXT or
PREV, the CO line number will not changed.
<Example> PS01:CO06.....Press NEXT.....PS02:CO06

Night Service

PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Description These programs assign which PSs will ring when a doorphone call
is received during the day and night modes. Programmed PSs are
also allowed to open the door.

• Doorphone number: KX-TD816 – 1 or 2, Disable, two entries (max.)
KX-TD1232 – 1 through 4, Disable, four
entries (max.)
Default All PSs – Disable (No doorphones) – Day / Night
Display example: PS DPH in Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:1234
4. Enter the doorphone number.

To not assign a doorphone, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new
doorphone number.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • For the KX-TD1232, Doorphone 1 and 2 are installed in the Master
System and 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.
• You can enter up to two (KX-TD816) or up to four (KX-TD1232)
doorphone numbers for each extension.

Door Opener Night Service
Doorphone Call

PS Voice Mail Access Codes
Description Assigns a mailbox number for each PS only if program [990],

“System Additional Information, Area 02 - Bit 8,” is set to “free.”

• Mailbox number: 16 digits (max.)

Display: PS VM ID Code
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

4. Enter the mailbox number.

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection) for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice
Mail or Automated Attendant ports.
• Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits, consisting of 0
through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the
display, press or .


PS Extension Connection Assignment
Description Assigns whether the PS can perform all accesses or not.

Default All PSs – Connect

Display: PS EXT Connect
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:Connect

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.


PS Data Line Security
Description Sets or cancels the Data Line Security mode on a PS basis.

• On / Off
Default All PSs – Off

Display: PS Data Mode
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01:Off

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.

Data Line Security

PS Extension Number Set
Description Assigns an extension number to each PS.

• PS extension number: 2 through 4 digits

Display: PS EXT NO. Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

4. Enter the PS extension number.

Display example: PS01:EXT 281
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • Each PS extension number can be two to four digits, consisting of 0

• A PS extension number can also be assigned in program [650], “PS
Registration.”

PS Extension Number Set (contd.)
• A PS extension number is invalid if the first or second digits do not

match with the setting in program [100], “Flexible Numbering, (01) –
(16) 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is
assigned as the leading digit, some PS extension numbers have two or
three digits. If two digits are assigned, they have three digits and some
may have four digits.
• Double entries or incompatible entries are invalid including the
assignment in programs [003] “Extension Number Set,” [012] “ISDN
Extension Number Set,” [017] “TD286 Extension Number Set,” [127]
“Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment,” [130] “Phantom
Extension Number” or [813] “Floating Number Assignment.” Valid
entry examples are: 10 and 11; 10 and 110. Invalid entry examples are:
10 and 106; 210 and 21.
• Program [653], “PS Extension Name Set,” is used to name the PSs.
• It is possible to modify the extension number in this program. If the PS
extension number was modified, re-register the PS to the system in
program [650], “PS Registration,” in order to use the extension number.


PS Password Set
Description Assigns a registration password, which is used for registration

(program [650], “PS Registration”), to each PS.

• PS password: 4 digits
Default All PSs – 1234

Display: PS Password Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

4. Enter the PS password.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • If you modify the PS password, re-register the PS to the system in order
to use the password.

PS CLIP / COLP Number Assignment
Description Assigns a CLIP/COLP number for each PS.

Default All PSs – Not Stored

Display: PS CLIP/COLP
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→


5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.

case, the display shows the contents programmed for PS 01.

Calling / Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP / COLP)

PS Extension Intercept Routing — Day / Night
Description Sets the Intercept Routing destination for each PS in both day and
night modes.

• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits /
Disable (no Intercept Routing)
Default All PSs – Disable — Day / Night
Display example: PS Intercept Day
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01: Disable

5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
Conditions • You can set the extension numbers in programs [650] “PS
Registration,” [671] “PS Extension Number Set,” [003] “Extension
“Phantom Extension Number” and also floating numbers of the external
ringer, hunting groups, and pagers in program [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.”
case, the display shows the contents programmed for PS 01.
• When “Disable” is selected, Intercept Routing is provided according to
the assignment in program [409-410].

Intercept Routing

PS Incoming Call Display
Description Selects the display type for each PS when an incoming call is
received. You can select the display type from one of the
following:
Caller: The incoming caller’s telephone number and name are
displayed.
CO Line: The CO line number and name assigned in the [421]
program are displayed.
DDI: The called party’s DDI number and extension name is displayed.

• Display Type: Caller / CO Line / DDI
Default All PSs – Caller

Display: PS Incoming Disp
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01: Caller

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
8. Press END.
• If the receiving call is in the 1:N status, the display only shows “CO
Line.”


PS Itemized Code Set
Description Registers an itemized code applied to each PS.


Default All PSs – Not Stored

Display: PS Itemized Code
2. Press NEXT.
Display: PS NO?→

Display example: PS01: Not Stored

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.



Cell Station Number Assignment for Master CS
Description Assigns the cell station number which is used for the master CS.
Selection • Cell Station number:

KX-TD816 – RIF1 / RIF2 / RIF3 / RIF4 / RIF5 / RIF6
KX-TD1232 – E1-RIF1 / E1-RIF2 / E1-RIF3 / E1-RIF4 /
E1-RIF5 / E1-RIF6 / E2-RIF1 / E2-RIF2 /
E2-RIF3 / E2-RIF4 / E2-RIF5 / E2-RIF6
(E1: Cell Station Interface Unit1 / E2: Cell Station Interface
Unit2 / RIF1: Cell Station1 / RIF2: Cell Station2 / RIF3: Cell
Station3 / RIF4: Cell Station4 / RIF5: Cell Station5 / RIF6: Cell
Station6)
Default Not stored

Display: Master CS Assign
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: M-CS:Not Stored

displayed.
Display example: M-CS:E1-RIF1
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • For changing the assignment of the Master CS, the assigned system
programming data or radio information data should be cleared in
program [862] “Radio Information Data Clear.” In this case, the re-
registration of PSs is essential.
• CSs do not work without this assignment.
• The Master CS must support GAP. In case a CS doesn’t support GAP,
the operation under this CS is not guaranteed (except with a proprietary
telephone).

PS Radio System ID Reference
Description Shows a radio system ID which is required for each PS to recognize

its registered PBX.
Selection Not applicable.

Display: Radio Sys-ID Set
2. Press NEXT.
Before a Radio System ID is assigned;
Display: Not Stored
After a Radio System ID is assigned;
Display: 00123456
3. Press END.
Conditions • The radio system ID must be assigned to support the DECT system
(KX-TD144 or KX-TD146 / KX-TD142). Otherwise, the wired
extension port of the KX-TD144 can be used.
• If the radio system ID is not assigned properly, the registered PS may
not work properly.

Radio Information Data Clear
Description Clears the assigned radio information data.
Selection Not applicable.

Display: Radio DATA Clear
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Clear OK?
3. Press STORE.
4. Press END.
Conditions • The data, regarding following system programmings, is cleared;


8-72
8.5 Template for the Cell Station

Please copy this page and use as a template for the Cell Station.
DECT Portable Station Section
168mm
Install a screw here. Install a screw here.
1. Place this template on the wall.

2. Install the screws.
(If you mount the unit on a concrete or mortar wall, drive the
anchor plugs flush to wall with a hammer beforehand.)
3. Hook the Cell Station (KX-TD142) on the screw heads.
For more details, see page 8-29.
Panasonic Business Systems U.K.
Panasonic House, Willoughby Road, Bracknell,
Berkshire RG12 8FP
Printed in the United Kingdom PSQX1047QA KS0699MT01109EB

KX-TD816 / KX-TD1232
Additional Information
for the KX-TD184 E
If you purchase the E&M (TIE) Line Unit (KX-TD184 E),
please read this leaflet.
In this manual, the last letter of each model number is omitted. The model number of
your unit is found on the label affixed to the unit.
MODEL NO. – – – – –
(label)
Introduction
E&M (TIE) Line Unit (KX-TD184)
Four E&M (TIE) lines can be connected.
This unit can be installed per system.
D1232
D816
Panasonic
Panasonic
4 E&M lines can be connected.
Specifications
(1) E&M (TIE) Line Types................................. Type 5 only
(2) Transmission ................................................. 2-wire or 4-wire voice path (Programmable)
(Note) Maximum cabling distance of the E&M line cord (twisted cable):
22 AWG: Under 9.6 km
(3) Transmission levels
2-wire voice path........................................... -3 db (transmit/receive)
4-wire voice path........................................... -3 db normal (transmit/receive)
Programmable (-6 db, -3 db, 0 db, +3 db)
(4) Signalling DTMF or Pulse
(5) E lead Battery -48 VDC, 20 mA to ground (max.)
Sensitivity 5 mA or 2000 Ω to ground (max.)
(min.)
(6) M lead Available current : 30mA (max.)
Available voltage: ±100V (max.)
Note:
After assigning a KX-TD184 in the system programming [109], turn the Power Switch off and on again.
Otherwise the previous setting will be maintained.
2
Contents
Features..................................................................................................4
Installation ...........................................................................................13
System Programming .........................................................................20
[100] Flexible Numbering....................................................................20
[109] Expansion Unit Type ..................................................................21
[154] PBX Code...................................................................................23
[155] E&M Signal Assignment............................................................24
[220] TIE First / Inter Digit Time ........................................................25
[340] TIE Line Routing Table..............................................................26
[341] TIE Modify Removed / Added Digit .........................................28
[430] TIE Table Number Assignment..................................................29
[431] TIE Incoming Assignment .........................................................30
[432] TIE Outgoing Assignment..........................................................31
[433] TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit ....................................32
[434] TIE Added Number ....................................................................33
[435] TIE Wink Time Out Assignment................................................34
[452] CO-to-TIE Transfer ....................................................................35
[453] TIE-to-CO Transfer ....................................................................36
[454] TIE-to-TIE Transfer ...................................................................37
[455] TIE Security Type ......................................................................38
[456] Line Hunting Sequence ..............................................................39
[457] Voice Path Type..........................................................................40
[458] Voice Level (Transmit)...............................................................41
[459] Voice Level (Receive) ................................................................42
[460] TIE Receive Dial ........................................................................43
[811] TIE User Codes ..........................................................................44
[990] System Additional Information, Area 08 (Bit 03)......................45
Programming Tables...........................................................................46
3
Features
E&M (TIE) Line Service

Description An E&M (TIE) line is a privately leased communication line
between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations.
The TIE lines can be used to call through your system to reach
another switching system (PBX or CO). By utilizing TIE lines,
your system can support not only communications with the public
network but with other company locations in the private network
where your system is included.
System Explanation
1. Making a TIE Call
One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE call.
1.1 Extension Number method
Dial the [Extension Number] only to make a TIE call.
<Example>
KX-TD816/1232 Other PBX
TIE Line
E&M E&M
2011
Ext. 1011 Ext. 2011
Explanation
To use this method, it is necessary to change the first one or two
digits of extension numbers of either PBX to avoid having the
same extension number.
1. Extension 1011 dials extension number “2011”.
2. Extension 1011 is connected to extension “2011” of the other
PBX.
4
Features
1.2 PBX Code method
Dial the [TIE Line Access Code] [PBX Code] [Extension
Number] to make a TIE call.
<Example>
TIE Line
E&M E&M
7-952-1011
PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952
Ext. 1011 Ext. 1011
Explanation
To use this method, it is necessary to have the code for each PBX
in order to identify the location of an extension.
1. Extension 1011 dials TIE line access code “7”, PBX code
“952” and extension number “1011”.
2. Extension 1011 is connected to extension 1011 of the other
PBX which has PBX code “952”.
5
Features
2. TIE Line and CO Line Connection
To connect the TIE line with a CO line, the following patterns are
available.
2.1 CO-to-TIE Transfer
The system transfers incoming outside calls to the other PBX
through the TIE line.
■ Call Forwarding / Call Transfer to the TIE line

<Example>
CO Line TIE Line

CO E&M E&M
Forwarded / Transferred
to 952-1011
phone no.
Outside party Ext. 1011 Ext. 1011

TIE Line Network
Explanation
The outside caller dials the phone number, and the call is
forwarded or transferred to extension 1011 of the other PBX which
has PBX code “952”.
Note: Setting the destination of Call Forwarding to the TIE line is
the same as Call Forwarding to a CO Line.
Transferring a call to the TIE line is the same as a Call
Transfer to a CO Line.
6
Features
2.2 TIE-to-CO Transfer

The system transfers TIE calls to a CO line of the other PBX
through the TIE line. The following patterns are available.
■ Outside call through the other PBX

<Example>
TIE Line CO Line

E&M E&M CO
7-952 9-(TIE User Code)
-phone no.
Ext. 1011 TIE Line Network Outside party
Explanation
Extension 1011 dials as follows:
1. TIE line access code “7”, PBX code “952” and CO line access
code “9”. A special dial tone is heard.
2. The TIE user code (if required) and desired phone number.
Extension 1011 is connected to the desired outside party through
the other PBX which has PBX code “952”.
Note: The TIE user code (assigned in program [811]) is required
when the CO line security mode is selected in program
[455].
■ Call Forwarding / Call Transfer to CO line

<Example>
TIE Line CO Line

E&M E&M CO
7-952-1011 Forwarded / Transferred
to CO line
Ext. 1011 Ext. 1011 Outside party

TIE Line Network
7
Features
Explanation
Extension 1011 dials as follows:
1. TIE line access code “7”, PBX code “952” and extension
number “1011”.
2. The call is forwarded or transferred by extension 1011 of the
other PBX, which has PBX code “952”, to the designated CO
line.
3. TIE Line Routing Table

The TIE Line Routing Table is referenced by the system to identify
the CO line route, when an extension user makes a TIE call.
It is necessary to make unified routing tables with each PBX in
your TIE line network.
A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the first
three digits (except the TIE line access code) of the dialled number.
There are two system programs for the tables:
[340] TIE Line Routing Table: used to assign the access number
(PBX code or extension number) and CO line group hunt sequence.
[341] TIE Modify Removed / Added Digit: used to assign
removed and added digits of the dialled digits of the TIE call.
Programming Example
<Example>
Your system is PBX-1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line
network. To identify the CO line route as illustrated below, you
should make the following routing table.
PBX-4 TIE Line Network

PBX-2
Ext. 2xx PBX Code 953

Ext. xxxx
c)2xx
→
TRG 6 →
TRG 7
b) 953-xxxx
If you dial:
a) 7-952-xxxx TRG 5 →
b) 7-953-xxxx
Ext. 1xxx a) 952-xxxx Ext. xxxx
c) 2xx PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952
(7: TIE line access code)
PBX-1 PBX-3
8
Features
TIE Line Routing Table of PBX-1
Location PBX Code Removed Added CO Line Group Hunt Sequence
No. / Ext. No. Digit Digit 01 02 03 04 05
01 952 0 5 6
02 953 0 6 5
03 2xx 0 7
Explanation
Location 01: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 952]:
The 1st route — CO line group (TRG) 5
The 2nd route — CO line group (TRG) 6
Location 02: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 953]:
The 2nd route — CO line group (TRG) 5
Location 03: The hunt sequence by dialling [Ext.no. 2xx]:
If the received number does not match the PBX Code, the system
checks the number in the routing table. If it is found, the system
automatically sends the number to the corresponding PBX.
For example, if PBX-1 receives the number “952-xxxx” from
PBX-4, PBX-1 automatically sends the number through CO line
group 5.
4. TIE Call Dialling Method

The following patterns are TIE call dialling methods. The dial
number modification depends on the dialling method.
Your telephone Dialling Method Dial Modification

APT / DPT Extension no. Enable
CO button + (PBX code) + Extension no. Disable
TIE line access code + (PBX code) + Extension no. Enable
CO button + PBX code (+ TIE user code) + Phone no. Disable
TIE line access code + PBX code (+ TIE user code) + Enable
Phone no.
Select CO line group + (PBX code) + Extension no. Disable
Select CO line group + PBX code (+ TIE user code) + Disable
Phone no.
9
Features
Your telephone Dialling Method Dial Modification
SLT Extension no. Enable
TIE line access code + (PBX code) + Extension no. Enable
TIE line access code + PBX code (+ Account code) + Enable
Phone no.
Select CO line group + (PBX code) + Extension no. Disable
Select CO line group + PBX code (+ Account code) + Disable
Phone no.
In addition to the methods above, the system can use the TIE line
for sending CO line access code “9” through the other PBX. When
you dial the CO line access code and the CO line is busy, the
system automatically sends CO line access code “9” to a TIE line
so that you can access the CO line through the other PBX. This is
enabled by program [990] “System Additional Information, Area
08 (Bit 03)”.
5. TIE Line Routing Flow Chart

Making a TIE Call from an Extension
A TIE call is made as follows.

PBX Code Method – 7-abc-xxxx
Extension No. Method – dexx
Is the dialled number identified with the stored No Not treated as a TIE
numbers? (Checks in program [100]) call.
Yes:
TIE line access code – 7
Other PBX extension no – de
Are the accessed digits (abc or de) found in a TIE No

Reorder tone
Line Routing Table? (Checks in program [340])
Yes
NG
Modifies the dialled number if a removed or added
Reorder tone
number is assigned. (Checks in program [341])
Your extension no. TIE or CO call no.
Calls an extension. Routes to the TIE or CO line.
10
Features
Receiving a Call through a TIE Line
A call is received through a TIE line as follows.

xxxx (Extension No.)
abc-xxxx (PBX Code + Extension NO.)
dexx (Another PBX No.)
Is the system allowed to receive TIE dial numbers? No

DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N
(Checks in program [460])
Yes
Modifies the dialed number if a removed or added Analyses the number Incorrect
number is assigned. (Checks in programs [430–435]) of incoming call
Correct
abcxxxx dexx xxxx Line Access
Code
Checks the PBX code “abc”. Found in a TIE Line Routing Extension no. Seize the Co
(Checks in program [154]) Table. (Checks in program [340]) Line
xxxx
Ext. no. Line access
code Modifies the dialed number if a
removed or added number is
Calls an Checks the code assigned. (Checks in program [341])
extension. in program [100].
Yes Is there a hunt sequence assignment?

(Checks in program [340])
No
Is the TIE-to-CO Transfer Does the The corresponding extension does not
No
(Checks in program [453]) or corresponding exist. (Checks in program [220])
TIE-to-TIE Transfer (Checks in extension exist?
program [454]) enabled?
Yes
Enable
Did you employ the CO line security Is the corresponding 1.When the IRNA is set, the call is
mode? (Checks in program [455]) extension idle? routed to IRNA.
2.When the IRNA is not set, a busy
No Yes Yes No tone or reorder tone is heard.
Is a TIE user code received?
(Programs in program [811]) No
• Call Waiting
Yes • 1.When the IRNA is set, the call is
routed to IRNA.
Routes to a CO or TIE line. Calls an extension. (A 2.When the IRNA is not set, a busy
(ARS / Local / TRG routing) ringback tone is sent.) tone or reorder tone is heard.
11
Features
Conditions • It is possible to program the E&M signal, voice path type and voice
level (transmit / receive) of the E&M Line Unit by system
programming. For details about the E&M signal, voice path type and
voice level, refer to “Installation” in this manual.
• The FLASH button does not function as the disconnection key.
• The ability to perform Call Forwarding/Call Transfer to TIE line is
determined on a Class of Service basis. See programs [503] and [504].
[100] Flexible Numbering
[109] Expansion Unit Type
[154] PBX Code
[155] E&M Signal Assignment
[220] TIE First / Inter Digit Time
[340] TIE Line Routing Table
[341] TIE Modify Removed / Added Digit
[430] TIE Table Number Assignment
[431] TIE Incoming Assignment
[432] TIE Outgoing Assignment
[433] TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit
[434] TIE Added Number
[435] TIE Wink Time Out Assignment
[452] CO-to-TIE Transfer
[453] TIE-to-CO Transfer
[454] TIE-to-TIE Transfer
[455] TIE Security Type
[456] Line Hunt Sequence
[457] Voice Path Type
[458] Voice Level (Transmit)
[459] Voice Level (Receive)
[460] TIE Receive Dial
[811] TIE User Codes
[990] System Additional Information, Area 08 (Bit 03)
12
Installation
Installation Installing one unit to the system allows four E&M (TIE) lines to be
connected to CO lines 05 through 08 for the KX-TD816, or CO
lines 09 through 12 or 21 through 24 for the KX-TD1232. This
unit can be installed to any of the expansion areas provided on the
front of the system.
For unit installation, refer to the procedure “Section 2.4.6 Installing
Expansion Unit (KX-TD170/KX-TD180/KX-TD280/KX-TD286)”
in the main Installation Manual. Steps 1 through 5 and 7 through
10 of the installation procedure are the same as for other expansion
units. Step 6 is different for each unit. Please follow the
instructions below for the installation of this unit.
Notes • System Programming [109] Expansion Unit Type is required for
expansion unit location identification.
■ If a KX-TD184 is to be installed:
6-1. The 50-pin connector (Jack) on the Expansion Unit has two
hook-pins. Take out the screw, and remove the hook-pin.
Screw
4
E
&
M
D
IG
IT
A
L
S
U
P
E
R
H
Y
B
R
ID
S
Y
S
T
E
M
50-pin
Connector
Hook-pins
13
Installation
Notes • When connecting a connector of the type shown below, unscrew the
lower hook-pin too. Then drive both accessory screws.
6-2. Insert the Amphenol connector to the jack.
4
Connector type
E
&
M
D
IG
50-pin (Amphenol 57JE
IT
series or the equivalent)

A
L
S
U
P
E
R
H
Y
B
R
ID
S
Y
S
T
E
M
25 1
50 26
P
an
as
on
ic
To terminal Board from the

E&M (TIE) Line.
14
6-3. To attach the Amphenol 57JE type (Plug) to the connector,
drive the accessory screw at the upper part.
Fasten the accessory wire tie around the lower hook-pin and
the Amphenol 57JE type, as shown.
Notes • Be sure to secure the inside screw, or the unit may not work properly.
• For jack connection, please see “Cable Pin Number to Be Connected”
on the next page.
15
Installation
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be Connected (E&M Line)
Connect Pin Cable Colour E&M Line
1 WHITE / BLUE T
26 BLUE / WHITE R
2 WHITE / ORANGE T1
27 ORANGE / WHITE R1
3 WHITE / GREEN NO.1 E Lead
28 GREEN / WHITE SG Lead
4 WHITE / BROWN SB Lead
29 BROWN / WHITE M1 Lead
5 WHITE / GRAY SG0
30 GRAY / WHITE M Lead only for Type 5
6 RED / BLUE T
31 BLUE / RED R
7 RED / ORANGE T1
32 ORANGE / RED R1
8 RED / GREEN E Lead
NO. 2
33 GREEN / RED SG Lead
9 RED / BROWN SB Lead
34 BROWN / RED M1 Lead
10 RED / GRAY SG0
35 GRAY / RED M Lead only for Type 5
11 BLACK / BLUE T
36 BLUE / BLACK R
12 BLACK / ORANGE T1
37 ORANGE / BLACK R1
13 BLACK / GREEN NO. 3 E Lead
38 GREEN / BLACK SG Lead
14 BLACK / BROWN SB Lead
39 BROWN / BLACK M1 Lead
15 BLACK / GREY SG0
40 GRAY / BLACK M Lead only for Type 5
16 YELLOW / BLUE T
41 BLUE / YELLOW R
17 YELLOW / ORANGE T1
42 ORANGE / YELLOW R1
18 YELLOW / GREEN E Lead
NO. 4
43 GREEN / YELLOW SG Lead
19 YELLOW / BROWN SB Lead
44 BROWN / YELLOW M1 Lead
20 YELLOW / GRAY SG0
45 GRAY / YELLOW M Lead only for Type 5
Notes • 21-25, 46-50: cannot be connected.
16
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be Connected (E&M Line)
• E&M Line Wiring
50-pin
Connector Block Terminal
26 1 1
1 2 2
27 3 3
2 4 4
28 5 5
E&M Line 1
3 6 6
29 7 7
4 8 8
30 9 9
5
31 11 11
6 12 12
Bridging Clips
■ Connecting to another KX-TD816/KX-TD1232 system (KX-TD184)

(1) 2-wire voice path
KX-TD184 Another KX-TD184
T T
R R
E E
SG SG
M1 M1
SB SB
T T
R R
T1 T1
R1 R1
E E
SG SG
M1 M1
SB SB
17
Installation
■ Connecting to the E&M Central Office
KX-TD184 E&M Central Office
T
R
-48V E
M
-48V
GROUND GROUND
T
Voice Voice
Transmit R
Receive
T1
Voice Voice
Receive R1 Transmit
E
-48V
M
-48V
GROUND GROUND
18
■ E&M Sequences
You can choose one of the following E&M sequences by System
Programming [155] “E&M Signal Assignment”.
(1) Continuous E&M
Seize Dial Answer Disconnect
∼
E-Wire
Wink
M-Wire
If you select “Immediate”, this signal will not appear.
(2) Pulsed E&M with Answer signal

∼
E-Wire
ACK
M-Wire
(Answer signal)
If you select this sequence, you must

select “Wink” as the start type.
(3) Pulsed E&M without Answer signal

∼
E-Wire
ACK
M-Wire
If you select this sequence, you must

select “Wink” as the start type.
19
100 System Programming
Flexible Numbering
Description Assigns the TIE line access code and the leading one or two digits
of the other PBX extension numbers.
Selection • Selection number: 086 through 102

• Feature number: 1 to 3 digits (for selection number 86),
1 or 2 digits (for selection numbers 87 through
102), consisting of 0 through 9
Default
86 TIE line access code None
87 Other PBX Extension 01 None
For the programming sequence and more information, refer to the program [100] “Flexible
Numbering” in the main Installation Manual.
20
System Programming 109
Expansion Unit Type
Description Assigns the type of expansion units to be used in the system.

This allows the system to identify the unit in each expansion unit
location. Select “EM” to use a 4-E&M Line Unit.
Selection KX-TD816
• Areas 1; 2; 3 = 1 (Inside the system) : C (4CO) / S (2SO)
2; 3(Expansion Area) :
C (4CO) / S (2SO) / S2 (6SO) / S3 (1PRI)/
E (EXT) / EM (4E&M)
KX-TD1232
• Master / Slave
• Areas 1; 2; 3;4 = 1 (Inside the system) : C (8CO) / S (4SO)
2; 3; 4 (Expansion Area) :
C (4CO) / S (2SO) / S2 (6SO) / S3 (1PRI) /
E1 (EXT1) / E2 (EXT2) / EM (4E&M)
Default KX-TD816: C; C; E
KX-TD1232: Master and Slave – C; C; E1; E2
1. Enter 109.
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Mast.: C; C ;E

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
KX-TD1232
1. Enter 109.
2. Press NEXT to program the Master System.

To program the “Slave”, press NEXT again.
Display example: Mast.:C ;C; E1; E2
21
Expansion Unit Type (contd.)

displayed.
4. Press .

displayed.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all of the required entries are

completed.
7. Press STORE.
If only one system is in operation, go to step 8.
8. Press NEXT to program the Slave System.

Display example: Slave :C ;C; E1; E2
10. Press END.
Conditions • When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data
and there are two expansion areas on the system, areas 2 and 3 from
bottom to top.
and there are three expansion areas on the system, area 2, 3 and 4 from
bottom to top.
• If the Slave system is out-of-service, skip steps 8 and 9.
• After changing the setting, to make your setting effective, turn the
Power Switch off and an again. Otherwise, the previous setting will be
maintained.
Note:
After assigning a KX-TD184 in this program register, turn the Power
Switch off and on again. Otherwise the previous setting will be
maintained.
22
PBX Code
Description Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the “PBX Code
method” is employed for Tie Line Network calling.
Selection PBX Code: 1 to 3 digits
Default Not Stored

Display: PBX Code
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Code:
3. Enter a PBX Code.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new code.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • Valid numbers for the PBX Code are 0 through 9.

• The PBX Code method is: PBX Code + Extension number.
23
E&M Signal Assignment
Description Assigns the E&M signal. There are three signals available:
Continuous: Continuous E&M (Wink/Immediate)
Pulsed Ans: Pulsed E&M with Answer Signal (Wink only)
Pulsed No Ans: Pulsed E&M without Answer Signal (Wink only)
Selection Continuous / Pulsed Ans / Pulsed No Ans
Default Continuous

Display: E&M Signal
2. Press NEXT.
Display example: Continuous

displayed.
4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.
Conditions • If you select “Pulsed Ans” or “Pulsed No Ans”, you must select “Wink”
as the start type.
24
TIE First / Inter Digit Time
Description Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of the dial
tone and the first digit dialled (First Digit Time), and between digits
(Inter Digit Time) on a TIE call. If an extension user fails to dial
any digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This
timer applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed.
Selection Time (seconds): 3 to 30
Default 5s

Display: TIE Timer
2. Press NEXT.
3. Enter the time.

4. Press STORE.
5. Press END.


Toll Restriction
25
TIE Line Routing Table
Description The TIE line routing table can be programmed. This table is
referenced by the system to identify the CO line route, when an
extension user makes a TIE call.
A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the first
three digits (except the TIE line access code) of the dialled
number. This program assigns the TIE line access code and CO
line group hunt sequence.

• TIE line access code: 1 to 3 digits
• CO line group hunt sequence number: 1 through 8 (5 entry max.)

Display example: TIE Route
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: 01: ,
4. Enter a TIE line access code.

5. Press to program the CO line group hunt sequence number.
6. Enter a CO line group hunt sequence number.

7. Press STORE.

10. Press END.
26
TIE Line Routing Table (contd.)
Conditions • Each TIE line access code has a maximum of three digits, consisting of
0 through 9 and . The character “ ” can be used as a wild card
character.
• Program [341] “TIE Removed / Added Digit” is used to modify the TIE
line access code.
27
TIE Modify Removed / Added Digit
Description Assigns the removed and added digits of the TIE call received
digits. Digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
dialled digits.

• Number of digits to be deleted: 0 to 4 (0=no deletion)
• Number to be added: 4 digits (max.)
Default All locations – Deleted digit: 0, Added digit: Blank

Display: TIE Remove / Add
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: 01:0,
4. Enter the number of digits to be deleted.

5. Press to program the number to be added.
6. Enter the number to be added.

7. Press STORE.

10. Press END.
Conditions Each added number has a maximum of 4 digits, consisting of 0 through

9.
28
TIE Table Number Assignment
Description Assigns a TIE table number to each CO line group.

• TIE table number: 1 to 4
Default All CO line groups – Not stored

Display: Modify Table NO.
2. Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?→

Display example: TRG1:Not Stored
4. Enter a TIE table number.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions This is the first and basic programming for the TIE features. If this
assignment is changed, it affects other programming ([431] through
[435]).
29
TIE Incoming Assignment
Description Assigns a TIE incoming method, immediate or wink, to each TIE

table depending on your central office service.
Immediate: Incoming and TIE calls can be received right after the
receiving signal arrives.
Wink: Incoming and TIE calls can be received after the wink signal
is transmitted to the central office (after the receiving signal
arrives).
Selection • TIE table number: 1 to 4, ( =all TIE tables)

• Immediate / Wink
Default All TIE tables – Wink

Display: Signal In
2. Press NEXT.
Display: Table NO?→

To enter TIE table number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 1:Wink

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. To program another TIE table, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and the desired TIE table number.
8. Press END.
Conditions To assign all TIE tables to one selection, press the key in step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for TIE table
number 1.
30
TIE Outgoing Assignment
Description Assigns a TIE outgoing method, immediate or wink, to each TIE

table depending on your central office service.
Immediate: Outgoing and TIE numbers can be transmitted right
after seizing the CO line.
Wink: Outgoing and TIE numbers can be transmitted after
receiving the wink signal from the central office after seizing the
CO line.

• Immediate / Wink
Default All TIE tables – Wink

Display: Signal Out
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: 1:Wink

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • The time the system waits for the confirmation wink signal can be
programmed in program [435] “TIE Wink Time Out Assignment”. The
system disconnects the CO line when the time-out time expires.
• To assign all TIE tables to one selection, press the key in step 3. In
number 1.
31
TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit
Description Assigns the removed digits of the received and TIE subscriber
numbers to each TIE table. Digits are removed from the beginning
of the received digits.
Selection • TIE table number: 1 to 4

• Number of digits to be deleted (RMV): 0 through 6
(0=no deletion)
Default All TIE tables – RMV:0

Display: Remove Digit
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: 1:1
4. Enter the number of digits to be deleted.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions You cannot leave the entry empty.
32
TIE Added Number
Description Assigns the added number to the TIE subscriber number which is
determined in program [433] “TIE Subscriber Number Removed
Digit”. This makes the final number which serves as the extension
number. Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the
number.
Selection • TIE table number: 1 to 4

• Number to be added: 4 digits (max.)
Default All TIE tables – Not Stored

Display: Add Dial
2. Press NEXT.

To enter table number 1, you can also press NEXT.
4. Enter the number to be added.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions Each added number has a maximum of 4 digits, consisting of 0 through

9.
33
TIE Wink Time Out Assignment
Description The TIE outgoing method can be set to the wink mode in program
[432] “TIE Outgoing Assignment”. This program sets the time the
system waits for the confirmation wink signal after a CO line is
seized depending on your central office service. The system
disconnects the CO line when the time-out expires.

• Time: 1 through 127 (✕ 64 milliseconds is the actual time)
Default All TIE tables – 16

Display: Wink Timeout
2. Press NEXT.

4. Enter the time.

5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions • You cannot leave the entry empty.

• To assign all TIE tables to one selection, press the key in step 3. In
number 1.
34
CO-to-TIE Transfer
Description Enables or disables transferring an incoming outside call to the TIE

line on a CO line group basis. This restriction applies to the
following: 1) Call Forwarding to a TIE line 2) Call Transfer to a
TIE line.

Default All CO line groups – Disable

Display : CO-TIE Transfer
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions None
35
TIE-to-CO Transfer
Description Enables or disables transferring TIE calls to a CO line on a CO line

group basis. This restriction applies to the following: 1) An outside
call through another PBX 2) Call Forwarding to a CO line 3) Call
Transfer to a CO line.

Default All CO line groups – Disable

Display : TIE-CO Transfer
2. Press NEXT.


displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions None
36
TIE-to-TIE Transfer
Description Enables or disables transferring TIE calls to a TIE line on a CO line

group basis. This restriction applies to the following: 1) A TIE call
through another PBX 2) Call Forwarding to a TIE line 3) Call
Transfer to a TIE line.

Default All CO line groups – Enable

Display : TIE TIE Transfer
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: TRG1:Enable

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions None
37
TIE Security Type
Description Assigns the security mode for TIE calls. There are two modes, Non
Security and Trunk Security (CO line security). Non Security
mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialling a TIE
user code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE
User Code assigned in program [811] “TIE User Codes” before
making a TIE call.

• Non (non security) / Trunk (trunk security)
Default Non

Display: TIE Security
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: TRG1:Non

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions None
38
Line Hunting Sequence
Description Assigns the hunting sequence of idle lines, seizing from the
smallest to the largest line number or vice versa in a CO line group,
on a CO line group basis.

• Small → Large / Large → Small
Default All CO line groups – Large → Small

Display : Line Hunting
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: TRG1:Large→Small

displayed.
5. Press STORE.

8. Press END.
Conditions The default setting (Large → Small) may often cause a busy situation
between two PBXs, as the same line may be seized by both sides
simultaneously. In this case, we recommend changing the setting of
either PBX to Small → Large.
39
Voice Path Type
Description Assigns the voice path type on a CO line basis.

KX-TD1232 – 09 through 12 (Master), 21 through 24 (Slave),
( =all CO lines)
• 2 wire / 4 wire
Default All CO lines – 2 wire

Display: Voice Path Type
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO09:2 Wire

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Condition To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 3.
40
Voice Level (Transmit)
Description Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line port basis. This
program is valid only when the voice path type is set to “4 wire”.

( =all CO lines)
• –6 db / –3 db / 0 db / +3 db
Default All CO lines – –3db

Display: Voice Level (TX)
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO09:–3db

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
Conditions To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key in step 3.
41
Voice Level (Receive)
Description Assigns the received voice level on a CO line basis. This program
is valid only when the voice path type is set to “4 wire”.

( =all CO lines)
• –6 db / –3 db / 0 db / +3 db
Default All CO lines – –3db

Display: Voice Level (RX)
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO09:–3db

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
42
TIE Receive Dial
Description Assigns whether the system receives TIE dial numbers on a CO

line basis. If “No” is selected, the dialled number is treated as a
local number and sent to DIL 1 : 1 or DIL 1 : N.

( =all CO lines)
• Yes / No
Default All CO line ports – Yes

Display: TIE Receive Dial
2. Press NEXT.

Display example: CO09:Yes

displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. Press END.
43
TIE User Codes
Description Assigns the TIE User Codes and a Class of Service (COS) to each
code. The code COS determines the toll restriction level of the
TIE caller.
Selection • TIE user code number: 01 through 32

• TIE user code: 4 to 10 digits
Default Code 01=0001 – COS 1

Code 02=0002 – COS 1
Code 03=0003 – COS 1
:
Code 32=0032 – COS 1

Display: User Code
2. Press NEXT.
Display: User Code NO?→
3. Enter a TIE user code number.

To enter user code number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01:0001 C:1
4. Enter a TIE user code.

To change the current entry, enter the new code.
5. Press to program the COS.

To change the current entry, enter the new COS number.
7. Press STORE.
8. To program another user code, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired TIE user code number.
10. Press END.
Conditions • This setting is required if the Trunk (CO line) Security mode is selected
in programs [455] “TIE Security Type”.
• Each user code should be unique and composed of eight numerical
digits, 0 through 9.
• You cannot leave an entry empty.
44
System Additional Information
Description Bit 03 in Area 8 gives additional information about the TIE line
service.
Area 08
Display 1111111111111111
example
↓
Field number (03)
Explanation for Area 08 (Bit 03)

Area Bit Description Selection Default Reference
08 (03) Enables or disables sending CO line 0 : enable 1 Flexible
access code “9” to a TIE line. When 1 : disable
you dial CO line access code “9” and Numbering
the CO line is busy, the system can
automatically send CO line access
code “9” to a TIE line so that you can
access the CO line through another
PBX.
For the programming sequence and more information, refer to the program [100] “Flexible
Numbering” in the main Installation Manual.
45
Programming Tables
[100] Flexible Numbering [154] PBX Code
Item Feature Default Parameter
Parameter :
86 TIE line access code – Default 1 – 3 digits, 0 – 9
87 Other PBX Extension 01 – Not stored
88 Other PBX Extension 02 –
90 Other PBX Extension 04 – [155] E&M Signal Assignment
Default Selection
93 Other PBX Extension 07 – Continuous ✔
94 Other PBX Extension 08 – Pulsed Ans
95 Other PBX Extension 09 – Pulsed No Ans
98 Other PBX Extension 12 – [220] TIE First / Inter
99 Other PBX Extension 13 – Digit Time
Default 5s
Other PBX Extension 16 – Parameter
102
(Selection) No.86: 1 – 3 digits, No.87 – 102: 1 or 2 digits, Selection 3 – 30
(Valid Entries) 0 – 9
[109] Extension Card / Unit Type
TD816 Area No. 1 2

Selection C S S2 S3 EM E C S S2 S3 EM E
Default ✔ ✔
Parameter
TD1232 Master System
Area No. 1 2 3
Selection C S S2 S3 EM E1 E2 C S S2 S3 EM E1 E2 C S S2 E3 EM E1 E2
Default ✔ ✔ ✔
Parameter
Slave System
Area No. 1 2 3
Selection C S S2 S3 EM E1 E2 C S S2 S3 EM E1 E2 C S S2 S3 EM E1 E2
Default ✔ ✔ ✔
Parameter
<Note>
TD816 – C: 4CO, S: 2SO / S2: 6SO / S3: 1PRI / E:EXT /EM: 4E&M
TD1232 – C: 4CO, S: 2SO / S2: 6SO / S3: 1PRI / E1:EXT1 / E2: EXT2 / EM: 4E&M
46
Programming Tables
[341]
[340] TIE Line Routing Table TIE Modify Removed / Added Digit
Parameter : TIE line access Parameter : CO line group hunt Parameter : Parameter : No. to be
Item : code (3 digits max.), sequence no. (1 – 8), 5 entries No. of digits to added (4 digits max.),
Location No. consisting of 0 – 9, . max., consisting of 0 – 9, . be deleted (0 – 4) consisting of 0 – 9.
Default: all Not Stored Not Stored 0 Not Stored
all locations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
47
Programming Tables
[430] TIE Table Number [452] CO-to-TIE [453] TIE-to-CO [454] TIE-to-TIE
Assignment Transfer Transfer Transfer
Item : CO Line Parameter: TIE Table No. Selection Selection Selection
Group No. (1 – 4) Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable
Default : all Not Stored ✔ ✔ ✔
all CO line groups
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[455] TIE Security [456] Line Hunting

Type Sequence
Item : CO Line Selection Selection
Group No. Non Trunk Small→Large Large→Small
Default : all ✔ ✔
all CO line groups
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[431] TIE Incoming [432] TIE Outgoing

Assignment Assignment
Item : TIE Selection Selection
Table No. Immediate Wink Immediate Wink
Default : all ✔ ✔
all tables
1
2
3
4
48
Programming Tables
[433] TIE Subscriber [434] [435] TIE Wink Time Out
Number Removed Digit TIE Added Number Assignment
Item : Parameter : Parameter :
TIE Table No. Selection:
No. of digits to be No. to be added
1 – 127 (✕ 64 msec)
deleted (0 – 6) (4 digits max.), consisting of 0 – 9.
Default: all 0 Not Stored 16
all tables
1
2
3
4
[457] Voice [458] [459] [460] TIE

Path Type Voice Level (Transmit) Voice Level (Receive) Receive Dial
Item : Selection Selection Selection Selection

CO Line No. 2 wire 4 wire -6 db -3 db 0 db +3 db -6 db -3 db 0 db +3 db Yes No
Default : all ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
all lines
05
TD816 06
07
08
all lines
09
10
11
TD1232
12
21
22
23
24
49
Programming Tables
[811] TIE User Codes
Item : Default Parameter Item : Default Parameter

Code No. Code COS Code (4 digits) COS (1 – 8) Code No. Code COS Code (4 digits) COS (1 – 8)
1 0001 1 17 0017 1
2 0002 1 18 0018 1
3 0003 1 19 0019 1
4 0004 1 20 0020 1
5 0005 1 21 0021 1
6 0006 1 22 0022 1
7 0007 1 23 0023 1
8 0008 1 24 0024 1
9 0009 1 25 0025 1
10 0010 1 26 0026 1
11 0011 1 27 0027 1
12 0012 1 28 0028 1
13 0013 1 29 0029 1
14 0014 1 30 0030 1
15 0015 1 31 0031 1
16 0016 1 32 0032 1
[990] System Additional Information
AREA 08 [Bit 03]

Bit not used 03 not used
Default — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1 — —
Selection
<Selection>
Area 08 Bit 03
50
Berkshire RG12 4FP
Printed in the United Kingdom PSQX1921ZA KS1199EB0

D1232

DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
User Manual
MODEL
KX-TD816E/KX-TD1232E
Panaso Panaso
nic nic
Please read this manual before connecting the

Digital Super Hybrid System.
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System.
Telephones More Extensions
This system can connect digital and analogue This system can double the extension capacity
Panasonic proprietary telephones. Single line by connecting a proprietary telephone and a
devices such as a single line telephone, single line telephone. The proprietary
facsimile, cordless telephone, voice telephone can share the extension with
processing system, etc. can also be another single line telephone. Furthermore,
connected. D1232 you can connect a Panasonic digital
+ 1-4 proprietary telephone and D1232
a single line telephone to

one jack and use them as
individual extensions.
+ 1-5
Saves on telephone charges Call Record

(LCR = Least Cost Routing) (Station Message Detail Recording)
This system chooses the most cost-effective This system can record or print out call
carrier based on the outside number dialled information: date, time, extension no., dialled
and the time called. no., duration, etc.
+ 2-9 + Consult your dealer.
D1232 A
Date Time Ext • • • • • • •

B
24/06/99 10:03 AM 223 • • • • • • •
24/06/99 11:07 AM 233 • • • • • • •
DECT System Voice Mail Integration

This system optionally supports the DECT You can forward your call to a voice
system. A DECT Portable Station (PS) can be processing system and let callers leave their
used in the system with other wired telephone. messages in your mailbox when you are
+ DECT Portable Station unable to receive calls.
+ 2-77
D1232
D1232
Message
Message
Message
Message
Message
Message
Note:
In this manual, the suffix of each model number is omitted.
ii
Precaution
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS

BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE

POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND
RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR SAFETY

REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT
SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS.
THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE.

ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/INSTALLED NEAR THE
EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO

RAIN OR MOISTURE.
WARNING Warning: Static sensitive connectors
Static sensitive devices are used. To protect

REMOTE
printed circuit boards from static electricity, do

not touch connectors indicated to the right. SYSTEM INTER
CONNECTION
To discharge body static, touch ground or

4CO/ISDN
wear a grounding strap.

8CO/ISDN
The following icons are used frequently in this manual.
!! Hints Conditions
iii
Attention
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as
fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the
performance of the unit.
• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40˚C) and vibration,
and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc., into the vents or holes of this unit.
• If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug the telephone directly into
the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line until the
problem has been repaired by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. If the telephone
does not operate properly, chances are that the problem is in the telephone system, and not in the
unit.
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the unit. You
should note the model number and the serial number of this unit in the space provided
and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase, to aid in identification in
the event of theft.
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
For future reference
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
APPROVED for connection to APPROVED for connection to

telecommunication systems telecommunication systems
specified in the instructions for specified in the instructions for
use subject to the conditions set use subject to the conditions set
out in them. out in them.
606055 NS / 1010 / 235 / R / 604365
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232
iv
Safety Instructions
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or
laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
2. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electric storm. There may be a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
4. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a
fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
v
Table of Contents
1-2 Capacity
1-3 Names and Locations
1-4 Connection Example
1-5 Adding Another Telephone in Parallel
Overview
2-2 Before Operating the Telephones

2-8 Making Calls
2-8 Basic Calling
2-10 Easy Dialling
Redial
Operation 2-15
2-17 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
2-22 Calling without Restrictions
2-24 Alternating the Calling Method
2-25 Receiving Calls
2-25 Answering Calls
2-26 Answering Hands-free
2-27 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone
2-29 Answering a Call via an External Speaker
2-30 During a Conversation
2-30 Holding a Call
2-35 Talking to Two Parties Alternately
2-36 Transferring a Call
2-38 Answering a Call Waiting
2-39 Three-party Conversation
2-41 Saving a Number
2-42 Mute
2-43 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation
2-44 Before Leaving Your Desk
2-44 Forwarding Your Calls
2-48 Forwarding Calls from a Receiving Group
2-49 Showing an Absent Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display
2-52 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone
2-53 Leaving a Call Distribution Group
2-54 Making / Answering an Announcement
2-54 Paging
2-57 Paging a Person and Transferring a Call
2-59 Answering a Paged Announcement
2-61 Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
2-61 Setting the Alarm
2-63 Refusing Incoming Calls
2-65 Receiving a Call Waiting
2-66 Denying the Paged Announcement
2-67 Displaying Your Number on the Called Party and Calling Party’s Telephone
2-68 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone
2-69 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Calling Party’s Telephone
2-69 Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking up Your Calls
2-70 Turning on the Background Music
2-70 Checking the Day / Night Service Status
2-71 Setting the Parallel Connected Telephone Ringer
2-73 Clearing the Feature Settings at Your Extension
2-74 Using User-supplied Equipment
2-74 If a Doorphone / Door Opener is Connected
2-77 If a Host PBX is connected
2-78 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
2-83 Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
2-83 Calling Using the Call Log
2-85 Recording a Call Log
2-86 Denying Other People the Possibility of Seeing Your Call Log
2-87 Using the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 or KX-T7235
vi
Overview
3-2 Extension Control
3-2 Assigning Level of Service
3-3 Changing the Settings
3-4 System Control
3-4 Forwarding a Waiting Call
Operator 3-5
3-7
Day / Night Service
Turning on the External Background Music
Operation 3-8 Recording Outgoing Messages
3-9 Using the ANSWER / RELEASE Button
3-10 Hotel Use Features
Operation
3-15 Printing the System Working Report
4-2 Customising Your Phone (Station Programming)

4-2 Initial Settings
4-4 Customising the Buttons
4-7 Charge Fee Management
4-8 Customising Your System (System Programming)
Customising 4-8 Programming Information
Operator
4-14 Date and Time Set (000)
Your 4-15 System Speed Dialling Number Set (001)
Phone & System 4-16 System Speed Dialling Name Set (002)
4-23 Extension Number Set (003)
4-24 Extension Name Set (004)
5-2 Safety Instructions
Customising
5-4 Before Operating the DECT Portable Station
5-6 Operation
5-9 Making Calls
5-11 Receiving Calls
DECT 5-12 Redial
Portable Station 5-13 Holding a Call
5-15 Transferring a Call
5-16 Using the Call Directory
5-23 Using Your PS in Parallel with the Wired Telephone
5-25 Locking the Keypads
Portable Station
5-26 Selecting the Feature Button on the Display
5-27 Other Operations
DECT
5-34 Customising Your PS
5-34 Programming Information
5-35 PS Programming
5-40 PBX Programming
Appendix
6-2 Troubleshooting
6-7 Feature Number List
6-10 Directory
6-17 What is This Tone?
Appendix 6-20 Specifications
6-21 Quick Reference Card for a Single Line Telephone
7-2 Index
Index
Index
vii
Overview
This section briefly outlines your system.
Overview
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panaso Panaso
nic nic
Capacity
You can connect the following number of outside lines, wired extensions and wireless extensions to your
system.
Basic With optional System

System units Connection
KX-TD816
Outside line 0 12 —
Wired extension 8 16 —
Wireless extension* 0 16 —
KX-TD1232
Outside line 0 38 38
Wired extension 16 32 64
Wireless extension* 0 64 64
• Actual capacity will depend on the number or/and type of card/units

connected to the system. For details, consult your dealer.
• * This is the maximum number of DECT portable stations that D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
you can register.

HYBRID SYSTE
M
D816
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
M
Panaso Panaso
nic nic
1-2 Overview
Names and Locations
Overview
KX-TD816
Inside view Extension Connectors

D816
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYST Paging Jack 2
EM
Paging Jack 1
Serial Interface External Music Jack 1
(RS-232C) System Clear Switch
Reset Button
Ground Terminal Door Opener Jack
Doorphone Jack
Battery Adaptor
Connector
Panaso
nic
AC Inlet
Power Indicator
KX-TD1232
Inside view
D1232
DIGITAL SUPE
R HYBRID SYST
EM
Door Opener Jack

Ground Terminal Doorphone Jack
Paging Jack 2
Paging Jack 1
Serial Interface
System Clear Switch
(RS-232C)
Battery Adaptor Reset Button
Connector
Panaso
nic AC Inlet
Power Indicator
To open the front cover

D1 23 2
1. Loosen the two screws on the right side of the main unit. DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
The two screws are attached to the front cover with springs so
that they will not be lost. A
Screw
2. Open the front cover in the direction of arrow A .
To close the front cover

1. Reverse the steps above. Panasonic
Screw
Overview 1-3
Connection Example
This diagram shows you a connection example including optional equipment.
D1232
Printer or Personal Computer
D1232
Battery Adaptor Car Battery
Panasonic
To AC Outlet
Doorphone Door Opener
Panasonic
Panasonic
To Outside Lines (with Lightning Protectors)

To Extensions
Data Terminal Single Line Telephone
External Music Source
Cordless Phone
KX-T7431
Telephone Answering
Amplifier KX-T7436
Machine with Facsimile
External Speaker
KX-T7433
Voice Processing System
Cell Station (CS)

DECT
KX-T7440
DECT Portable Station
: needs Optional Cards or Adaptor.
1-4 Overview
Adding Another Telephone in Parallel
Overview
A Panasonic proprietary telephone and a single line telephone, including a facsimile, cordless telephone,
etc., can be connected to one extension jack in parallel. There are two types of parallel connections.
• Parallelled Telephone Connection

– Any proprietary telephone and a single line telephone
These telephones share the same extension number. Follow Method 1 or 2.
To ring the single line telephone, set to ring (on) if necessary. (“Setting the Parallel Connected
Telephone Ringer”)
• EXtra Device Port (XDP)

– Digital proprietary telephone and a single line telephone
Each telephone has a different extension number and can work individually. For more information,
contact your dealer. Follow Method 2 or 3.
Method 1
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM

Connect pins "A" and "B".
Master
socket
2-conductor wiring cord Standard SLT cord

For a digital proprietary telephone:
Connect pins “L” and “H” only.
(“A” and “B” are not required.)
For an analogue proprietary telephone:
Connect pins “A” and “B” and “L” and “H”.
Proprietary Telephone Single Line Telephone
Overview 1-5
Adding Another Telephone in Parallel
Method 2
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
<Back of the KX-T7400 Series DPTs>

To single line
telephone

Connect pins “A”, “B”, “L” and “H”.
To system
Standard SLT cord Master

socket <Back of the KX-T7200 Series DPTs>
To single line
To system telephone
LCD ADJ TO TEL

PUSH
TO EMSS
Single Line Telephone Digital Proprietary Telephone
Method 3
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
2-conductor wiring cord 2-conductor wiring cord Standard SLT cord

Connect pins “L” and “H”. Connect pins “A” and “B”.
Master Master
socket socket
Single Line Telephone
Digital Proprietary Telephone
1-6 Overview
Operation
This chapter shows you how to operate each feature
step by step.
Read this chapter to become familiar with the many
Operation useful features of this system.
Before Operating the Telephones
What kind of telephone can be used?
You can use a single line telephone (SLT), such as a rotary pulse telephone or a Panasonic proprietary
telephone (PT) such as the KX-T7436. Operate the feature depending on the telephone you are using.
REDIAL
If you are using a Panasonic proprietary telephone with a special function button such as and/or
has a display (D – PT), you can follow the operation with the button or display messages
for easy programming.
If you use a large display telephone (e.g. KX-T7436), you can follow the displayed messages to operate
the features.
If your telephone does not have function buttons and/or a display, you may operate the unit by entering
a feature number instead. Follow the available operation with your telephone.
If you use a Console, you can use the buttons on the Console as the buttons on the connected
!!• If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone
which does not have function buttons, you may
change one of the unused flexible buttons to a
function button. Refer to “Customising the
Buttons” (Customising Your Phone & System).
Feature Numbers
To operate certain features, you need to enter specified feature numbers (and an additional parameter,
if required).
There are two types of feature numbers as follows:
• Flexible feature number
• Fixed feature number
Fixed feature numbers cannot be changed. However, you can change the flexible numbers to other
numbers for easier use. If you want to change the numbers, consult your dealer. In this manual, the
default numbers (factory installed) are used for operations.
A flexible number is shown as 0 (half-shaded key). Use the new programmed number if you have
changed the feature number. Write the new number in the “Feature Number List” (Appendix).
If you use a single line telephone which does not have the “ ” or “#” keys;
it is not possible to access features that have “ ” or “#” in their feature numbers.
Tones
You will hear various tones, during or after an operation, for confirmation. Refer to “What is This
Tone?” (Appendix).
2-2 Operation
Display
In this manual, you will see “the display ...”. This refers to the display of a Panasonic proprietary
telephone. If your telephone is not a Panasonic proprietary telephone with a display, the message will
not be displayed.
If you use a Panasonic display proprietary telephone, the display helps you confirm the settings. For
example, when you set the Do Not Disturb feature, the display shows “Do Not Disturb”. Some
proprietary telephones also give you easy access to operations. A message is displayed depending on
Operation
the operation. By pressing the corresponding button on the side or bottom of the display, or rotating a
jog dial, you can access the desired feature. For example, if turning background music on becomes
available, “BGM” will be shown on the display. Follow the instructions in each operation.
BGM
1 Jan
3:00PM
Extens
Featur ion STA
Call Lo es SYS Speed
Furthermore, depending on the display proprietary telephone, CONT g

RING
Speed
BGM
you can operate features or make calls using the display

message. Refer to “Using the Display Proprietary Telephone”.
Your Extension Number

If you use a Panasonic display proprietary telephone, you can check your own extension number on the
display. Refer to “Customising Your System – Programming Information” (Customising Your Phone &
System).
Examples
The displays and the illustrations shown as examples are from a telephone connected to the
KX-TD1232.
Restrictions
Some features may be restricted at your extension under system programming. Consult your manager
or dealer.
Operation 2-3
Icon Descriptions
The following icons show you the feature availability, notes and action to operate the features.
While operating the unit, you can easily refer to the Icons noted on the inside back cover of this manual.
This feature cannot be operated with a Seize an external line (One of the
(CO)
single line telephone. OR
following).
9 • Press the CO button.
OR • Dial automatic line access number 9.
8 1 • Dial outside line number 81 to 88.
Related Programming Title to
See “Programming”, if necessary. 8 8
Off-hook (One of the following). Press the Call button on the Doorphone.
• Lift the handset.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button. (To start
talking, lift the handset.)
On-hook (One of the following). Press the Recall button on a single line
• Hang up. (Recall)
telephone.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button.
Press the corresponding function button Wait for an answer.

on the proprietary telephone. (See to
“When You Use a Panasonic Proprietary
Telephone”.)
desired no. Enter the required number. Talk.

<Example>
account code Enter the account code.
extension no. Dial an extension number. You will hear a confirmation, dial or ring
tone.
C. Tone: confirmation tone
D. Tone: dial tone
R. Tone: ring tone
phone no. Dial the telephone number.
2-4 Operation
When You Use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone
If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone and the Console, they may have some of the useful
function buttons listed below. These buttons make operations simple. The illustrations may differ from
the buttons on your telephone.
ANSWER
ANSWER: Used to answer an incoming HOLD
HOLD: Used to place a call on hold.
call.
Operation
AUTO ANSWER / MUTE: Used to receive INTERCOM: Used to make or receive an
AUTO ANSWER
an incoming intercom call in the hands- INTERCOM
intercom call.
MUTE
free mode or mute the microphone during
a conversation.
MESSAGE: Used to leave a message
MESSAGE
waiting indication or call back the party
AUTO DIAL / STORE: Used for System who left the message waiting indication.
AUTO DIAL
Speed Dialling or storing program
STORE
changes. MODE: Used to shift the display to access
MODE
various features.
CO: Used to make or receive an outside
(CO)
call. A Loop-CO button supports all lines.
Pressing this button seizes an idle line MONITOR: Used for hands-free dialling.
automatically. (Button assignment is MONITOR
You can monitor the party’s voice hands-
required.) free.
Also used as the desired function
buttons. (Button assignment is required.)
(Only the CO “number” (e.g. 1, 2) may be PAUSE: Used to insert a pause during
shown on some telephones.) PAUSE
dialling. Used to enter the programming
mode instead of using the PROGRAM
Conference: Used to establish a three- button.
CONF party conversation.
PROGRAM: Used to enter and exit the
Programming mode.
DSS: Used to access the extension. PROGRAM
(Only the “S” may be shown on some

(DSS)
telephones.)
Programmable Function: Located on the
(PF)
upper part of the CO button or on the DSS
FLASH / RCL
FLASH / RCL: Used to send a flash Console. Assigns the desired button and
signal to the Central Office or another used to access the stored function. Mostly
connected PBX. Or used to disconnect used as a one-touch dialling button.
the current call and make another call (Only the “F and number” may be shown on
without hanging up. some telephones.)
Function: Located beside the display. REDIAL

REDIAL: Used to redial.
Used to perform the displayed function or
operation.
RELEASE: Used to disconnect the line.

Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb: RELEASE
FWD/DND
Used to perform Call Forwarding or Do
Not Disturb.
SAVE: Used to store a dialled phone
Jog Dial: Used to adjust the volume and
number and redial.
the display contrast or select desired items (SAVE)
for each function.
Operation 2-5
If the term is in parentheses like (Account) in this
SELECT: Used to select the displayed
SELECT section, it means a flexible button has been made into
function or to call the displayed phone
an “Account” button.
number.
SHIFT
SHIFT: Used to alternate between the
subfunctions on the display.
Soft: Used to perform a function or

operation appearing on the bottom line of
the display.
SP-PHONE
Speakerphone: Used for the hands-free
operation.
TRANSFER: Used to transfer a call to

TRANSFER another party.
Using a Jog Dial

The Jog Dial can be used for the display contrast and the volume control or you can search for desired
items on the display. Rotate the Jog Dial in the either direction as desired. The contrast or the volume
level and the items will change as follows:
Left Right
(counter-clockwise) (clockwise)
Level decreases Level increases
To the previous item To the next item
2-6 Operation
How to Follow the Steps
A sample operation is shown below.
Feature title
Operation
Calling Without a Restriction
Using an account code (Account Code Entry)

An Account Code gives information about outside calls for accounting and billing purposes.
Sub feature title
You may not be able to make an outside call without an account code entry.
The mode is assigned to each user. Ask your manager for your mode.
PT / SLT Description
ACCNT
OR
(Account)
account code OR Operation steps
9 9
OR The description of the
Off-hook. 4 9 Enter account code Press # or dial 99.
(max. 10 digits). icons are explained
Press “ACCNT”,
Account or dial 49. on page 2-4 and the
inside back cover of
(CO)
OR
phone no.
this manual.
C.Tone line access
no.
Press CO or enter Enter phone number.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
Conditions Hints
• A Panasonic proprietary telephone user can enter

an account code during a conversation and when
hearing a reorder tone after the other party hangs up. You may give a specified account code to extension
• If you enter the wrong code, press the “ ” key users and check their telephone usage. You can
while entering the account code and then re-enter specify an account code to each client and check the
the code. call duration.
• To cancel the entry, press the Account button or
the hookswitch while entering the code.
• For your convenience, you can store the code with
the phone number in memory (e.g. Speed dialling).
• If you hear a reorder tone, the entered account
code is wrong. Enter the correct code.
☞ Customising Your Phone

• Customising the Buttons
Create or re-arrange an Account button.
Programming References: The related or required programming is noted.

To programme, see “Customising Your Phone & System”.
Operation 2-7
Making Calls
Basic Calling
Calling another extension

◆ To another extension (Intercom Call)
PT
PTand SLT
/ SLT
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Off-hook. Enter extension Talk.

number or press DSS.
<Example>
When you call Mr. Thomas....
Mr. Thomas’s extension number is 223.
PT / SLT
2 2 3
Off-hook. Dial 223. Talk.
• The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:

Off: The extension is idle.
!!
• Do you have an extension directory?
Red on: You or another extension is using the line. Complete the directory on page 6-10 and make
☞
a copy for your reference.
Customising Your Phone • For quick operation
• Customising the Buttons If you are an operator or dial some extensions
Create or re-arrange a DSS button. frequently, the DSS button is useful.
Customising Your System • Confirming the dialled number before
• Extension Number Set connecting
• Extension Name Set You can go off-hook after confirming the
number you dialled. If you misdial, press “ ”
to clear each number from the right or press
the FLASH/RCL button to clear all numbers.
◆ To an operator (Operator Call)
PT / SLT
0
OR
operator
call number
Off-hook.
Dial 0 or enter
operator call number .
2-8 Operation
Calling an external party
You have to seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number because external calls are
made via your system.
Select one of the following methods:
• Press an idle (CO) button.
• Dial automatic line access number 9 .
An idle line is selected automatically.
Operation
• Dial outside line number 8 1 to 8 8 .
A specific line is selected.
PT / SLT
(CO)
OR
9
OR phone no.
8 1
to
Off-hook. Enter phone number. Talk.
8 8
Seize an external line
(CO, 9 or 81-88).
• The CO button light shows the current status as follows:

Off: The line is idle.
!!• Hands-free operation
Green on: You are using the line. You can have a conversation in the hands-free
Red on: The line is in use. mode using the SP-PHONE button. You can
• CO1 to CO8 correspond to outside line numbers 81 to 88 then perform other tasks at the same time.
respectively. (Default : Setting) Helpful hints for hands-free operation
• Emergency call – Use your telephone in a quiet room for best
You can dial pre-programmed emergency numbers performance.
without any restrictions. – If the other party has difficulty hearing you,
decrease the volume.
(Default: 999, 112)
– If you and the other party talk at the same time,
☞
parts of your conversation will be lost. To avoid
Customising Your Phone this, talk alternately.
• Initial Settings • To select the less expensive line
– Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing automatically, dial “9” or press the Loop-CO
Select the seized line when going off-hook. button to seize a line. (LCR = Least Cost
• Customising the Buttons Routing)
Create or re-arrange the Terminate button. • Confirming the dialled number before
• Charge Fee Management connecting
You can go off-hook after confirming the
number you dialled. If you misdial, press “ ”
to clear each number from the right or press
the FLASH/RCL button to clear all numbers.
• Call information
The following information can be referred to by
repeatedly pressing the CO button in use.
– Phone number (outgoing call) or
call duration (incoming call)
– Meter
– Call charge
• To call another party without hanging up,
just press the Terminate button or “TRM”
button on the display, re-access an outside line
and dial the new phone number.
Operation 2-9
Making Calls
Easy Dialling
This is convenient for frequently dialled phone numbers.

– With one touch button – To a pre-set party by going off-hook
– Using numbers stored at your extension – Using a pre-assigned number
– Using numbers stored in the system – To a Phantom extension
With one touch button (One-Touch Dialling)
PT
(One-Touch
Dialling)
Off-hook. Press One-Touch

Dialling.

• Initial Settings
– Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment
Allow or cancel the one-touch operation while on-hook. (Default: Allow)
Create or re-arrange the One-Touch Dialling button and store the desired number, phone number, feature
number, etc.
Using numbers stored at your extension (Station Speed Dialling)

You can store up to ten numbers at your extension for your personal use.
◆ To store a phone number
PT / SLT
station speed desired no.

6 0 dial no. #
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 60. Enter station speed Enter the desired Dial #. On-hook.
dial number (0-9). number (max. 24 digits).
Enter a line access number (9 or 81 to 88) as

the first digit before an external party number.
•“ ” and PAUSE can also be stored as digits.
2-10 Operation
◆ To dial
PT / SLT
6 station speed
dial no.
Operation
Off-hook. Dial 6 . Enter station speed
dial number (0-9).
Using numbers stored in the system (System Speed Dialling)

Up to 500 parties can be stored in the system. Refer to the directory on page 6-10.
PT / SLT
AUTO DIAL
STORE
OR
system speed
dial no.
Off-hook. Press AUTO DIAL Enter system speed

or dial . dial number (3 digits).
• More than one speed dial number can be used for long telephone numbers, if the number is divided when stored.
<Dialling Example>
If the number is divided and stored in system speed dial numbers 001 and 002:
AUTO DIAL AUTO DIAL
0 0 1 0 0 2
STORE STORE
☞ Customising Your System

• System Speed Dialling Number Set
• System Speed Dialling Name Set
Operation 2-11
Making Calls
To a pre-set party by going off-hook (Pickup Dialling)
You can make an outside call simply by going off-hook if you pre-assigned.
PT / SLT
desired
7 4 2 party’s no. #
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 742. Enter the desired Dial #. On-hook.
party’s number
(max. 24 digits).
Enter a line access number (9 or 81 to 88) as

the first digit before an external party number.
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
1 Set
OR
7 4
0 Cancel C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 74. Dial 1 to set On-hook.
or 0 to cancel.
◆ To dial
PT / SLT
Off-hook.
• You can set or cancel this feature by simply pressing the Pickup Dialling button. If set, the button light turns red.
• To call another party, dial the desired party’s phone number before the pre-set line is connected.
(Default: 1 second)
• “ ” can also be stored as a digit.
• This feature is not available for an ISDN telephone user.

Create or re-arrange a Pickup Dialling button.
2-12 Operation
Using a pre-assigned number (Quick Dialling)
You can make a call simply by pressing the number pre-assigned as quick dialling. Up to 80 parties
can be stored in the system. Consult your manager or dealer for details and refer to the directory on
page 6-16.
PT
PTand SLT
/ SLT
Operation
quick dial no.
Off-hook. Enter quick dial

number (1-4 digits).
To a Phantom extension 123

123
You can call extensions associated with a
Phantom extension. The call arrives at all
extensions who have the corresponding 123
Phantom extension button.
123
◆ To call a phantom extension
PT
(Phantom)
OR
phantom
extension no.
Press Phantom or enter
phantom extension number.
◆ To transfer to a phantom extension

PT
During a conversation
(Phantom)
OR
phantom
TRANSFER extension no.
Press Phantom or press TRANSFER and enter
phantom extension number.
Operation 2-13
Making Calls
◆ To answer
PT
OR
(Phantom)
Off-hook or
press Phantom.
• The Phantom extension button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Idle
Red on: You are calling a phantom extension.
Flashing green: Incoming call
• To set ringing or not, refer to “Customising Your Phone”.

Create or re-arrange a Phantom extension button.
2-14 Operation
Redial
This is convenient when calling the same external party again.
– Redialling the last number you dialled
– Saving the number and redialling
!!
Operation
• Up to twenty-four digits can be programmed and
redialled. The line access number is not counted as a
• To redial automatically, go off-hook with the
digit.
SP-PHONE button and the REDIAL button, or
☞
press the REDIAL button directly. It will keep
Customising Your Phone
trying the busy number until the called party
answers within a specified time (Automatic
– Full One-Touch Dialling Assignment
Redial). You can perform other tasks during
Allow or cancel the one-touch operation while on-
dialling. To cancel, press the FLASH/RCL
hook. (Default: Allow)
button or perform another operation.
Redialling the last number you dialled (Last Number Redial)
PT / SLT
REDIAL
OR
Off-hook. Press REDIAL or dial #.
Operation 2-15
Making Calls
Saving the number and redialling (Saved Number Redial)
The saved number is retained until a new number is stored.
◆ To save
PT
PT
During a conversation or while hearing a busy tone
AUTO DIAL
STORE (Save)
Press STORE. Press SAVE.
◆ To dial
PT
(Save)
Off-hook. Press SAVE.

Create or re-arrange a SAVE button.
2-16 Operation
When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
– Reserving a busy line – Leaving a message waiting indication

– Sending a call waiting tone
Operation
Reserving a busy line (Automatic Callback Busy)
You can set the telephone to receive call-back ringing when a dialled line becomes idle.
When you answer the call-back ringing:
For an outside call: The line is seized.
For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing automatically.
PT / SLT
While hearing a busy tone
C.BCK
OR
C.Tone
6
Press “C.BCK” or dial 6. On-hook.
◆ To answer a call-back ringing and call
PT / SLT
● Outside call ● Intercom call
phone no.
Off-hook. Enter phone number. Off-hook.
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
4 6
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 46. On-hook.
• If you do not answer after four call-back rings, this feature will be cancelled.
Operation 2-17
Making Calls
Sending a call waiting tone (Busy Station Signalling [BSS])
The party will know your call is waiting.
PT / SLT
While hearing a busy tone
BSS
OR
2
Press “BSS” or dial 2.
• If “BSS” is not displayed or you hear a reorder tone, this feature is not set at the other party’s phone.
This feature is only available if the called extension has set the “Call Waiting” feature.
• Depending on the other party’s telephone, the “Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)” and the “Whisper
OHCA” functions can be applied. You can talk to the other party through the speaker and the microphone
(OHCA) or you only send a call announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA), while they are having
another conversation using the handset.
2-18 Operation
Leaving a message waiting indication (Message Waiting)
The called extension receives a message waiting
indication (MESSAGE button light turns on and / or
indication tone* is emitted when going off-hook) to call
you back.
Operation
◆ To leave a message waiting indication
PT / SLT
When the called extension is busy or does not answer
MESSAGE
OR
4 C.Tone
Press MESSAGE On-hook.
or dial 4.
◆ To leave / cancel a message waiting indication

PTand
PT / SLT
SLT
1 Leave
OR extension no.
7 0
0 Cancel C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 70. Dial 1 to leave or Enter extension On-hook.
0 to cancel. number.
T7431
MODE
→ MSG Off ext extension no.
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter On-hook.
“Feature Access” until “MSG Off” “MSG On”: Leave extension number.
is displayed. or “MSG On” “MSG Off”: Cancel.
is displayed.
T7433
→M S G O f f ext
SHIFT FEAT MSG On ext
MENU SEL
extension no.
C.Tone
Press SHIFT Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial Press “SEL”. Enter On-hook.
until “FEAT” until “MSG Off” “MSG On”: Leave extension number.
is displayed. or “MSG On” is “MSG Off”: Cancel
at the arrow.
Operation 2-19
Making Calls
◆ To leave / cancel a message waiting indication (contd.)
T7436 / T7235
Cancel
Message Off (→ext)

Features OR extension no.
Message On (→ext)
NEXT C.Tone
Press “Features”. Leave Enter On-hook.
extension number.
Rotate Jog Dial or Press “Message On” to leave
press “NEXT” until the or “Message Off” to cancel.
following is displayed.
◆ To check and select the party
D – PT
While on-hook
MESSAGE
Press MESSAGE
until the desired extension appears.
• The extension number and name are shown in the received order.
• Single line telephone users may hear a special ring tone as notification while on-hook, if required.
• * Indication tone
1s
◆ To call back
PT / SLT
MESSAGE
OR
7 0 2
Off-hook. Press MESSAGE or dial 702.
2-20 Operation
◆ To clear all message waiting indications
PT / SLT
your extension
7 0 0 no.
C.Tone
Operation
Off-hook. Dial 700. Enter your extension On-hook.
number.

Create or re-arrange a MESSAGE button.
Operation 2-21
Making Calls
Calling without Restrictions
– Using an account code – Changing the dialling mode

– To an extension refusing the call
Using an account code (Account Code Entry)

An Account Code gives information about outside calls for accounting and billing purposes. You may
not be able to make an outside call without an account code entry. A mode is assigned to each user.
Ask your manager for your mode.
PT / SLT
ACCNT
OR
account code OR
(Account)
OR
9 9
Off-hook. 4 9 Enter account code Press # or dial 99.
(max. 10 digits).
Press “ACCNT”,
Account or dial 49.
(CO)
OR
phone no.
C.Tone line access
no.
Press CO or enter Enter phone number.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
• A Panasonic proprietary telephone user can enter an

account code during a conversation and when hearing a
!! • You may give a specified account code to
reorder tone after the other party hangs up. extension users and check their telephone
• If you enter the wrong code, press the “ ” key while usage. You can specify an account code to
entering the account code and then re-enter the code. each client and check the call duration.
• To cancel the entry, press the Account button while
entering the code.
• For your convenience, you can store the code with the
phone number in memory (e.g. Speed dialling).
• If you hear a reorder tone, the entered account code is
wrong. Enter the correct code.

Create or re-arrange an Account button.
2-22 Operation
To an extension refusing the call (DND Override)
PT / SLT
While hearing the DND tone
Over
Operation
OR
2
Press “Over” or dial 2.
Changing the dialling mode (Pulse to Tone Conversion)

To access services such as computer telephone services, Voice Mail, etc., that require a tone, you can
temporarily change the dialling mode from Pulse to Tone.
PT / SLT
After the line is connected
desired no.
Dial #. Enter desired number.
Operation 2-23
Making Calls
Alternating the Calling Method
(Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice)
The calling method, either ring or voice, is set by the

called extension when an intercom call is received. Ring
However, you can change the method temporarily. Ring Hello
Ring-calling (Default) :
OR
You can call the other party with a ring tone.
Voice-calling :
You can talk to the other party immediately after
a confirmation tone.
◆ For voice-calling
PT / SLT
After dialling
Voice
OR
C.Tone
Press “Voice” or . Talk.
◆ For ring-calling
PT / SLT
After dialling
Tone
OR
Press “Tone” or .
• If the called party uses a single line telephone, only Ring-Calling is available.
• You can switch the desired calling method only once during a call.

– Intercom Alert Assignment
Which way do you prefer to receive an intercom call?
2-24 Operation
Receiving Calls
Answering Calls
PT / SLT
Operation
Off-hook. Talk.

· Lift the handset to receive the preferred line.
(Default: Ringing line is selected.)
· Press the SP-PHONE button.
· Press the flashing red CO or green INTERCOM button directly.
+ Customising Your Phone

– Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming
!!
• Hands-free operation
You can have a conversation in the hands-free
Select the seized line when going off hook. mode with the SP-PHONE button. You can
– Intercom Alert Assignment perform other tasks at the same time.
Select the Calling method, either ring or the other Helpful hints for the hands-free operation
party’s voice. – Use your telephone in a quiet room for best
• Customising the Buttons performance.
Re-arrange the CO button and change the ringing – If the other party has difficulty hearing you,
tone for each CO button. decrease the volume.
– If you and the other party talk at the same time,
parts of your conversation will be lost. To avoid
this, talk alternately.
• If the Caller ID feature is available, you may
confirm the caller’s phone number and name
before answering an outside call.
Pressing the SHIFT button displays the outside
line number and name.
<Example>
0111111111 CO1 Panasonic
John Thomas
Extension STA Speed Extension STA Speed
Features SYS Speed Features SYS Speed
Call Log Call Log
SHIFT SHIFT
The caller’s information from your telephone

company will only be sent to the pre-assigned
extension.
Operation 2-25
Receiving Calls
Answering Hands-free
(Hands-free Answerback)
You can answer an intercom call without going off-hook as soon as the line is connected.
You will hear the caller talking without the phone ringing.
u To set / cancel
PT
While on-hook
AUTO ANSWER
MUTE
Press AUTO
ANSWER.
• The AUTO ANSWER button light shows the current status as follows:
On: Set.
Off: Not set.
2-26 Operation
Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone
(Call Pickup)
You can answer an incoming call that is ringing at another extension from your phone without
leaving your desk.
The following types are available:
Operation
Outside (CO) Call Pickup: Picks up an outside call.
Group Call Pickup: Picks up a call within your extension group.
Directed Call Pickup: Picks up a specified extension’s call.
PT / SLT
4 Outside call
OR
4 0 Group C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 4 for an outside call Talk.
or 40 for group.
C.Tone
4 1 Directed extension no.

Dial 41 for directed call. Enter extension
number.
T7431
l Group Call Pickup only
MODE
→ C.Pickup GRP
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Talk.
“Feature Access” until “C.Pickup GRP”
is displayed. is displayed.
T7433
→C . P i c k u p G R P
SHIFT FEAT Call Park 0-9
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. Talk.
“FEAT” is displayed. “C.Pickup GRP” is
at the arrow.
Operation 2-27
Receiving Calls
T7436 / T7235
Features OR C.Pickup Group

NEXT C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “C.Pickup Group”. Talk.
Rotate Jog Dial or
press “NEXT” until the
• If you receive a call waiting tone, you can ask a third

party to pick up your second call with Directed Call
!!• You can also deny other people the possibility
Pickup. of picking up your calls. Refer to “Setting the
• “Group Call Pickup” is not available for an ISDN Telephone According to Your Needs”.
telephone user.
2-28 Operation
Answering a Call via an External Speaker
(Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])
You can answer an incoming outside call paged through an external speaker from any extension.
PT / SLT
Operation
While hearing a tone from external speaker
4 2 speaker no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 42. Enter speaker Talk.
number (1-4).
T7431
MODE
→Page-E ANS 1-4 extension
speaker no.
no.
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter speaker On-hook.
“Feature Access” until “Page-E ANS” number (1-4).
T7433
→P a g e - E A N S 1-4
SHIFT FEAT Page-GRP ANS
MENU SEL
speaker no.
C.Tone
Enter speaker Talk.
Press SHIFT Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial Press “SEL”. number (1-4).
until “FEAT” until “Page-E ANS”
is displayed. is at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
Features OR Page-Ext Answer (1-4) speaker no.

PREV C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Page-Ext Answer”. Enter speaker Talk.
number (1-4).
Rotate Jog Dial or
press “PREV” until the
!!
• You can also receive a paged announcement
via a speaker with this operation.
Operation 2-29
During a Conversation
Holding a Call
– Holding – Holding in a system parking zone

– Denying other people the possibility of retrieving your held calls
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder.
• If a call is not retrieved within thirty minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
Holding (regular)
PT SLT
During a conversation During a conversation
HOLD
(Recall)
5 0
C.Tone C.Tone
Press HOLD. On-hook. Press Recall. Dial 50. On-hook.
u To retrieve a call
PT / SLT
l At the holding extension
(CO) OR INTERCOM
OR
5 0
Off-hook. Press CO/INTERCOM Talk.
or dial 50.
l For an outside call from another extension
(CO)
OR
5 3 held line no.

C.Tone
Off-hook. Press CO or dial 53 and Talk.
held line number (01-54).
l For an intercom call from another extension
5 1 holding ext no.

C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 51. Enter holding Talk.
extension number.
2-30 Operation
• The CO or INTERCOM button light shows the current status as follows:
Flashing green: Your held call
Flashing red: Another extension’s held call
• A single line telephone user can hold either an intercom call or an outside call at one time.
• A proprietary telephone user can hold an intercom call and multiple outside calls.
• To hold multiple intercom calls, use the “Call Park” feature.
Operation
Denying other people the possibility of retrieving
your held calls (Exclusive Call Hold)
Only the held extension can retrieve the call.
PT
HOLD HOLD
C.Tone
Press HOLD. Press HOLD again. On-hook.
u To retrieve a call
PT
(CO)
OR
INTERCOM
Off-hook. Press CO or
INTERCOM.
• You can hold an intercom call and multiple outside calls.
Operation 2-31
Holding in a system parking zone (Call Park)
You can park a call and perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved by any extension.
Up to ten calls can be parked.
u To park a call
PT
5 2 parking zone no.

TRANSFER
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER. Dial 52. Enter parking On-hook.
zone number (0-9).
SLT
(Recall)
5 2 parking zone no.
C.Tone
Press Recall. Dial 52. Enter parking On-hook.
zone number (0-9).
T7431
MODE
→ Call Park 0-9
TRANSFER SELECT MODE
Press TRANSFER. Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT.
“Feature Access” until “Call Park”
parking zone no.

C.Tone
Enter parking On-hook.
zone number (0-9).
2-32 Operation
u To park a call (contd.)
T7433
SHIFT FEAT
Operation
TRANSFER
Press TRANSFER. Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until
“FEAT” is displayed. “Call Park” is at the arrow.
→C a l l P a r k 0-9
COS Primary ext
parking zone no.
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Press “SEL”. Enter parking On-hook.
zone number (0-9).
T7436 / T7235
Features OR Call Park (O-9) parking zone no.

NEXT
Press “Features”. Press “Call Park”. Enter parking
zone number (0-9).
Rotate Jog Dial or
C.Tone
On-hook.
Operation 2-33
u To retrieve
PT / SLT
stored parking
5 2 zone no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 52. Enter stored parking Talk.
zone number (0-9).
T7431
MODE
→ Call Park 0-9
stored parking
SELECT MODE
zone no.
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter stored parking Talk.
“Feature Access” until “Call Park” zone number (0-9).
T7433
→C a l l P a r k 0-9
SHIFT FEAT COS Primary ext
MENU SEL
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. “Call Park” is at the arrow.
stored parking
zone no.
C.Tone
Enter stored parking Talk.
zone number (0-9).
T7436 / T7235
Features OR Call Park (O-9) stored parking

zone no.
NEXT C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Call Park”. Enter stored parking Talk.
Rotate Jog Dial or zone number (0-9).
• This function is not available for an ISDN telephone user. !! • If you hear a busy tone when and entering
the zone number to park a call, the zone is
in use. Enter another number.
• If you hear a reoder tone when retrieving a
parked call, there is no held call. Confirm the
stored parking zone number.
2-34 Operation
Talking to Two Parties Alternately
(Call Splitting)
When talking to one party while the other party is on hold, you can swap the calls back and forth
(alternately).
Operation
PT
During a conversation with a held call During a conversation with a held call
l When either party is an outside party l When both parties are an extension party
Repeat to
alternate.
TRANSFER
OR
HOLD
(CO) HOLD
OR
INTERCOM Press TRANSFER

Press HOLD. or HOLD.
Press CO or
INTERCOM.
SLT
During a conversation with a held call
(Recall)
Press Recall.
Operation 2-35
Transferring a Call
– Transferring to an extension – Transferring to an external party
Transferring to an extension
PT
extension no.
OR
TRANSFER
C.Tone (DSS)
Enter extension Talk. On-hook.

Press TRANSFER. number or press DSS.
The destination is confirmed before

sending. This can be disregarded.
SLT
(Recall)
extension no.
C.Tone
Press Recall. Enter extension Talk. On-hook.
number.

2-36 Operation
Transferring to an external party
Some extensions may be restricted from performing this function.
PT
Operation
(CO)
OR
phone no.
TRANSFER
C.Tone line access
no.
Press TRANSFER. Press CO or enter Enter phone number. Talk. On-hook.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
SLT
line access phone no.

(Recall) no.
C.Tone
Press Recall. Enter line access Enter phone number. Talk. On-hook.
number (9 or 81-88).
• If you misdial, press the FLASH/RCL (PT only) button,

and re-enter the number.
!!• If you transfer a call with the DSS or One-
• To return to the held call before the destination Touch Dialling with Auto Hold button, you
answers, press the TRANSFER button, corresponding do not have to press the Transfer button
CO, INTERCOM button, or the Recall (SLT only). (One-Touch Transfer).
• To return to the conversation after completing the
transfer to an external party, press the corresponding
CO button.
• If you hear an alert tone, the destination extension did
not answer the call. Answer the call.

Create or re-arrange a DSS and One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold button.
Operation 2-37
During a conversation, a call waiting tone or voice announcement through the speaker or the handset
occurs when an outside call is received or another extension is letting you know another call is waiting.
To activate this feature, set to “On”. (Default: No tone) You can answer the second call by
disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.
u To talk to the new party
PT SLT
While hearing a tone While hearing a tone
HOLD (CO)
OR
(Recall)
5 0
INTERCOM
Press Recall and dial 50. On-hook. Off-hook.
Press HOLD. Press CO or INTERCOM.
Disregard this step if you

terminate the current call.
Disregard this step if you Disregard this step if both
terminate the current call. parties are extensions.
• Depending on the other party’s telephone, the “Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)” and the “Whisper
OHCA” functions can be applied. You can talk to the other party through the speaker and the microphone
(OHCA) or you only receive a call announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA), while they are having
another conversation using the handset.
• The calling extension’s name or number is displayed for five seconds in ten second intervals before answering a
call.

• Initial Setting
– Call Waiting Tone Type Selection
Determine the tone depending on the second party, either an outside call or an extension.
Default 15 s
Special Tones 5s
Outside
Extension
2-38 Operation
Three-party Conversation
– Adding a third party during a conversation

– Leaving a conference
Operation
Adding a third party during a conversation (Conference)
PT
desired
CONF party’s no. CONF
C.Tone
Press CONF. Enter desired Press CONF. Talk.
party’s number.
Press a CO button or enter a line access number

(9 or 81-88) before an external phone number.
SLT
desired
(Recall) party’s no. (Recall)
3
C.Tone
Press Recall. Enter desired Press Recall. Dial 3. Talk.
party’s number.
Enter a line access number (9 or 81-88)

before an external phone number.
u To talk to one party by disconnecting the other when one of these parties is an
outside call
PT
(CO)
OR
INTERCOM
C.Tone
Press CO or Talk.
INTERCOM.
Operation 2-39
Leaving a conference
The other two parties can continue their conversation.
PT / SLT PT
When you are talking with two extensions or When you are talking with two external parties
one extension party and one external party (Unattended Conference)
Some extensions may be restricted

CONF
from performing this function.
On-hook. Press CONF.
u To return
PT
While the others are talking
(CO)
Press CO.

Create or re-arrange a Conference button.
2-40 Operation
Saving a Number
(Notebook Function)
You can store a desired outside phone number in memory during a conversation or while
on-hook. You can dial the stored number easily.
Operation
u To store
PT
PT
During a conversation or on-hook status
AUTO DIAL AUTO DIAL

phone no.
STORE STORE (Save)
Press STORE. Press STORE again. Enter phone number. Press SAVE.
(max. 24 digits)
u To dial
PT
(Save)
Off-hook. Press SAVE.
• You do not have to store a line access number before the phone number. An outside line is automatically accessed.
• “ ” and “#” can also be stored as a digit.

Create or re-arrange a Conference button.
Operation 2-41
Mute
You can disable the microphone or the handset to consult privately with others in the
room while listening to the other party on the phone through the speaker or the
handset.
There are two types of mute as follows:
Handset Mute: During a conversation using the handset.
This function is available for the KX-T7400 series telephone users
only.
Microphone Mute: During a conversation using the microphone.
u To set / cancel
PT
AUTO ANSWER
MUTE
Press MUTE.
• The AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button light shows the current status as follows:
Flashing red: Mute
Off: Normal
2-42 Operation
Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation
(Off-Hook Monitor) [KX-T7400 series telephone only]
You can let other people in the room listen to the conversation through the speaker while continuing the
conversation using the handset.
Operation
u To set / cancel
PT
SP-PHONE
Press SP-PHONE.
• This feature is only available during a conversation using the handset.

• The SP-PHONE button light shows the current status as follows:
On: The voice is heard through the speaker.
Off: The voice is heard through the handset.
Operation 2-43
Before Leaving Your Desk
Forwarding Your Calls
(Call Forwarding)
You can have your incoming calls forwarded to a

specific destination. Internal destination may be an
extension or a receiving group.
All Calls: All calls are forwarded to another internal destination.

Busy: All calls are forwarded to another internal destination when your extension is busy.
No Answer:
All calls are forwarded to another internal destination when you do not answer the call.
Busy/No Answer (BSY / NA):
All calls are forwarded to another internal destination when you do not answer or when your
extension is busy.
To Outside Line (CO Line):
All calls are forwarded to an external party. Some extensions may be restricted.
Follow Me (From):
If you forget to set “All Calls” to be forwarded before you leave your desk, you can set the
same functions from the destination extension.
By ISDN Line:
All calls are forwarded to an external party by ISDN line in one of the following conditions.
– Unconditionally (Call Forwarding Unconditional [CFU])
– When you do not answer (Call Forwarding No Reply [CFNR])
– When your extension is busy (Call Forwarding Busy [CFB])
Some extensions may be restricted.
!!• You can set your mailbox or mobile telephone

as the forwarding destination.
2-44 Operation
◆ To set (except “Call Forwarding by ISDN Line”)
PT / SLT
For “Follow Me”, dial
2 All Calls your extension number.
FWD/DND 3 Busy
OR 4 No Answer extension no.
5 Busy/No Answer
7 1 0 C.Tone
Operation
7 Follow Me
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Enter extension On-hook.
or dial 710. Enter required number. number.
(Max. 24 digits)
To line access phone no.

6 Outside line no.
Dial 6 to select Enter line access Enter phone

“To Outside Line”. number (9 or 81-88). number.
C.Tone
Dial #. On-hook.
T7436 / T7235
FWD/DND Cancel
DND (0/*/ext)
FWD-All Calls (ext)
FWD-Busy (ext)
(ext)
extension no.
FWD/DND FWD-No Answer
MENU PREV NEXT C.Tone
OR
Off-hook. Press NEXT Enter extension On-hook.
FWD/DND. number.
FWD-BSY/NA (ext)
FWD-CO Line (dial)
FWD-From (ext)
FWD-From Cancel (ext) For “FWD-From” (Follow Me),
dial your extension number
MENU PREV NEXT
(Max. 24 digits)

FWD-CO Line (dial) no.
Press desired button. Enter line access Enter phone

number (9 or 81-88). number.
C.Tone
Dial #. On-hook.
Operation 2-45
◆ To cancel (except “Call Forwarding by ISDN Line”)
PT / SLT
FWD/DND
OR 0
7 1 0 C.Tone
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Dial 0. On-hook.
or dial 710.
From destination
C.Tone
your
8 extension no.
Dial 8. Enter your

extension number.
T7436 / T7235
FWD/DND
FWD/DND Cancel
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press Press FWD/DND Cancel. On-hook.
FWD/DND.
From destination
C.Tone
your
FWD-From Cancel (ext) extension no.
Press FWD-From Cancel. Enter your

extension number.
◆ To set “Call Forwarding by ISDN Line”
PT / SLT
9 2 1 CFU
FWD/DND OR
OR your MSN
9 3 1 CFB
7 1 0 OR
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND

9 4 1 CFNR
Enter your multiple
or dial 710. subscriber number
Enter required number. (MSN).
# phone no. #
C.Tone
Dial #. Enter phone Dial #. On-hook.
number.
2-46 Operation
◆ To cancel “Call Forwarding by ISDN Line”
PT / SLT
9 0 All
OR
FWD/DND
9 2 0 CFU
OR your MSN
OR
7 1 0
Operation
9 3 0 CFB
OR
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Enter your multiple
or dial 710. 9 4 0 CFNR subscriber number
(MSN).
Enter required number.
#
C.Tone
Dial #. On-hook.
• Each call can be forwarded up to four times. The fifth time will be disregarded.
Incoming
call
A B C D E F
once twice three times four times five times
Original
destination
• Boss-Secretary function
The extension which has been set as the destination can call the forwarding extension. Also, any extension in the
receiving group which has been set as the forwarded destination can call the forwarding extension.
<Example> Call
Receiving group 1
Forward
Fowarding set
extension
• The FWD/DND button light flashes red when the Call Forwarding feature is set.

Create or re-arrange a FWD/DND button.
Operation 2-47
Forwarding Calls from a Receiving Group
(Call Forwarding – from Hunting Group)
Pre-assigned extension users can forward calls arriving at any receiving group or calls arriving just at
your own receiving group. The destination can be another receiving group or a specific extension.
◆ To set
PT / SLT
forwarding destination group

7 1 4 1 group no. or extension no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 7141. Enter forwarding Enter destination On-hook.
group number. group number or
extension number.
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
forwarding
7 1 4 0 group no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 7140. Enter forwarding On-hook.
group number.
• You can set or cancel this feature by simply pressing the Call Forwarding from Hunting Group button.
If set, the button light turns red.
• Each call can be forwarded up to four times. The fifth time will be disregarded.
Incoming
call
A B C D E F
once twice three times four times five times
Original
destination
• Boss-Secretary function
The destination extension can call the forwarding receiving group.
<Example>
Call
Receiving group 1
Forward
Destination set
extension

Create or re-arrange a Call Forwarding from Hunting Group button.
2-48 Operation
Showing an Absent Message on the Caller’s
Telephone Display (Absent Message Capability)
You can show the reason for your absence, if the calling extension uses a Panasonic proprietary
telephone with a display. This way the caller will know when you will be available. You can choose one
of nine messages.
Operation
Message no. Default Message
1 Will Return Soon
2 Gone Home
3 At Ext %%% (Extension number)
4 Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute)
5 Out until %%/%% (Month/Day)
6 In a Meeting
• Enter the desired value in the “%” space.

You must make your message in all of the “%”s using 0 to 9, #, or .
• The message can be changed. Consult your dealer.
◆ To set
PT / SLT
1 Will Return Soon
2 Gone Home
3 At Ext %%% + Extension no.
4 Back at %%:%% + Hour : Minute
7 5 0 5 Out until %%/%% + Month / Day
6 In a Meeting C.Tone
7
8
9
Operation 2-49
◆ To set (contd.)
T7431
1 Will Return Soon
2 Gone Home
MODE 3
→ ABST MSG On 1-9 At Ext %%% + Extension no.
SELECT MODE
5 Out until %%/%% + Month / Day
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. 6 In a Meeting
“Feature Access” until “ABST MSG On” 7
is displayed. is displayed. 8
9
C.Tone
On-hook.
T7433
→A B S T M S G O n 1-9
SHIFT FEAT C.Pickup GRP
MENU SEL
“FEAT” is displayed. “ABST MSG On” is
at the arrow.
1 Will Return Soon

2 Gone Home
6 In a Meeting C.Tone
7 On-hook.
8
9
T7436 / T7235 1 Will Return Soon

2 Gone Home
Features OR Absent MSG On (1-9)
NEXT 6 In a Meeting
7
Press “Features”. Press “Absent MSG On”.
8
Rotate Jog Dial or 9
following is displayed. Enter required number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
2-50 Operation
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
7 5 0 0
C.Tone
Operation
T7431
MODE
→ ABST MSG Off
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. On-hook.
“Feature Access” until “ABST MSG
is displayed. Off” is displayed.
T7433
→A B S T M S G O f f
SHIFT FEAT ABST MSG On 1-9
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. On-hook.
“FEAT” is displayed. “ABST MSG Off” is
at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
Features OR Absent MSG Off

NEXT C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Absent MSG Off”. On-hook.
Rotate Jog Dial or
!!
• To confirm the message, go off-hook.
It will be displayed.
Operation 2-51
Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone
(Electronic Station Lockout)
◆ To lock / unlock
PT / SLT
desired code same code Lock

7 7 OR
stored code Unlock C.Tone

Enter code (3 digits) twice or once.
• If you forget the code or cannot unlock your phone, consult an operator. They can unlock your extension
(Remote Station Lock Control).
2-52 Operation
Leaving a Call Distribution Group
(Log-In / Log-Out)
You can set your status in a receiving group. Set

Log-Out when you leave the office so that incoming
calls will temporarily skip your extension in the
Operation
receiving order. When you return, set Log-In so that
calls will reach your extension. (Default: Log-In)
log in log out
PT / SLT
0 Log-Out group no. Specific

OR
4 5 OR
1 Log-In All C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 45. Dial 0 to log-out Enter specific group number On-hook.
or 1 to log-in. or dial for all.
• The Log-In / Log-Out button alternates the setting between Log-In and Log-Out modes. The button light shows
the current status as follows:
Off: Log-In mode
Red on: Log-Out mode
Flashing red: a call waiting

Create or re-arrange a Log-In / Log-Out button.
Operation 2-53
Making / Answering an Announcement
Paging
You can make a voice announcement to several people

at the same time. Your message is sent over the
proprietary telephone speakers and/or external speakers.
The paged person can answer your paging from any
telephone. There are three types as shown below:
All: Paging through both the telephone speakers and
external speakers.
External: Paging through the external speakers.
Group: Paging to a particular extension group or all
groups (all extensions) through the telephone
speakers.
◆ All
PT / SLT
6 2
OR
6 3 C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 62 or 63 . Announce. Talk.
◆ External
PT / SLT
speaker no. Specific
6 2 OR
All
0 C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 62. Enter specific speaker number Announce. Talk.
(1-4) or 0 for all.
T7431
MODE
→ Page Extrn 0-4 OR
SELECT MODE
0 All
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter specific speaker number
“Feature Access” until “Page Extrn” (1-4) or 0 for all.
C.Tone
Announce. Talk.
2-54 Operation
◆ External (contd.)
T7433
→P a g e E x t r n 0-4
SHIFT FEAT Page GRP 00-16
MENU SEL
Operation
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. until “Page Extrn”
is at the arrow.

OR
0 All C.Tone
Enter specific speaker number Announce. Talk.
(1-4) or 0 for all.
T7436 / T7235

Features Paging External (0-4) OR
OR
PREV 0 All
Press “Features”. Press “Paging External”. Enter specific speaker number

Rotate Jog Dial or (1-4) or 0 for all.
C.Tone
Announce. Talk.
◆ Group
PT / SLT
group no. Specific
6 3 OR
0 0 All C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 63. Enter specific group number Announce. Talk.
(01-16) or 00 for all.
Operation 2-55
◆ Group (contd.)
T7431
group no. Specific
MODE
→ Page GRP 00-16 OR
SELECT MODE
0 0 All
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter specific group number
“Feature Access” until “Page GRP” (01-16) or 00 for all.
C.Tone
Announce. Talk.
T7433
→P a g e G R P 00-16
SHIFT FEAT Parallel 1/0
MENU SEL
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial Press “SEL”.
“FEAT” is displayed. until “Page GRP”
is at the arrow.
group no. Specific

OR
0 0 All C.Tone
Enter specific group number Announce. Talk.
(01-16) or 00 for all.
T7436 / T7235
group no. Specific

Features OR Paging Group (00-16) OR
PREV 0 0 All
Press “Features”. Press “Paging Group”. Enter specific group number

Rotate Jog Dial or (01-16) or 00 for all.
C.Tone
Announce. Talk.
• A ringing, busy, Do Not Disturb extension, or a single line telephone cannot receive a paged announcement.
• The proprietary telephone user can deny a paged announcement. For more details, refer to the page 2-65.
2-56 Operation
Paging a Person and Transferring a Call
◆ Through a speaker and telephones
PT
Operation
6 2
OR
TRANSFER
6 3 C.Tone
Press TRANSFER. Dial 62 or 63 . Announce. Wait for an answer.
C.Tone
Talk. On-hook.
SLT
6 2
(Recall)
OR
6 3 C.Tone
Press Recall. Dial 62 or 63 . Announce. Wait for an answer.
C.Tone
Talk. On-hook.
◆ Through a speaker
PT
TRANSFER
6 2 OR
All
0 C.Tone
Press TRANSFER. Dial 62. Enter specific speaker number Announce.

(1-4) or 0 for all.
C.Tone
Wait for an answer. Talk. On-hook.
Operation 2-57
◆ Through a speaker (contd.)
SLT
(Recall)
6 2 OR
All
0 C.Tone
Press Recall. Dial 62. Enter specific speaker number Announce.

(1-4) or 0 for all.
C.Tone
◆ Through the telephone of a particular extension group
PT
group no. Specific
TRANSFER
6 3 OR
0 0 All C.Tone
Press TRANSFER. Dial 63. Enter specific group number Announce.

(01-16) or 00 for all.
C.Tone
SLT
group no. Specific
(Recall)
6 3 OR
0 0 All C.Tone
Press Recall. Dial 63. Enter specific group number Announce.

(01-16) or 00 for all.
C.Tone
2-58 Operation
Answering a Paged Announcement
◆ Through a speaker
PT / SLT
Operation
4 2 speaker no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 42. Enter speaker Talk.
number (1-4).
T7431
MODE
→ Page-E ANS 1-4 extension
speaker no.
no.
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter speaker Talk.
“Feature Access” until “Page-E ANS” number (1-4).
T7433
→P a g e - E A N S 1-4
SHIFT FEAT Page-GRP ANS
MENU SEL
“FEAT” is displayed. “Page-E ANS” is
at the arrow.
speaker no.
C.Tone
Enter speaker Talk.
number (1-4).
T7436 / T7235
Features OR Answer
Page-ExtExt-Page
Answer (→1-4)
(1-4) speaker no.
PREV C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Page-Ext Answer”. Enter speaker Talk.

Rotate Jog Dial or number (1-4).
Operation 2-59
◆ Through the telephones
PT / SLT
4 3
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 43. Talk.
T7431
MODE
→ Page-GRP ANS
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT. Talk.
“Feature Access” “Page-GRP ANS” is
is displayed. displayed.
T7433
→P a g e - G R P A N S
SHIFT FEAT Page Extrn 0-4
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. Talk.
“FEAT” is displayed. “Page-GRP ANS” is
at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
Features OR Page-GRP Answer

PREV C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Page-GRP Answer”. Talk.
Rotate Jog Dial or
2-60 Operation
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
Setting the Alarm
(Timed Reminder)
You can receive a ringback alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting, appointment or as a
wake-up call. The setting can be for either one time or daily (every day until cancelled) at a pre-set
time.
Operation
◆ To set
PT / SLT
0 AM 0 One Time
7 6 1 hour / minute OR OR
1 PM 1 Daily
Off-hook. Dial 761. Enter hour (01-12) Dial 0 for AM Dial 0 for one time
and minute (00-59). or 1 for PM. or 1 for daily.
C.Tone
On-hook.
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
7 6 0
C.Tone
◆ To view the setting
D – PT
7 6 2
Operation 2-61
◆ To stop or answer the ringback
PT / SLT
any key
OR
Press any key or

off-hook and on-hook.
• The alarm tone keeps ringing for thirty seconds.

• If you receive an incoming call during ringback,
!!
When the daily alarm is set, the display shows “*”
ringing starts after the ringback stops. in the corner.
• If you are having a conversation during the pre-set
time, the ringback will start after your conversation. Alarm 10:10AM*
• If you go off-hook to answer, you can hear the alarm tone
or the recorded message which the operator pre-
assigned.
2-62 Operation
Refusing Incoming Calls
(Do Not Disturb [DND])
– Refusing all calls – Refusing direct outside calls
Operation
Refusing all calls
You may set this feature during a meeting or when you are busy. Outside calls can be forwarded to a
backup station (pre-assigned extension or the operator).
◆ To set
PT / SLT
extension no. Extension
FWD/DND OR
OR
1 0 Operator
7 1 0 OR
C.Tone
No backup station
or dial 710.
Enter extension number, dial 0
or dial as you desire.
T7436 / T7235
extension no. Extension
OR
DND @(0/*/ext) 0 Operator

FWD/DND
OR C.Tone
No backup station
Off-hook. Press Press “DND”. On-hook.
FWD/DND.
Enter extension number, dial 0
or dial as you desire.
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
FWD/DND
OR
0
7 1 0 C.Tone
or dial 710.
Operation 2-63
◆ To cancel (contd.)
T7436 / T7235
FWD/DND Cancel
FWD/DND
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND. Press “FWD/DND Cancel”. On-hook.
Refusing direct outside calls (DND for Direct Dialling In Calls)

You can set your extension to refuse direct outside calls and have them forwarded to the operator. The
operator cannot set this feature.
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
1 Set
OR
5 4
0 Cancel
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 54. Dial 1 to set or On-hook.
0 to cancel.
• A flashing CO button tells you an outside call is received. You can answer the call by pressing the CO button.
• The following button lights turn red when the DND feature is set.
– Your FWD/DND button.
– The DSS button on other extensions where your extension number has been assigned.
• The following features cannot be set at the same time.
– Forwarding your calls (Call Forwarding)
– Refusing all calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
– Refusing direct outside calls (DND for Direct Dialling In Calls)
The most recent feature set overrides the previous setting.
• You can set or cancel the DND for Direct Dialling In Call feature by simply pressing the DND for DDI button. If
set, the button light turns red.
• These features are not available for an ISDN telephone user.

Create or re-arrange a FWD/DND button and DND for DDI button.
2-64 Operation
Receiving a Call Waiting
(Call Waiting / Off-Hook Call Announcement [OHCA] / Whisper OHCA)
During a conversation, you can be informed a call waiting with a tone or voice announcement through
your speaker or handset. (Default: No tone)
Call waiting tone: a waiting tone through the handset
Operation
You can change the tone, refer to “Customising Your phone”.
OHCA: a voice announcement through the speaker without pre-information
(KX-T7436 and KX-T7235 telephone users only)
Whisper OHCA: a voice announcement through the handset without pre-information
(KX-T7400 series telephone users only)
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
0 No tone
OR
1 Tone
7 3 1 OR
2 OHCA C.Tone
OR
3 Whisper OHCA
Dial 0 to 3 as you desire.
• You can set or cancel the Call Waiting features by simply pressing the Call Waiting button. Pressing this button
changes the features as follows:
Tone OHCA Whisper OHCA No tone
If the Call Waiting tone, OHCA or Whisper OHCA is selected, the button light turns red.

Create or re-arrange a Call Waiting button.
Operation 2-65
Denying the Paged Announcement
(Paging — DENY)
You can refuse any paged announcement sent through your speaker.
PT
1 Deny
OR
7 2 1
0 Allow
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 721. Dial 1 to deny On-hook.
or 0 to allow.
• You can deny or allow this feature by simply pressing the Paging Deny button. If denied, the button light turns
red.

Create or re-arrange a Paging Deny button.
2-66 Operation
Displaying Your Number on the Called Party and
Calling Party’s Telephone
(Calling / Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP / COLP])
CLIP : When making an outside call, you can let the other party see your pre-assigned identification
Operation
number.
COLP : When receiving an outside call, you can let the party calling you see your pre-assigned
identification number.
You can select to show an identification number assigned for an outside line or your extension.
You can also show a desired identification number when making a particular call.
◆ To show an identification number assigned for an outside line or your extension

PT / SLT
1 Outside line
OR
7 1 1
2 Extension
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 711. Dial 1 for outside line On-hook.
or 2 for extension.
◆ To show a desired identification number when making a particular call (CLIP only)
PT / SLT
desired
7 1 1 3 identification no. #
Off-hook. Dial 7113. Enter desired Dial #.

identification number.
(CO)
OR
phone no.
C.Tone line access
no.
Press CO or enter Enter phone number. Talk.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
• The system is in accordance with ETS specifications below.

ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation
!! • Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN
(CLIP) supplementary service service of your telephone company.
ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction • The entered identification number must match the
(CLIR) supplementary service conditions of your telephone company. Otherwise
ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation it might be ignored or replaced by another value.
(COLP) supplementary service
ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction
(COLR) supplementary service
ETS : European Telecommunication Standard
Operation 2-67
Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the
Called Party’s Telephone
(Calling Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])
When making a call, you can prevent the other party from seeing your identification number. You can
change the setting at any time for a particular call.
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
2 Set
OR
5 9
0 Cancel C.Tone
0 to cancel.
◆ To change the setting at any time for a particular call
PT / SLT
(CO)
OR
5 9 1 phone no.
line access
no.
Off-hook. Dial 591. Press CO or enter Enter phone number. Talk.
line access number
(9 or 81-88).
• You can set or cancel this feature by simply pressing the

CLIR button. If set, the button light turns red.
!!
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN
☞
service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
Create or re-arrange a Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR) button.
2-68 Operation
Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the
Calling Party’s Telephone
(Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR])
When receiving a call, you can prevent the party calling you from seeing your identification number.
Operation
◆ To set / cancel
PT / SLT
1 Set
OR
5 8
0 Cancel C.Tone
0 to cancel.
• You can set or cancel this feature by simply pressing the

COLR button. If set, the button light turns red.
!!• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN
service of your telephone company.

Create or re-arrange a Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR) button.
Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking up

Your Calls (Call Pickup Deny)
PT / SLT
1 Deny
OR
7 2 0
0 Allow
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 720. Dial 1 to deny On-hook.
or 0 to allow.
• You can deny or allow or cancel this feature by simply pressing the Call Pickup Deny button. If it is denied, the
button light turns red.

Create or re-arrange a Call Pickup Deny button.
Operation 2-69
Turning on the Background Music
You can listen to background music through your telephone speaker while on-hook.
An external music source, such as a radio, must be connected.
◆ To set / cancel
PT
While on-hook
BGM
OR
HOLD
Press “BGM” or HOLD.
Checking the Day / Night Service Status
You can manage your system under different

conditions for either day time (business hours) or
night time (after business hours).
D – PT
While on-hook
OR
(Night)
Dial # or press Night.
• Any extension user can check the status.

• The Night button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Red: Night mode

Create or re-arrange a Night button.
2-70 Operation
Setting the Parallel Connected Telephone Ringer
(Parallelled Telephone)
A proprietary telephone user can choose whether the single line telephone
connected in parallel will ring or not, when an incoming call is received.
(Default: No ring)
Operation
PT / SLT
1 Ring
OR
6 9
0 No ring
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 69. Dial 1 to ring On-hook.
or 0 to no ring.
T7431
1 Ring
MODE
→ Parallel 1/0 OR
SELECT MODE 0 No ring
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Dial 1 to ring
“Feature Access” until “Parallel” or 0 to no ring.
C.Tone
On-hook.
T7433
→P a r a l l e l 1/0
SHIFT FEAT ABST MSG Off
MENU SEL
“FEAT” is displayed. “Parallel” is at the arrow.
1 Ring
OR
0 No ring
C.Tone
Dial 1 to ring On-hook.
or 0 to no ring.
Operation 2-71
T7436 / T7235
1 Ring
Features Parallel On/Off (1/0) OR
OR
PREV 0 No ring
C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Parallel On/Off”. Dial 1 to ring On-hook.
Rotate Jog Dial or or 0 to no ring.
• You can select “Ring” or “No ring” by simply pressing the Parallelled Telephone Connection button. If “Ring” is
selected, the button light turns red.
• Even if “No ring” is selected, the call can be answered with the single line telephone by lifting the handset.
• If you go off-hook while your parallelled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to your telephone, and vice
versa.

Create or re-arrange a Parallelled Telephone Connection button.
2-72 Operation
Clearing the Feature Settings at Your Extension
(Station Program Clear)
You can clear the following features which have been set on your phone. If you change desks, and
notice settings which a previous owner left on the line, you can clear these features.
Operation
• Calling to a Pre-set Party by Going Off-Hook (Pickup Dialling): The stored number will be cleared.
• Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic Callback Busy)
• Leaving a Message Waiting Indication (Message Waiting): All messages will be removed.
• Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding)
• Showing an Absent Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message Capability)
• Leaving a Call Distribution Group (Log-In/Log-out)
• Calling Using the Call Log (Incoming Call Log)
• Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
• Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
• Receiving a Call Waiting (Call Waiting / Off-Hook Call Announcement [OHCA] / Whisper OHCA)
• Denying the Paged Announcement (Paging — Deny)
• Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking up Your Calls (Call Pickup Deny)
• Turning on the Background Music
• Setting the Parallel Connected Telephone Ringer (Parallelled Telephone): The single line telephone
will not ring.
• Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (CLIR)
• Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Calling Party’s Telephone (COLR)
PT / SLT
7 9 0
C.Tone
Operation 2-73
Using User-supplied Equipment
If a Doorphone / Door Opener is Connected
– Doorphone call – Opening the door

– Forwarding doorphone call to outside paties
Doorphone call
◆ To call from the doorphone

Doorphone
Press doorphone
button.
◆ To call the doorphone
PT / SLT
6 1 doorphone no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 61. Enter doorphone Talk.
number (1-4).
2-74 Operation
Forwarding doorphone calls to outside parties
(Doorphone Call Forwarding to Outside Line)
You can have incoming doorphone calls forwarded to outside parties using ISDN lines.
You can choose a different destination for Day mode and Night mode.
◆ To set / cancel (at the extension receiving doorphone calls)
Operation
PT / SLT
doorphone no. Specific 1 Set

OR
7 1 6 OR
All 0 Cancel C.Tone

Off-hook. Dial 716. Enter specific doorphone Dial 1 to set On-hook.
number (1-4) or dial for all. or 0 to cancel.

PT / SLT
0 Day doorphone no. Specific

OR
7 1 5 OR
1 Night
All
Off-hook. Dial 715. Dial 0 for Day mode Enter specific doorphone
or 1 for Night mode. number (1-4) or dial for all.
(Max. 24 digits)

no. #
C.Tone
Enter line access Enter phone Dial #. On-hook.
number (9 or 81-88). number.
◆ To clear the phone number

PT / SLT
0 Day doorphone no. Specific

OR
7 1 5 OR
1 Night
All
Off-hook. Dial 715. Dial 0 for Day mode Enter specific doorphone
or 1 for Night mode. number (1-4) or dial for all.
#
C.Tone
Dial #. On-hook.
Operation 2-75
• You can set or cancel this feature by simply pressing the Doorphone Call Forwarding to Outside Line button.
If set, the button light turns red.
• Time limit
A call between a party at a doorphone and an outside party is restricted by the system timer (Default: 0 sec.).
The call is disconnected when the time runs out.

Create or re-arrange a Doorphone Call Forwarding to Outside Line button.
Opening the door

◆ From a specified extension
PT / SLT
door opener
5 5 no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 55. Enter door opener On-hook.
number (1-4).
◆ From any extension while talking to the doorphone
PT SLT
5 (Recall)
5
C.Tone C.Tone
Dial 5. On-hook. Press RECALL. Dial 5. On-hook.
• The door will be left open for five seconds.

• To keep the door open for another five seconds, dial 5 again using a Panasonic proprietary telephone.
• If no one answers the doorphone call within 30 seconds, the call is cancelled.
2-76 Operation
If a Host PBX is Connected
Accessing external services (External Feature Access)

You can access special features (e.g. Call
Operation
Waiting) offered by a host PBX or Central D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTEM
Office. This feature is only effective with

an outside call.
Panaso
nic
PT SLT
FLASH / RCL
OR desired no. (Recall)

6 4 desired no.
TRANSFER
6 4 Press Recall. Dial 64.
Enter desired number. Enter desired number.
Press FLASH/RCL or
TRANSFER and dial 64 .
Operation 2-77
If a Voice Processing System is Connected
– Voice mail integration

If your system is connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System (e.g. KX-TVP100) which can be
used with a digital proprietary telephone, the following functions are available:
– Screening calls – Recording a conversation
Voice mail integration

If you cannot answer calls, you can forward them to your mailbox. If your telephone has a MESSAGE
button, the button light turns on and lets you know you have messages. Even if a MESSAGE button is
not provided, you will hear an indication tone* when going off-hook.
You can also transfer received outside calls to a certain mailbox so that callers can leave messages.
If you create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone, the transfer is done easily without confirming
the voice mail extension number (Voice Mail Transfer).
◆ To forward your calls to a mailbox
PT / SLT
2 All Calls
FWD/DND
3 Busy voice mail
OR
4 No Answer extension no.
7 1 0 5 Busy/No Answer
C.Tone
Off-hook. Press FWD/DND Enter Enter voice mail On-hook.
or dial 710. required number. extension number.
T7436 / T7235
FWD/DND Cancel
DND (0/*/ext)
FWD-All Calls (ext)
FWD-Busy (ext) voice mail
FWD/DND FWD-No Answer (ext) extension no.
MENU PREV NEXT C.Tone
OR
Off-hook. Press NEXT Enter voice mail On-hook.
FWD/DND. extension number.
FWD-BSY/NA (ext)
FWD-CO Line (dial)
FWD-From (ext)
FWD-From Cancel (ext)
MENU PREV NEXT
Press desired button.
2-78 Operation
◆ Transferring calls
PT
extension no.
OR
(VM Transfer)
(DSS)
Operation
Press VM Transfer. Enter extension
◆ To listen to a stored message
PT / SLT
MESSAGE
OR
voice mail
extension no.
Off-hook. Press MESSAGE or
voice mail extension number.
*Indication tone
1s

Create or re-arrange a MESSAGE button and Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button.
Operation 2-79
Screening calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox, you can monitor the call. If
desired, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two methods
available (Default: Hands-free mode). In both modes, if you are currently having
a conversation, you will hear a call waiting tone.
Hands-free mode: You can monitor the message automatically through the
telephone speaker at the same time.
Private mode: You will hear an alert tone while the caller is leaving a message.
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the Password.
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
◆ To set / cancel the password
PT
desired same Set
password password
7 9 9 OR
stored C.Tone
password Cancel
Enter password (3 digits) twice or once.
◆ To set Live Call Screening
PT
password
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call Enter password.

Screening.
◆ To cancel Live Call Screening
PT
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call

Screening.
2-80 Operation
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be hands-free operations.
PT
Hands-free Mode Private Mode

Operation
(Call Waiting Tone)
(Alert Tone)
*1
Monitoring On-hook. Monitoring Stopping the alert tone

No operation SP-PHONE FLASH / RCL
OR OR
MONITOR
Off-hook.
Stop (LCS Cancel)
monitoring Answering OR Press

FLASH/RCL
(Live Call or LCS Cancel.
Screening)
FLASH / RCL
(Live Call
Screening) Press
OR OR SP-PHONE,
Off-hook. MONITOR or
SP-PHONE
Live Call
(LCS Cancel) Screening.
Press Press Live Call
FLASH/RCL Screening or
or LCS Cancel. SP-PHONE.
Stop monitoring Answering the call
FLASH / RCL
(Live Call (Live Call
Screening) Screening)
OR On-hook. OR Off-hook. Press
SP-PHONE Live Call
(LCS Cancel) Screening.
Press Press Live Call
FLASH/RCL Screening or
or LCS Cancel. SP-PHONE.
*1 To hold the current call, press the HOLD button.
• The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Red on: LCS is on.
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alert ringing in the Private mode*2
Flashing green slowly: Live Call Screening is in use.*2
*2 The DSS button light is red while Live Call Screening is in use.
• The operator can clear a password at any extension.

– Live Call Screening Mode Set
Select the mode, either monitoring the message automatically or receiving alert ringing, when the caller
leaves a message.
Create or re-arrange a Live Call Screening button and Live Call Screening Cancel button.
Operation 2-81
Recording a conversation (Two-Way Recording)
You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
◆ To record into your mailbox
PT
To stop recording,
(Two-Way
press this button again.
Record)
Press Two-Way
Record.
◆ To record into another mailbox
PT
extension no.
OR
(Two-Way
Transfer)
(DSS)
Press Two-Way Enter extension

Transfer. number or press DSS.
To stop recording,
press this button again.
• The Two-Way Record button light shows the current

status as follows:
!!• When you record Two-Way telephone
On: Recording the conversation.
conversations, you should inform the other party
Off: Not recording.
that the conversation is being recorded.

Create or re-arrange a Two-Way Record button and Two-Way Transfer button.
2-82 Operation
Using the Display Proprietary Telephone
Calling Using the Call Log
(Incoming Call Log) [KX-T7433, KX-T7436, KX-T7230, KX-T7235 only]
If you do not answer an outside call, the caller’s information is recorded automatically in the call log.
When the SHIFT button light turns on, there is a call in the call log. You can also store a call log during
a conversation. (See “Recording a Call Log”.) Up to 15 calls can be logged per extension. You can
Operation
select how the 16th call is treated; either a new call can be disregarded or a new call overwrites the
oldest call. (Default: Overwrite)
You can modify and call back the logged numbers.
u To confirm
D – PT
While on-hook <Information sample>
CO02:Panasonic Outside line no. & name
OLD 012345678 Phone no.
Nina Thomas Caller’s name
OR
22 09:00 AM Receipt date & time
Seq01 2 Calls Sequence no. & calling time (max. 15)
NEW MENU CLR NEXT
OLD:Information you have already confirmed.

Press “OLD” or “NEW”. NEW:Information you have not yet confirmed.
• With the KX-T7433 and the KX-T7230, press the INFO

button to scroll through information.
!! • To modify the phone no, press the “ ” key to
Sequence number,
erase and then enter the number. The number
Sequence number CO line number is modified from the first digit. The new
date, time and number
and a name and CO line name
of times called number is programmed.
• To return to the initial display, press MENU
button or go off-hook and on-hook.
u To clear the log
D – PT
CLR
Press “CLR”.
Operation 2-83
◆ To call back
D – PT
When the desired number is displayed
CALL
Operation
Off-hook. Press “CALL”.
◆ How to treat the 16th call

D – PT
1 Overwrite
OR
5 6
0 Disregard C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 56. Dial 1 to overwrite On-hook.
or 0 to disregard.
Operation 2-83
Recording a Call Log
[KX-T7433, KX-T7436, KX-T7230, KX-T7235 only]
You can record the caller’s information in the call log to call them back. If you do not answer the call,
the log is recorded automatically. You can see the call duration during the conversation.
◆ To record a call log
D – PT
LOG
Press “LOG”.
◆ To view the call duration*
D – PT
<Display example>
CO02 12:00'30
(CO)
Extension STA Speed
Features SYS Speed
Press CO. Call Log
LOG
* A KX-T7433 and a KX-T7230 users may change the displayed message as follows by pressing the CO button.
Caller’s phone no. Caller’s name Call duration / Sequence no.
2-84 Operation
Denying Other People the Possibility of Seeing Your
Call Log (Incoming Call Log Lock) [KX-T7433, KX-T7436, KX-T7230, KX-T7235 only]
D – PT
Operation
desired code same code Lock
5 7 OR
stored code Unlock C.Tone

Off-hook. Dial 57. Enter code (3 digits) twice or once. On-hook.
• If you forget the code, consult your operator. They can unlock the call log display of any extension (Incoming
Call Log Lock Control).
Operation 2-85
Using the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 or
KX-T7235
– Using the KX-T7431 – Using the KX-T7235
– Using the KX-T7433 – Storing the names and numbers for station speed dialling
– Using the KX-T7436 – Display feature list
Using the KX-T7431

A KX-T7431 Panasonic proprietary telephone with a 1-line display allows you to make calls and operate
the features using the display message. You do not have to memorise the phone numbers or feature
numbers.
Operation
1 Press the MODE button repeatedly to show the desired display.
2 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired message is shown.
(See page 2-92 for the feature messages.)
3 Press the SELECT button or go off-hook to call the displayed party or to select the desired feature.
4 Enter parameters if required.
MODE MODE
< Initial Display > < Seventh Display > < Sixth Display >
1 Jan 10:10 Contrast: 3 Ringer: 3
MODE MODE
MODE MODE MODE
< Second Display > < Third Display > < Fourth Display > < Fifth Display >
System Speed Station Speed Extension Feature Access
Calling using Calling using names Calling an intercom Operating the

names stored in and numbers stored call using the various features
the system at your extension directory (System Feature
(System Speed (Station Speed (Extension Dialling) Access)
Dialling) Dialling)*
→Tom Jones →ABST MSG On 1-9

SELECT MODE SELECT MODE
If a parameter is required,
OR
the feature name and
parameter will flash.
* The names and phone numbers
should be stored beforehand. parameter
See page 2-91.
2-86 Operation
Using the KX-T7433
numbers.
Operation
1 Press the SHIFT button repeatedly to show the third display.
Operation
2 Press the desired button, if required.
3 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired message is at the arrow.
4 Press the CALL button or go off-hook to call the party or the SEL button to select the desired feature.
< Initial Display >

1 Jan 15:00
CONT RING BGM
SHIFT
< Second Display >
OLD1 NEW1
SHIFT
< Third Display >
STA EXT FEAT

SHIFT

→A n n P a r k e r →B o b J o n e s →A B S T M S G O n 1 - 9
Alice Carol C.Pickup GRP
MENU CALL MENU CALL MENU SEL
OR OR If a parameter is required,
the feature name and
parameter will flash.
parameter
* The names and phone numbers should be stored beforehand. See page 2-91.
Operation 2-87
Using the KX-T7436
numbers.
Operation using the function buttons

1 Press the desired function button on the initial display.
2 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired message is at the arrow. (See page 2-92 for the feature messages.)
3 Press the CALL button, the function button or go off-hook to call the party.
Or press the SEL button to select the desired feature at the arrow or press the function button next to
the desired feature.
< Initial Display >
1 Jan 15:00
Calling an intercom
call using the
Extension STA Speed
directory
Features SYS Speed
(Extension Dialling)
Call Log
<Example> CONT RING BGM
To select Beth
AB KL
C MN Redialling using Calling using names
DE OPQR and numbers stored
FG S
one of the last five
HIJ T-Z outside call at your extension
MENU numbers (Station Speed
(Outgoing Call Log) Dialling)*
<Example> <Example>
To select 111 To select Panasonic
Adam Bob
Alice Carol
1234567890 Ann Parker KME
Ann Parker Casey
111 Beth Panasonic
Ben Johns Ched Ely
0987654321 Bob Jones Police
Beth Chris
000111222333 Carol Ronald
MENU PREV NEXT
100200300400500 Chris Home
MENU CLR MENU NEXT
Operating the various Calling using names

features stored in the system 0-123-4567 0-987-6543
(System Feature Access) (System Speed Dialling) 01111111 0-5555555
033333333 0-999
077777777 0-4444444
<Example> 10 0-1000000
To select Beth MENU NEXT
Absent MSG Off AB KL

Absent MSG On (1-9) C MN
C.Pickup Group DE OPQR
Call Park (0-9) FG S
COS Primary (ext) HIJ T-Z
MENU NEXT MENU
COS Secondary (ext) Adam Bob

Extrn BGM On/Off Alice Carol
Message Off (ext) Ann Parker Casey
Ben Johns Ched Ely
OR
Message On (ext)
Night On/Off (1/0) Beth Chris
MENU NEXT MENU PREV NEXT
the parameter will flash. * The names and phone numbers should be stored beforehand. See
parameter page 2-91.
2-88 Operation
Operation using the soft buttons
1 Press the SHIFT button repeatedly to show the third display.
2 Press the desired button, if required.
3 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired message is at the arrow.
4 Press the CALL button or go off-hook to call the party or the SEL button to select the desired feature.
Operation
< Initial Display >
1 Jan 15:00
Extension STA Speed

Features SYS Speed
Call Log
CONT RING BGM
SHIFT
< Second Display >

OLD1 NEW1
SHIFT
< Third Display >

STA EXT FEAT
SHIFT

→Ronald →Ann Parker →Absent MSG Off

Zaydel Beth Absent MSG On (1-9)
Adam Bob Jones C.Pickup Group
Alice Carol Call Park (0-9)
Ann Parker Chris COS Primary (ext)
MENU
MENU CALL
NEXT MENU
MENU CALL
NEXT MENU
MENU SEL
NEXT
OR OR If a parameter is required,
the parameter will flash.
parameter
* The names and phone numbers should be stored beforehand. See page 2-91.
Operation 2-89
Using the KX-T7235
numbers.
Operation
2 Press the desired function button or NEXT button until the desired message is displayed.
3 Press the function button next to the desired party or the feature.
< Initial Display >

Calling an intercom 1 Jan 15:00
call using the
directory Extension STA Speed
(Extension Dialling) Features SYS Speed
Call Log
CONT RING BGM
SHIFT
Calling using names Calling using names

stored in the system and numbers stored
(System Speed Dialling) at your extension
(Station Speed
→Ronald Dialling)*
Zaydel
Adam
Alice Redialling using
Ann Parker one of the last five
MENU
MENU CALL
NEXT outside call
numbers
OR (Outgoing Call Log)
Operating the various <Example>

features To select 111
(System Feature Access)
1234567890 →Ann Parker
111 Beth
0987654321 Bob Jones
000111222333 Carol
100200300400500 Chris
MENU CLR MENU
MENU CALL
NEXT
OR
→Absent MSG Off

Absent MSG On (1-9)
C.Pickup Group
Call Park (0-9)
COS Primary (ext)
MENU
MENU SEL
NEXT
* The names and phone numbers should be stored
parameter beforehand. See page 2-91.
2-90 Operation
Using the KX-T7235
numbers.
Operation
Operation
2 Press the desired function button or NEXT button until the desired message is displayed.
3 Press the function button next to the desired party or the feature.
< Initial Display >
1 Jan 10:00AM
Calling an intercom
call using the
Extension STA Speed
directory
Features SYS Speed
(Extension Dialling)
Call Log
<Example> CONT RING BGM
To select Beth
AB KL
C MN Redialling using Calling using names
DE OPQR and numbers stored
FG S
one of the last five
HIJ T-Z outside call at your extension
MENU numbers (Station Speed
(Outgoing Call Log) Dialling)*
<Example> <Example>
To select 111 To select Panasonic
Adam Bob
Alice Carol
1234567890 Ann Parker KME
Ann Parker Casey
111 Beth Panasonic
Ben Johns Ched Ely
0987654321 Bob Jones Police
Beth Chris
000111222333 Carol Ronald
MENU PREV NEXT
100200300400500 Chris Home
MENU CLR MENU NEXT
Operating the various Calling using names

features stored in the system 9-123-4567 9-987-6543
(System Feature Access) (System Speed Dialling) 91111111 9-5555555
933333333 9-999
977777777 9-4444444
<Example> 10 9-1000000
To select Beth MENU NEXT
Absent MSG Off AB KL

Absent MSG On (1-9) C MN
C.Pickup Group DE OPQR
Call Park (0-9) FG S
COS Primary (ext) HIJ T-Z
MENU NEXT MENU
COS Secondary (ext) Adam Bob

Extrn BGM On/Off Alice Carol
Message Off (ext) Ann Parker Casey
Message On (ext) Ben Johns Ched Ely
Night On/Off (1/0) Beth Chris
MENU NEXT MENU PREV NEXT
* The names and phone numbers should be stored
parameter beforehand. See page 2-91.
Operation 2-91
Display feature list
You can access the following features. These displays can be shown by rotating the Jog Dial or
pressing the NEXT or PREV button after selecting “Features”. For their operation, see the respective
operating instructions in the list below.
DISPLAY DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
(KX-T7436/KX-T7235) (KX-T7431/KX-T7433)
Absent MSG Off ABST MSG Off Cancel the absent message. Refer to 2-50.
Absent MSG On (1-9) ABST MSG On 1-9 Set an absent message. Refer to 2-48 and
2-49.
C.Pickup Group C.Pickup GRP Pick up a call within your extension group.
Refer to 2-26 and 2-27.
Call Park (0-9) Call Park 0-9 Place a call on hold in a system parking
area. Refer to 2-31 and 2-32.
COS Primary (ext) COS Primary ext Select the primary Class of Service (COS)
mode for an extension*. Refer to 3-2.
COS Secondary (ext) COS Second ext Select the secondary Class of Service (COS)
mode for an extension*. Refer to 3-2.
Extrn BGM On/Off Ext-BGM On/Off Turn on/off the background music*.
Refer to 3-7.
Message Off (ext) MSG Off ext Cancel a notification. Refer to 2-18 and
2-19.
Message On (ext) MSG On ext Leave a notification so that the called party
may call you back. Refer to 2-18 and 2-19.
Night On/Off (1/0) Night Mode 1/0 Change the night service mode, night (On)
or day (Off)*.
(Pre-assigned extension can also change the
mode.) Refer to 3-5 and 3-6.
Page-Ext Answer (1-4) Page-E ANS 1-4 Answer the paged announcement through a
speaker. Refer to 2-28 and 2-58.
Page-GRP Answer Page-GRP ANS Answer the paged announcement through a

telephone in the same extension group.
Refer to 2-59.
Paging External (0-4) Page Extrn 0-4 Page through the speaker. Refer to 2-53
and 2-54.
Paging Group (00-16) Page GRP 00-16 Page to all or a particular extension group.
Refer to 2-54 and 2-55.
Parallel On/Off (1/0) Parallel 1/0 Set whether a single line telephone
connected in parallel will ring (On) or not
(Off) when receiving a call. Refer to 2-70.
2-92 Operation
* The message is useful for the operators only.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature:

You can also access the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb features. Go off-hook and press the
FWD/DND button. You will see the following displays. For their operation, see the respective operating
instructions. The KX-T7436 and the KX-T7235 users only use this display operation.
Operation
FWD/DND Cancel FWD-BSY/NA (ext)
DND (0/ /ext) FWD-CO Line (dial)
FWD-All Calls
*
(ext) FWD-From (ext)
FWD-Busy (ext) FWD-From Cancel (ext)
FWD-No Answer (ext)
MENU PREV NEXT MENU PREV NEXT
Operation 2-93
* The message is useful for the operators only.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature:

You can also access the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb features. Go off-hook and press the
FWD/DND button. You will see the following displays. For their operation, see the respective operating
instructions. The KX-T7436 and the KX-T7235 users only use this display operation.
FWD/DND Cancel FWD-BSY/NA (ext)

DND (0/ /ext) FWD-CO Line (dial)
FWD-All Calls
*
(ext) FWD-From (ext)
FWD-Busy (ext) FWD-From Cancel (ext)
FWD-No Answer (ext)
MENU PREV NEXT MENU PREV NEXT
2-94 Operation
This chapter shows the operators how to control the
extensions or the system.
Your system supports up to two operators.
Operator
Operation
Operator
Extension Control
Assigning Level of Service
You can assign either primary or secondary level of service for each extension.
PTand
PT / SLT
SLT
1 Primary
OR
7 9 extension no.
3 Secondary
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 79. Dial 1 for primary Enter extension On-hook.
or 3 for secondary. number.
T7431
MODE
→ COS Primary ext extension no.
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Enter On-hook.
“Feature Access” until “COS Primary” extension number.
is displayed. or “COS Second”
is displayed.
T7433
→C O S P r i m a r y ext
SHIFT FEAT COS Second ext
MENU SEL
extension no.
C.Tone
Press SHIFT Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. Enter On-hook.
until “FEAT” “COS Primary” or extension number.
is displayed. “COS Second” is
at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
COS Primary (ext)

Features OR extension no.
COS Secondary (ext)
NEXT
Press “Features”. Enter
extension number.
Rotate Jog Dial or Press “COS Primary” or
press “NEXT” until the “COS Secondary”.
C.Tone
On-hook.
3-2 Operator Operation

Changing the Settings
To enter the program mode To programme To exit
To continue
PROGRAM AUTO DIAL PROGRAM

programming
OR 9 9 input OR
STORE
PAUSE PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Enter programming Press STORE. Press PROGRAM
Operator
or PAUSE. input. or PAUSE.
Item Programming Input
Unlocking or locking any 0 1 extension no.* X

extension (Remote Station X= 1 : Unlock
Lock Control)
2 : Lock
Unlocking the call log

(Incoming Call Log Lock 0 2 extension no.*
Control)
Clearing the Live Call

Screening Password (Live
0 3 extension no.*
Call Screening Password
Control)
* To assign all extensions, press the “ ” key.
Operator Operation 3-3

System Control
Forwarding a Waiting Call
(Automatic Overflow / Hurry-up Transfer)
When you (operator 1) are busy and an outside call comes to you directly, that call
is put in a waiting queue. When the number of calls in the queue exceeds the
assigned limit, calls will automatically be forwarded to operator 2.
You can check the condition of the queue with the Hurry-Up button light, and forward
the first call in the queue to a pre-assigned extension.
◆ To forward
PT
(Hurry-up)
Press Hurry-up.
• The Hurry-Up button light shows the current status as follows:

Off: No waiting call
Red: At least one call is waiting.
Flashing red: Number of calls exceeds assigned limit.

• Customising Your Phone
Create or re-arrange a Hurry-Up button.

Day / Night Service
You can change the Day/Night mode at any time.
PT / SLT
1 Day to Night
OR
7 8
0 Night to Day
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 78. Dial 1 for day to night On-hook.
or 0 for night to day.
Operator
T7431
1 Day to Night
MODE OR
→ Night Mode 1/0
SELECT MODE 0 Night to Day
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial Press SELECT. Dial 1 for day to night
“Feature Access” until “Night Mode” or 0 for night to day.
C.Tone
On-hook.
T7433
→N i g h t M o d e 1/0
SHIFT FEAT Page-E ANS 1-4
MENU SEL
“FEAT” is displayed. “Night Mode” is at the arrow.
1 Day to Night
OR
0 Night to Day
C.Tone
Dial 1 for day to night On-hook.
or 0 for night to day.

System Control
T7436 / T7235
1 Day to Night
OR
Features OR Night On/Off (1/0)
NEXT 0 Night to Day
C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Night On/Off”. Dial 1 for day to night On-hook.
Rotate Jog Dial or or 0 for night to day.
• The Night button alternates the setting between Day and Night modes.
• To confirm the current mode, press the “#” key while on-hook.
• The Night button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Red: Night mode
• Pre-assigned extension user can also change the mode.

Create or re-arrange a Night button.

Turning on the External Background Music
You can broadcast background music in the office through external speakers.
◆ To start / stop background music
PT / SLT
6 5
C.Tone
Operator
T7431
MODE
→ Ext-BGM On/Off
SELECT MODE
C.Tone
Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT. On-hook.
“Feature Access” “Ext-BGM On/Off” is
is displayed. displayed.
T7433
→E x t - B G M O n / O f f
SHIFT FEAT MSG Off ext
MENU SEL
C.Tone
Press SHIFT until Press “FEAT”. Rotate Jog Dial until Press “SEL”. On-hook.
“FEAT” is displayed. “Ext-BGM On/Off”
is at the arrow.
T7436 / T7235
Features OR Extrn BGM On/Off

NEXT C.Tone
Press “Features”. Press “Extrn BGM On/Off”. On-hook.
Rotate Jog Dial or

System Control
Recording Outgoing Messages

UCD messages : Used for the greeting message or guidance when an external party calls your
company to access an extension or external party without any operator assistance. Up to four different
UCD messages can be recorded.
Timed Reminder message : Often used as wake-up call which is played when answering the Timed
Reminder alarm. Only one Timed Reminder message can be recorded.
You can also play back the recorded message for confirmation.
◆ To record
PT / SLT
7 1 2 1 OGM no.
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 7121. Enter OGM Record
nubmer (1-4). message.
AUTO DIAL
The message
is played back.
STORE
C.Tone C.Tone
Press STORE. On-hook.
◆ To play back
PT / SLT
The message
7 1 2 2 OGM no. is played back.
C.Tone C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 7122. Enter OGM On-hook.
number (1-4).
• To stop recording or playing back, press the AUTO DIAL / STORE button.
• Message recording limit
The total length must be under sixty four seconds or less. (Default: 32 seconds for OGM 1 and 3 and 0 second for
OGM 2 and 4)
• The optional unit or card is necessary to utilise this feature.

Using the ANSWER / RELEASE Button
[KX-T7441 only]
The ANSWER and RELEASE buttons on the Console are convenient for operators using headsets.
With the ANSWER button, you can answer all incoming calls to the paired telephone.
With the RELEASE button, you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or complete
transferring a call.
◆ To answer
PT & T7441
ANSWER
Operator
Press ANSWER. Talk.
◆ To transfer a call
PT & T7441
During a conversation with the headset or hands-free mode
desired no. RELEASE
The party
TRANSFER OR answers.
(DSS)
Press TRANSFER. Enter desired Press RELEASE.

◆ To transfer an outside call to an extension with one-touch
PT & T7441
During a conversation with the headset or hands-free mode
RELEASE
The party
(DSS) answers.
Press DSS. Press RELEASE.
The other party is placed on hold and the

destination extension is called immediately.

System Control
Hotel Use Features
– Check-in / check-out – Unanswered timed reminder alert

– Setting the alarm for other extensions – Printing out guest room information
Check-in / check-out [KX-T7436, KX-T7235 only]

The check-in mode activates the primary service mode and automatically clears the charge counter.
The check-out mode activates the secondary service mode and prints out the charge counter, minibar and
other expenses. While in the check-in mode, the DSS button light turns on.
◆ To check-in
T7436 / T7235
YES
extension no.
Hotel Check in OR
NEXT OR
(DSS)
NO
Press “Hotel”. Press “Check in”. Enter extension Press “NEXT”.
number or press DSS. Press “YES” or “NO”.
◆ To check-out
T7436 / T7235
extension no.
Hotel Check out OR
NEXT
(DSS)
Press “Hotel”. Press “Check out”. Enter extension Press “NEXT”.

YES
Telephone PRINT END OR

NO
Press “Telephone”.
Press “PRINT”. Press “END”.
Minibar Press “YES” or
Minibar charge “NO”.
Press “Minibar”. Enter the charge.
other
Others charges
Press “Others”. Enter Other charges.
• It is possible to change the telephone and minibar charges. In this case, enter the charge after pressing the
“Telephone” or “Minibar” button.

Data similar to below is printed out.
Check in : 30.Jan.99 05:30 PM

Check out : 31.Jan.99 11:15 AM
Room : 201
Telephone 2.00 (Tax 0.0%= 0.0)

Minibar 2.50 (Tax 0.0%= 0.0)
Others 3.00 (Tax 0.0%= 0.0)
Total £ 7.50 (Tax Total= 0.0)
Operator
Setting the alarm for other extensions (Wake-up Call)
The operator can remotely set/cancel the alarm for a desired extension. If the Alert button on Operator’s
extension turns red, it indicates that a guest has not responded to the wake-up call.
◆ To set
PT / SLT
extension no.
7 1 OR hour / minute
(DSS)
Off-hook. Dial 7 1. Enter extension Enter hour (00-12)

number or press DSS. and minute (00-59).
0 AM 0 One Time
OR OR
1 PM 1 Daily C.Tone
Dial 0 for AM Dial 0 for one time On-hook.
or 1 for PM. or 1 for daily.
T7436 / T7235
extension no.
NEXT
Hotel Wake up OR hour / minute
(DSS)
Press “Hotel”. Press “Wake up”. Enter extension Press “NEXT”. Enter hour (00-12)
number or press DSS. and minute (00-59).
0 AM 0 One Time PROG END END END

OR OR
1 PM 1 Daily C.Tone
Dial 0 for AM Dial 0 for one time Press “PROG”. Press “END”. Press “END”. Press “END”.
or 1 for PM. or 1 for daily.

System Control
• A voice message can be recorded by the operator if required. (Refer to “Recording Outgoing Messages”.)
◆ To cancel
PT / SLT
extension no.
7 0 OR
(DSS)
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 7 0. Enter extension On-hook.

T7436 / T7235
extension no.
NEXT
Hotel Wake up OR
(DSS)
Press “Hotel”. Press “Wake up”. Enter extension Press “NEXT”.

CLR END END END
C.Tone
Press “CLR”. Press “END”. Press “END”. Press “END”.
◆ To view the setting
D – PT
extension no.
7 2 OR
(DSS)
Off-hook. Dial 7 2. Enter extension On-hook.

T7436 / T7235
extension no.
NEXT
Hotel Wake up OR
(DSS)
Press “Hotel”. Press “Wake up”. Enter extension Press “NEXT”.

END END END
Press “END”. Press “END”. Press “END”.

!!
• If the daily alarm is set, the display shows “*” in
the corner.
Alarm 10:10AM*
Unanswered timed reminder alert [KX-T7436, KX-T7235 only]

If the guest does not answer a wake-up call, the Alert button light will flash. Pressing the Alert button informs
you which extension did not answer the wake-up call.
T7436 / T7235
Operator
Unanswered CLR
extension number
(Alert)
is displayed.
Press “CLR” to
Press “Alert”. clear.
NEXT
Press “NEXT” to
go to the next
unanswered extension.
MENU
Press “MENU”
to exit.

Create or re-arrange an Alert button.

System Control
Printing out guest room information
Guest room information can be printed out from the telephone in each room. Pre-assigned message
numbers 6 through 9 can be used.
<Example>
Message 6: “Cleaned-up”
Message 7: “Minibar £ %%%.%”
PT / SLT
7 5 0 message no. parameter
Off-hook. Dial 750. Dial message Enter parameter On-hook.

number (6-9). if required.
Data similar to below is printed out.
Date Time Ext Depatment code CO Dial Number Duration Charge Code CD
24/03/99 02:09 PM 221 Cleaned-up

24/03/99 10:23 AM 230 Minibar £ 2.5

Printing the System Working Report
The system working report contains the following:

• The number of incoming calls and answered calls
• The percentage of answered calls versus all incoming calls
• The number of accesses requested and successful calls
• The percentage of successful calls versus tries
• The average call duration
This report can also be printed out by the manager.
PT / SLT
Operator
1 Print
OR
7 9 4
0 Clear
C.Tone
Off-hook. Dial 794. Dial 1 to print On-hook.
or 0 to clear.
*****************************************************
* System working report *
*****************************************************
[ 1] Date of record
Start : 1. Jan. 1999 11:00’ AM
End : 1. Jan. 1999 7:23’ AM
[ 2] Incoming calls
CO 01 02 03
Incoming calls 44 38 47
Answered calls 39 37 44

This chapter shows you how to customise your
individual telephone or system according to your
needs.
Customising Find the desired setting and program as necessary.
Your
Phone & System
Customising
Customising Your Phone (Station Programming)
If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone
(e.g. KX-T7436), you can customise your
telephone functions. For example, you can
!!
• If you change your desks and the extension line,
change the initial settings or button functions clear all settings first. The old settings will remain in
according to your needs. the previous extension user’s memory.
Initial Settings
The original settings are shown in bold letters in the shaded boxes. Find and mark your desired
selections for programming.
• If nothing is entered within one minute in the programming mode, the mode returns to the normal status.
• To exit the mode at any time, lift the handset.
To enter the programme mode To programme To exit
To continue

programming
OR 9 9 input OR
STORE
PAUSE PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Follow programming Press STORE. Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE. input. or PAUSE.
Item Selection Programming Input
No line 1 1
Which line do you prefer to
seize when you go off-hook An idle outside line 1 2
to make calls?
Outside line no.
(Preferred Line Assignment A pre-assigned outside line 1 3
(01–54)
– Outgoing)
The Intercom line 1 INTERCOM
Which line do you prefer to No line 2 1

seize when you go off-hook
to receive calls? A ringing line 2 2
(Preferred Line Assignment
– Incoming) Outside line no.
A pre-assigned outside line 2 3 (01–54)
4-2 Customising Your Phone & System

Which way do you prefer to Going Off-hook and then pressing

dial the One-Touch Dialling 3 1
the One-Touch Dialling button.
feature?
(Full One-Touch Dialling Pressing the One-Touch
Assignment)
3 2
Dialling button.
Which way do you prefer to Ringing 4 1

receive an intercom call?
(Intercom Alert Assignment) Directly – the party’s voice is
heard without ringing.
4 2
Do you prefer to distinguish the No. Use the same tone. 5 1

Call Waiting tone from an outside
line and an intercom call?
(Call Waiting Tone Type Selection) Yes. Use a different tone. 5 2
Which equipment will you Handset 9 1

use as a receiver?
(Handset/Headset Selection) Headset 9 2
Which voice mail service do You can monitor the message
Customising
you prefer when a caller is through the telephone speaker. 1 1
recording a message in your (Hands-free mode)
mailbox? Only an alert tone is heard.
(Live Call Screening Mode Set) 1 2
(Private mode)
To confirm the current setting
To continue
PROGRAM HOLD PROGRAM

programming input,
OR 9 9 except for suffix no. OR
PAUSE PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Enter programming input, Press HOLD. Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE. except for suffix number. or PAUSE.
To clear all settings

OR 9 9 OR
STORE
PAUSE PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Dial 99#. Press STORE. Press PROGRAM

or PAUSE. or PAUSE.
Customising Your Phone & System 4-3


You can change the flexible CO buttons, DSS buttons and programmable function (PF) buttons to the
following function buttons. For example, if your telephone has more CO buttons than available CO
lines, you may change an unused CO button to a one-touch dialling button.
To continue

programming
OR 9 9 (CO, DSS, PF) input
OR
STORE
PAUSE PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Press CO, Follow Press STORE. Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE. DSS or PF. programming or PAUSE.
input.
Programmable Button
Button Programming Input
CO DSS PF
Loop-CO ✔
Group-CO ✔ Outside line group no. (1–8)
Single-CO ✔ 0 Outside line no. (01–54)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) ✔ ✔ 1 Extension no.
One-Touch Dialling ✔ ✔ ✔ 2 Desired no.*1 (max. 24 digits)
MESSAGE ✔ ✔ 3
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb) ✔ ✔ ✔ 4
SAVE ✔ ✔ ✔ 5
Account ✔ ✔ ✔ 6
CONF (Conference) ✔ ✔ ✔ 7
Log-In/Log-Out*2 ✔ 8 0 Receiving group no.
Hurry-Up ✔ 8 1 Extension no.
Voice Mail Transfer*3 ✔ ✔ ✔ 8 2 Voice mail extension no.
Two-Way Record*3 ✔ ✔ 8 3 Voice mail extension no.
Two-Way Transfer*3 ✔ ✔ 8 4 Voice mail extension no.
Live Call Screening*3 ✔ ✔ 8 5

Live Call Screening Cancel*3 ✔ ✔ 8 6
Alert ✔ 8 7

Programmable Button
CO DSS PF
Phantom Extension ✔ ✔ 8 8 Phantom extension no.
Night*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 0
Call Pickup Deny*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 1
Call Waiting*4 ✔ ✔ 8 0 2
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 3
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)* 2
✔ ✔ 8 0 4
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call (DND for DDI)*2
✔ ✔ 8 0 5
Paging Deny* 2
✔ ✔ 8 0 7
Paralleled Telephone Connection*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 8
Pickup Dialling*2 ✔ ✔ 8 0 9
Call Forwarding from Hunting Group*2 ✔ ✔ 8 1 0

Forwarding receiving
group no.
Doorphone Call Forwarding to Outside Line*2 ✔ ✔ 8 1 1 Doorphone no. (1–4)
Customising
One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold ✔ ✔ ✔ 8 Desired no.*1 (max. 24 digits)
Terminate ✔ ✔ ✔ 9
• *1 “ ”, “#”, FLASH/RCL, PAUSE, SECRET (INTERCOM) and — (CONF) can also be stored.
– If you do not want to display the stored number, press the SECRET (INTERCOM) button before and after the
numbers you wish to conceal.
– If you store an external party’s number, you should first store a line access number (9, 81 to 88).
– If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the line access
number.
<Example>
SECRET
49 1234 # 9 [ 123 4567 ]
Account code feature no. Account code Account code delimiter Automatic line Phone number
access number
• *2 Pressing this button while on-hook or hearing a dial tone changes the setting (on or off) of the corresponding
feature.
• *3 This button is used for the voice mail integration feature.
• *4 Pressing this button changes the settings as follows.
Tone OHCA Whisper OHCA No tone
• To exit the mode at any time, lift the handset.

To distinguish the ringing tones for each CO button
(Digital proprietary telephone only)
To continue
AUTO DIAL
9 9 tone type no.

PROGRAM (CO) (CO) PROGRAM
STORE
R.Tone
Press Dial 99. Press CO. Press CO. Enter tone type Press STORE. Press
PROGRAM. number (1-8). PROGRAM.
To change the ringing tone for intercom calls

(Digital proprietary telephone only)
AUTO DIAL
9 9 tone type no.

PROGRAM INTERCOM INTERCOM PROGRAM
STORE
R.Tone
Press Dial 99. Press Press Enter tone type Press STORE. Press
PROGRAM. INTERCOM. INTERCOM. number (1-8). PROGRAM.
To set a phantom extension ringing or not
PROGRAM 1 Off AUTO DIAL PROGRAM

OR
OR 9 9 (Phantom) (Phantom)
OR
2 On STORE
PAUSE PAUSE
Dial 99. Press Press Dial 1 for off Press STORE.
Press PROGRAM Phantom. Phantom. or 2 for on. Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE. or PAUSE.
To clear the button data
To continue

OR 9 9 (CO, DSS, PF)
2 OR
STORE
PAUSE PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Dial 99. Press CO, Dial 2. Press STORE. Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE. DSS or PF. or PAUSE.

[Pre-assigned extension only]
To continue
PROGRAM HOLD HOLD PROGRAM

programming
OR 9 9 8 ID code input
OR
PAUSE PAUSE
Dial 99. Dial 8. Enter ID code Follow Press Press
Press (4 digits). programming HOLD. HOLD. Press
PROGRAM input. PROGRAM
or PAUSE. or PAUSE.

SEL HOLD
1 Extension no. Viewing

Viewing, clearing or
Customising
OR
printing each extension SEL CLR HOLD
2 Extension
Outside line
no.no. (01-54) Clearing
charge, outside charge
OR
or account code SEL AUTO DIAL HOLD
charge. 2
3 Extensiontable
Account no. no. (001-128) Print out
STORE
SEL
Viewing, clearing or 4 Extension no. Viewing
printing total extension OR

SEL CLR
charge, total outside 5 Outside line no. Clearing
charge or total account OR
AUTO DIAL
code charge. SEL
6 Account table no. Print out
STORE
AUTO DIAL
Assigning an account CLR
72 Extensiontable
Account no. no. (001-128) Extension
New account
no.no. (10 digits)
code. STORE
• You cannot print out the account code charge of the account table number (01) by SMDR.

Customising Your System (System Programming)
You can customise your system according to your application. You can control telephone
conditions for each extension, extension group, Class of Service, etc.. For example, you can restrict
some extensions from calling external parties. Furthermore, the programmed data, such as system
speed dialling, can be used by all extensions.
Your system already has default settings (factory installed). Most of the programming is done by
your dealer. Consult your dealer about system applications and re-programming according to your
needs.
Only frequently changed programming items (User Programming) are shown in this manual. If you
would like to change the following features, extensions which meet certain conditions can
re-program them at any time.
The available programming is shown below. (Programme number)

• The date and time (000)
• System speed dialling numbers and names (001/002)
• Extension number and name (003/004)
Required Telephone
A Panasonic Proprietary Telephone with display (e.g. KX-T7433, KX-T7436)
User Password
To enter the programming mode, a user password (4-7digits) is required. It should be programmed
through system programming beforehand. Check your password (Default:1234).
Conditions
Only one extension, which is on-hook and holding no calls, is available at one time. If another
extension is programming, “Another Use” is displayed.
List
Before programming, decide your selections and write them down in the list for each programming
item. These are useful for easy programming and future reference. Your dealer also has
programming tables which contain all of the assignments. You may ask for photo copies of these
tables to be aware of the features /conditions available.
Overlay / Button Function

The overlay is a paper sheet which is included
with the telephone.
In the programming mode, the button functions
are different. The overlay shows the functions in SECRET PROGRAM PAUSE CLEAR
the programming mode. Place the overlay on 1QZ!? 2ABC 3DEF

STORE
the telephone properly. 1
4GHI
2
5JKL
3
6MNO
FLASH SELECT
4 5 6
7PRS 8TUV 9WXY
If your telephone display shows the necessary 7 8
,
9
/+ – = < > 0 ., :; #$%&@( )
functions, the overlay may be not required. 0
PREV END NEXT
KX-T7436 with the overlay

Display
The display gives you useful messages about programming. The multiple-line display also shows the
available functions. Follow the message at each step. This is a display sample in the initial
programming mode.
One line type Multiple line type

(The last two lines)
Message Line USR-PGM NO?→ USR-PGM NO?→
Function Line CLR NEXT
SHIFT
Soft buttons
The message line guides you through programming and lets you confirm your selection. For example,
when “Jack No? →” is displayed, enter the jack number. The display shows up to 16 characters at a
time. To scroll the display, press → or ←. The function line shows you the function of the Soft button
located below it. When the SHIFT button light beside the display is on, subtitles are available.
Press the SHIFT button to confirm the available functions.
Jack Number / Extension Number

Certain programming is assigned to each jack number. The jack number is where your telephone
connects to the system. If two telephones share one jack and have their own extension number (eXtra
Customising
Device Port [XDP]), the jack number is determined as Jack XX-1 for a proprietary telephone and Jack
XX-2 for a single line telephone. The display may show XX-2, even if an extension has not set XDP.
If you do not know the jack number or extension number, check it as shown below.
If you do not know the jack / extension number After confirming
PROGRAM END PROGRAM

OR 9 9 6 OR
PAUSE PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Dial 996. Press END. Press PROGRAM

or PAUSE. or PAUSE.
Confirmation
To confirm your entry after storing data;
• The STORE button light: Lights red.
• Confirmation Tone:
– One beep: Your entry is accepted.
– Three beeps: Your entry is rejected.

Icon Descriptions
Icons are given to guide you through programming. The following is an example of how the icons
may be used:
X X X Enter the programme number. (xxx= the specified number)
Press the corresponding button on the telephone or the Soft button

which corresponds to the display.
<Example>
NEXT : “NEXT” is displayed.
In this case, both of the following methods are available:

NEXT
• Press the NEXT ( ) button.

• Press the Soft button which corresponds to “NEXT” shown on the display.
( NEXT )
The display messages “SEL+, SEL- and SEL” mean ”SELECT”.

“CLR” means “CLEAR”.
Press the button until the desired entry appears.
Enter your selection.

<Example>
jack no. : “Jack no.” is displayed.
Enter the jack number.

Procedure
The basic steps are shown below.
1. Entering the programming mode
PROGRAM
OR user password
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Dial . Enter user password.

or PAUSE.
2. Programming
SKP+ SKP–
OR
Press SKP+. Press SKP-.
To continue programming
To end
programme no. NEXT your entry STORE END

Enter programme Press NEXT. Enter your entry Press STORE. Press END.
Customising
number (3 digits).
To continue entering selections
NEXT OR PREV
Press NEXT. Press PREV.
SELECT
Press SELECT.
To go to the next/previous programme or entry.

To enter the desired programme or entry.
• To delete or change an entry, press CLEAR (TRANSFER).

• To confirm your entry after storing data:
– The STORE button light: Lights red.
– Confirmation Tone: One beep: Your entry is accepted.
Three beeps: Your entry is rejected.
• To exit the programming mode at any time, lift the handset.
3. Exiting the mode
PROGRAM
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.

Character Entry
When storing a name or message, enter the characters as follows. The tables A, a
below and on the next page show you the characters available for each key. B, b
You can enter letters by pressing the alphanumeric keys on your telephone. C, c
Example: Key 2 can enter A, a, B, b, C or c. ABC
Entering characters 2
• Press the desired character key.
• Press the matching Soft button, press the SELECT* (AUTO ANSWER) button or rotate
the Jog Dial as needed.
• Repeat the appropriate steps for the remaining characters.
• To erase the last letter, press the ← (CONF) button.

• To erase all letters, press the CLEAR (TRANSFER) button.
• To alternate between capital and lower case letters, press the SHIFT button. Once this button is pressed, the
mode remains until the SHIFT button is pressed again.
* If your telephone is a KX-T7431, do not use the provided SELECT button. Use the AUTO ANSWER button which
becomes the SELECT button when using the overlay.
Combination Table 1
Jog Dial
Display sequence by rotating the Jog Dial
keys
1 1 Q q R r S s T t ···
2 2 A a B b C c D d ···
3 3 D d E e F f G g ···
4 4 G g H h I i J j ···
5 5 J j K k L l M m ···
6 6 M m N n O o P p ···
7 7 P p Q q R r S s ···
8 8 T t U u V v W w ···
9 9 W w X x Y y Z z ···
0 0 (space) ! ? . , ’ : ; ···
* / + – = < > # $ ···
# # $ % & @ ( ) A a ···

Combination Table 2
SHIFT+ SHIFT+
Soft button S1 SHIFT+S1 S2 SHIFT+S2 S3 SHIFT+S3
SHIFT+S1 SHIFT+S2
SELECT button
pressing
times 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
keys
1 1 Q q Z z ! ?
2 2 A a B b C c
3 3 D d E e F f
4 4 G g H h I i
5 5 J j K k L l
6 6 M m N n O o
7 7 P p Q q R r S s
8 8 T t U u V v
9 9 W w X x Y y Z z
0 0 (space) . , ’ : ;
* / + – = < >
# # $ % & @ ( )
Customising
<Example> To enter “Ann”,
A n n
– Using the Jog Dial

2 until “A” is 6 until “n” is displayed. 6 until “n” is displayed.
displayed.
– Using a soft button.

2 A B C 6 SHIFT m n o 6 m n o
– Using the SELECT button.

SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT
2 6 6

Date and Time Set (000)
After setting the current date and time, the proprietary telephone displays the current date and time
while on-hook.
Default : 1 Jan ‘94 SAT 12:00 AM
0 0 0 NEXT day SELECT year

Dial 000. Press NEXT. Enter day Press ➡. Select month Press ➡. Enter year
(1-31). (Jan.-Dec.). (00-99).
SELECT STORE NEXT hour

Press ➡. Select day Press STORE. Press NEXT. Enter hour Press ➡.
of the week (01-12).
(SUN-SAT).
To end
minute SELECT STORE END

Enter minute Select Press STORE. Press END.
(00-59). AM or PM.
• After changing the desired entries, you can press the STORE button. You do not have to perform the rest of
the steps.
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• You cannot leave an entry empty.
• The clock is automatically adjusted in case of ISDN.

System Speed Dialling Number Set (001)
You can store the phone numbers of up to 500 frequently dialled numbers.
Default : No entry
To end
0 0 1 NEXT speed dial no. phone no. STORE END

Dial 001. Press NEXT. Enter speed dial Enter phone number Press STORE. Press END.
number (000-499). (max. 24 digits).
To continue
NEXT OR PREV
SELECT
Press SELECT.
Customising
• The programming list is on page 4-17. The directory is on page 6-10.
• If the desired number is more than 24 digits, divide the number and store it into two or more speed dial numbers.
• “ ”, “#”, FLASH/RCL, PAUSE, SECRET (INTERCOM) and — (CONF) can also be stored.
– If you do not want to display the stored number, press the SECRET (INTERCOM) button before and after the
– If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the line access number.
<Example>
SECRET
49 1234 # 9 [ 1 201 123 4567 ]
Account code feature no. Account code Account code delimiter Automatic Line access number Phone number
• The System Speed Dialling numbers are used for the call identification. For a proper operation, a hyphen must be
inserted after the line access number. Additionally, the area code must be stored always (even for local numbers
in the same area).

System Speed Dialling Name Set (002)
You can store the corresponding name of the speed dialling number. These names are displayed when
making call with the display operation. (See “How to Use the Display”(Operation))
To enter characters, see page 4-12.
Default : No entry
To end
0 0 2 NEXT speed dial no. name STORE END

Dial 002. Press NEXT. Enter speed dial Enter name Press STORE. Press END.
number (000-499). (max. 10 characters).
To continue
NEXT OR PREV
SELECT
Press SELECT.
• The programming list is on page 4-17. The directory is on page 6-10.

Programming List for 001/002
Speed Speed
Name Phone no. Name Phone no.
dial no. dial no.
000 043
001 044
002 045
003 046
004 047
005 048
006 049
007 050
008 051
009 052
010 053
011 054
012 055
013 056
014 057
015 058
016 059
Customising
017 060
018 061
019 062
020 063
021 064
022 065
023 066
024 067
025 068
026 069
027 070
028 071
029 072
030 073
031 074
032 075
033 076
034 077
035 078
036 079
037 080
038 081
039 082
040 083
041 084
042 085

Speed Speed
dial no. dial no.
086 129
087 130
088 131
089 132
090 133
091 134
092 135
093 136
094 137
095 138
096 139
097 140
098 141
099 142
100 143
101 144
102 145
103 146
104 147
105 148
106 149
107 150
108 151
109 152
110 153
111 154
112 155
113 156
114 157
115 158
116 159
117 160
118 161
119 162
120 163
121 164
122 165
123 166
124 167
125 168
126 169
127 170
128 171

Speed Speed
dial no. dial no.
172 215
173 216
174 217
175 218
176 219
177 220
178 221
179 222
180 223
181 224
182 225
183 226
184 227
185 228
186 229
187 230
188 231
Customising
189 232
190 233
191 234
192 235
193 236
194 237
195 238
196 239
197 240
198 241
199 242
200 243
201 244
202 245
203 246
204 247
205 248
206 249
207 250
208 251
209 252
210 253
211 254
212 255
213 256
214 257

Speed Speed
dial no. dial no.
258 301
259 302
260 303
261 304
262 305
263 306
264 307
265 308
266 309
267 310
268 311
269 312
270 313
271 314
272 315
273 316
274 317
275 318
276 319
277 320
278 321
279 322
280 323
281 324
282 325
283 326
284 327
285 328
286 329
287 330
288 331
289 332
290 333
291 334
292 335
293 336
294 337
295 338
296 339
297 340
298 341
299 342
300 343

Speed Speed
dial no. dial no.
344 387
345 388
346 389
347 390
348 391
349 392
350 393
351 394
352 395
353 396
354 397
355 398
356 399
357 400
358 401
359 402
360 403
Customising
361 404
362 405
363 406
364 407
365 408
366 409
367 410
368 411
369 412
370 413
371 414
372 415
373 416
374 417
375 418
376 419
377 420
378 421
379 422
380 423
381 424
382 425
383 426
384 427
385 428
386 429

Speed Speed
dial no. dial no.
430 465
431 466
432 467
433 468
434 469
435 470
436 471
437 472
438 473
439 474
440 475
441 476
442 477
443 478
444 479
445 480
446 481
447 482
448 483
449 484
450 485
451 486
452 487
453 488
454 489
455 490
456 491
457 492
458 493
459 494
460 495
461 496
462 497
463 498
464 499

Extension Number Set (003)
You can assign an extension number to each jack.
Default : Jack no. = Extension no.

KX-TD816 – 01-1 through 16-1= 201 through 216
01-2 through 16-2= 301 through 316
KX-TD1232 – 01-1 through 64-1= 201 through 264
01-2 through 64-2= 301 through 364
To end
0 0 3 NEXT jack no. extension no. STORE END

Dial 003. Press NEXT. Enter jack Enter extension Press STORE. Press END.
number. number (2-4 digits).
To select the jack number To continue

XX-2, press NEXT.
NEXT OR PREV
Customising
SELECT
Press SELECT.
• The leading number(s) should be the same as the assigned number(s) for Flexible Numbering. Consult your
dealer.
• A double entry is invalid.

Extension Name Set (004)
You can store the name of an extension user. This is useful if you want to know who is calling, or who
you are calling when making an intercom call using the directory.
To enter characters, see page 4-12.
Default : No entry
To end
0 0 4 NEXT jack no. name STORE END

Dial 004. Press NEXT. Enter jack Enter name Press STORE. Press END.
number. (max. 10 characters).
To select the jack number To continue

XX-2, press NEXT.
NEXT OR PREV
SELECT
Press SELECT.

Programming List for 003/004
Jack Jack
Extension no. Name Extension no. Name
no. no.
01-1 01-2
02-1 02-2
03-1 03-2
04-1 04-2
05-1 05-2
06-1 06-2
07-1 07-2
08-1 08-2
09-1 09-2
10-1 10-2
11-1 11-2
12-1 12-2
13-1 13-2
Customising
14-1 14-2
15-1 15-2
16-1 16-2
17-1 17-2
18-1 18-2
19-1 19-2
20-1 20-2
21-1 21-2
22-1 22-2
23-1 23-2
24-1 24-2
25-1 25-2
26-1 26-2
27-1 27-2
28-1 28-2
29-1 29-2
30-1 30-2
31-1 31-2
32-1 32-2

Jack Jack
no. no.
33-1 33-2
34-1 34-2
35-1 35-2
36-1 36-2
37-1 37-2
38-1 38-2
39-1 39-2
40-1 40-2
41-1 41-2
42-1 42-2
43-1 43-2
44-1 44-2
45-1 45-2
46-1 46-2
47-1 47-2
48-1 48-2
49-1 49-2
50-1 50-2
51-1 51-2
52-1 52-2
53-1 53-2
54-1 54-2
55-1 55-2
56-1 56-2
57-1 57-2
58-1 58-2
59-1 59-2
60-1 60-2
61-1 61-2
62-1 62-2
63-1 63-2
64-1 64-2
• The directory is on page 6-8.

This chapter shows you how to operate each DECT
Portable Station feature step by step.
Read this chapter to become familiar with the many
DECT useful features of this DECT system.
Portable Station The KX-TD816 and KX-TD1232 systems optionally
support the DECT system.
Portable Station
DECT
Safety Instructions
Take special care to follow the safety suggestions listed below to use the Panasonic DECT Portable
Station (PS).
Safety
1) The charger should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating
instructions or as marked on the charger.
2) When the PS is not being used, turn the power off. When left unused for a long period of time,
the charger should be unplugged from the household AC outlet.
Installation
Environment
1) Do not use this PS and the charger near water – for example, near a bath tub, washbowl, sink,
etc. Damp basements should also be avoided.
2) The PS and the charger should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators, kitchen
ranges, etc. They also should not be placed in rooms where the temperature is less than 5°C or
greater than 40°C.
Placement
1) Do not place heavy objects on top of the PS and charger.
2) Care should be taken so that objects do not fall onto and liquids are not spilled into the PS and
charger. Do not subject the PS and charger to excessive smoke, dust, mechanical vibration, or
shock.
3) Place the charger on a flat surface.
Battery
To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons, read and follow these instructions.
1) Use only the battery specified.

2) Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. It may explode. Check with local waste management
codes for special disposal instructions.
3) Do not open or mutilate the battery. Released electrolyte is corrosive and may cause burns or
injury to the eyes or skin. The electrolyte may be toxic if swallowed.
4) Exercise care in handling the battery in order not to short the battery with conductive materials
such as rings, bracelets, and keys. The battery and/or conductor may overheat and cause burns.
5) Do not recharge batteries, which are provided or specified as replacement parts for use with
other products. The battery may leak corrosive electrolyte or explode.
6) Do not attempt to rejuvenate the battery provided with or identified for use with this product by
heating. Sudden release of battery electrolyte may occur causing burns or irritation to eyes or
skin.
7) Remove the battery from this product if the product will not be used for a long period of time
(several months or more). During this time the battery could leak in the product.
8) Discard the “dead” battery as soon as possible. A “dead” battery may leak in the product.
9) Do not store this product, or the battery provided with or identified for use with this product, in
high temperature areas. Batteries that are stored in a freezer or refrigerator for the purpose of
extending shelf life should be protected from condensation during storage and defrosting.
Batteries should be stabilised at room temperature prior to use after cold storage.
5-2 DECT Portable Station

For Best Performance
Operating Range
1) The range of operation depends on the topo-graphy of your office, weather or usage conditions,
because signals are transmitted between the Cell Station (CS) and the PS by radio waves.
2) Normally, you will get greater range outdoors than indoors. If there are obstacles such as walls,
noise may interfere with your telephone calls. In particular, high metal shelves or reinforced
concrete walls will shorten your operating range.
3) A PS may not work if used in places that are too far from the CS depending on the structure of
the building.
Noise
Occasional noise or interference may occur due to other sources of electromagnetic radiation, such
as refrigerators, microwave ovens, faxes, TVs, radios, or personal computers.
If noise affects your telephone calls, keep the PS away from other electrical appliances.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR ANY
TYPE OF MOISTURE.
Portable Station
DECT
DECT Portable Station 5-3

Before Operating the DECT Portable Station
What is the DECT Portable Station?
You can use a Panasonic DECT Portable Station (PS), KX-TD7500, by connecting an optional wireless
system to your PBX, KX-TD816 or KX-TD1232. It can be used in the system with other telephones.
Capacity
You can use the following number of PS in each system.
KX-TD816 16
KX-TD1232 64
Up to four calls can be made at the same time in the range.
Registration
You must register your PS in the system and determine its extension number before initial use.
For PS registration, consult your dealer.
Display
The display has two lines with 16 characters per line, and related symbols to show information for your
phone activities.
Furthermore, your PS can show the guidance messages which show the selectable buttons and help
you operate your PS without the operating instructions. Refer to “Customising Your PS – PS
Programming”.
(Function mode) (Directory or Programming mode)
(Off-hook status) (Message Waiting indicator)
Someone is waiting for your call.
(Radio Signal Strength) (Battery Strength)
Shows the strength of the receiving Shows the strength of the battery.
radio signal from the Cell Station (CS).
Fully charged.
Strong Medium
Low
The battery needs to
Weak (Flashing) be charged. The call
will be disconnected
[Display: NO SERVICE] within 3 minute after
(Flashing) Out of range. a beep tone sounds.
Move closer to the CS.

Battery Charge
You need to charge the battery before initial use and when the battery strength becomes low. When
“ ” flashes or beep tones sound every five seconds during a conversation or “BATTERY EMPTY” is
displayed, recharge the battery or replace with a fully charged optional spare battery. If not, the call will
be automatically disconnected in three minutes.
Standard Battery Life

If your Panasonic battery is fully charged [provided 25°C]:
While in use (Talk mode) Up to about 10 hours
While not in use (Stand-by mode) Up to about 100 hours
To install a battery To replace a battery

Hook the bottom of the battery on the PS, and Set the power switch to OFF first to prevent
place the battery until it clicks. memory loss, and then remove the battery
while pressing the tab.
To charge the battery

1. Connect the charger to a power outlet using the AC adaptor.
2. Slide the battery-attached portable station or the battery in the charger.
• Charge the battery for about 1.5 hours.
• When charging is completed, the charge indicator will change from orange to green.
Portable Station
Cord holder
DECT
Charger
To power outlet
(230 VAC, 50 Hz)
AC adaptor Charge indicator
• The battery is used while the PS’s power is ON.

• Battery life may vary depending on usage conditions and !!
• The AC adaptor is used as the main disconnect
ambient temperature.
• Please use only a Panasonic battery. device. Ensure that the socket-outlet is located
• Do not let the charged battery’s electrodes touch metallic near the equipment for easily access.
objects. The terminal may short and overheat, causing
burns.
• Clean the charge contacts on both the PS and the charger
with a soft cloth once a month, or the battery may not
charge properly.
• The PS can receive calls even while charging.
• You need not worry about overcharging.

Feature Numbers
To operate certain features, you need to enter specified feature numbers (and an additional parameter,
if required).
There are two types of feature numbers as follows:
• Flexible feature number
• Fixed feature number
Fixed feature numbers cannot be changed. However, you can change the flexible numbers to other
numbers for easier use. If you want to change the numbers, consult your dealer. In this manual, the
default numbers (factory installed) are used for operations.
A flexible number is shown as (half-shaded key). Use the new programmed number if you have
changed the feature number. Write the new number in the “Feature Number List” (Appendix).
Your Extension Number / DECT System Number

You can check your own extension number or/and the connected DECT System number on the display
if set to be shown by PS Programming. Refer to “Customising Your PS – PS Programming – Standby
Display Selection”.
Tones
You will hear various tones, during or after an operation, for confirmation. Refer to “What is This
Tone?” (Appendix).
Examples
The displays and the illustrations shown as examples are from a PS connected to the KX-TD1232.
Restrictions
Some features may be restricted at your PS under system programming. Consult your manager or
dealer.
Icon Descriptions
There are some icons which show you the feature availability, notes and action to operate the features.
For details, refer to “Before Operating the Telephones – Icon Descriptions” (Operation).
While operating the PS, you can easily refer to the Icons noted on the inside back cover of this manual.

Button Descriptions
Your PS has the useful function buttons listed below. These buttons make operations simple.
INT'
INTERCOM Button: Used to make F1-F3 Flexible CO Buttons (F1 through F3):
or receive intercom calls. Used to make or receive an outside
call. A F1 button is already assigned
TALK Button: Used to make, receive as a Loop-CO button. Pressing this
or end calls. button seizes an idle line
automatically.
F1 through F3 buttons can be used as
C CANCEL Button: Used to end calls, the desired function buttons. (Button
or exit the directory or Function assignment is required.)
mode. If the term is in parentheses like
(Save), it means this button has
CLEAR / TRANSFER Button: Used become the “Save” button.
CLR
to clear incorrect digits while
entering numbers or transfer a call BOOK Button: Used to enter into the
to another extension. directory mode or select a menu in
the Function mode.
HOLD Button: Used to place a call
on hold.
FLASH Button: Used to disconnect
a current call and make another call.
FUNCTION Button: Used to enter
into the Function mode or access
features by pressing additional keys. Power Switch: Used to switch the
power ON ( ) or OFF ( ).
OK AUTO / OK Button: Used for System
Speed Dialling and storing program Volume Control Button: Used to
changes. select the ringer volume (seven
levels, off and vibration mode) during
Portable Station
on-hook or ringing status, or receiver
REDIAL Button: Used to redial the
volume (three levels) during a
last number dialled.
DECT
conversation. The volume levels are
indicated by the number of asterisks
on the display.
Combination Buttons*
Some special features can be used by combining two buttons.
PAUSE Button ( ): GHI CONF (Conference) Button ( ):

Used to insert a pause in Used to establish a three party
numbers. conversation.
ABC
FWD/DND Button ( ): JKL TONE Button: Used to change the
Used to set the Call Forwarding dialling mode temporarily to tone.
or Do Not Disturb (DND)
features.
DEF MESSAGE Button ( ):

* These buttons can also be activated using the
Used to leave a message waiting
display. Refer to “Operation – Selecting the
indication or call back the party Feature Buttons on the Display”.
who left the message waiting
indication.

How to Follow the Steps
A sample operation is shown below.
Feature title
Calling the Call Directories
Storing the names and numbers

You can store, edit or delete the PS Dialling Directory or PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory
Sub feature title
items on your PS.
PS Description
OK OK name OK
<Example>
Operation steps
MODIFY BOOK PS-NEW-ENTRY ENTER NAME
=1/99 REMAINS
Panasonic Panasonic
ENTER PHONE-NO.
The display examples
may be shown on the
Press FUNCTION
and BOOK.
Press OK. Press OK. Enter name*1
(max. 16 characters).
Press OK. shaded part to help
you operate.
phone no. OK C The description of the
icons are explained
Panasonic STORED
on page 5-7 and the
0123456789
inside back cover of
Enter phone number*2 Press OK. Press CANCEL. this manual.
(max. 32 digits).
Conditions Hints
• To store a phone number only, skip the step for

entering name.
• *1 To enter characters, see page 5-22. You can lock the Call Directories to prevent other
• *2 The line access number is not required. people from seeing your directory display.
☞ Customising Your PS
• PS Programming – Directory Lock Control
Lock or unlock the Call Directories.
Programming References: The related or required programming is noted.

To programme, see “Customising Your PS” in this section.

Operation
Making Calls
Calling another extension

◆ To another extension (Intercom Call)
PT and
PS SLT
OR extension no. C
INT'
Press TALK or Enter extension Talk. Press CANCEL.

INTERCOM. number.
<Example>
When you call Mr. Thomas....
Mr. Thomas’s extension number is 223.
PT and
PS SLT
ABC ABC DEF

C
Press TALK. Enter 223. Talk. Press CANCEL.
!!
Portable Station
• You can also finish the conversation by placing the PS
on the charger or pressing TALK button. • Do you have an extension directory?
DECT
• If “ ” flashes, move towards the Cell Station until the Complete the directory on page 6-10 and make
sign stops flashing and try again. a copy for your reference.
• Confirming the dialled number before
connecting
number you dialled. If you misdial, press the
CLEAR button to clear each number from the
right.
• If you go off-hook first and then misdial,
press the FLASH button and enter the number
again.
• Handover
Even if you move during a conversation, the
linking Cell Station (CS) will automatically
switch without disconnecting the call.
Handover is available only during a
conversation (except a conference call). It is
not available when a switched CS is busy or
there is no CS in the new range.

Operation
Calling an external party
You have to seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number because external calls are
made via your system.
F1-F3
• Press an idle button.
(CO)
• Dial automatic line access number WXYZ

.
An idle line is selected automatically.
• Dial outside line number to
TUV TUV TUV .
A specific line is selected.
◆ Using a Flexible CO button
PT and
PS SLT
F1-F3
phone no. C
(CO)
Press CO. Enter phone number. Talk. Press CANCEL.
◆ Using automatic line access number / outside line number
PS
WXYZ
OR
TUV phone no. C
to
TUV TUV
Press TALK. Enter phone number. Talk. Press CANCEL.

Seize an external line
(9 or 81-88).
• You can also finish the conversation by placing the PS

on the charger or pressing TALK button.
!!
• To select the less expensive line
• If “ ” flashes, move towards the Cell Station until the automatically, dial “9” or press the Loop-CO
sign stops flashing and try again. button to seize a line. (LCR = Least Cost
• Emergency call Routing) F1 button is already assigned as the
You can dial pre-programmed emergency numbers Loop-CO button.
without any restrictions. • Confirming the dialled number before
(Default: 999, 112) connecting
☞
Customising Your PS number you dialled. If you misdial, press the
• PBX Programming – Customising the Buttons CLEAR button to clear each number from the
Create or re-arrange the Loop-CO button, Group-CO right.
button and Single-CO button. • If you go off-hook first and then misdial,
press the FLASH button and enter the number
again.
• Call information
The following information can be referred to by
repeatedly pressing the CO button in use.
– Phone number (outgoing call) or
call duration (incoming call)
– Meter – Call charge

Receiving Calls
When you receive a call, the DECT portable station (PS) rings or vibrates, and the outside line number
or extension number of the receiving call will appear on the display.
T7431
PS
OR
C
F1-F3
(CO)
Press TALK or Talk. Press CANCEL.

flashing CO.
• You can hang up also by pressing the TALK button or

placing the PS on the charger.
!!
• To select the vibration mode
☞
Press the Volume Control button until
Customising Your PS “VIBRATION CALL” is displayed. This button
• PS Programming — To change the initial settings also changes the ringer volume which is
– Quick Answering Mode Set indicated by the number of asterisks on the
Select to answer calls by just lifting the ringing PS display.
off the charger. • If the PS is on the charger, just lift up the PS
– Automatic Answer Mode Set (Quick Answering).
Select the answering mode when using the • If a headset is connected to the PS,
headset. you can select to answer a call without lifting
your PS (Automatic Answer Mode).
Portable Station
DECT

Operation
Redial
This is convenient when calling the same external party again.

– Redialling the last number you dialled
– Redialling one of the last five outside phone numbers you dialled
Redialling the last number you dialled (Last Number Redial)
PS
Press TALK. Enter #.
Redialling one of the last five outside phone numbers you dialled
(Outgoing Call Log)
PS
OR
F1-F3
(CO)
Press REDIAL until the Press TALK or CO.

desired number appears.
• You can also search the desired log number by pressing the Next or Previous button after pressing the REDIAL button.
◆ To clear all of the numbers in the call log
PS
CLR
Press REDIAL. Press CLEAR.

Holding a Call
– Holding
– Denying other people the possibility of retrieving your held calls
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder.
• If a call is not retrieved within fifteen minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
Holding (regular)
PS
Press HOLD.
◆ To retrieve a call
PS
● At the holding extension
F1-F3
(CO)
OR
INT'
Portable Station
Press flashing Talk.
DECT
CO or INTERCOM.
● For an outside call from another extension

F1-F3
(CO)
Press flashing CO. Talk.
● For an intercom call from another extension
JKL
holding
extension no.
C.Tone
Dial 51. Enter holding Talk.
extension number.

• You can hold either an intercom call or an outside call at one time.
• To hold multiple calls, use the “Call Park” feature.

Operation
Denying other people the possibility of retrieving
your held calls (Exclusive Call Hold)
Only the held extension can retrieve the call.
PS
Press HOLD. Press HOLD again.
◆ To retrieve a call
PS
F1-F3
(CO)
OR
INT'
Press flashing Talk.

CO or INTERCOM.

• You can hold either an intercom call or an outside call at one time.

Transferring a Call
– Transferring to an extension – Transferring to an external party
Transferring to an extension
PS
CLR
extension no. C
C.Tone
Enter extension Announce. Press CANCEL.
Press number.
TRANSFER.
Transferring to an external party

PS
Portable Station
F1-F3
DECT
(CO)
OR
CLR
phone no. C
C.Tone line access

no.
Press Press CO or enter Enter phone number. Announce. Press CANCEL.
TRANSFER. line access number
(9 or 81-88).
• To return to the held call before the destination answers, press the TRANSFER button, corresponding CO or
the INTERCOM button.
• To return to the conversation after completing the transfer to an external party, press the corresponding CO
button.
• If you hear an alert tone, the destination extension did not answer the call. Answer the call.

Operation
Using the Call Directories
– Storing the names and numbers – Making calls using the Call Directories
– Entering characters
You can store names and/or phone numbers in the directories.

A stored number is dialled out by selecting a name or phone number in a directory.
There are four types of directory features, including one PS directory and three PBX directories.
PS Dialling Directory: You can store up to 100 private names and phone numbers of outside parties.
All directory items are stored in alphabetical order.
PBX System Speed Dialling Directory:
You can make a call via the system by selecting system-assigned names and
phone numbers (500 max.).
PBX Extension Dialling Directory:
You can make a call via the system by selecting system-assigned extension
names.
PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory:
You can make a call via the system by selecting privately assigned names and
phone numbers (10 max.).
Storing the names and numbers

You can store, edit or delete the PS Dialling Directory or PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory items on
your PS. There are five displays for directory entry/edition/deletion as shown below.
Display sequence in “MODIFY BOOK” display
MODIFY BOOK
OK
PS-NEW-ENTRY PS-EDIT PBX-STA-EDIT
Storing the PS Dialling Editing the PS Dialling Storing / Editing the

Directory items Directory items PBX Station Speed
Dialling Directory items*
PBX-STA-DELETE PS-DELETE
Deleting the Deleting the PS Dialling

PBX Station Speed Directory items
Dialling Directory items*
• It is not possible to edit items in the PBX System Speed Dialling or PBX Extension Dialling Directories.
• * Only displayed when registered to a Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System. It is not displayed when out of
range.

◆ To store a PS Dialling Directory item
PS
OK OK name OK
<Example>
MODIFY BOOK PS-NEW-ENTRY ENTER NAME Panasonic Panasonic
=1/99 REMAINS ENTER PHONE-NO.
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press OK. Enter name*1 Press OK.
and BOOK. (max. 16 characters).
phone no. OK C
Panasonic STORED
0123456789
Enter phone number* 2 Press OK. Press CANCEL.

(max. 32 digits).
• To store a phone number first and then a name:
phone no. OK OK name OK OK
• To store a phone number only, skip the step for entering name.
• *1 To enter characters, see page 5-22.
• *2 The line access number is not required.
Portable Station
DECT

Operation
◆ To edit a PS Dialling Directory item
PS
OK OK
<Example>
MODIFY BOOK PS-NEW-ENTRY PS-EDIT Ann Parker Panasonic

0111111111 0123456789
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press BOOK. Press OK. Press BOOK until
and BOOK. the desired item is
displayed.
OK edit name OK edit phone no. OK
Panasonic Panasonic-NT Panasonic-NT Panasonic-NT STORED

0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456799
Press OK. Edit name*1 Press OK. Edit phone number*2 Press OK.
(max. 16 characters). (max. 32 digits).
Press CANCEL.

• *2 To change the number, press the CLEAR button to clear a digit from the right, and enter the number again.
To move the cursor on the number, Use # (to the left) or (to the right) button.

◆ To store / edit a PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory item
PS
OK OK
<Example>
MODIFY BOOK PS-NEW-ENTRY PBX-STA-EDIT Ann Parker Ann Parker

0111111111 0111111111
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press BOOK until the Press OK. Press BOOK until blank
and BOOK. message above appears. (for new entry) or the
desired item (for edition)
is displayed.
OK name OK phone no. OK
Panasonic Panasonic-NT Panasonic-NT Panasonic-NT STORED

0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456799
Press OK. Enter or edit name* 1 Press OK. Enter or edit Press OK.
(max. 10 characters). phone number* 2
(max. 16 digits).
C
Enter a line access number (9 or 81-88)
before an external phone number.
Press CANCEL.

• *2 To change the number, press the CLEAR button to clear a digit from the right, and enter the number again.
Portable Station
To move the cursor on the number, press the # (to the left) or (to the right) button.
DECT

Operation
◆ To delete a PS Dialling / PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory item
PS
OK OK
<Example>
MODIFY BOOK PS-NEW-ENTRY PS-DELETE OR

PBX-STA-DELETE Ann Parker
0111111111
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press BOOK until the Press OK.
and BOOK. message above apears.
OK C
Panasonic DELETED
0123456789
Press BOOK until Press OK. Press CANCEL.

the desired item is
displayed.

Making calls using the Call Directories
There are four displays for directory dialling as shown below.
Display sequence for Call Directory dialling
PS-DIALING PBX-SYS-DIALING PBX-EXT-DIALING PBX-STA-DIALING
PS Dialling Directory PBX System Speed PBX Extension PBX Station Speed
Dialling Directory Dialling Directory Dialling Directory
• These displays will not appear when registered to a non-Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System or when out of
range. In this case, the directory item appears after pressing the BOOK button.
• You can transfer a call to a number stored in the directory. In this case, press the TRANSFER button during
a conversation and then dial by selecting the directory item.
PS <If required>
Next
OK
first letter of OK OR
desired name
Previous
<Example>
PS-DIALING Ann Parker P Panasonic Panasonic

0111111111 0123456789 0123456789
Portable Station
Press BOOK until Press OK. Enter first letter of Press OK. Press # or
the desired directory desired name* until desired item
DECT
display appears. appears.
Press TALK.
• * To enter characters, see page 5-22.

• You can lock the Call Directories to prevent other people from seeing the directory display. When locked,
“DIRECTORY LOCK” will be displayed after pressing the BOOK button.
☞ Customising Your PS
• PS Programming — To change the initial settings
– Directory Lock Control
Lock or unlock the Call Directories.

Operation
Entering characters
When storing a name or message, enter the characters as follows.
A, a
The table below shows you the characters available for each key. B, b
You can enter letters by pressing the alphanumeric keys on your telephone. C, c
Example: Key 2 can enter A, a, B, b, C or c.
ABC
• To erase the each letter from the right, press the CLEAR button.
• To move the cursor, press the # (to the left) or (to the right) button.
Combination Table
Keys Display sequence by pressing the key
1 Ä ä Ö ö Ü ü 1
2 A a B b C c 2
3 D d E e F f 3
4 G g H h I i 4
5 J j K k L l 5
6 M m N n O o 6
7 P p Q q R r S s 7
8 T t U u V v 8
9 W w X x Y y Z z 9
0 (space) . : / – ( ) 0
Moves the cursor to the left
# Moves the cursor to the right
<Example> To enter “Ann”,
A n n
ABC MNO MNO MNO MNO MNO MNO MNO MNO

Using Your PS in Parallel with the Wired Telephone
(Super EXtra Device Ports [SXDP])
Your PS can be used in parallel with a proprietary wired (PT) or single line telephone (SLT).
When in the SXDP mode, incoming calls to a wired telephone also reach the paired PS, while incoming
calls to a PS only reach the PS. If one telephone is busy, you cannot make a call from the other
telephone.
The “Call Forwarding – All Calls” feature for the wired telephone can also be set from the paired PS so
that all incoming calls to the wired telephone will be forwarded to the desired destination.
◆ To set
PS
GHI TUV extension

phone no.no. C
C.Tone
Press TALK. Press 481. Enter extension number Press CANCEL.
of the paired telephone.
◆ To cancel
PS
T7431
GHI TUV C
Portable Station
C.Tone
Press TALK. Press 480. Press CANCEL.
DECT
◆ To confirm the extension number of the paired telephone
PS
T7431
GHI TUV JKL C
C.Tone

Operation
◆ To set the “Call Forwarding – All Calls” for the paired telephone
PS
GHI TUV GHI ABC

destination C
extension no.
C.Tone
Press TALK. Press 4842. Enter destination Press CANCEL.
extension number.
◆ To cancel the “Call Forwarding – All Calls” for the paired telephone
T7431
PS
GHI TUV GHI C
C.Tone
• The Outgoing Call Log memory can be used by both the PS and paired telephone.
• Some wired telephones are restricted to perform this feature.

Locking the Keypads
Incoming calls can be answered, but outgoing calls cannot be dialled.
PS
While on-hook
<When locked>
KEYPAD LOCKED
PRESS F FOR 2SEC
Press FUNCTION
for 2 seconds.
Portable Station
DECT

Operation
Selecting the Feature Button on the Display
The following buttons can be activated using display operations.

PAUSE Button
FWD/DND Button
MESSAGE Button
CONF (Conference) Button
TONE Button
Display sequence in “KEY” display
KEY
OK
PAUSE (KEY1) FWD/DND (KEY2) MESSAGE (KEY3)
PAUSE Button FWD/DND Button MESSAGE Button
TONE (KEY5) CONF (KEY4)
TONE Button CONF (Conference)

Button
<Example>
To cancel the Do Not Disturb feature
PS
OK OK C
Press TALK. Press Press OK. Press BOOK until Press OK. Press 0. Press CANCEL.
FUNCTION. “FWD/DND” is
displayed.
• These buttons can also be activated using a combination of buttons. For descriptions and button combinations,
refer to “Before Operating the DECT Portable Station – Button Descriptions”.

Other Operations
Most of the wired telephone features are also supported by a system with a DECT portable station (PS).
For feature descriptions and details, refer to the respective features in Operation (Section 2).
Desired Function Operation

Making Calls
Basic Calling
To an operator Idle operator
(Operator Call) OR
operator Specific operator

call number
Easy Dialling
With one touch button F1-F3
(One-Touch Dialling) (One-Touch

Dailling)
Using numbers stored at your To store a phone number

extension station speed
MNO phone no. C
(Station Speed Dialling) dial no.
To dial
MNO station speed
dial no.
Using numbers stored in the system speed

OK
system dial no.
(System Speed Dialling)
To a pre-set party by going off- To store a phone number

hook PQRS GHI ABC
phone no. C
(Pickup Dialling)
Portable Station
To set / cancel
PQRS GHI set C
cancel
DECT
To dial
Using a single digit number

quick dial no.
(Quick Dialling)
Redial To store
Saving the number and redialling During a conversation or while hearing a busy tone
F1-F3
(Saved Number Redial) OK
(Save)
To dial
F1-F3
(Save)
When the Dialled Line is Busy or To set To answer a call-back ringing and call (outside call)
There is No Answer While hearing a busy tone
phone no.
Reserving a busy line MNO C
(Automatic Callback Busy)

To cancel To answer a call-back ringing and call (intercom call)
GHI MNO C

Operation
Making Calls
Sending a call waiting tone While hearing a busy tone

(Busy Station Signalling [BSS]) ABC
Leaving a message waiting To leave a message waiting indication when the called extension is busy
indication or does not answer
(Message Waiting) GHI C
OR
DEF
To leave / cancel a message waiting indication

PQRS Leave extension no. C
Cancel
To call back
PQRS ABC
OR
DEF
To clear all message waiting indications

PQRS
your C
extension no.
Calling without Restrictions

Using an account code F1-F3
GHI WXYZ account code phone no.
(Account Code Entry) (CO)
OR
line access no.
To an extension refusing the call While hearing the DND tone

(DND Override) ABC
Changing the dialling mode After the line is connected

(Pulse to Tone Conversion)
desired no.
OR
JKL
Alternating the Calling Method Voice to ring calling or ring to voice calling
(Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice)
Receiving Calls
Answering a Call Ringing at
Another Telephone Outside call
GHI
(Call Pickup)
Directed
GHI extension no.
Group
GHI
Answering a call via an External

Speaker GHI ABC
speaker no.
(Trunk Answer From Any Station
[TAFAS])

Holding a Call To park a call
Holding in a system parking zone JKL ABC parking zone no. C
CLR
(Call Park)
To retrieving
JKL ABC
stored parking
zone no.
Talking to Two Parties Alternately When talking to one party while the other party is on hold
(Call Splitting) When either party is an outside party When both parties are an extension party
F1-F3
(CO)
OR
INT'
Transferring a Call To an extension

CLR C
extension no. Announce.
To an external party
F1-F3
(CO) phone no.

OR
line access no.
Answering a Call Waiting To talk to the new caller by terminating the current call
While hearing a Call Waiting tone
F1-F3
(CO)
OR
INT'
To talk to the new caller by holding the current call

F1-F3
(CO)
Portable Station
OR
INT'
DECT
Adding a third party during a GHI desired party’s no. GHI
conversation
(Conference)
Leaving a conference When you are talking with two extension or one extension party and one external party
C
When you are talking with two external parties (Unattendant Conference)
GHI
Saving a Number To store

(Notebook Function) During a conversation or on-hook status
F1-F3
OK OK phone no.
(Save)
To dial
F1-F3
(Save)

Operation
Forwarding your Calls To set
(Call Forwarding) PQRS
OR
ABC
All Calls C
ABC
extension no.
Busy
DEF
extension no.
No answer
GHI
extension no.
Busy / No answer
JKL
extension no.
To Outside Line
MNO
line access no. phone no.
Follow Me
PQRS your extension no.
By ISDN Line
WXYZ ABC
CFU your MSN phone no.
WXYZ DEF
CFB
WXYZ GHI CFNR
To cancel
PQRS
OR
ABC
At the original extension (except "By ISDN Line") C
At the destination extension

TUV your extension no.
By ISDN Line
WXYZ All your MSN
WXYZ ABC CFU
WXYZ DEF CFB
WXYZ GHI
CFNR
Forwarding Calls from a To set

Receiving Group PQRS GHI
forwarding destination group C
group no. or extension no.
(Call Forwarding – from Hunting
Group) To cancel
PQRS GHI
forwarding C
group no.
Showing an Absent Message on To set

the Caller’s Telephone Display PQRS JKL message no. parameter (if required) C
(Absent Message Capability)
To cancel
PQRS JKL C
Preventing Other People from

Using Your Telephone
PQRS PQRS
desired code same code Lock C
(Electronic Station Lockout) stored code Unlock

Leaving a Call Distribution Group GHI JKL group no. For Log-In to specific group C
(Log-In / Log-Out)
For Log-In to all groups
group no. For Log-Out from specific group
For Log-Out from all groups

Paging All
MNO ABC
OR
Announce.
MNO DEF
External
MNO ABC
All Announce.
Group
DEF
MNO
group no. Specific
Announce.
All
Paging a Person and Transferring Through a speker and telephones

a Call MNO ABC
CLR
OR
Announce.
MNO DEF
Through a speaker
CLR
MNO ABC speaker no. Specific
All Announce.
Through the telephones of a particular extension group
CLR
MNO DEF
group no. Specific
All Announce.
Portable Station
Answering a Paged GHI ABC speaker no. Page through a speaker
Announcement
DECT
GHI DEF Page through a wired telephone

Setting the Alarm To set
(Timed Reminder) PQRS MNO hour/minute AM One time C
PM Daily
To cancel
PQRS MNO C
To view the setting

PQRS MNO ABC C
To stop or answer the ringback

any key
Refusing Incoming Calls

PQRS To set C
Refusing all calls
OR extension no. Extension
(Do Not Disturb [DND]) ABC
Operator
No backup station
To cancel

Operation
Refusing direct outside calls JKL GHI Set C

(DND for Direct Dialling In Calls)
Cancel
Receiving a Call Waiting

To set / cancel To talk to the new caller,
(Call Waiting) terminate the current call
PQRS DEF Set C
Cancel F1-F3
OR
INT'
To talk to the new caller,

hold the current call
F1-F3
OR
INT'
Displaying Your Number on the To show an identification number

Called Party and Calling Party’s PQRS no. assigned for an outside line C
Telephone
ABC no. assigned for your extension
(Calling / Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP / To show a desired identification number when making a particular call
COLP]) F1-F3
PQRS DEF
desired phone no.
identification (CO)
no. OR
line access no.
Preventing Your Number Being To set / cancel

Displayed on the Called Party’s JKL WXYZ ABC Set C
Telephone
Cancel
(Calling Line Identification
Restriction [CLIR]) To change the setting at any time for a particular call
F1-F3
JKL WXYZ phone no.
(CO)
OR
line access no.
Preventing Your Number Being

Displayed on the Calling Party’s
JKL TUV Set C
Telephone Cancel
(Connected Line Identification
Restriction [COLR])
Denying Other People the

PQRS ABC Deny C
Possibility of Picking up Your
Calls Allow
(Call Pickup Deny)
Clearing the Feature

PQRS WXYZ C
Settings at Your Extension
(Station Program Clear)
Day / Night Service Status Switching modes using the feature number
[Pre-assigned extension user only]
PQRS TUV Day mode C
Night mode

If a Doorphone / Door Opener is
Connected
To call the doorphone
MNO
doorphone no.
If a Doorphone / Door Opener is

Connected
Forwarding doorphone calls to To set / cancel (at the extension receiving doophone calls)
outside parties PQRS MNO
doorphone no. Specific Set C
(Doorphone Call Forwarding to
Outside Line) All Cancel
To store a phone number

PQRS JKL
Day doorphone no. Specific line access no. C

& phone no.
Night All
To clear the phone number

PQRS JKL Day doorphone no. Specific C
Night All
Opening the door From a specified extension

JKL JKL doorphone no. C
From any extension while talking to the doorphone

JKL C
If a Host PBX is Connected

desired no.
Accessing external services
(External Feature Access)
If a Voice Processing System is
Portable
Portable Station
Connected To forwarding your calls to a mailbox
Voice mail integration
PQRS
Call Forwarding no. VM extension no.
DECT
C
DECT
OR
ABC
Station
Transferring calls
F1-F3
extension no.
(VM
Transfer)
To listen to a stored message
VM extension no.
OR
DEF
Recording a conversation To record into your mailbox / To stop recording

F1-F3
(Two-Way Recording)
(Two-Way
Record)
To record into another mailbox

F1-F3
extension no.
(Two-Way
Transfer)
To stop recording into another mailbox

F1-F3
(Two-Way
Transfer)

Customising Your PS
You can customise your telephone functions with your DECT portable station (PS).
PS Programming: You can change the initial settings according to your needs.
PBX Programming: You can enter into the proprietary wired telephone (PT) programming mode
(Station Programming) and program several items for your PS.
There are three displays for programming as shown below.
Display sequence in “PROGRAMMING” display
PROGRAMMING
OK
PS-PROGRAM PBX-PROGRAM REGISTRATION
PS Programming PBX Programming Registration*
* This display is used for PS registration and not displayed if the DECT System Lock is set.
For details, consult your dealer.

PS Programming
You may be required to enter a PS Programming password or a DECT System Lock password
when entering the PS Programming mode.
Depending on the password, the number of possible programming items changes for PS security
reasons. There are three password levels.
Level 0: A password is not required.
Level 1: A PS Programming password is required.
Level 2: A System Lock password is required.
After selecting the PS programming display, “ENTER PASSWORD” may be displayed.

If not displayed, no password is required.
The combinations of the passwords are as shown below.
If DECT System Lock password is: DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE

If PS Programming password is: DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE
System Lock password

Level 0 – 2 Level 0 – 2
Not required. Not required.
are possible. are possible.
PS Programming password
Level 0 – 2 Level 0 – 1
Not required. Not required.
are possible. are possible.
No password
Level 0 – 2 Level 0 is Level 0 – 1 Level 0 is
or
are possible. possible. are possible. possible.
If incorrect password
Portable Station
DECT

Customising Your PS
To set the PS Programming / DECT System Lock password
PS
Next
OK OK OR
Previous
PROGRAMMING PS-PROGRAM BACKLIGHT PS PASSWORD OR

DECT-SYS LOCK
= ON = DISABLE = DISABLE
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press OK. Press # or until the

and then BOOK twice. display above appears.
OK password OK password
PS PASSWORD ENTER PASSWORD ENTER PASSWORD REENTER PASSWORD REENTER PASSWORD

= ENABLE = = **** = = ****
Press BOOK to Press OK. Enter password Press OK. Enter same
select “ENABLE”. (4 digits). password again.
OK C
Press OK. Press CANCEL.
To cancel the PS Programming / DECT System Lock password

PS
OK OK password OK
PROGRAMMING PS-PROGRAM ENTER PASSWORD ENTER PASSWORD BACKLIGHT

= = **** = ON
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press OK. Enter password Press OK.
and then BOOK twice. (4 digits).
Next
OR OK C
Previous
PS PASSWORD OR
DECT-SYS LOCK DECT-SYS LOCK
= ENABLE = ENABLE = DISABLE
Press # or until the Press BOOK to Press OK. Press CANCEL.

display above appears. select “DISABLE”.

To change the initial settings
PS
<If required>
OK OK password OK
PROGRAMMING PS-PROGRAM ENTER PASSWORD ENTER PASSWORD BACKLIGHT

= = **** = ON
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press OK. Enter password Press OK.
and then BOOK twice. (4 digits).
To continue
Next
OR OK C
Previous
<Example>
RING PATTERN RING PATTERN RING PATTERN

= 1 = 6 = 6
Press # or until Press BOOK until Press OK. Press CANCEL.

the desired item is the desired selection
displayed. is displayed.
Display Item Selection Level
Portable Station
Do you prefer the keypad No (OFF)
BACKLIGHT
backlight? 0
DECT
= ON
(Keypad Backlight Mode Set) Yes (ON)
Do you prefer to hear the No (OFF)

KEY TONE key tone (except during
= ON
0
PBX Programming mode)?
(Key Tone Set) Yes (ON)
Which ringer pattern do you Ringer pattern no.

RING PATTERN
= 1 prefer in 6 patterns? 0
(Ringer Pattern Selection) Ringer pattern 1
Ring and vibrate at the same time

How do you receive a (RING & VIB)
call?*1
VIBRATION & RING
(Vibration and Ring Type Vibrate for 9 seconds then ring 0
= OFF (VIB→RING)
Selection)
Not use the vibration and
ring mode (OFF)

Customising Your PS
English
German
Do you prefer to change French

LANGUAGE
= AUTO the display language?
Italian 0
(Display Language
Selection)
Spanish
Dutch
Auto (English)*2
Do you lock / unlock the lock (ON)

DIRECTORY LOCK
= OFF
Call Directories? 1
(Directory Lock Control) Unlock (OFF)
Do you prefer to answer an No (OFF)

QUICK ANSWER incoming call by just lifting your
0
= ON ringing PS off the Charger?
(Quick Answering Mode Set) Yes (ON)
Do you prefer to No (OFF)

AUTO ANSWER answer a call without
= OFF
0
lifting your PS using
the headset? Answer all calls. (INT/CO)
(Automatic Answer
Answer only intercom calls.
Mode Set)
(INT ONLY)
Select the number of rings before
ringers
AUTO ANS DELAY answering a call automatically
= OFF
0
when using the headset.*3
(Automatic Answer Delay Selection) 1 ring
DECT System no.

Do you prefer to change
ACCESS DECT-SYS the DECT system (1
AUTO (All connected terminals) 2
= DECT-SYS1 through 4)?*4
(DECT System Selection)
Your registered DECT system
no.
Extension no. (EXT)

0
DECT system no.
Which standby display do
STANDBY DISPLAY (DECT-SYS-NO.)
= OFF
you prefer?*5
(Standby Display Selection) DECT system and extension no.
(DECT-SYS-NO.&EXT)
None of these (OFF)

Which display do you prefer Date (DATE)
DATE/TIME DISPLY in the Standby mode?*5
= TIME
0
(Date / Time Display
Selection) Date and time (TIME)
The following settings will be returned to their default settings

– Call log numbers*6
– Ringer volume
– Receiver volume
MEMORY CLEAR – PS Programming items
1
(except: Selecting the DECT System; Cancelling the PS
Registration; Setting the PS Programming Password;
Setting the DECT System Lock)
Press the OK button after the display on the left appears.
(Memory Clear)
After cancelling the PS registration in System Programming,

CANCEL DECT-SYS cancel again by pressing the OK button after the display on the
2
= DECT-SYS1 left appears. For details, consult your dealer.
(PS Registration Cancellation)
Do you prefer the Guidance Yes (ON)

GUIDANCE menu to help you operate
0
= OFF your PS?*7
(Guidance Menu Set) No (OFF)
Do you prefer to use the PS Yes (ENABLE)

PS PASSWORD Programming password?
1
= DISABLE (PS Programming
Password Set) No (DISABLE)
Portable Station
Do you prefer to use the DECT Yes (ENABLE)
DECT-SYS LOCK System Lock password?
2
= DISABLE (DECT System Lock Password
DECT
Set) No (DISABLE)
*1 If you set the ringer volume off or vibration mode using the Volume Control button, the PS doesn’t ring
regardless of this setting.
*2 If you are connected to a Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System while the default setting is still “AUTO”, the
display language will depend on the setting of the system.
*3 The display of this item is only displayed when “Automatic Answer Mode Set” is set to “INT/CO” or “INT ONLY”.
*4 The display of this item is only displayed when more than two fixed terminals are connected.
*5 The display of this item is only displayed when your PS is registered to a Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System
and “ ” is displayed.
*6 Call log numbers are cleared only when your PS is registered to a system other than a Panasonic Digital Super
Hybrid System.
*7 For the Guidance menu, some keys work differently from the normal use.
BOOK( )=NEXT OK( OK )=OK #( )=NEXT
*( )=PREV HOLD( )=BACK C( C )=EXIT

Customising Your PS
PBX Programming
You can enter into the proprietary wired telephone (PT) programming mode and program several items
for your PS.
The available programs are listed below.
Initial Settings
Initial Settings
PS
OK OK
PROGRAMMING PS-PROGRAM PBX-PROGRAM PT-PGM Mode
Press FUNCTION Press OK. Press BOOK. Press OK.

and then BOOK twice.
programming C
input
Follow programming Press CANCEL.

input.
No line
Which line do you prefer to

seize when you go off-hook An idle outside line ABC
to make calls?
Outside line no.
(Preferred Line Assignment A pre-assigned outside line DEF
(01–54)
– Outgoing)
INT'
The Intercom line
To clear the setting of the “Preferred Line Assignment –

Outgoing”
To check your extension number MNO

You can change the flexible CO buttons to the following function buttons.
PS
OK OK

To continue
F1-F3
programming C
input
Press CO. Follow programming Press BOOK. Press CANCEL.

input.

Loop-CO
Group-CO Outside line group no. (1–8)
Portable Station
Single-CO Outside line no. (01–54)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Extension no.
DECT
One-Touch Dialling ABC Desired no.*1 (max. 24 digits)
Message DEF
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb) GHI
Save JKL
Account MNO
Conference PQRS
Log-In/Log-Out TUV Receiving group no.
Voice Mail Transfer*2 TUV ABC Voice mail extension no.
Two-Way Record*2 TUV DEF Voice mail extension no.
Two-Way Transfer*2 TUV GHI

Voice mail extension no.
One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold TUV Desired no.*1 (max. 24 digits)
Terminate WXYZ

Customising Your PS
• *1 “ ”, “#”, FLASH, PAUSE, SECRET (Intercom) and — (Conference) can also be stored.
– If you do not want to display the stored number, press the SECRET (Intercom) button before and after the
– If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the line access
number.
<Example>
SECRET
49 1234 # 9 [ 123 4567 ]
Account code feature no. Account code Account code delimiter Automatic line Phone number
access number
• *2 These buttons are used for the voice mail integration feature.
• To exit the mode at any time, press the CANCEL button.

[pre-assigned extension only]
PS
OK OK

To continue
TUV ID code programming C

input
Dial 8. Enter ID code Follow programming Press HOLD. Press HOLD Press CANCEL.
(4 digits). input. again.

OR
printing each extension
2 Extension
Outside line
no.no. (01-54) Clearing
Portable Station
charge, outside charge CLR
OR
or account code
charge. 2
3 Extensiontable
Account no. no. (001-128) Print out OK
DECT
OR
printing total extension
charge, total outside 5
2 Outside line no. Clearing CLR
charge or total account OR
code charge. 6
2 Account table no. Print out OK
Assigning an account 72 Extensiontable

Account no. no. (001-128) CLR
New account no. (10 digits) OK
code.
• You cannot print out the account code charge of the account table number (01) by SMDR.

This chapter provides the Troubleshooting, Feature
Number List, Directory, Tone List, Specifications and
the Quick Reference Card for a Single Line
Appendix Telephone. Check the Troubleshooting before
consulting your dealer.
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting for wired telephones
Problem Remedy
The telephone does not work • The wiring is wrong.
properly. á Check the wiring.
• The system does not work properly.
á Restart the system is required. Consult your dealer.
I cannot use the telephone. • The telephone is locked.

á Unlock your telephone. (+ P. 2-52, 3-3)
• Your telephone is connected to an eXtra Device Port.
á System programming is required. Consult your dealer.
Some features do not work. • System management may restrict certain features.
á Consult your manager.
• The feature numbers have changed.
á Confirm the revised number and try again.
Even though following the manual • The Intercom line was not seized. The seized line, when
instructions, none of the operations going off-hook, was changed by personal setting. (+ P. 4-2)
work when using a proprietary á In the manual, going off-hook means an Intercom line is
telephone. seized.
If the setting has been changed, press the INTERCOM
button after going off-hook and follow the instructions.
The paralleled single line telephones • This is the default setting.

do not ring. á Change the setting to ring. (+ P. 2-71)
The telephone does not work using • The extension line has been changed. The previous
the personal settings or with other telephone’s settings have not be cleared.
settings. (One-touch dialling, á Clear the settings and then programme your desired
forwarding destination, etc.) settings again. (+ P. 2-73, 4-3, 4-6)
My proprietary telephone does not • Some models do not have the function button.
have a function button. á Change a flexible button to the desired button.
(+ P. 4-4)
á Enter the specified feature number instead of the function
button. (+ P. 2-2)
I cannot make an outside call. • The telephone is locked.

á Unlock your telephone. (+ P. 2-52, 3-3)
• Toll restriction is activated.
á Consult your manager or dealer.
• An account code is required. (+ P. 2-22, 4-7)
• Another PBX is connected to your system.
á A host PBX access code is required. (+ P. 2-77)
• Nothing was dialled within 10 seconds after going off-hook.
á Hang up, off-hook and re-dial again.
A reorder tone is audible or • The telephone is locked.

“Restricted” is displayed. á Unlock your telephone. (+ P. 2-52, 3-3)
• Toll restriction is activated.
• An account code is required. (+ P. 2-22, 4-7)
6-2 Appendix
Problem Remedy
I cannot make an outside call using • A line access number was not stored.
the One-Touch Dialling button or á A line access number is required for outside calls.
speed dialling. (+ P. 2-9, 2-92, 4-4)
I cannot remember the feature á Ask your dealer to change the feature numbers for easier use.
numbers. á Store the feature numbers into the One-Touch Dialling
buttons. (+ P. 4-4)
Redialling does not function. • The stored number was more than 24 digits or an extension
number. (+ P. 2-15)
I do not want to show my (+ P. 2-68, 2-69)

identification number to the calling
or called party’s telephone.
I want to show my identification (+ P. 2-67)

number to the calling or called
party’s telephone.
I cannot send a call waiting tone to • The other party has not set the Call Waiting feature.
the dialled extension. (+ P. 2-17, 2-18, 2-38, 2-65)
• The other party has set Data Line Security.
á Consult your dealer.
I forgot the lock code / Live Call á Ask the Operator or manager to assist you. (+ P. 3-3)
Screening Password.
The background music started á Turn off the music. (+ P. 2-70, 3-7)
suddenly.
I do not want to display a number á Conceal the number. (+ P. 2-92, 4-5)

which is stored in memory.
The display does not show the • The telephone is not a Panasonic proprietary telephone.
message described in the manual. á This manual shows messages which appear only on
Panasonic proprietary telephones (e.g. KX-T7436).
(+ P. 2-3)
Appendix
I want to confirm my extension (+ P. 4-9)
number and jack number.
The date and time are not correct. • Set the date and time by system programming. (+ P. 4-14)
The display is abnormal. • The lithium battery for memory back-up needs to be replaced.
I want to distinguish the tones. (+ P. 4-3, 4-5)
I hear a warning tone from the • The handset was off-hook in an idle status for an extended
telephone. period of time.
á Replace the handset.
Appendix 6-3
Troubleshooting
Problem Remedy
The MESSAGE button light lit. • Another extension left you a message waiting indication
during you were on the phone or left your desk.
“System Data Err 1” is displayed at • There is a wrong system data with back up RAM for master
the operator 1’s telephone. system.
“System Data Err 2” is displayed at • There is a wrong system data with back up RAM for slave
the operator 1’s telephone. system.
“Check Printer” is displayed at the • The paper of the printer runs out or the printer is out-of-
operator 1’s telephone. service.
“System Link Down” is displayed at • System inter-connection is down.

the operator 1’s telephone. á Consult your dealer.
A Power Failure occurred. When a power failure occurs...

The system and Panasonic proprietary telephones stop all
functions. Specific single line telephones are automatically
connected straight to specific CO lines. This provides CO
line conversations between the single line telephone and the
following CO lines:
KX-TD816 KX-TD1232
CO01 CO01
CO02 CO02
CO05 CO09
CO13
CO14
CO21
All intercom calls and features do not function.

When turning the power back on...
Your system restarts with the stored data automatically.
Memory is protected by a pre-installed lithium battery.
There is no memory loss except for Automatic Callback
Busy (Reserving a busy line) and Held calls.
6-4 Appendix
Troubleshooting for DECT Portable Station
Problem Remedy
The PS does not work. • The battery is empty.
á Charge the batteries fully. (+ P. 5-5)
• The PS has been cancelled or the PS has not been
registered.
The PS does not operate. • The power switch is OFF.

á Turn it ON. (+ P. 5-7)
The PS does not ring. • Ringer volume is set to OFF or VIBRATION.

á Set to ring by pressing the Volume Control button.
(+ P. 5-7)
• The PS is out of range or the Cell Station (CS) is busy.
á Move closer to the CS or try again later.
• The radio channel is busy or a radio communication error
occurred.
á Try again later.
You cannot dial. • The number which you dialled is restricted by the system.
• The key lock mode is set.
á To cancel the mode, press the Function for about 2
seconds. (+ P. 5-25)
occurred.
á Try again later.
Static, sound cuts in/out, fades. á Set the PS and CS away from other electrical appliances.
Interference from other electrical á Move closer to the CS.
units.
“CS Busy” is displayed. • The radio channel is busy.

á Try again later.
“FAULT” is displayed. á Consult your dealer.
Appendix
“PS NO CONNECTED” is displayed. • The power switch is set to OFF.
á Turn it ON. (+ P. 5-7)
• The PS is out of range.
á Move closer to the CS.
occurred.
á Try again later.
“REGISTER UNIT” is displayed. • The PS is not registered in the system.

“NO SERVICE” is displayed. • The PS is out of range.

á Move closer to the CS.
Appendix 6-5
Troubleshooting
Problem Remedy
You cannot store a phone number • Your entry exceeds the maximum digits or characters.
and name in the directory. • Do not pause for over 30 seconds while programming.
The alarm sounds after pressing the • A number is not saved in the Call Log.
Redial button.
“ ” flashes or beeps tones sound • The battery is low.

every 5 seconds during a á Charge the batteries fully. (+ P. 5-5)
conversation.
You charged the batteries fully, á Clean the charge contacts and charge again.
but “ ” flashes. á It is time to change the batteries. Please purchase new
batteries.
The PS stops working during á Turn the power switch OFF and ON. Then try again.
operation. (+ P. 5-7)
á Re-insert the battery and try again. (+ P. 5-5)
Handover does not work. • You moved to a busy CS or are out of range.
• You moved while not having a conversation (e.g., while
hearing a busy tone).
occurred.
The display does not show a strong • Normally, the PS user can make a call even with a “ ”
radio signal “ ” even though you status. In this case, the current linked CS is still connected
are near the CS. even though another CS is closer.
The alarm sounds during a • The radio signal is weak.

conversation while receiving a weak á Move closer to the CS.
radio signal
“ ”.
6-6 Appendix
Feature Number List
Numbers listed below are the default settings. There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature
numbers. If you change the flexible feature numbers, fill in your assigned numbers in the list for
future reference.
Feature Default Assigned no. Additional digits

Calling the operator 0
Automatic line access number / ARS 9
Outside line number 8 1-8
Calling a pre-set party by going off-hook / 74 1/0/
cancelling / storing 2+phone no.+#
Calling using the number stored at your extension 6 0-9
Storing the numbers 60 [0-9]+phone no.+#
Calling using the number stored in the system 000-499
Redialling the last phone number you dialled #
Cancelling the reserving of a busy line 46
Sending a call waiting tone 2 Fixed
Leaving a message waiting indication / cancelling 70 1+ext. no. / 0+ext. no. /
/ calling back / clearing a received indication 2 / 0+your ext. no.
Joining an existing call 3 Fixed
16th incoming call log is stored / disregarded 56 1/0
Picking up a call for someone else – outside call 4
– group 40
– direct 41 ext. no.
Holding or retrieving a call 50
Retrieving from another extension – outside call 53 01-54
– intercom call 51 ext. no.
Holding in a system parking zone or retrieving 52 0-9
Paging or transferring and paging 63 / 00 / 01-16
– all devices / all extensions /group
– external speaker 62 1-4
Answering a paged announcement or an 42 1-4
incoming call through the speaker
Appendix
Answering the paged announcement through telephones 43
Accessing external services 64
Forwarding your call – All calls / Busy / No 710 [2 / 3 / 4 / 5]+ ext. no.
answer / Busy, No answer
– to an external party 6+line access no.
+phone no.+#
– cancel 0
– Follow Me/cancel [7 / 8]+your ext. no.
Appendix 6-7
Feature Number List
Refusing all calls (DND)
– forwarding to extension / operator / 710 1+[ext. no. / 0 / ]
no backup station
– cancelling 0
Forwarding calls from a receiving group 714 1+forwarding group
no.+destination group
or ext. no. /
0+forwarding group no.
Refusing direct outside calls (DND or DDI) / 54 1/0
cancelling
Showing a message to the caller / cancelling 750 [1-9]+(parameter) / 0
Joining the call receiving group / leaving 45 [1 / 0]+
[group no. or (all)]
Conference 3 Fixed
Calling with account codes 49 code+[# or 99]
Temporary tone dialling # Fixed
Dialling a DND extension 2 Fixed
Setting the alarm / 76 1+time+[0:AM / 1:PM]+
[0 (once) / 1 (daily)]
cancelling / viewing 0/2
Receiving or refusing a call waiting tone or voice 731 0/1/2/3
no tone / tone / OHCA / whisper OHCA
Displaying your number on the called / calling
party’s telephone
– showing a number assigned for an outside 711 1/2
line / your extension
– showing a desired number when making a 3+desired no.+#
particular call
Preventing your number being displayed on the 59 2/0/1
called party’s telephone / showing / changing
the setting when making a particular call
Preventing your number being displayed on the 58 1/0
calling party’s telephone / showing
Denying other people the possibility of 57 3 digit code twice /
– seeing your call logs / allowing stored code
– using your telephone / allowing 77 3 digit code twice /
stored code
– picking up your calls / allowing 720 1/0
– paging through the speaker / allowing 721 1/0
Day / Night service confirmation # Fixed
Switching the display – day, month, time / Fixed
day, month, year, day of the week
Parallelled telephones ring / do not ring 69 1/0
6-8 Appendix
Switching the calling method (Ring / Voice) Fixed
Cancelling the feature settings 790
Calling the doorphone 61 1-4
Opening the door from a specified phone 55 1-4
from any extension while talking 5 Fixed
Forwarding doorphone calls to outside parties 716 [1-2 or (all)]+[1 / 0]
– setting / cancelling
– storing the phone number 715 [0 (day) / 1 (night)]+
[1-4 or (all)]+line
access no.+phone no.+#
– clear the phone number [0 (day) / 1 (night)]+
[1-4 or (all)]+#
*Assigning level of service – primary / secondary 79 [1 / 3]+ext. no.
*Setting the Live Call Screening password / 799 3 digit code twice /
cancelling stored code
*Hotel use features 1+ext. no.+time+
– Setting the alarm for other extensions / 7 [0:AM / 1:PM]+
cancelling / viewing [0 (once) / 1 (daily)] /
0+ext. no. / 2+ext. no.
– Printing out guest room information 750 [6-9]+(parameter)
*Turning on / off the background music 65
Switching the Day / Night service 78 0/1
– to day / to night
*Recording an outgoing message / playing back 712 [1 / 2]+OGM no.
*Printing out the system working report / clearing 794 1/0
* : Operator only
Appendix
Appendix 6-9
Directory
Extension
Jack Jack
no. no.
01-1 01-2
02-1 02-2
03-1 03-2
04-1 04-2
05-1 05-2
06-1 06-2
07-1 07-2
08-1 08-2
09-1 09-2
10-1 10-2
11-1 11-2
12-1 12-2
13-1 13-2
14-1 14-2
15-1 15-2
16-1 16-2
17-1 17-2
18-1 18-2
19-1 19-2
20-1 20-2
21-1 21-2
22-1 22-2
23-1 23-2
24-1 24-2
25-1 25-2
26-1 26-2
27-1 27-2
28-1 28-2
29-1 29-2
30-1 30-2
31-1 31-2
32-1 32-2
6-10 Appendix
Jack Jack
no. no.
33-1 33-2
34-1 34-2
35-1 35-2
36-1 36-2
37-1 37-2
38-1 38-2
39-1 39-2
40-1 40-2
41-1 41-2
42-1 42-2
43-1 43-2
44-1 44-2
45-1 45-2
46-1 46-2
47-1 47-2
48-1 48-2
49-1 49-2
50-1 50-2
51-1 51-2
52-1 52-2
53-1 53-2
54-1 54-2
55-1 55-2
56-1 56-2
Appendix
57-1 57-2
58-1 58-2
59-1 59-2
60-1 60-2
61-1 61-2
62-1 62-2
63-1 63-2
64-1 64-2
Appendix 6-11
Directory
No. Name No. Name No. Name
000 043 086
001 044 087
002 045 088
003 046 089
004 047 090
005 048 091
006 049 092
007 050 093
008 051 094
009 052 095
010 053 096
011 054 097
012 055 098
013 056 099
014 057 100
015 058 101
016 059 102
017 060 103
018 061 104
019 062 105
020 063 106
021 064 107
022 065 108
023 066 109
024 067 110
025 068 111
026 069 112
027 070 113
028 071 114
029 072 115
030 073 116
031 074 117
032 075 118
033 076 119
034 077 120
035 078 121
036 079 122
037 080 123
038 081 124
039 082 125
040 083 126
041 084 127
042 085 128
6-12 Appendix
129 174 219
130 175 220
131 176 221
132 177 222
133 178 223
134 179 224
135 180 225
136 181 226
137 182 227
138 183 228
139 184 229
140 185 230
141 186 231
142 187 232
143 188 233
144 189 234
145 190 235
146 191 236
147 192 237
148 193 238
149 194 239
150 195 240
151 196 241
152 197 242
153 198 243
154 199 244
155 200 245
156 201 246
157 202 247
158 203 248
159 204 249
160 205 250
161 206 251
Appendix
162 207 252
163 208 253
164 209 254
165 210 255
166 211 256
167 212 257
168 213 258
169 214 259
170 215 260
171 216 261
172 217 262
173 218 263
Appendix 6-13
Directory
264 309 354
265 310 355
266 311 356
267 312 357
268 313 358
269 314 359
270 315 360
271 316 361
272 317 362
273 318 363
274 319 364
275 320 365
276 321 366
277 322 367
278 323 368
279 324 369
280 325 370
281 326 371
282 327 372
283 328 373
284 329 374
285 330 375
286 331 376
287 332 377
288 333 378
289 334 379
290 335 380
291 336 381
292 337 382
293 338 383
294 339 384
295 340 385
296 341 386
297 342 387
298 343 388
299 344 389
300 345 390
301 346 391
302 347 392
303 348 393
304 349 394
305 350 395
306 351 396
307 352 397
308 353 398
6-14 Appendix
399 433 467
400 434 468
401 435 469
402 436 470
403 437 471
404 438 472
405 439 473
406 440 474
407 441 475
408 442 476
409 443 477
410 444 478
411 445 479
412 446 480
413 447 481
414 448 482
415 449 483
416 450 484
417 451 485
418 452 486
419 453 487
420 454 488
421 455 489
422 456 490
423 457 491
424 458 492
425 459 493
426 460 494
427 461 495
428 462 496
429 463 497
430 464 498
431 465 499
Appendix
432 466

Name No. Name No.
0 5
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
Appendix 6-15
Directory
Quick Dialling
Name Quick dial no. Name Quick dial no.
Phone no.
6-16 Appendix
What is This Tone?
While on-hook
Ring Tones
Tone 1 1s
• Incoming call from an external party
• An outside call is held for more than a
specified time (default: 60 seconds).
Tone 2
• Incoming call from an extension
• An intercom call is held for more
than a specified time (default: 60
seconds).
Tone 3
• Incoming call from a doorphone
• The pre-set alarm time has arrived.
Tone 4
• A reserved outside line or
extension became idle.
• A caller is leaving a message in
your mailbox (Live Call Screening-
Private mode).
When going off-hook

Dial Tones
1s
Tone 1
Normal
Tone 2
At least one feature has been
changed from the default setting
at your extention.
Tone 3
• The alarm is being answered.
• Enter an account code to turn off
the tone.
Appendix
Tone 4
Message waiting indication was
received.
Appendix 6-17
What is This Tone?
When you make calls
1s
Busy Tone
CCBS Tone
The called party on an ISDN line is
busy.
Reorder Tone
• The outside line you tried to seize is
not assigned or denied.
• The wrong account code was entered.
Ringback Tone
Do Not Disturb Tone

The dialed extension is refusing
incoming calls.
While off-hooking
Indication Tones
Tone 1 15 s
Call Waiting tone (default)
Tone 2
Call Waiting tone from outside
Tone 3 5s
Call Waiting tone from another
extension
Tone 4 15 s
A call is held for more than a
specified time (default: 60 seconds).
When talking to an external party

1s
Warning Tone
This tone is sent 15, 10 and 5
seconds before the time limit.
6-18 Appendix
When setting the features or programming
Confirmation Tones
Tone 1 1s
• Set/cancel to deny other people
the possibility of using your phone.
• The new setting differs from the
previous setting by personal
programming.
• Completing the system
programming.
Tone 2
• The feature setting was
completed successfully.
• Before paging through an
external speaker
• The new setting is same as the
previous setting by personal
programming.
Tone 3
Before performing the following
features:
• Retrieving a held call
• Picking up another call
• Paging/Answering a paged
annoucement
• Answering the call through a
speaker
Tone 4
Establishing or leaving a three-party
conversation
Appendix
Appendix 6-19
Specifications
General Description
Item Description
System Capacity Basic Expansion System
Connection
KX-TD816
Outside lines 0 8 —
Wired extension 8 16 —
Wireless extension* 0 16 —
(Extension lines with XDP/SXDP 16 32 —)
KX-TD1232
Outside lines 0 38 38
Wired extension 16 32 64
Wireless extension* 0 64 64
(Extension lines with XDP/SXDP 32 64 128 )
*This is the maximum number of DECT portable stations that you can
register.
Power Supplies Primary 230 VAC, 50 Hz

Secondary Station Supply Volt: 30V
Circuit Volt: ± 5V, ± 15V
Power Failure • Memory backup duration: seven years with a
factory-provided lithium battery
• 3 outside lines max. for KX-TD816 and 6 outside
lines max. for KX-TD1232 automatically assigned
to specific single line telephone (Power Failure
Transfer)
• System operation for about three hours using
recommended batteries (consisting of two 12
VDC car batteries).
Dialling Outward/Internal Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, Tone (DTMF) Dialling

Mode Conversion DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
SMDR Interface Serial Interface (RS-232C)

(Station Message Output Equipment Printer
Detail Recording) Detail Recording Date, Time, Extension Number, Outside Line
Number, Dialled Number, Ring Duration, Call
Duration, Account Code, Charge Fee
Characteristics
Item Description
Maximum Number of Station 1 or 2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port Connection
Instruments per Line
Ring Voltage 65 Vrms at 32 Hz depending on the ringing load
Environmental Requirements 0 – 40 °C, 10 – 90% relative humidity
6-20 Appendix
Please cut out these cards and distribute to the single line telephone users.
$
$
$
$
$
Quick Reference Card Quick Reference Card
To Make Calls To Make Calls
• Intercom: Ext. no. • Intercom: Ext. no.
• Operator: 0 • Operator: 0
• External Party: 9 or 81-88 ) + Phone no. • External Party: 9 or 81-88 ) + Phone no.
• Station Speed Dialling: 6 + No. 0-9 • Station Speed Dialling: 6 + No. 0-9
• System Speed Dialling: + No. 000-499 • System Speed Dialling: + No. 000-499
• Doorphone: 6 1 + Doorphone no. • Doorphone: 6 1 + Doorphone no.
When a Line is Busy When a Line is Busy

• Reserving a busy line: 6 • Reserving a busy line: 6
• Sending a call waiting tone: 2 • Sending a call waiting tone: 2
• Redialling the last dialled number: • Redialling the last dialled number:
To Pick Up Someone’s Call To Pick Up Someone’s Call

• Outside Call: 4 • Outside Call: 4
• Specified Extension: 4 1 + Ext. no. • Specified Extension: 4 1 + Ext. no.
• Extension Group: 4 0 • Extension Group: 4 0
During a Conversation During a Conversation

• Holding: + 5 0 + • Holding: + 5 0 +
(Recall) (Recall)
• Retrieving: + 5 0 • Retrieving: + 5 0
(Recall) (Recall)
• Transferring: (Recall)
+ Dial no. • Transferring: + Dial no.
(Recall)
• Answering Call Waiting: (Recall)

+ 5 0 + + • Answering Call Waiting: + 5 0 + +
(Recall)
$
$
Quick Reference Card Quick Reference Card
To Make Calls To Make Calls
• Intercom: Ext. no. • Intercom: Ext. no.
• Operator: 0 • Operator: 0
• External Party: 9 or 81-88 ) + Phone no. • External Party: 9 or 81-88 ) + Phone no.
• Station Speed Dialling: 6 + No. 0-9 • Station Speed Dialling: 6 + No. 0-9
• System Speed Dialling: + No. 000-499 • System Speed Dialling: + No. 000-499
• Doorphone: 6 1 + Doorphone no. • Doorphone: 6 1 + Doorphone no.
When a Line is Busy When a Line is Busy

• Reserving a busy line: 6 • Reserving a busy line: 6
• Sending a call waiting tone: 2 • Sending a call waiting tone: 2
• Redialling the last dialled number: • Redialling the last dialled number:
To Pick Up Someone’s Call To Pick Up Someone’s Call

• Outside Call: 4 • Outside Call: 4
• Specified Extension: 4 1 + Ext. no. • Specified Extension: 4 1 + Ext. no.
• Extension Group: 4 0 • Extension Group: 4 0
During a Conversation During a Conversation

• Holding: + 5 0 + • Holding: + 5 0 +
(Recall) (Recall)
• Retrieving: + 5 0 • Retrieving: + 5 0
(Recall) (Recall)
• Transferring: + Dial no. • Transferring: (Recall)

+ Dial no.
(Recall)
• Answering Call Waiting: + 5 0 + + • Answering Call Waiting: (Recall)

+ 5 0 + +
(Recall)
$
$
$
$
$
Please cut out these cards and distribute to the single line telephone users.
$
$
$
$
$
Locking / Unlocking Your Phone Locking / Unlocking Your Phone
• Lock: 7 7 + 3 digit desired code + same code • Lock: 7 7 + 3 digit desired code + same code
• Unlock: 7 7 + Stored code • Unlock: 7 7 + Stored code
Settings Settings
• Storing the number for Station Speed Dialling: • Storing the number for Station Speed Dialling:
6 0 + No. 0-9 + Line no. 9 or 81-88 + Phone no. + 6 0 + No. 0-9 + Line no. 9 or 81-88 + Phone no. +
• Call Waiting: • Call Waiting:
— Set: 7 3 1 1 — Set: 7 3 1 1
— Cancel: 7 3 1 0 — Cancel: 7 3 1 0
Frequently Used Features at Your Extension Frequently Used Features at Your Extension
$
$
Locking / Unlocking Your Phone Locking / Unlocking Your Phone

• Lock: 7 7 + 3 digit desired code + same code • Lock: 7 7 + 3 digit desired code + same code
• Unlock: 7 7 + Stored code • Unlock: 7 7 + Stored code
Settings Settings
• Storing the number for Station Speed Dialling: • Storing the number for Station Speed Dialling:
6 0 + No. 0-9 + Line no. 9 or 81-88 + Phone no. + 6 0 + No. 0-9 + Line no. 9 or 81-88 + Phone no. +
• Call Waiting: • Call Waiting:
— Set: 7 3 1 1 — Set: 7 3 1 1
— Cancel: 7 3 1 0 — Cancel: 7 3 1 0
Frequently Used Features at Your Extension Frequently Used Features at Your Extension
$
$
$
$
$
Index
Index
Index
A bsent Message ...............................2-49, 5-31 C amp-On → Automatic Callback Busy
ABST MSG Off / Absent MSG Off .......2-50, 2-51 CALL...............................................................2-84
ABST MSG On 1-9 / Absent MSG On (1–9) Call
........................................................2-50, 2-51 Directories........................................................5-16
ACCESS DECT-SYS ..........................................5-39 Duration ..................................................2-22, 2-85
ACCNT.............................................................2-22 Information ..........2-9, 2-22, 2-25, 2-83, 2-85, 5-10
Record..........................................................ii, 2-85
Account ....2-22, 4-4, 4-7, 5-28, 5-41, 5-43, 6-17
Caller ID .....................................2-25, 2-83, 2-85
Adding Telephone..............................ii, 1-5, 2-71
Call Forwarding.........2-5, 2-44, 2-48, 2-78, 2-94,
Alarm........................2-61, 3-11, 3-13, 5-31, 6-17
5-23, 5-30, 5-33
Alert .......................................................3-13, 4-4
Call Hold → Hold
Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice .........2-24, 5-28
Calling → Making Calls
Announce → Paging
Calling back .................................................2-84
ANSWER .................................................2-5, 3-9
Calling method ..............................................2-24
Answering → Receiving Calls
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)
At Ext %%% (extension no.) ..........................2-49 ........................................................2-67, 5-32
AUTO ..............................................................5-7 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
AUTO ANS DELAY ............................................5-38 .................................................2-68, 4-5, 5-32
AUTO ANSWER..................................................5-38 Call Log → Incoming Call Log/Outgoing Call Log
AUTO ANSWER ..............2-5, inside back cover Call Log.....................................2-89, 2-90, 2-91
AUTO DIAL ......................2-5, inside back cover Call Log Lock, Incoming → Incoming Call Log
Automatic Call Park ..............................................2-32, 5-29
Answer Mode Set ...................................5-11, 5-38 Call Park 0–9 / Call Park (0–9)
Answer Delay Selection...................................5-38
...............................................2-32, 2-33, 2-34
Callback Busy.........................................2-17, 5-27
Call Pickup .................................2-27, 5-28, 6-19
Log...................................................................2-83
Night Service .....................................................3-5 Call Pickup Deny ..........................2-69, 4-5, 5-32
Overflow.............................................................3-4 Call Splitting.........................................2-35, 5-29
Redial...............................................................2-15 Call Transfer → Transferring
Call Waiting ......2-18, 2-38, 2-65, 4-5, 5-29, 5-32
B ack at %%:%% (Hour:Minute) ..................2-49 Tone .........................................................2-38, 4-3
Background Music (BGM) .....................2-70, 3-7 CANCEL .........................................................5-7
BACKLIGHT ..................................................5-37 CANCEL DECT-SYS .....................................5-39
Battery .....................................................5-4, 5-5 Cancelling → Clearing
BGM ..............................................................2-70 Capacity.................................................1-2, 6-20
BOOK..............................................................5-7 C.BCK.............................................................2-17
BOOK=NEXT ..................................................5-39 Cell Station .....................................5-4, 5-9, 5-10
Boss-Secretary function ......................2-47, 2-48 C=EXIT ...........................................................5-39
BSS (Busy Station Signalling) / BSS.....2-18, 5-28 Character ..................................................4-12, 5-22
Busy ........................2-15, 2-17, 2-18, 2-19, 2-44, Charge Fee Management......................4-7, 5-43
5-27, 5-28, 5-30 Charger ...........................................................5-5
Busy Station Signalling (BSS) .............2-18, 5-28 Check in / Check out.................................3-10
Busy tone ......................................................6-18 Check-in / check-out .....................................3-10
Button ......................2-5, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 5-7, 5-26,
5-41, inside back cover
7-2 Index
Clearing Paged announcement ..............................2-66, 4-5
Initial setting.......................................................4-3 Ringing (DND)...............................2-63, 2-64, 5-31
(Flexible) button data .........................................4-6 Picking up your calls...............................2-69, 5-32
Live Call Screening Password.........................2-80 Retrieving your held calls ......................2-31, 5-14
Programs ................................................2-73, 5-32 Seeing your call log .........................................2-86
System working report .....................................3-15 Using your telephone ......................2-52, 3-3, 5-30
CLIP → Calling Line Identification Presentation Dial Tone.......................................................6-17
CLIR → Calling Line Identification Restriction Direct Outside Calls.............................2-64, 5-32
COLP → Connected Line Identification Presentation DIRECTORY LOCK ..............................5-21, 5-38
COLR → Connected Line Identification Restriction Directory Lock Control .........................5-21, 5-38
CLR ...............................2-83, 3-12, 3-13, 4-7, 4-9 Direct Station Selection → DSS
CLR (CLEAR) .................................................5-7 Display
CO......2-4, 2-5, 2-9, 4-4, 5-41, inside back cover 2-2, 2-3, 2-83, 2-87, 4-9, 5-4, inside back cover
CONF (KEY4) ..............................................5-26 Display feature list ........................................2-93
CONF ........2-5, 4-4, 5-7, 5-26, inside back cover Display Language Selection .........................5-38
Conference........................2-39, 5-29, 5-41, 6-19 DND → Do Not Disturb, FWD/DND
Confirmation...................2-2, 4-3, 4-9, 5-43, 6-19 DND (0/*/ext) .....................................2-63, 2-94
Connected Line Identification Presentation DND for DDI .................................2-64, 4-5, 5-32
(COLP)............................................2-67, 5-32 Do Not Disturb (DND)
..............2-5, 2-23, 2-63, 2-94, 5-31, 5-32, 6-18
Connected Line Identification Restriction
Do Not Disturb Override ......................2-23, 5-28
(COLR) ....................................2-69, 4-5, 5-32
Door Open ..........................................2-76, 5-33
Connection ...........................................1-4, 2-72
Door Opener ........................................2-74, 5-33
Control extension ..........................................3-11
Doorphone .........................1-4, 2-74, 5-33, 6-17
COS (Class of Service)...................................3-2
Doorphone Call Forwarding to Outside Line
COS Primary ext / COS Primary (ext) .......3-2
................................................2-75, 4-5, 5-33
COS Second ext / COS Second (ext)...........3-2
DSS ........................................2-5, 2-8, 4-4, 5-41
C.Pickup GRP / C.Pickup Group .......2-27, 2-28
Customise..............................................4-1, 5-34
E asy Dialling...............................................2-10
EFA → External Feature Access
D ate .................................................2-83, 4-14 Electronic Station Lockout ...........2-52, 3-3, 5-30
Data / Time Display ...........................5-39
Emergency call ......................................2-9, 5-10
Data / Time Display Selection.......................5-39
END ..............................................3-10, 3-11, 3-12
Day / Night ..................................2-70, 3-5, 5-32
Exclusive Call Hold..............................2-31, 5-14
DECT Portable Station ...................................5-1
EXT .......................................................2-88, 2-90
DECT-SYS LOCK .........................................5-39
Extension..........................2-87, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91
DECT System
Extension
Lock Password Set .......................5-35, 5-36, 5-39
Customise..........................................................4-2
Number.....................................................5-6, 5-38
Dialling .........2-9, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91, 5-9
Selection ..........................................................5-38
Directory ..........................................................6-10
Default Set → Clearing
Group ............................................2-27, 2-55, 5-28
Denying Lock.................................................2-52, 3-3, 5-30
Index
Displaying your number on the called party’s Name ...............................................................4-24

telephone.............................................2-68, 5-32 Number .............................2-3, 4-9, 4-23, 5-6, 5-40
Displaying your number on the calling party’s External Feature Access .....................2-77, 5-33
telephone.............................................2-69, 5-32
Index 7-3
Index
External Party......................2-9, 2-37, 2-44, 5-10 HOLD=BACK......................................................5-39
eXtra Device Port (XDP).................................1-5 Host PBX .................................................2-77, 5-33
Ext-BGM On/Off / Extrn BGM On/Off...........3-7 Hot Line → Pickup Dialling
Hotel ..........................................3-10, 3-11, 3-12
F acsimile (FAX) ............................................1-4 Hotel Use Features .......................................3-10
FEAT .....................................................2-88, 2-90 Hurry-Up / Hurry-Up Transfer ..................3-4, 4-4
Feature Access ............................................2-87
Feature Number ..............................2-2, 5-6, 6-7 I con ............iii, 2-4, 4-10, 5-6, inside back cover
Features............................2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-91 Identification number.........2-67, 2-68, 2-69, 5-32
Flexible CO ........2-5, 4-4, 5-7, inside back cover In a Meeting ...............................................2-49
Follow Me ............................................2-44, 5-30 Incoming Call Log ...............2-83, 2-85, 2-86, 3-3
Forwarding Calls ......2-44, 2-48, 2-75, 5-30, 5-33 Indication Tone
Full One-Touch Dialling ..................................4-3 .....................................2-20, 2-38, 2-79, 5-28
Function .....................2-5, 5-7, inside back cover Initial Display .......................................2-83, 2-85
FWD → FWD/DND Initial Settings ........................................4-2, 5-40
FWD/DND............2-5, 2-94, 4-4, 5-7, 5-26, 5-41, INTERCOM................2-5, 5-7, inside back cover
inside back cover Intercom Alert .................................................4-3
FWD–All Calls (ext)..........................2-45, 2-78 Intercom Call ......2-8, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91,
FWD–BSY / NA (ext) ...........................2-45, 2-78 4-3, 5-9, 6-17
FWD–Busy (ext) ...................................2-45, 2-78 Interrupt.........................................................2-18
FWD–CO Line (dial).....................................2-45
FWD/DND (KEY2) ............................................5-26 J ack number .................................................4-9
FWD/DND Cancel ...................................2-45, 2-64 Joining
FWD–From (ext) ...........................................2-45 Receiving group......................................2-53, 5-31
FWD–From Cancel (ext) ...............................2-45

FWD–No Answer (ext)..........................2-45, 2-78
K EY .............................................................5-26
Key Click Tone .............................................5-37
G one Home..................................................2-49 Keypad Backlight Mode Set..........................5-37
Greeting → Outgoing message KEYPAD LOCKED ..............................................5-25
Group Call Pickup................................2-27, 5-29 KEY TONE .......................................................5-37
Group-CO .......................................................4-4
Guest room information ................................3-14
L ANGUAGE.....................................................5-38
Last Number Redial.............................2-15, 5-12
GUIDANCE .......................................................5-39
L-CO → Loop-CO
Guidance Menu Set ......................................5-39
LCR → Least Cost Routing ...............ii, 2-9, 5-10
LCS → Live Call Screening
H andover......................................................5-9
Leaving
Hands-free Answerback................................2-26
Conference .............................................2-40, 5-29
Hands-free mode ..................................2-80, 4-3
Message waiting indication..............................2-19
Hands-free operation .............................2-9, 2-25 Receiving group......................................2-53, 5-31
Handset...........................................................4-3 Line
Handset Mute................................................2-42 Access number.........................................2-9, 5-10
Headset...........................................................4-3 Name ......................................................2-25, 2-82
Hold (HOLD) .................2-5, 2-30, 5-7, 5-13, 6-17, Outside line .......................................1-2, 2-9, 5-10
Selection → Preferred Line Assignment............4-2
inside back cover
7-4 Index
Live Call Screening (LCS) Night Service → Day / Night
..................................2-80, 3-3, 4-3, 4-4, 6-17 Night Mode 1/0
Location ............................1-3, inside back cover Night On/Off (1/0) ..................................3-5
Lock ....................................2-52, 3-3, 5-25, 5-30 NO .................................................................3-10
Log.................................................................2-85 No Answer.........................2-17, 2-44, 2-78, 5-30
Log-In/Log-Out ....................2-53, 4-4, 5-30, 5-41 Notebook Function ..............................2-41, 5-29
Loop-CO ........................2-5, 2-9, 4-4, 5-10, 5-41
O ff-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
M ailbox ....................................2-78, 2-82, 5-33 ..................................................2-18, 2-38, 2-65
Making Calls ....2-8, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91, Off-Hook Monitor...........................................2-43
4-2, 5-9, 5-21 OGM → Outgoing Message
Account Codes .......................................2-22, 5-28 OHCA → Off-Hook Call Announcement
Call log .........................................2-83, 2-89, 2-91 OK=OK.............................................................5-39
Doorphone..............................................2-74, 5-33
OK...................................................................5-7
Easy Dialling ....................................................2-10
Phantom .........................................................2-13 OLD.................................................................2-83
Manager........................................................3-15 One-Touch Dialling ......2-10, 4-3, 4-4, 5-27, 5-41
Manual Night Service......................................3-5 One-Touch Dialling with Auto Hold
MEMORY CLEAR ................................................5-39 .................................................2-37, 4-5, 5-41
Memory Clear ...............................................5-39 One-Touch Transfer......................................2-37
Message.............................2-19, 2-49, 2-78, 3-8, Opening the door.................................2-76, 5-33
5-28, 5-30, 5-41 Operations ......................................................2-1
MESSAGE .............................2-5, 4-4, 5-7, 5-26, Operator .........................................2-8, 3-1, 5-27
inside back cover Others ...........................................................3-10
MESSAGE (KEY3) ............................................5-26 Outgoing Call Log.......................2-89, 2-91, 5-12
Message Waiting...............2-19, 2-78, 5-28, 6-17 Outgoing Message (OGM) ....................3-8, 3-11
Microphone .....................2-42, inside back cover Outside......................2-9, 2-27, 2-37, 2-44, 2-64,
Microphone Mute ..........................................2-42 5-10, 5-28, 5-30, 5-31
Minibar .........................................................3-10 Outside (CO) Call Pickup ....................2-27, 5-28
MODE .............................................................2-5 Out until %%/%% (Month/Day) .....................2-49
MODIFY BOOK..................................................5-16 Over..................................................................... 2-23
Monitoring ................................................... 2-80 Overlay............................................................4-8
MSG Off ext / Message Off (ext) ...2-19, 2-20
MSG On ext / Message On (ext).......2-19, 2-20 P age E-ANS 1-4 /
Music → Background Music Page-Ext Answer (1-4) .................2-29, 2-59
Mute (MUTE) ...........2-5, 2-42, inside back cover Page Extrn 0-4 /
Paging External (0-4) .................2-54, 2-55
N ame..............................1-3, inside back cover Page GRP 00-16 /
Paging Group (00-16) ...................2-55, 2-56
Extension .........................................................4-24
Character Entering...........................................4-12 Page-GRP ANS / Page-GRP Answer ..............2-60
Outside line.............................................2-25, 2-83 Paging .......................................2-54, 5-31, 6-19
Station Speed Dialling .....................................2-92
Index
Parallelled telephone.............1-5, 2-71, 4-5, 5-23

System Speed Dialling.....................................4-16 Parallel 1/0 /
New.................................................................2-83 Parallel On/Off (1/0) .................2-71, 2-72
Night................................................................4-5 PAUSE (KEY1) ................................................5-26
Index 7-5
Index
PAUSE ............2-5, 5-7, 5-26, inside back cover
PBX-EXT-DIALING...........................................5-21
Q UICK ANSWER ............................................5-38
Quick Answering Mode Set .................5-11, 5-38
PBX Extension Dialling Directory ........5-16, 5-21
Quick Dialling.......................................2-13, 5-27
PBX-PROGRAM..................................................5-34
Directory ..........................................................6-16
PBX Programming ........................................5-40
PBX-STA-DELETE ............................................5-16 R adio Signal Strength ..................................5-4
PBX-STA-DIALING...........................................5-21 RECALL (for PT)
PBX-STA-EDIT ................................................5-16 ...........................................2-5, 2-8, 2-9, 2-15
PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory Recall (for SLT)...............................................2-4
........................................................5-16, 5-21 Receiving calls... 2-25, 2-53, 4-2, 4-3, 5-11, 5-30
PBX-SYS-DIALING...........................................5-21 Call waiting....................................2-38, 2-65, 5-32
PBX System Speed Dialling Directory Hands-free..............................................2-25, 2-26
........................................................5-16, 5-21 Mailbox ..........................................2-78, 2-80, 5-33
Personal Computer .........................................1-4 Paging ....................................................2-59, 5-31
Password .............................2-80, 3-3, 4-8, 4-11 Receiving group ................. 2-48, 2-53, 4-5, 5-30
PF ............................................................2-5, 4-4 Recording
Call log .........................................................ii, 2-86
Phantom .........................................2-13, 4-5, 4-6
Conversation ..........................................2-82, 5-33
Picking up...................................2-27, 5-28, 6-19 Outgoing message.............................................3-8
Pickup Dialling..............................2-12, 4-5, 5-27 Redial (REDIAL)...................2-5, 2-15, 5-7, 5-12,
Power Failure................................................6-20 inside back cover
Power Switch ..................................................5-7 REGISTRATION ................................................5-34
Preferred Line ........................................4-2, 5-40 Registration.....................................................5-4
Preventing Ringing ..............................2-63, 5-31 RELEASE ................................................2-5, 3-9
PRINT.............................................................3-10 Remote Operation...........................................3-1
Print out ...........................ii, 1-4, 3-10, 3-14, 3-15 Remote Station Lock Control..........................3-3
Private mode ...............................2-80, 4-3, 6-17 Reorder Tone ........................................6-2, 6-18
PROG...............................................................3-11 Reserve line ........................................2-17, 5-27
PROGRAM ......................2-5, inside back cover Reset button....................................................1-3
PROGRAMMING..................................................5-34 Restriction.........2-3, 2-22, 2-68, 2-69, 5-28, 5-32
Programming .........................................4-1, 5-34 Ring..............................2-24, 4-3, 4-6, 5-28, 6-17
Proprietary Telephone......................1-5, 2-2, 4-2 RING PATTERN ................................................5-37
PS Dialling Directory............................5-16, 5-21 Ringer Pattern Selection ...............................5-37
PS PASSWORD..................................................5-39
PS Programming...........................................5-35 S ave (SAVE) ...............................2-5, 4-4, 5-41
PS Programming Password Set Saved Number Redial .........................2-16, 5-27
...............................................5-35, 5-36, 5-39 Saving a number .................................2-41, 5-29
PS Registration Cancellation ........................5-39 SECRET ......................................4-5, 4-15, 5-42
PS-DELETE......................................................5-16 SEL...................................................................4-7
PS-DIALING....................................................5-21 SELECT.................................................2-6, 4-12
PS-EDIT .........................................................5-16 SHIFT................................2-6, inside back cover
PS-NEW-ENTRY ................................................5-16 Single-CO → CO
PS-PASSWORD..................................................5-36 Single line telephone .......1-4, 1-5, 2-2, 2-4, 2-71
PS-PROGRAM....................................................5-34 Soft ...................................2-6, inside back cover
Pulse to Tone ......................................2-23, 5-28
7-6 Index
Speaker ............1-4, 2-29, 2-54, 2-57, 5-28, 5-31 Tone (TONE) ......2-23, 5-6, 5-7, 5-26, 5-28, 6-17
Speakerphone → SP-PHONE → Call Waiting – tone
Specifications................................................6-20 → Confirmation
Speed Dialling → Station speed dialling / Tone...............................................................2-24
System Speed Dialling TRANSFER ..............2-6, 5-7, inside back cover
SP-PHONE ......................2-6, inside back cover Transferring ...2-36, 2-57, 2-79, 5-15, 5-29, 5-31
STA .......................................................2-88, 2-90 TRM...................................................................2-9
STA Speed...................................2-89, 2-90, 2-91 Troubleshooting ..............................................6-2
STANDBY DISPLAY ..........................................5-38 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Standby Display Selection ............................5-38 ........................................................2-29, 5-28
Station Speed ..............................................2-87 Two-Way Recording............2-82, 4-4, 5-33, 5-41
Station Program Clear → Clearing-Programs Two-Way Transfer...............2-82, 4-4, 5-33, 5-41
...........................................................2-73, 5-32
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) U nattended Conference...........2-40, 5-29, 6-19
...............................................ii, 4-7, 5-43, 6-20 Unlock...............2-52, 2-76, 2-86, 3-3, 5-30, 5-33
Station speed dialling
2-11, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91, 2-92, 5-27 V IBRATION & RING .....................................5-37
Directory ..........................................................6-15 Vibration and Ring Type Selection ...............5-37
STORE .............................2-5, inside back cover Voice ........................................................... 2-24
Super EXtra Device Ports (SXDP)................5-23 Voice-Calling........................................2-24, 5-28
SXDP → Super EXtra Device Ports Voice mail ................ii, 2-78, 4-3, 4-4, 5-33, 5-41
SYS Speed...................................2-89, 2-90, 2-91 Voice processing system ...................ii, 1-4, 2-78
System Feature Access Volume Control ...............................................5-7
............................2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91
System Speed ................................................2-87 W ake up / Wake-Up call ......3-11, 3-12, 3-13
System speed dialling..........2-11, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, Wake-Up call → Timed Reminder
2-90, 2-91, 4-15, 4-16, 5-27 Will Return Soon ........................................2-49
Directory ..........................................................6-12 Warning Tone ................................................6-3
System Working Report ................................3-15 Whisper OHCA...........................2-18, 2-38, 2-65
T AFAS → Trunk Answer From Any Station X DP → eXtra Device Port

TALK ...............................................................5-7
Telephone..............................ii, 1-4, 1-5, 2-2, 2-5 Y ES .............................................................3-10
Telephone......................................................3-10
Temporary tone dialling .......................2-23, 5-28 S ymbols
Terminate .......................................2-9, 4-5, 5-41 #=NEXT ...........................................................5-39
*=PREV ..........................................................5-39
...............................................2-39, 5-29, 6-19
Time.....................................................2-83, 4-14
Time Limit...................................2-30, 2-76, 6-18
Timed Reminder
Index
...............................2-61, 3-11, 3-13, 5-31, 6-17

TONE (KEY5)..................................................5-26
Index 7-7
Names and Locations of the KX-T7436
Display
Function
Function
FWD/DND
CONF SHIFT
Soft
Flexible CO
TRANSFER
INTERCOM
PAUSE
PROGRAM
MESSAGE
MIC
AUTO DIAL / STORE
REDIAL AUTO ANSWER / MUTE
HOLD
FLASH
SP-PHONE
Jog Dial
Microphone
Icons
Conditions Press the Call button on

the Doorphone.
Hints Press the Recall button on

!! (Recall) a single line telephone.
+ Related Programming Title

or Programming steps.
Wait for an answer.
Not available for a single Talk.

line telephone.
Off-hook. You will hear a confirmation,

dial or ring tone.
C. Tone: confirmation tone
D. Tone: dial tone
On-hook.
R. Tone: ring tone
Warning 73/23/EEC
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment 89/336/EEC
this product may cause radio interference in which case 92/31/EEC
the user may be required to take adequate measures. 93/68/EEC

Berkshire RG12 8FP
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. (KME).
Under the applicable copyright laws, this manual may not be reproduced in any form,
in whole or part, without the prior written consent of KME and its licensee.
C 2000 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Printed in the United Kingdom PSQX1848ZA KS0699MT0

To expand the sub-menu, left click the
mouse on the symbol, located to the left of
the selected text.
for version 3 Adobe Reader
for version 4 Adobe Reader

Installation Hints – Analogue CO Lines
1. Calling Party Control Signal (CPC) incoming

The Host Exchange can send a short disconnect signal on completion of the call.
The Timer Prog Step [405] can be set to the minimum disconnect signal time.
If too short a time is set, the PBX may see random line conditions as the CPC signal
and release the call.
If too long a time is set, the CO Lines will lockup if the customer is using CO – CO
call forward or transfer.
Note:
Some older Answer Machines may treat the Recorder Tone returned to an extension
after CPC signal detection clear down as an ongoing call and continue to record.
2. Calling Party Control Signal (CPC) outgoing

When the CPC signal is detected on the original CO Line the PBX sends a CPC
signal to the established CO Line.
This would be used in a CO to CO connection.
Enabled using Prog. Step 415.
3. Host working
• If the Host PBX codes are entered in Prog. Step 411 the Pause time [412] will be
inserted after the Host code has been dialed.
• Register Recall signal can be modified by Prog. Step 413, to send a signal to the
Host PBX.
4. Reverse Signal Assignment

If set to detect (Prog. Step 416), on reversal the PBX starts the call duration timer and
opens the speakerphone speech path.
Installation Hints – LCR
To ensure correct operation of the LCR function the following rules should be applied:
1. All Leading Digit Entry (7X01) should contain the same number of digits
(pad out with “ ” (wild character) as necessary).
*
2. The Exception Code Set (7X20) must not contain less digits than its Leading
Digit Entry table.
Note: In Default the first carrier is programmed for the old analogue “131” service
Carriers 2 ~ 8 are not pre-programmed (i.e. 7X21/ 7X22/ 7X23).
Installation Hints – Phantom Extensions
A Phantom Extension is a virtual extension number that can be assigned to a button

on a Proprietary Telephone, the buttons can be set to ring or not to ring.
128 Phantom extensions can be assigned on the system.
A Phantom Extension can be used to identify incoming or internal call,

i.e. Calls directed to an extension in the normal manner may be a Sales call.
Calls directed to a Phantom Extension number may be a Service call.
To program:
1. In any free Phantom location (130) enter a spare extension number.
2. On the Proprietary Telephone program the phantom extension number to a
Flexible LED button using the Feature Code “88”.
3. The same phantom extension number can be assigned to several Proprietary
Telephones.
To use:
1. From any extension, dial the phantom number.
2. From an extension who has the phantom number assigned to a Flexible button,
press the assigned button.
Installation Hints – Analogue Extensions
1. eXtra Device Ports (XDP)

• Only available with Digital Integrated Proprietary Telephones (DPIT) (T7436,
T7433,T7431,T7425, T7420, T7235, T7230, T7250).
• To set, Enable Program Step [600] on a per port basis;
(Do not set on Single SLT’s or APIT models).
• To enable parallel ringing of the SLT, go Off-hook on the paired “DPIT” and dial
the Feature Code “691” (dial “690” to turn off parallel ringing).
2. Wiring
• Note: All DSS Consoles are wired using the Analogue Integrated Proprietary
Telephone (APIT) standard (T7130, T7020, T7050).
• The XDP can be taken from the back of the Telephone or direct from the PBX,
when taken direct from the PBX only the H & L wires need to be taken to the
parallel DPIT extension.
Installation Hints – ISDN Extensions
An ISDN extension or S-Bus, can provided data capability up to 128kbps (2 x 64kbps).
An ISDN extension can support up to 8 parallel ISDN devices.
If the ISDN device requires to use both “B” channels, the ISDN device will set up a
second call.
When both “B” channels are in use, the other devices on that ISDN extension will not be
able to make or receive calls.
Program step [427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Numbering can be set to add 1
or 2 digits to the Extension number for MSN working.
If MSN is not set all devises on the ISDN extension will be rung simultaneously.
Programming: Most common configuration for an ISDN Extension.
Prog Step / Description Contents
[012] ISDN Extn Number set Any free extension number
[013] ISDN Extn Name set 10 character Name
[150] DDI Translation Table I/C DDI string
[151] DDI Day ringing assignment Destination Extn Number
[152] DDI Night ringing assignment Destination Extn Number
[422] ISDN Port Type Set Port to Extension
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode Set Port to Call
[424] ISDN Configuration Set Port to Multipoint
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode Set Port to Call
[426] ISDN TEI Mode Set Port to Automatic

(Press CLR then Store)
[427] ISDN Extn MSN Set Port to 1 or 2 digit
[428] ISDN Progress Tone Generally only required if a Audio devise is

installed (i.e. ISDN Telephone).
Installation Hints – DDI Numbers
To allow an incoming call to be directed to selected destinations within the PBX, Digital
CO Lines have the ability to transmit part of the dialed number to the PBX.
The Network provider can supply two different services.

1. MSN service.
Provided on a Multipoint ISDN2e CO Line.
Can translate up to 10 incoming number strings on each Port
Generally send the Local Number or the National Number minus the 0.
Provided on a single ISDN2e basis, no hunting to another ISDN2e Cct.
Programming:
Prog Step Contents
[437] MSN Number set Incoming number strings
[438] MSN Day Ringing assignment Day Destination
[439] MSN Night Ringing assignment Night Destination
2. DDI service
Provided on a Point ISDN2 or ISDN 30 CO Line.
Can translate up to 400 incoming number strings
Generally send the last three digits of the dialed number.
Can be provided on several ISDN2 Ccts (Hunts when busy).
Programming:
Prog Step Contents
[150] DDI Number Translation Incoming number strings
[151] DDI Day Ringing assignment Day Destination
[152] DDI Night Ringing assignment Night Destination
Note:
If the PBX CO line is set to Point working, it will link with either a Point or Multipoint
service provided by the Network Provider.
When upgrading a Version 4 or earlier PBX with PC Programming, care should be taken
to check the DDI translation on the Version 5 data base.
On the Version 4 or earlier PBX there was no Day Night destination option and DDI
numbers were assigned to the Ports using several Program Steps
(i.e. 112; Hunt Groups, 136; Phantom Extn, 618; Extn, 619; ISDN Extn).
Installation Hints – TIE CO Lines (E&M)
The Tie Line (E&M) Cct can be programmed for access in several ways, by dialing the
Tie line access code or assigning different extension numbers for each PBX.
The setting of the outgoing Cct will depend on the service provided on the E&M Cct.
If the “SB” and “SG” leads are not provided by the Network, the “SB” and “SG” leads
from the KX-TD184 must be connected to Ground.
Basic Installation
1. Set the E&M Cct configuration to match Network Providers standard
The most common setting for the UK Type 5 E&M Ccts is;
I/C & O/G Assignment Program Steps [431/ 432] to “Immediate”.
2. Set Expansion unit type [109] to E&M, will not be set by Default.
3. Assign the Tie Access Code [100] location 86.
4. Assign a Tie Table [430] to the E&M CO lines.
5. Take the Tie Ccts out of the Dial 9 Access Group (103).
To allow break from another PBX, Prog Step 990 Area 08 Bit 03 can be Set.
This allows the PBX to route outgoing CO line calls over the Tie Ccts and break out
over the CO lines of the linked PBX when all the local CO lines are busy.
This programming should allow basic operation.
Using different extension numbers for each PBX

To use simply dial the required extension number.
1. Set as Basic Installation
2. Assign the other PBX extension numbers in Prog Step 100 locations 87 to 102.
3. Modify the dialed digits as required by the other PBX.
Prog Step Description
[340] Tie Line routing table Selects the CO route for the dialed digits
[341] Tie Modify Remove / Added digits Modifies the sent dialed digits
[433] Tie Removed Digits Removes digits from the rec’d no.
[434] Tie Added Digits Adds digits to the rec’d number
Using Tie Cct line access code and PBX number

To use dial the Tie Line access code (i.e. 1) then dial the PBX code for the required
linked PBX (i.e. 4) then the required extension number.
1. Set as Basic Installation
2. Assign the Tie access code Prog Step 100 locations 86.
3. Modify the dialed digits as required by the other PBX.
[341] Tie Modify Remove / Added digits Modifies the sent dialed digits
[433] Tie Removed Digits Removes digits from the rec’d no.
[434] Tie Added Digits Adds digits to the rec’d number
Installation Hints – ISDN Options
Installing a KX-TD280 Basic Rate Module (2 x ISDN2)
The TD280 is an external module, which supplies 2 x ISDN2 Ports, either or both Ports can be
programmed for CO or ISDN Extension (S-Bus) working.
Note: Prog Step 109 and ISDN Configuration programming require a system reset to activate
a) Module installation.
• If the Module is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Module use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S” to the required Area
Only one CO Module can be assigned to the PBX at the same time. If the CO Module is
assigned to the lower Area the upper Area must be assigned as an Extension “E”
(i.e. C; S; E).
b) Port numbering
When the TD280 is fitted to a TD816 the upper DDK or
First Port is assigned as Port 5 (CO Lines 5 & 6)
Second Port is assigned as Port 6 (CO Lines 7 & 8)
ISDN connection configuration

422 Sets a port to be an Extension or CO connection
423 Sets the Layer1 Activation mode, Permanent or Call by Call, the PBX
should have at least one ISDN CO Link set to Permanent.
424 ISDN Type: Point or Multipoint
Point - generally used for DDI service
Multipoint – generally used for ISDN2e MSN service
Note: A PBX Cct. assigned as Point will work on a Multipoint Cct.
425 Data Link (Layer 2) Activation mode, Permanent or Call by Call.
426 TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) – generally set as
Point: Fixed 0
Multipoint: Automatic (to assign press clear then store)
Recommended combinations
Program [422] [423] [424] [425] [426]
ISDN Port ISDN Layer 1 ISDN ISDN Data ISDN TEI
CO Permanent Point Permanent Fix 0
(DDI)
CO Permanent Multipoint Call Automatic
Parameter (MSN)
Extension Call Multipoint Call Automatic
(S-Bus)
Installing a KX-TD282 Basic Rate Card (2 x ISDN2)
The TD282 is an internal card, which supplies 2 x ISDN2 Ports, either or both Ports can be
a) Card installation.
• If the Card is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Card use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S” to the required Area (i.e. S; C; E).
b) Port numbering
When the TD282 is fitted

Point: Fixed 0
Program [422] [423] [424] [425] [426]
(DDI)
Parameter (MSN)
(S-Bus)
The TD286 is an external module, which supplies 6 x ISDN2 Ports,

Ports 1 to 4 can be programmed for CO or ISDN Extension (S-Bus) working.
Ports 5 and 6 are fixed as ISDN Extensions (S- Bus).
If the TD286 and TD282 are fitted at the same time, the corresponding ports of the TD282 and
TD286 will need to be set to opposite settings (i.e. TD282 Port 1; CO, TD286 Port 1; Extension)
Assign “S2” to the required Area
(i.e. C; S2; E).
b) Port numbering
When the TD286 is fitted to a TD816 Ports are assigned as
Port 1 to 6 (CO Lines 1 to 8)

Point: Fixed 0
Program [440] [441] [442] [443] [444]
(DDI)
Parameter (MSN)
(S-Bus)
Installing a KX-TD290 Primary Rate Module (8 channel)
The TD290 is an external module, which supports 8 channels,

c) Module installation.
assigned to the lower Area the upper Area must be assigned as an Extension “E” (i.e. C;
S3; E).
d) Port numbering
When the TD290 is fitted to a TD816 the channels are assigned as
Channel 1 as CO 09 to Channel 8 as CO 16.

450 Primary Rate Assignment
Assigns the number of B channels available,
0 Y Y - - Analogue configuration
8 Y - - - Primary Rate fitted
Note: An Analogue (TD182) or ISDN2 (TD282) card can be fitted to the
internal slot of the PBX.
451 PRI Reference CO

With the exception of: Trunk Group Assignment [401],
CO Line Number [419],
CO Line Name [421] &
Single CO Button Assignment [Prog 99 or 005]
The Primary Rate CO’s are not included in I/C and O/G CO Line
programming.
To program channels assign a reference to the desired channels and set the
I/C and O/G programming for that reference CO Line.
Reference CO’s 5 to 8 are available.
ISDN Worked Example
EXAMPLE:
1. The TD290 is being added to an existing PBX.
2. The Network supplier is sending 7 digits of DDI
3. The Extensions are to be assigned as follows:
Extn Name DDI Number I/C Display

201 John 7000001 I/C DDI number / Name
202 Peter 7000002 CO Line
203 Mary 7000003 Caller ID
4. The customer wants two DDI numbers to go to sub addresses on the ISDN Extension
ISDN Extn. No. Name DDI Numbers

390 Computer DDI No. 7000020 – 3904
DDI No. 7000024 – 3907
5. A Sales ring group is required with DDI Number 7000028 and 202 and 203 as members
6. A Phantom Extension number is required for Service calls, a phantom number can be used to
identify a ring group on a non-display proprietary telephone.
Assign DDI numbers 7000036 & 7 to phantom numbers 366 & 367 to CO line keys on
extensions 201 & 202.
7. The customer wants to modify the outgoing CLI so that when 201 (Manager) makes a call
the Caller ID sent by the network is that of 203 (PA).
ANSWERS:
1. For this example a TD282 is used to provided the ISDN Extension (S-Bus) on Port 1 and the
TD290 provides the CO Lines.
Assign the TD290 Module to the lower external area.
Programming
Prog step / Description Contents
[109] Card Config S (TD282) : S3 (TD290) : E (TD170)
[450] PRI Config 8: Y - - -
[451] PRI Ref CO Set working channels to one CO and Spare
Channels to another (available ref. CO 5 ~ 8)
[605/6] O/G Permitted Extn. Set Spare ref. CO to Disabled
[615/6] O/G Permitted ISDN Extn Set Spare ref. CO to Disabled
2. If the system has been upgraded from a Version 4 Program Step 111 may have been
modified, this adds or removes digits from the DDI string. The Version 4 Software could
only translate a maximum of 6 DDI digits.
3. Set the DDI to number to a destination extension day and night.
Location DDI Number Day Night

[150] [151] [152]
001 7000001 201 201
002 7000002 202 202
003 7000003 203 203
4. Assign TD282 Port 1 as ISDN Extension (S-Bus).

Most common settings for an ISDN Extension

[012] Extension Number Set Port 1: 390 (any spare number)
[422] ISDN Port Type Port 1: Extension
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Mode Port 1: Call
[424] ISDN Config Port 1: Multipoint
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode Port 1: Call
[426] ISDN TEI Mode Port 1: Automatic (press CLR then STORE)
[427] ISDN MSN Assign Port 1: 1 digit
[428] ISDN Progress Tone Generally only required for ISDN Telephone

[150] [151] [152]
004 7000020 3904 3904 ISDN extension
005 7000024 3907 3907 ISDN extension
5. Made a Ring Group with members 202 & 203.

[106] Station Hunting Type Group 01: Ring
[131] Hunt Group assignment Group 01: Location 01:202; 02:203
[813] Floating Number Assignment Group 01: 381 (any free number)

[150] [151] [152]
006 7000028 381 381 Ring Group
6. Assign a Phantom Number to the required telephones.

[130] Phantom Number Assignment Location 001: 366, 002: 367
[005] Button Assignment Jack 01: Any buttons 88 366, 88 367
or Prog 99

[150] [151] [152]
007 7000036 366 366 Phantom extension
7. To modify the customers CLIP/ COLP

[623] Extension CLI Jack 01: 7000000
[624] ISDN Extension Not required
[419] CO Line Number CO Line: 01633 8 (CO No. minus No. Prog 150)
The TD280 is an external module, which supplies 2 x ISDN2 Ports, either or both Ports can be
Assign “S” to the required Area
assigned to the lower Area the upper Areas must be assigned as an Extension “E”
(i.e. C; S; E1; E2).
b) Port numbering
When the TD280 is fitted to a TD1232 the upper DDK or

Point: Fixed 0
Program [422] [423] [424] [425] [426]
(DDI)
Parameter (MSN)
(S-Bus)
Installing a KX-TD281 Basic Rate Card (4 x ISDN2)
The TD282 is an internal card, which supplies 4 x ISDN2 Ports, Ports 3 & 4 can be programmed
for CO or ISDN Extension (S-Bus) working (Program & Jump Link has to be set).
a) Card installation.
• If the Card is fitted and the PBX is defaulted, the card will be assigned on power up.
• If you are adding the Card use Program step 109 to assign,
Assign “S” to the required Area (i.e. S; C; E1; E2).
b) Port numbering
When the TD281 is fitted
Port 1 is assigned as CO Lines 1 & 2 to
Port 4 is assigned as CO Lines 7 & 8

Move Jump Link 1 for Port 3 and Jump Link 2 for Port 4.
Point: Fixed 0
Program [422] [423] [424] [425] [426]
(DDI)
Parameter (MSN)
(S-Bus)
The TD286 is an external module, which supplies 6 x ISDN2 Ports,

Ports 1 to 6 can be programmed for CO or ISDN Extension (S-Bus) working.
If the TD286 and TD281 are fitted at the same time, the corresponding ports of the TD281 and
TD286 will need to be set to opposite settings (i.e. TD282 Port 1; CO, TD286 Port 1; Extension)
(i.e. C; S2; E1; E2).
b) Port numbering
When the TD286 is fitted to a TD1232 Ports are assigned as
Port 1 to 6 (CO Lines 1 to 12)

Point: Fixed 0
Program [440] [441] [442] [443] [444]
(DDI)
Parameter (MSN)
(S-Bus)
Installing a KX-TD290 Primary Rate Module (30 channel)
The TD290 is an external module, which supports 30 channels,

c) Module installation.
(i.e. C; S3; E1; E2).
d) Port numbering
When the TD290 is fitted to a TD1232 the channels are assigned as
Channel 1 as CO 25 to Channel 30 as CO 54.

450 Primary Rate Assignment
Assigns the number of B channels available,
0 Y Y - - Analogue configuration
30 Y - N N 30 “B” Channels Primary Rate allowed
30 N - Y N 30 “B” Channels Primary Rate allowed
30 N - N Y 30 “B” Channels Primary Rate allowed
26 Y - N Y 26 “B” Channels Primary Rate allowed
26 N - Y Y 26 “B” Channels Primary Rate allowed
22 Y - Y N 22 “B” Channels Primary Rate allowed
18 Y - Y Y 18 “B” Channels Primary Rate allowed
Note: An Analogue (TD181) or ISDN2 (TD281) card can be fitted to the
“Y” positions of the PBX.
451 PRI Reference CO

With the exception of: Trunk Group Assignment [401],
CO Line Number [419],
CO Line Name [421] &
Single CO Button Assignment [Prog 99 or 005]
The Primary Rate CO’s are not included in I/C and O/G CO Line
programming.
To program channels assign a reference to the desired channels and set the
I/C and O/G programming for that reference CO Line.
Reference CO’s 9 to 12 are available.
ISDN Worked Example
EXAMPLE:
1. The TD290 is being added to an existing PBX.
2. The Network supplier is sending 7 digits of DDI
3. The Extensions are to be assigned as follows:
Extn Name DDI Number I/C Display

201 John 7000001 I/C DDI number / Name
202 Peter 7000002 CO Line
203 Mary 7000003 Caller ID
4. The customer wants two DDI numbers to go to sub addresses on the ISDN Extension
ISDN Extn. No. Name DDI Numbers

390 Computer DDI No. 7000020 – 3904
DDI No. 7000024 – 3907
5. A Sales ring group is required with DDI Number 7000028 and 202 and 203 as members
6. A Phantom Extension number is required for Service calls, a phantom number can be used to
identify a ring group on a non-display proprietary telephone.
Assign DDI numbers 7000036 & 7 to phantom numbers 366 & 367 to CO line keys on
extensions 201 & 202.
7. The customer wants to modify the outgoing CLI so that when 201 (Manager) makes a call
the Caller ID sent by the network is that of 203 (PA).
ANSWERS:
1. For this example a TD281 is used to provided the ISDN Extension (S-Bus) on Port 3 and the
TD290 provides the CO Lines.
Assign the TD290 Module to the lower external area.
Programming
[109] Card Config S (TD281) : S3 (TD290) : E1; E2 (TD170)
[450] PRI Config 30: Y - N N
[451] PRI Ref CO Set working channels to one CO and Spare
Channels to another (available ref. CO 9 ~ 12)
[605/6] O/G Permitted Extn. Set Spare ref. CO to Disabled
[615/6] O/G Permitted ISDN Extn Set Spare ref. CO to Disabled
2. If the system has been upgraded from a Version 4 Program Step 111 may have been
modified, this adds or removes digits from the DDI string. The Version 4 Software could
only translate a maximum of 6 DDI digits.
3. Set the DDI to number to a destination extension day and night.

[150] [151] [152]
001 7000001 201 201
002 7000002 202 202
003 7000003 203 203
4. Assign TD281 Port 3 as ISDN Extension (S-Bus).

Move Jump Link 1.
Most common settings for an ISDN Extension

[012] Extension Number Set Port 3: 390 (any spare number)
[422] ISDN Port Type Port 3: Extension
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Mode Port 3: Call
[424] ISDN Config Port 3: Multipoint
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode Port 3: Call
[426] ISDN TEI Mode Port 3: Automatic (press CLR then STORE)
[427] ISDN MSN Assign Port 3: 1 digit
[428] ISDN Progress Tone Generally only required for ISDN Telephone

[150] [151] [152]
004 7000020 3904 3904 ISDN extension
005 7000024 3907 3907 ISDN extension
5. Made a Ring Group with members 202 & 203.

[106] Station Hunting Type Group 01: Ring
[131] Hunt Group assignment Group 01: Location 01:202; 02:203
[813] Floating Number Assignment Group 01: 381 (any free number)

[150] [151] [152]
006 7000028 381 381 Ring Group
6. Assign a Phantom Number to the required telephones.

[130] Phantom Number Assignment Location 001: 366, 002: 367
[005] Button Assignment Jack 01: Any buttons 88 366, 88 367
or Prog 99

[150] [151] [152]
7. To modify the customers CLIP/ COLP

[623] Extension CLI Jack 01: 7000000
[624] ISDN Extension Not required
[419] CO Line Number CO Line: 01633 8 (CO No. minus No. Prog 150)
Installing DECT on the KX-TD816/1232 PBX
General Programming rules

• Do not program the system before the link between the 2 cabinet is established (approx. 5 minutes).
• Do not up-load/down-load from the PC programming before the 2 cabinet link is established.
• The Cell Station ( TD142 ) takes a further minute link after the PBX .
• Whenever a PBX is Reset or Powered Down, allow time for the CS link to re-establish.
Specification
• The Maximum number of Portable Stations : PS(TD7500) is not dependent on the number of
Cell Stations : CS(TD142) or Interface Units : I/F(TD144 / TD146) fitted
( Maximum of 64 PS on a TD1232, Single or Double Cabinet)
( Maximum of 16 PS on a TD816 ).
• The Cell Station Interface units (TD144 / TD146) can only be fitted to the Master Cabinet only on
a double cabinet TD1232 installation.
• TD144 (DECT I/F Unit) supports 2 Cell Stations and 4 extension ports (with XDP)
( Each Cell Station supports 4 speech paths ).
• TD146 (DECT I/F Unit) supports 6 Cell Stations only (no extension ports).
• Maximum length of Cell Station to PBX cable is 1 K meter.
• A “Site-survey” must be taken at each customer site.
Quick Install
Follow the instructions under the following headings.
1. ‘Preparing the PBX for DECT’
2. ‘Registering the HANDSET ( PS )’
3. ‘General Handset Programming’
Preparing the PBX for DECT

• Setting the Expansion Card type ( TD144 / TD146 same type as TD170 ).
• Assign a CS location to be the Master CS, the CS ID code will be used to provide the PBX Radio
ID code, this is used prevent other DECT users gaining unauthorised assess.
• The Cell Station ID and Current CS status can be checked via PC Program : [ 26 ] CS Information
Via the PC Programming tool Via a Keyphone

Step Description : Entry Step Description : Entry
[ 3 ] System : 14 [109] Expansion Card Prog : E (1/2)
[ 14 ] Miscellaneous : EXT (1/2)
[ 2 ] Station : 23 [680] Master CS Assignment
[ 23 ] PS System : Master CS
Note: Once the Master CS ID has been assigned and the PBX has downloaded the CS ID as the
System Radio ID, only defaulting the PBX would clear the Radio ID. The CS can be changed
if required.
1
Registering the Handset ( PS )
• Assign an extension number to each PS.
• Set the PBX to Register.
• Register PS to PBX one at a time.
• The PC screen / Keyphone display shows the PS waiting to register.

[ 2 ] Station : 14 [671] PS Ext. Number Set : Ext No.
[ 14 ] PS Setting 1 : Ext. number
[ 24 ] PS Registration : Y [650 ] PS Registration
Registering a PS ( TD7500 )
Step Display : Entry

[F] KEY
[ BOOK ] MODIFY BOOK
[ BOOK ] PROGRAMMING
[ OK ] PS - PROGRAM
[ BOOK ] REGISTRATION
[ OK ] Arial signal flashes until a connection is established
DECT – SYS – NO.
1234 : e.g. 1 (allows 4 separate DECT PBX systems to be assigned)
[ OK ] ENTER PASSWORD = 1234 (Default)
[ OK ] DECT – SYS LOCK = DISABLE
[ OK ] Idle display
Terminating PS registration
• To remove a PS from the system, so it cannot be used.

[2 ] Station : 23 [651] PS Termination : Ext No.
[ 25 ] PS Termination : Y
2
Registering PS to more than one PBXs
A DECT PS ( TD7500) can be registered on 4 separate DECT PBX’s ( KX-TD816/1232 )
The PS can be registered with a different PS number and Extension number for each System.
KX-TD1232 PBX Etc. KX-TD1232 PBX

Radio ID 00001002 Radio ID 00001002
Handset Ext No. PS No. Sys No. Ext. No. PS No. Sys. No.
1 290 01 2 290 01 1
2 291 05 1 292 06 2
3 292 04 1 291 04 3
General Handset Programming

• Incoming Calls.
• Outgoing Access.
• Extension programming.
• It has been noted that sometimes when the PS 1:N ringing pattern has been changed, the change
only becomes effective after the CS has been disconnected for a few seconds or the PBX has been
reset.

[ 16 ] PS Settings 1 [671] PS Ext. Number Set : Ext No.
[653] PS Ext. Name Set
[667] PS Ext. Connection Assignment
[656] PS Charge Verification Assignment
[658] PS Ext. Group
[663] PS Doorphone Ringing - Day
[664] PS Doorphone Ringing - Night
[ 17 ] PS Settings 2 [670] PS DDI No. Transformation
[674] PS Ext. Intercept Routing - Day
[675] PS Ext. Intercept Routing - Night
[655] PS Charge Limit
[673] PS CLIP/COLP Number Assignment
[ 18 ] PS Settings 3 [657] PS Class Of Service
[668] PS Data Line Security
[665] PS Voice Mail Access Code
[676] PS Incoming Display
[ 19 ] PS Settings 4 [661] PS Outgoing Permitted – Day
[662] PS Outgoing Permitted - Night
[ 20 ] PS Settings 5 [659] PS DIL 1 : N - Day
[660] PS DIL 1 : N – Night
[ 21 ] PS Settings 6 [672] PS Password Set : 1234 (Default)
[654] SXDP Assignment : Enable (Default)
Setting Super eXtra Device Port :
User Programming
[ 22 ] PS Flexible Programming [020] Flexible Key Programming
3
Site Surveying
Preparing for the Site Survey

• Program PBX.
• Assign the CS ID to the PS (CS ID is only available from the PC Programming Tool).
• Disconnect TD142 from PBX.
• Change DIP switches to Test Mode ( at the rear of the TD142 ).
• Connect TD142 to Power Supply.
Assigning a PS ( TD7500 ) to a Cell Station

To enter Survey Mode : Switch PS On while pressing, ‘TALK’ + ‘FLASH ( )’ + ‘*’ .
FUNCTION < 0 – 4 >
[2] CS NO? ( 1 – 8 )
Number is not CS System number.
It is eight locations for entering CS ID numbers for Site Survey
1~8 Enter a spare location number, The TD7500 can store 8 CS ID’s for Site Surveying .
The CS ID number is not related to the CS number on the PBX
[ TALK ] CS ID1 =
[ CS ID ] CS ID1 = 0123456789
A ~ F are the 6 Function Keys below the Number Pad
[ TALK ] To Save
If more than one Cell Station is to be surveyed repeat this step for the other CS ID’s
[ CLR ] Returns to Main Menu
To clear CS ID numbers ( can be overwritten )

[3] CS – ID CLEAR, CS NO? ( 1 – 8 )
Enter CS Number to be cleared.
[ TALK ] CS ID Cleared
Repeat for other CS Numbers
4
Site Survey
Assigning a PS ( TD7500 ) to a Cell Station

[0] Current Status Displayed
To Survey other slots : Press [ # ] (Next) or [ * ] (Previous)
To Survey other channels : Press [ 0 ~ 9 ]
[ TALK ] To record results
** All Book Data is cleared **
[ CLR ] To return to test result display
[ TALK ] To Clear all Log data, Press ( . )
[0~9] Log Number
[ TALK ] Record results
Locating Cell Stations (CS)
• The CS should be located at the point where the signal strength from the nearest CS is at least
‘Level 3’.
• If Handover problems occur the signal strength between two adjacent CS could be poor, the CS may
not recognise the adjacent CS and could use the same channel ( 0 ~ 9 ), try relocating the CS closer.
But it is recommended to maintain a minimum distance of 5 metres between CS.
• For a good Handover the cross over should be ‘Level 8’ from both CS for a minimum of 3 metres.
• If additional speech paths are required in one area additional CS can be located in that area, but a
minimum distance of 5 metres should be maintained between two CS.
• When more than two CS are required to provide additional speech paths in one area only two CS
should be located within the RSSI Level 11 of any CS.
RSSI Level 11
CS CS CS
Min 5m
5
Installation Hints – Message Card
To allow an incoming call to be directed to a UCD Message.
Setup a Hunt Group as normal, but set the Hunt Type [106] as UCD
Basic programming:
Prog Step Contents
[134 ~ 135] Hunting Intercept An intercept destination must be set
to receive the OGM
[137 ~ 138] UCD Time Table Assignment Assign a Table to the UCD Group
[139] UCD Time Table Set the table with OGM selection
[216] O/G Message Time Default OGM 1 & 3 - 32 seconds
OGM 2 & 4 - 0 seconds
(Max record time 64 secs)
Example 1
Simple call waiting message.
Hunt Group 01 (Extn No 380) assigned as UCD group.
Program Step Contents

[106] Hunting Type Group 01 : UCD
[131] Hunt Group Assignment Group Members
[133] Hunting Overflow Ovf , 8 (max queue length)
[134 ~ 135] Hunting Intercept Intercept to own Hunt Group (380)
[137 ~ 138] UCD Time Table Assignment Assign to table 1
[139] UCD Time Table Table 1 : S1 => T1 => RT
[407 ~ 408] DIL 1:1 Assigned to Hunt Group (380)
[813] Floating Numbers Group 01 : 380
Record OGM via operator telephone.

If all the Group members are busy the call waits in the UCD queue (with the OGM).
Continued:
Example 2
Playing an introduction message then playing a waiting message if the members of the
group are busy.
Program Step Contents

[106] Hunting Type Group 01 : UCD
Group 02 : UCD
[131] Hunt Group Assignment Group 01 : NO members
Group 02 : Assigned Members
[133] Hunting Overflow Group 01: Ovf , 8 (queue length)
Group 02: Ovf , 8 (queue length)
[134 ~ 135] Hunting Intercept Group 01: 381
Group 02: 381 (own Hunt Group)
[137 ~ 138] UCD Time Table Assignment Group 01: Assign to table 1
Group 02: Assign to table 2
[139] UCD Time Table Table 1 : S1 => TR
Table 2 : S2 => T1 => RT
[216] OGM Message Time 32, 32, 0, 0
[407 ~ 408] DIL 1:1 Assigned to Hunt Group (380)
[813] Floating Numbers Group 01 : 380
Group 02 : 381
Record OGM 1 & 2 via operator telephone.

All incoming calls are played message 1, "Welcome message".
If the group has no free members the calls will be held in the second UCD group and
played "Waiting message", message 2
(in default only OGM 1 & 3 are allocated time, Prog Step 216).
Index Pages Jump Links
The index pages now include Jump Links to the referenced pages.
As one subject may refer to several pages, Jump Links have been associated with
each referenced page.
To use a Jump Link move the cursor over the required page number then left click the
mouse button.
To return to the Index page click the Left Arrow Button on the Tool Bar.
Page numbering, the first number represents the Section and the second number
represents the page within that Section.
An Index reference may have several associated pages, to help choose which page you
require a description of the contents of each section are listed below:
Section 1 - General overview of the telephone system.
Section 2 - Operation of a wired telephone.
Section 3 - Additional features for the System Operator.
Section 4 - Programming your System or your Telephone
Section 5 - Operation of a DECT telephone.
Section 6 - Troubleshooting help guide.

KX Td1232e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KX Td1232e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Digital Super Hybrid System

Please read this manual before connecting

KX-TD816E / KX-TD1232E KX-TD816 KX-TD1232

2 *1: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

Operation in Power Failure

‘Prevention of access by user. This apparatus is intended to be accessible only to authorized

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type

For your future reference

APPROVED for connection to APPROVED for connection to

This manual contains the following sections:

Section 1, System Outline.

Section 4, System Programming.

Section 7, PRI Section.

Section 8, DECT Portable Station Section.

8 *1: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

*: Available for KX-TD1232 only. 9

*: Available for KX-TD1232 only. 13

Section 4 System Programming

Section 7 PRI Section

Section 8 DECT Portable Station Section

EXtra Device Port (XDP)

Parallelled Telephone Connection

Super Hybrid System

Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPT)

1-2 System Outline *: Available for KX-TD1232 only.

Voice Mail Integration

Least Cost Routing (LCR)

Charge Fee Reference

Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Remote Station Lock Control

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

System Outline 1-3

1-4 System Outline

Note : Flexible CO : Flexible CO button (programmable)

System Outline 1-5

8 or 16 extensions 8 extensions can

4-CO Line Unit (KX-TD180) /

4 CO lines / 2 ISDN S0 lines / 4 CO lines / 2 ISDN S0 lines /

1-6 System Outline

8 CO lines / 4 ISDN S0 lines can be added.

4-CO Line Card (KX-TD182)*2 /

4 CO lines / 2 ISDN S0 lines can be added.

System Inter Connection Card (KX-TD192)*1

*1: Available for the KX-TD1232 only. System Outline 1-7

9600bps Speed Remote Card (KX-TD197) /

Note The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as the main unit.

1-8 System Outline *1: Available for the KX-TD1232 only.

Telephone Line External Telephone

Note The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as the main unit.

Battery Adaptor (KX-A46)

Battery Adaptor KX-A46

Two car batteries, connected in series

Battery Adaptor Connector

Note The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit.

*: Available for the KX-TD816 only. System Outline 1-9

Note The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit.

Note The KX-TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit.

1-10 System Outline

Control Method Stored Program CPU: 16 bits CPU

Switching Non Blocking PCM Time Switch

Power Supplies Primary 230 VAC, 50 Hz

Dialling Outward Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps